LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 (rl KT OK 
 
 Deceive J 
 ^Accessions No. 
 
 
AN INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD 
 
AN INDUCTIVE 
 
 LATIIST METHO 
 
 BY 
 
 WILLIAM R. HARPER, Pn.D, 
 
 PROFESSOK IN YALK UXIVEKSITV 
 AND 
 
 ISAAC B. BURGESS, A.M. 
 
 INSTRUCTOR IN PUBLIC LATIN SCHOOL. BOSTON, MASS. 
 
 /V V 0** 
 
 \Sf.-r^<,. 
 
 .. ' J .*_*_ K^?^^ 
 
 NEW YORK : CINCINNATI I CHICAGO 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 FROM THE PRESS OF 
 IVISON, BLAKEMA.V & COMPANY. 
 
Copyright, 1888, 
 BY JivisoN, BLAKEMAN, AND COMPANY 
 
/' /ta> 
 
 H V*' 
 
 *< 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THERE is clearly no demand for a new Introductory Latin book, 
 unless it is one which differs essentially from those already in use. 
 The score or more of methods" which have appeared in this country 
 are constructed practically according to the same idea. Though many 
 of them are scholarly and progressive, all are merely companions to 
 the grammar, and not guides to the language. The existence of so 
 many " methods " indicates a feeling that, thus far, an entirely satis- 
 factory introductory book has not been found. If anything addi- 
 tional were needed to justify the existence of this feeling, it would 
 be found in the lack of interest which characterizes the average 
 student of Latin, and in the confessedly small results accomplished in 
 college. 
 
 The method presented in this book claims to overcome both of 
 these difficulties. It will arouse enthusiasm ; it will increase results. 
 It is not supposed that this claim will be accepted until the merits 
 of the method have been tested in the class-room ; but the following 
 outline of the plan of the work which it advocates may, perhaps, 
 show the value of the principles on which the claim is based. 
 
 1. A sentence or part of a sentence of the original text (in 
 later work, even a section) is placed before the pupil. The pronun- 
 ciation and exact translation of each word are furnished him. By the 
 aid which the teacher gives him in advance, and with the help given 
 in the book, lie thoroughly masters the words and phrases of this 
 
vi PREFACE. 
 
 sentence or section. His knowledge is tested by requiring him to 
 recite or write the Latin sentence, with only the translation before 
 his eye. 
 
 2. In connection with this mastery of the words and phrases of 
 the sentence assigned, the pupil reads and digests the contents of the 
 " Notes " on these words. This study accomplishes two things : 
 first, the careful examination of each remark, with its application to 
 the work in hand, aids in fixing more firmly in mind the word 
 sought to be mastered ; second, grammatical material is being col- 
 lected from the very beginning of his work. 
 
 3. The "Text" and "Notes " having been learned, the -next step 
 is one of a more general character. Out of the material which has 
 thus far been mastered, those principles which are of most impor- 
 tance, and which the pupil himself will be most likely to recognize, 
 are pointed out under the head of " Observations." The pupil may be 
 brought to see these points for himself before having his attention 
 called to them in the " Lesson." 
 
 4. The grammatical material obtained in the " Lesson " is now 
 systematized and arranged with references to the two leading gram- 
 mars. This not only furnishes a review of what already has been 
 done, but also enables the pupil to see the connection of each new 
 fact or principle with the others to which it stands related. 
 
 5. The words of the sentence or section are now separated from 
 their context and placed in alphabetical order. Thus separated, they 
 form the basis of additional study. In some cases words similar in 
 form and meaning to familiar English words are inserted in order to 
 allow greater variety in the exercise. 
 
 6. In order to prevent the memorizing of the Latin text without a 
 clear idea of the force of each word, to impress more firmly on the 
 mind the words and phrases of the text, and to drill the pupil in 
 prose composition, " Exercises," Latin into English and English 
 into Latin, are given. These are always based upon the sentence or 
 section which furnishes the basis of the " Lesson." Prose composi- 
 tion taught in this manner ceases to be dreaded by the pupil, and 
 becomes, indeed, a source of delight. 
 
PREFACE. Vll 
 
 7. Once more the leading points of the entire lesson, whether 
 suggested in the " Notes," the " Observations," or the " Grammar 
 Lesson," come up for consideration under the head of " Topics for 
 Study." Upon each topic the student is expected to make a state- 
 ment of what he knows (not of what has been said in the book). If 
 his statement is not sufficiently full, it will be criticised by the 
 class. 
 
 From this outline the idea of the Method will be apparent. It 
 proposes : first, to gain an accurate and thorough knowledge of some 
 of the facts of the language ; second, to learn from these facts the 
 principles which they illustrate, and by which they are regulated , 
 third, to apply these principles in the further progress of the work. 
 A few words in explanation of this statement are needed : 
 
 1. The method employed is inductive, and yet a slight departure is 
 made at times to allow a more complete treatment of a subject, in 
 order to elucidate some detail of which an example has not occurred. 
 
 2. The term "facts," as used, includes data from every source. 
 Special emphasis is laid upon the collecting of facts from the living 
 page of the original text; but paradigms and vocabularies are also 
 to be used for this purpose. 
 
 3. It is not to be supposed that a long time must elapse before the 
 beginner is ready to take hold of principles. As a matter of fact, he 
 is taught important principles, and that, too, inductively, during the 
 first hour's work. The three processes are all the while going on 
 together. He is increasing the store of facts at his command, 
 learning from the facts thus acquired new principles, and applying 
 these principles to the new forms continually coming to his notice. 
 
 4. The memorizing of the facts of a language, before a knowl- 
 edge of the principles has been acquired, is, indeed, a piece of 
 drudgery, and yet not so great as is the memorizing of grammar with- 
 out a knowledge of the facts. Nor will it long remain drudgery ; 
 for very soon the student begins to see analogies, to compare this 
 word with that, and in short to make his own grammar. 
 
 The Lessons cover Chapters 1-20 of Book I. of Caesar's Commen- 
 taries on the Gallic War, and include a formal study of almost every 
 
viii PREFACE. 
 
 portion of the grammar. Special attention is given to review, lessons 
 for the purpose being frequently inserted. Some additional items of 
 interest to teachers will be found elsewhere. 
 
 Professor Lewis Stuart, Ph.D., of Alma College, Alma, Mich., and 
 Professor George H. Horswell, Ph.D., of the North-Western Univer- 
 sity, Evanston, 111., were at first associated in the work of preparing 
 the book ; but ill-health and the pressing duties of their positions 
 compelled them to withdraw. The material of Appendix C, viz. 
 the Latin Word-Lists, has been kindly furnished by Professor 
 Horswell. 
 
 The sheets, as well as a part of the manuscript, have been read by 
 Professor Charles Chandler, Denison University, Granville, Ohio. It 
 is not to be understood that Professor Chandler is responsible for 
 all the statements contained in the book ; the authors, however, 
 desire hereby to acknowledge the great value of his contributions 
 to the work. Many valuable hints have been received also from 
 Professor William E. Waters, Ph.D., Cincinnati, Ohio, and from Pro- 
 fessor F. J. Miller, M.A., Worcester, Mass. 
 
 It is hardly to be expected that the first edition of a book con- 
 structed upon a plan so different from any heretofore employed will 
 be found perfect in execution. For suggestions, corrections, and 
 criticisms, proper acknowledgment will be made. It is hoped that 
 this book may receive from instructors of Latin as kindly a reception 
 as has been accorded by instructors of Hebrew to the Inductive 
 Hebrew Method. 
 
 WILLIAM R. HARPER, 
 ISAAC B. BURGESS. 
 
 AUGUST 18, 1888. 
 
SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 
 
 1. Use twenty minutes of every hour in explaining to the class the new 
 points of the advance-lesson ; and in no case ask a. class to prepare a lesson 
 which has not thus been explained. 
 
 2. Do not fail to require the pupil so to master the text that, with the Eng- 
 lish translation before his eye, he can repeat or write the original with accu- 
 racy and without hesitation ; and with every advance-lesson let the text of 
 the ten or twelve preceding lessons be reviewed. 
 
 3. Let every point referred to in the " Notes " be called up in one form or 
 another in the class-room. 
 
 4. In teaching the "Observations," let the words or phrases which serve as 
 the basis of the "Observations" be written upon the board. 
 
 5. Insist upon the thorough mastery of the " \ r ocabularies, " not only from 
 the Latin into English, but also from the English into Latin. 
 
 6. In the translation of the English sentences into Latin, the following 
 order is suggested: (1) The pupil will write the exercise in a blank-book ; 
 (2) He will copy it upon the blackboard ; (3) The instructor will read and 
 correct the work on the board, the pupil at the same time incorporating the 
 corrections in his blank book ; (4) The instructor will examine the book and 
 mark all words which contain an error ; (5) The pupil will take the book and 
 correct all words so marked. To carry out this plan two blank books are 
 required. 
 
 7. The Review lessons are very important, and should be dwelt upon until 
 thoroughly mastered. 
 
 8. Much time can be saved and much good accomplished by having the 
 class do a portion of the work in concert. This is especially helpful in repro- 
 ducing the original text from the English translation and in reviewing the 
 "English-Latin Exercises." 
 
 9. It is unnecessary, indeed harmful, to tell the pupil everything that may 
 be said concerning a word or form, when it first occurs. Nor should one feel 
 obliged, when a general statement is made concerning a given point, to indi- 
 cate all the exceptions which exist. 
 
 10. Require the mastery of the paradigms, but not merely that thej^-may 
 be recited by rote. The pupil should study and compare them, with^a view 
 to ascertaining the principles in accordance with which they are constructed. 
 As paradigms are commonly studied, they work more injury than benefit. 
 
 11. Introduce conversation in Latin upon the text if possible ; it relieves 
 the monotony of a recitation ; it fixes the text more firmly in mind ; it 
 teaches the pupil to think in the language which he is studying. Every 
 teacher knowaithe common stock of interrogative words and phrases, or can 
 get them from 'a grammar. 
 
 12. It is not supposed that an ordinary class will learn one lesson a day. 
 If the seventy lessons can be covered in one hundred to one hundred and forty 
 recitations, the progress should be regarded as satisfactory. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PREFACE v 
 
 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS ix 
 
 LESSONS I.-LXIX 7 
 
 GRAMMATICAL INDEX 249 
 
 TEXT OF C.KSAR, B. G. I. 1-29 256 
 
 LITERAL AND FREE TRANSLATION 271 
 
 APPENDIX A. METHOD OF READING LATIN 279 
 
 APPENDIX B. NOTES ox B. G. I. 21-29 .281 
 
 APPENDIX C. WORD-LISTS 287 
 
 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS .,....,. 290 
 
 VOCABULARY : 
 
 LATIN-ENGLISH . 291 
 
 ENGLISU-LATIN . . . . . . . 312 
 
/4r' tt T T7 T? T< 
 
 H y IN 1 Y Js * *' ^ * 
 
 \>v /^ 
 
 _ 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 NOTE. In studying the "Text" and "Notes," the pupil will observe the 
 following suggestions : 
 
 (1) Take up first the word Gal-H-a, and notice the number of syllables, the 
 marks of quantity over the vowels, and the meaning. After reading carefully what 
 is said about the word in Note 1 (a) (b) (c) (d), pronounce it aloud several times, 
 each time associating the meaning with the sound. 
 
 (2) Treat in the same manner the remaining words of the lesson, but in no case 
 take up a new word until the word preceding it has been thoroughly mastered. 
 
 (3) Having mastered the words separately, study the sentence as a whole, pro- 
 nouncing and writing out the Latin with only the English translation (p. 271) before 
 the eye. 
 
 (4) Understand from the beginning that every word and sentence of the Latin 
 text is to be mastered. Nothing short of absolute mastery will answer the purpose. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Gal-ll-a est 5-mrrfs dl-vl-sa In par-tes tres. 
 Gaul is as-a-whole divided into parts three. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. G&1-1I-&, Gaul; cf. Galatia, Gael, Gaelic: (a) vowel sounds, 
 3. as in Cuba correctly pronounced, I as in cigar; 1 (b) vowels un- 
 marked, or marked thus, %., are short, marked thus, a, are long ; 
 (c) accent the first syllable; (d) the ending -3. indicates the feminine 
 singular. 
 
 1 It would be confusing to explain two methods of pronunciation in the same 
 notes. The teacher who prefers the English method will omit these notes on pro- 
 nunciation and substitute others adapted to that method. 
 
8 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. gst, is; cf. est (French), ist (German), is: (a) 6 as in met; 
 (b) -t, the ending of the third person singular of the verb, means he, 
 she, or it. Est (he, she, or it) is ; Gallia est, Gaul is. 
 
 3. S-mnis, all. as-a-whole ; cf. omni-present omni-bus (for all) : 
 (a) 6 = in obey; (b) accent the first syllable. 
 
 4. di-vi-sa, divided: (a) i = i in caprice ; the long vowels are 
 identical with the short vowels in quality, the only difference being 
 that the short vowels are less prolonged in pronunciation ; (b) v = w 
 in we; (c) a is always like ss in hiss, never like z; (d) accent the 
 second syllable, divisa; (e) the feminine singular ending is -a; cf. 
 Gallia ; (/) est divisa, is divided; omnis GalliS est divisa, all 
 Gaul is divided; GalliS est omnis divisa, Gaul is as-a-whole 
 divided. 
 
 5. in, into; cf. in (Eng. and Germ.), en (French). 
 
 6. par-tes, parts: (a] e = ey in they ; (b) the ending -es indicates 
 the plural ; cf. the Eng. hero, heroes. 
 
 7. tres, three; cf. tre-ble, tri-pod, and three: (a) -gs is seen here 
 as well as in partes above ; (b) here also it indicates the plural. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Yowcl sounds in this lesson ; a, e, i, o, e, I, as in art, met, cigar, 
 obey, they, caprice. 
 
 2. The consonants, except v, are sounded as in English ; but a 
 never has the sound of z. v as w in we, B as ss in hiss. 
 
 3. Words of two syllables take the accent on the first, 6mnis, 
 partes. 
 
 4. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the syllable 
 next to the last (that is, on the penult), if it is long, divisa; other- 
 wise on the syllable before the penult (that is, on the antepenult), 
 Gallia. A vowel before another vowel is short. 
 
 5. The ending -a indicates the feminine singular, Gallia, divisS. 
 
 6. The ending -es indicates the plural, partes, tres. 
 
 7. The ending -t of the verb indicates the third person singular. 
 
 8. All the Latin words in this lesson have related words in English. 
 
 9. Names of objects without sex are neuter in English, but in Latiu 
 they are often classed as masculine or feminine. 
 
LESSON I. 9 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Pronunciation, 
 
 Roman method . A. & G. 16. H. 5, 6, 7. 
 
 English method A. & G. 17, entire. H. 9, 10, 11, 12, 13. 
 
 2. Accent . . . .' A. & GK 19, a, & H. 17, 18. 
 
 3. Number . . . A. & G. 31. H. 44. 
 
 4. Gender . . . . A. & G. 28, a, c, and note. H. 41 and foot-note. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. di-vi-s, fern, sing., divided. 5. 6-mni3, masc. and fein. sing., all, 
 
 2. Sst, (he, she, it), is. every, as-a-w hole ; plur. 6mnes. 
 
 3. Gai-li-a, fern, sing., Gaul. 6. pSr-tes, fern, plur., parts. 
 
 4. In, prep., into, sometimes in. 1. tres, three. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 1 
 
 1. AquitaniS, 2 Aquiiania. 4. Alpes, the 5 Alps. 
 
 2. Helvetia, 3 Switzerland. 5. clientgs, clients. 
 
 3. proviucia, 4 province. 6. legiones, 4 legions. 
 
 7. montgs, mountains. 
 
 8. omngs, a//. 
 
 9. possSssiones, 4 possessions. 
 10. 
 
 11. et, 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Translate: (a) Gallia est cllvlsa. (J) Omnis GalliS est dlvisS. 
 (c) Gallia est omnis divis. (d) Omnis Gallia in partes tres divisa 
 est. (e) Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres. 
 
 2. (a) Tres legiones. (b) Alpes montes. (c) Possessiongs 
 
 1 In this vocabulary the words ending in -a are of course feminine ; those end- 
 ing in -es are plural. 
 
 2 qu = English qu in quite. 
 
 8 This word is not used by Csesar. 
 
 4 C, g, B, and t, are always pronounced as in cat, go, so, and to. 
 
 6 The Latin has no article. . 
 
10 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 omnes. (d) Clientea quattuor. (e) In quattuor partes. (f) Gal- 
 liS. est provinciS. (y) ProvinciS. est dlvisS. (h) Oranis Helvetia in 
 quattuor partes divisS est. () AquituuiS. est dlvisS. 
 
 3. Translate : (a) Gaul is as-a-whole divided, (b) All Gaul is 
 divided into parts, (c) Gaul is as-a-whole divided into three parts. 
 (d) Gaul as-a-whole is divided into three parts, (e) As-a-whole Gaul 
 is divided into three parts. 
 
 4. (a) Three clients, (b) All the legions, (c) All Helvetia. 1 
 (d) The province as-a-whole is divided, (e) Helvetia is as-a-whole 
 divided into four parts. 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Feminine ending. 2. Plural ending. 3. The word for all, 
 sing and plur. 4. Place of accent in words of two syllables. 5. In 
 words of more than two syllables. 6. Sound of v, s. 7. Penult. 
 8. Antepenult. 9. Eelated words. 10. Difference in pronunciation 
 between short arid Ions; vowels. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Read again the suggestions given in connection with Lesson I. for taking up 
 the text. 
 
 Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; 
 
 qua-rum u-nam In-co-lunt Bel-gee, a-H-am 
 of-which one inhabit the-Belgse, another 
 
 A-qui-ta-ni. 
 
 the-Aquitani. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. qua-rttm, of which ; (a) qu = kw = qu in quite ; (b) & = a 
 in father ; (c) ti = 00 in book ; (d) accent on the first syllable. 
 
 1 The student should pronounce proper names in the Eng. exercises as Eng. 
 words and not as Lat. words. 
 
LESSON II. 11 
 
 2. u-iiam, one; cf. unit, unite, one: (d) ii = oo in moon: (b) for 
 see Gallia I. N. 1 (a) 1 ; (e) accent on the h'rst syllable; cf. dmnis, 
 partes, quorum, uiiam ; (d) -am indicates the ein. sing, as clirect 
 object; (e) cf. the following sentences : f^^-^U^L^(^ __ fe^^d $* 
 
 "OnZ. (pars) est Aquitania, one part is Aquitania. 
 
 Unani (par tern) incolunt Aqultani, the Aquitdni inhabit one 
 part. 
 
 (f) -S, it will be seen, indicates the fern. sing, as subject, that is, fern, 
 sing, nominative case ; while -am indicates fern. sing, as object, that is, / 
 fern. sing, objective case, or, as it is called in Latin, accusative^case ; ^ 
 so, Galliam, divisam. &^J^ <*U^ V^JL~ ^aO^t^U^^ 
 
 3. In-c6-liint, they inhabit: (a) for vowels I, 6, u, see above; 
 (b) accent on the antepenult; why? cf. Galli&, divisa ; (c) -nt, the 
 ending of the third person plural, they; incolunt, they inhabit; 
 Belgae incolunt, the Belgce inhabit. $4*%^ &9~i>**-S^ < 
 
 4. Bel-gae, the Belgce : (a) for 6 see above; (b) g is always hard 
 like g in go, never as in gem ; (c) ae = i in kite ; (e?) the ending 
 indicates the feminine plural as subject, **. e. the feminine plural nomi- 
 native ; provincial, a province, provinciae, provinces; (e) Belgae 
 although having a feminine ending is masculine, because it denotes 
 male beings. A. & G. 29 ; H. 42, I. 1. 
 
 5. ci-11-eim, another, other; cf. alien, alias, alibi: (d) for the 
 vowels &, I, see above ; (b) accent on the antepenu t ; cf. Gallia, 
 incolunt, aliam; (c) -am indicates the fern. sing, accusative; cf. 
 unam, aliam. 
 
 6. A-qui-ta-ni, the Aquitani: (d) qu = qu in quite; cf. qua- 
 rum ; (b) place of the accent ? why ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. New vowels, u, 5, u = oo in book, a in father, oo in moon; 
 consonants, g pronounced as in go, qu as in quite ; the diphthong ae 
 = i in kite. 
 
 2. Personal endings, 3d sing, -t, 3d plur. -nt. 
 
 3. The nominative is the case of the subject, GalliS, Belgae. 
 
 4. The accusative is the case of the direct object, unam, aliam. 
 
 1 I. N. 1 (a) = Lesson I., Note 1, division (a). 
 
12 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. The ending -a indicates fern. sing, noui., GalliS, divisa. 
 6 The ending -am indicates fern. sing, accus., imam, aliain. 
 
 7. The ending -ae indicates fern. plur. nom., provinciae ; but cf. 
 Belgae, which is masculine by meaning. 
 
 8. Examine the nom. plur. in Belgae, Aquitani, and partgs, and 
 note that in Latin there are different declensions, i. e. the same case 
 is formed with different endings in different words ; cf. wars, boxes, 
 oxen. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Quantity of vowels . . A. & G. 18, a, b, c. H. 16, notes 1, 2, 3, 
 
 4, foot-note 3. 
 
 2. Quantity of syllables . A. & G. 18, d, e. H. 16, I. II. III. 
 
 3. Nominative case . . . A. & G. 31, a. H. 365, I. 
 
 4. Accusative case . . . A. & G. 31, d. H. 365, III. 432. 
 
 5. Gender A. & G. 29. H. 42. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. a-ll-a, nom. sing, fern., other, 5. ESl-gae, the Belgce. 
 
 another. 6. In-c6-lunt, they inhabit. 
 
 2. a-H-am, accus. sing. fern. 7. quse, nom. plur. fern., which. 
 
 3. a-ll-se, nom. plur. fern. 8. qua-rttm, plur. fern., of-which. 
 
 4. A-quI-ta-ni,nom.plur. maso., 9. u na, nom. sing, fern., one. 
 
 the Aquitani. 10. u-nam, accus. sing. fern. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 NOM. SING. FKM. ACCUS. SING. FEM. N()M. PLUR. FEM. 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 1. Gallia, 1 Gaul Gall] am. 
 
 2. Helvetia, Switzerland. Helveti&m. 
 
 3. provmcia, province. provinciam. provinciae, provinces. 
 
 4. via, way. viam. vise, ways. 
 
 1 The marks over the vowels indicate the quantity of the vowels, not the quan- 
 tity of the syllables in which they stand. The first syllable of GalliS is, of 
 course, long. H. p. 4, foot-note 4. 
 
LESSON II. 
 
 13 
 
 5. all's, other. 
 
 6. divisS, divided. 
 
 7. un, one. 
 
 NOM. PLUR. MASC. 
 
 8. Aquitani, the Aquitani. 
 
 9. Roman!, the Romans. 
 10. Tiguiiui, the Tigurini. 
 
 13. incoliint, ^ey inhabit. 
 
 aliSm. 
 dlviSeiin. 
 
 unSm. 
 
 aliw. 
 dlvlsae. 
 
 NOM. PLUR. MASC. 
 
 11. Tolosates, the Tolosates. 
 
 12. Verbigeni, the Verbigeni. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 14. mittunt, they send. 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 In the case of the following words and phrases, (1) pronounce, noting every 
 letter the sound of which in Latin is different from its usual sound in English, also 
 the force of significant endings ; (2) translate ; (3) give the principle of accent for 
 each Latin word. 
 
 1. (a) Quarum Una", (b) In partes tres. (c) Belgae imam (par- 
 tern) incolunt. (d) Aquitani aliam (partem) incolunt. (e) Belgas 
 et Aquitani Galliam incolunt. 
 
 2. (a) In Helvetiam. (b) In Aquitaniam. (c) UnS pars, (c?) 
 Tr5s paries, (e) UnS via. (/) Tres vise, (g) Tolosates provin- 
 ciam incolunt. (h) Quattuor legiones in Galliam Roman! mittnnt. 
 
 (1) Tiguiini et Verbigeni Helvetiam incolunt. (j) Helvetia est 
 omnis divisS in pnrtes quattuor, quarum unam incolunt Tigurini, 
 aliam Verbigeni. 
 
 In the case of the following phrases and sentences, (1) translate into Latin ; 
 
 (2) note the significant endings. 
 
 3. (a) Into three parts, of which the Belgse inhabit one. (&) Into 
 three parts, of which the Aquitani inhabit another, (c) One (part) 
 the Aquitani inhabit. (d~) Another (part) the Belgae inhabit, (e) 
 The Belgse and the Aquitani inhabit parts. 
 
 4. (a) One province, (b) Three provinces, (c) Into another 
 road, (d) Three other roads, (e) The Tolosates inhabit the moun- 
 tains. (/) The Romans send three legions into the province. 
 
14 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; quarum unam 
 incolunt Belgse, aliam Aquitani, 1 
 
 ter-tl-am, qui I-pso-rum Hn- 
 
 tlie third (part, those inhabit) who of themselves in the 
 
 gua Cel-tae, no-stra Gal-ll ap-pel-lan-tur. 
 language Kelts, in ours Gauls are called. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. tSr-tl-am, the third ; cf. tertiary: (a) t always has the sound 
 of t in tin, never that of sh as in action; (b) place of accent? (c) this 
 word is the object of incdlunt, and agrees with the Latin word mean- 
 ing part, both of which are supplied in thought from the preceding 
 clauses ; (d) -a-m indicates accus. sing, fern., the a generally indicating 
 fern, gender and the -m accus. sing. ; cf. unam, aliam. 
 
 2. qui, who: (a) the ending I here indicates nom. plur. masc., 
 cf. Aquitani; (b) subject of appellautur. 
 
 3. i-ps5-rum, of themselves, their own : (a) 6 = in note ; 
 (b) place of accent ? (c) the ending -6-rum indicates here the genitive 
 case, plur. masc.; cf. qu-a-rum, which is gen. plur. fern. How is the 
 masc. distinguished from the fern, ending in these words ? (d) Aqui- 
 tani, qui, ipsorum have the same endings in the nom. and also 
 the gen. plur. masc. What, then, is the nom. plur. masc. of ipso- 
 rum ? What means of the Aquitani, of whom or whose ? (e) ip- 
 sorum is joined in translation with lingua, in their own language, 
 (f) What English case does the Latin genitive somewhat resemble ? 
 
 1 From the first, the review should be translated at hearing, and should be pr<K 
 nounced with only the English translation before the eye. 
 
LESSON III. 15 
 
 4. Hn-gua, in the language; cf. language, lingual., linguist: 
 
 (a) gu before a vowel = gw ; cf. qu in quite ; (b) g is always bard in 
 pronunciation; cf. Belgae II. N. 4; (c) pronounced in two syllables, 
 since u is not here a vowel; (d) the ending -a indicates fern, sing., 
 answering the question, wherein? whereby? i.e. ablative case. How 
 does lingua differ from lingua in ending? lingua, the language, 
 lingua, in the language ; the difference in meaning is indicated by -a 
 and -a; the former is nom., the latter is called ablative. 
 
 5. Cel-tae, Kelts : (a) c = k, never s ; (b) ae = i in kite ; cf. 
 Belgce ; (c) -ae indicates nom. plur. and usually belongs to fern, 
 nouns, but (d) Celtse and Belgae are masc. because the names of 
 males ; names of males are always masc. in Lat. as in Eng. 
 
 6. nS-stra, in ours, cf. nostrum, i. e. our remedy, pater noster, 
 our father ; (a) the ending a indicates ablative (note the translation, 
 in ou?*s), sing, fern., cf. lingua ; (b) with nostra, lingua is to be 
 supplied. 
 
 7. Gal-li, Gauls: (a) I indicates nom. plur. maso. ; cf. Aquitani, 
 qui ; (b) Gallia, Gatil, the country, Galll, Gauls, the people in- 
 habiting it. 
 
 8. ap-pgl-lan-tur, (they] are called,' cf. appella-ntur, es-t, he, 
 she, or it is, iiicolu-nt, they inhabit; hence (a) appella-t, he, she, 
 or it calls, appella-nt, they call, appella-ntur, they are called; 
 
 (b) appellat means, he calls by name, cf. appellation. Another 
 meaning of the Eng. word call? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1 
 
 1. The ending -a indicates nom. sing. fern. ; -a indicates ablative 
 sing. fern. 
 
 2. The endings -a, -am, -a, are all sing. fern. ; what cases? 
 
 3. The endings -ae, -I, -3, are all plur. ; what cases? 
 
 4. The endings -arum, genitive plur. fern.; -orum, genitive plur. 
 masc. 
 
 5. The endings of verb : in active voice, -t, he, she, or it, -nt, 
 they ; in passive voice, -ntur, they. 
 
 1 In reciting the observations, the pupil should give examples of the principles 
 stated, from the text. 
 
16 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 In the study of this vocabulary, let the instructor call for the various forms of 
 each word which the pupil should be expected to know. 
 
 1. ap-pgl-lan-tttr, they are called (by name). 
 
 2. C61-tae, noin. plur. masc., the Kelts. 
 
 3. G&l-li, noin. plur. masc., the Gauls. 
 
 4. i-psi, norn. plur. masc., themselves. 
 
 5. lln-gua, noin. sing, fein., the tongue, language. 
 
 6. n5-stra, nom. sing, fern., our. 
 
 7. qui, nom. plur. masc., who. 
 
 8. tgr-ti-&, nom. sing, fern., third. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 9. Ggr-ma-ni, Germanorum, the Germans. 
 
 10. Grse-ci, Graecorum, the Greeks. 
 
 11. Hgl-le-nes, the Hellenes. 
 
 12. ml-li-tes (cf. military, militia}, soldiers. 
 
 13. Ro-ma-ni, Romanorum, the Romans. 
 
 14. su-pg-ran-tflr (cf. superior, superb), they are overcome. 
 
 15. tgr-ra (cf. terra firma, terrestrial, subterranean), the earth, a 
 country. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 (1.) Pronounce. (2.) Translate. (3) Name the case of each noun or 
 adjective. 
 
 1. (a) Nostra" lingua". (5) Nostrae linguae, (c) Nostrt lingua. 
 (d) Ipsorum lingua. (e) Ipsorum lingua. (/) Unam (pnrtem) 
 incolunt Belgae. (g) Aliam (partem) inoolimt Aqmtani. (h) Ter- 
 tiam (partem) incolnnt Celtae. ({) Gal IT ipsorum lingua Celtae ap- 
 pellantur. (j) Celtge, qui nostra lingua Galli appellantur, tertiam 
 (partem) incolunt. 
 
LESSON III. 17 
 
 2. (a) Chungs German! superantur. (b) MilitSs Romanorum 
 superantur. (c) Galli provinciam nostram incolunt. (d) Grsecl 
 ipsorum lingua Hellengs appellantur. (e) Tertiam (artem) inco- 
 lunt qui Romanorum lingua Galli appellantur. (/) Unam terrain 
 incolunt Galli, aliam German!, tertiam qui ipsorum lingua Hellenes, 
 nostra Grace! appellantur. 
 
 3. (a) The Gauls are called Kelts, (b) The Gauls, who in their 
 own language are called Kelts, inhabit the third (part), (c) The 
 Kelts, who in our language are called Gauls, inhabit one part. 
 (d) The Aquitani and the Belgfje are called Gauls, (e) Gaul is as 
 a whole divided into three parts, one of which the Belgoe inhabit, 
 another the Aquitani, the third (those) who in their own language are 
 called Kelts, in ours Gauls. 
 
 4. (a) Three legions are overcome, (b) Gaul is the country of 
 the Gauls, (c) They send their own possessions into another part. 
 (d) The Belgae and the Aquitani inhabit three parts, (e) (There) 
 is one way into the divided province. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The Eng. prepositions equivalent to the endings -rum and -5, as 
 used in this lesson. 2. The Eng. pronouns, equivalent to endings -t, 
 -nt, and -ntur in verb. 3. The different Lat. cases and their uses. 
 4. Feminine endings. 5. Words to be supplied in thought in the 
 text of this lesson. 6. Pronunciation of consonants t, gu, g, and c ; 
 of vowel 6 and diphthong se. 
 
18 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 HI 6-mnes Hn-gua, in-stl-tu-tis, le-gl-bus, In-ter 
 These all in language, customs, laws, among 
 
 se dlf-fe-runt. 
 
 themselves differ. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Hi, these: (a) I indicates nom. plur. masc. ; cf. Aquitani, qui, 
 Galli. (b) The Lat. for of these (sometimes equivalent to their) ? 
 cf. ipsSrum, quorum III. N. 3. 
 
 2. S-mngs, all: (a) for 6 see I. x. 3. (b) for s see I. N. 4 (c). 
 (c) 5s indicates plur.; cf. partSa, trgs. (d) cf. omnis, nom. sing.; 
 GalliS. omnis, all Gaul, sing. ; hi omnes, all these, plur. 
 
 3. Hn-gua, in language: (a) a indicates fern. sing. abl. case; 
 cf. lingua III. N. 4, and observe that the ablative; lingua modifies 
 the verb like an adverb ; ipsorum lingua appellantur, they 
 are called in (or by) their own language ; lingua differunt, they 
 differ in language. The ablative is the case of adverbial relations. 
 H. 365, VI. ; (b) since lingua tells in what respect these differ it 
 is called the abl. of respect, or, by some, the abl. of specification. 
 (c) lingua, language, as subject, nom. sing. 
 
 linguam, language, as object, acrus. sing. 
 linsua, language, in adverbial uses, abl. sing, 
 linguae, languages, as subject, nom. plnr. 
 
 4. in-stl-tu-tis, in customs, cf. institute, institution: (a) place of 
 accent? (b) abl. plur. of respect ; cf. lingua 3 (b). 
 
 5. le-gi-btts, in laws, cf. legal, legislate. (a) g as in go. 
 (b) place of accent? why? (c) abl. plur. of respect, (d) What is 
 the difference between the use of lingua, Institutis, legibus, in tin's 
 sentence and that of lingua in III. ? see 3 (a), (b). (e) though insti- 
 
LESSON IV. 19 
 
 tut-Is and 15g-Ibus are both abl. plur., one ends in -is and the other 
 in -Ibtis, see II. Ob. 8. 
 
 6. In-tSr, between, among, cf. interval, interview, intervene. 
 
 7. se, themselves; cf. suicide: (a) accus. plur. with the preposi- 
 tion inter, like the Eiig. objective with preposition ; cf. in partes. 
 
 8. dlf-f6-runt, they differ ; cf. differ, different : (a) -nt ending of 
 the 3d plur., they ; cf. inc6iu-nt ; (b) made up of two words, viz. 
 dis, apart, and ferunt, they bear; cf. in-c61unt arid appellantur 
 for ad-pellantur. Such words are called compound. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The preposition in when it means into and the preposition 
 inter, between, among, require the accusative after them. 
 
 2. The ablative of respect or specification is used without a prepo- 
 sition to denote that in respect to which a statement is true. 
 
 3. Abl. endings : in sing., -a ; in plur., -is, -ibus. 
 
 4. Nom. plur. endings, -se, -I, -es. 
 
 5. The endings -se, -a-rum, plur. fern.; -I, -6-rum, plur. masc. 
 
 6. The ending -is in uoin. sing, becomes -es in nom. and accus. 
 plur. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Use of the abl. case in general A. & G. 242. H. 365, VI. 
 
 2. Abl. of respect or specification A. & G. 253. H. 424. 
 
 3. Inter A. & G. 196, /. 153. H. 433, I. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. dif-fS-runt, they bear apart, differ. 
 
 2. hi, nom. plur. masc., these. 
 
 8. In-stl-tii-tis, abl. plur. customs, institutions. 
 
 4. In-t8r, prep, with accus., between, among. 
 
 5. 16-gI-btts, abl. plur. laws ; ISgSs, nom. plur. 
 
 6. 8-mnIs, adj. in nom. sing., all, every ; 6mnes, nom. plur. 
 
 7. ae", accus. plur., themselves. 
 
20 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 1. co-pl-a, nom. sing, fern., plenty ; in plur. forces, troops; cf. 
 Eng. copious, cornucopia (horn of plenty). 
 
 2. Sx-tra, prep, with accus., beyond, cf. Eng. extra. 
 
 3. Lln-g6-nes, nom. and accus. plur., the Lingones. 
 
 4. na-tu-ra, nom. sing, fern., nature, disposition. 
 
 5. Sg-qua-nl, nom. plur. masc., the Sequani. 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 Translate, point out the abl. of respect, and name the case of every noun used. 
 
 1. (a) Omnes lingua inter se difterunt. (b) Hi legibus inter 
 se dift'eruiit. (c) Roinanl in montes qnattuor legiones mittunt. 
 (d) Legiones Romanorum in Alpes mittuntur. (e) Tres partes inter 
 se differunt. 
 
 2. (a) Terra Belgarum et Celtarum est extra provinciam. (b) Via 
 inter montes et provinciam est. (c) Copiae Sequanorum Lingones 
 superant. (d) Galli et Germain natura inter se difterunt. (e) Sequa- 
 ni et Lingones ipsorum lingua Celtae appellantur. (/) Hi omnes 
 Galliam incolunt et nostra lingua Galli appellantur. 
 
 3. (a) Their country (the country of these) is Gaul, (b) All 
 these differ from one another in language, (c) The soldiers of the 
 Belgse are overcome, (d) The Celtse and the Belgae, who inhabit 
 Gaul, differ from one another in laws. 
 
 4. (a) Aquitania is beyond our province. (b) The Greeks 
 (Graecl) and Eomans differ from one another in disposition, (c) The 
 clients are sending (their) possessions, (d) They send all the soldiers 
 into the country of the Sequani who dwell beyond the Alps. 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The following endings of nouns and adjectives: -&, -a, -ae, 
 -a-rum, -6-rum, -is, -ibus, -a-m, -es, -i. 2. The arrangement of 
 these endings by genders. 3. By cases. 4. The use of the abl. 
 case. 5. Corresponding cases in Eng. and Lat. 6. Difference in 
 form and use of act. and pass, voices. 7. Pronunciation of o, B, and 
 
LESSON V. 21 
 
 g. 8. The analysis (i. e. the separation into component parts) of the 
 endings -arum, -orum, -am, and the explanation of the force of each 
 part. 9. The method of marking quantity in the last Latin exercise. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Gal-los Sb A-qui-ta-nis Ga-rum-na flu-men, 
 
 The Gauls from the Aquitani the Garumna river, 
 
 a Bel-gis Ma-tro-na et Se-qua-na dl-vl-dlt. J 
 from the Belgae the Matrona and the Seine divide (s). 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Gal-los, the Gauls: (a) -6-s indicates accus. plur. masc. ; all 
 nouns and adjectives having the nom. plur. ending -I have -6-s in the 
 accus. plur., e. g. qui, quos ; Aquitaiii, Aquitanos ; hi, hSs ; 
 (b) the object of dividit ; (c) corresponding to the masc. endings 
 -6-rum, -6s, are the feminine endings -a-rum, -a-s. 
 
 2. ab, from ; cf. absolve: prep, with the abl. case. 
 
 3. A-quI-ta-nis, the Aquitani; -is indicates abl. plur.; cf. insti- 
 tutls IV. N. 4. All nouns and adjectives with the ending -i in nom. 
 plur. have the ending -is in abl. plur.; cf. III. N. 3 (c). 
 
 4. Ga-rtim-na, the name of a river: (a) what case? (5) subject 
 of dividit; (c) -S in the nom. sing, usually indicates fern, gender, 
 but Garumna, like most names of rivers, is masc. by meaning; cf. 
 Celtce III. N. 5 (d). 
 
 5. flu-mSn, that which flows, the river; cf. fluid: (a) nom. 
 sing., neuter gender; (b) the word flumen refers to the same thing 
 as Garumna, and describes it like an adj., just as the word river 
 describes Garumna in the phrase the Garumna, a river, or the river 
 Garumna. 
 
 1 The pupil should not lose sight of the suggestions made in the first lesson, 
 touching the order and plan of study. 
 
22 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. a, from ; cf. avert : same word as ab ; cf. 2 ; before a word 
 beginning with a vowel or h the form ab must be used ; before a con- 
 sonant, except h, a is generally used. 
 
 7. B61-gi3, the Belgce : (a) abl. plur., from noin. plur. Belgae ; cf. 
 II. N. 4; (b) the ending is -is, as in Aquitanis, which has noin. 
 plur. ending -I. 
 
 8. di-vi-dit, he, she, or it divides ; cf. divisa I. N. 4 : (a) -t 
 indicates 3d person sing., cf. est ; (b) the verb though having two 
 subjects connected by et (and) is sing., because the two rivers, 
 Matrona and Seine, are thought of as forming a single boundary. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The ending -6-s, a^cus. plur. masc. ; -5-s, accus. plur. fem. 
 
 2. The ending -is, abl. plur. masc. and fem. 
 
 3. The abl. is used with prep. 
 
 4. Two or more sing, subjects may take a verb in the sing, when 
 they form a unit in sense. 
 
 5. The prep, a or ab is used with the ablative. Ab stands before 
 a vowel or h, a before a consonant. 
 
 6. The ending -en in the nom. sing, is neuter. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Two or more subjects with a sing, verb H. 463, II. 3. 
 
 2. Gender of names of rivers . . A. & G. 29, a. H. 42, I. 2. 
 
 3. Abl. with prep A. & G. 260. H. 432. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. a, ab, prpp. with abl.,y*rom, by. 
 
 2. di-vi-dit. he, she, or it divides ; dividunt, they divide ; dlvi- 
 duntur, they are divided or being divided. 
 
 3. flu m6n, nom. sing, neut., a river. 
 
 4. Ga-riim-na, nom. sing, masc., the Garumna. 
 
 5. Ma tr6 na, nom. sing, masc., the Matrona. 
 
 6. Se-qua-na, nom. sing, fem., the Seine. H. 43, 1. 
 
LESSON V. 23 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 1. contendit, he strives, hastens. 
 
 2. Helvetia, the country of the Helvetii, now Switzerland. 
 
 3. Helvetii, nom. plur. inasc., the Helvetii. 
 
 4. legati, nora. plur. masc., lieutenants, ambassadors. 
 
 5. Orgetorix, uom. sing, masc., a Helvetian chief. 
 
 6. Rhodanus, nom. sing, masc., the Rhone. 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Aqmtanos a Gallis Garumna flumen dividit. (b) Gallos 
 a Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit. (e) Flumen est Garumna 
 inter Gallos et Aqultands. (d) Belgas a GermanTs Rhenus dividit. 
 (e) Helvetii, quos a provincia montes dividunt, Helvetian! incolunt. 
 
 2. (a) Una in Sequanos via est. (b) Sequani ab Helvetiis 
 dividuntur. (c) Legati ab Helvetiis contendunt. (d) Provinciam 
 nostram ab Helvetiis Rhodanus flumen dividit. (e) Legatos in Ger- 
 manos Helvetii mittunt. 
 
 3. (a) The Garumna river separates the Gauls from the Aquitani. 
 
 (b) Orgetorix hastens into the country of the Sequani. (c) All 
 these differ from one another, (d) All these are called Kelts in their 
 own language, (e) The legions are sent between the mountains and 
 the Helvetii. 
 
 4. (a) The Romans overcome the soldiers whom the Aquitani 
 send. (b) The languages of the Gauls differ from one another. 
 
 (c) The Kelts differ from the Aquitani in language, customs, arid 
 laws. (d) Ambassadors, whose country is Gaul, hasten into Hel- 
 vetia, (e) The river Rhine separates the Gauls from the Germans. 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Analysis of the endings -6s and -as and force of each part. 
 2. New nom. ending. 3. Agreement of verb and subject. 4. Plnr. 
 ending of masc. nouns. 5. Similarity of masc. and fern, nouns in the 
 plur. 6. Cases with prep. 7. Use of prefix a or ab in Eng. 
 8. Gender by meaning rather than ending in Lat. 9. The new gen- 
 der in this lesson. 10. Position of a and ab. 
 
24 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Ho-rum 6-mnT-um for-tls-sl-mi sunt Bel-gae, 
 
 Of these (of) all the bravest are the Belgae, 
 
 prop-ter-e-a quod a cul-tu at-que 
 
 on account of this because from the civilization and also 
 
 hu-ma-nl-ta-te pro-vln-cl-se 16n-gls-sl-me ab-sunt. 
 the refinement of the province very far they are distant. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Ho-rttm, of these; cf. 3 : (a) case and gender? cf. hi IV. N. 1 ; 
 ipsorum III. N. 3. (b) To what persons previously mentioned in the 
 narrative does horum refer? 
 
 2. 6-mni-um, of all ; cf. Gallia omnis I. N. 3; GalliS. divis5. 
 I. N. 4 ; partes tres I. N. 6 and 7 ; hi omnes IV. N. 1 and 2 : 
 (a) gen. plur.; (b) omnis agrees with Gallia, divisa agrees with 
 Gallia, tres agrees with partes, omnes agrees with hi, and omnium 
 agrees with horum, in case, number, and gender. 
 
 3. f6r-tis-si-mi, the bravest,' (a) -I indicates noin. plur. masc.; cf. 
 hi, qui, Galli ; (b) -issimi, like English -est in brav-est, is the end- 
 ing of the superlative degree of the adj.; positive, fortis, cf. omnis ; 
 
 (c) horum 1, is joined in translation with this word, thus, the 
 bravest of these ; i. e., horum depends upon (hangs from) fortissimi; 
 
 (d) these, horum, denotes the whole (the whole of the Gauls) of 
 which the bravest, fortissimi, are only a part ; cf. quarum II., 
 which denotes the whole, while unam (partem), on which it depends, 
 denotes a part ; kSrum and quarum are called partitive genitives, 
 or, by some, perhaps more correctly, genitives of the whole ; (e) cf. 
 ipsorum lingua III., where the genitive has exactly the force of an 
 Eng. possessive, in their own language ; (jQ agrees with Belgee, the 
 subject of sunt; cf. 2 (b). 
 
LESSON VI. 25 
 
 4. sunt, they are : (a) full form, es-unt ; cf. es-t, incol-unt, Eng. 
 'tis for ^ is; (b) many words have a clearly distinguishable part 
 which remains unchanged, while the endings change ; cf. appella-t, 
 appella-nt, appella-ntur, linguS, lingua, lingua-rum, lingua-s. In 
 some cases this common base, called the stem, has been modified or 
 obscured ; cf. es-t, sunt (for es-unt). 
 
 5. pr6p-t6r-6-a qu6d : propterea, adverb, on account of this ; 
 quod, conjunction, because. Both words together may be translated 
 because. 
 
 6. a, from; cf. a and Sb, V. N. 2 and 6. 
 
 7. cul-tu, culture, civilization, abl. sing. masc. 
 
 8. St-qug, and also: a conjunction, stronger than et, emphasizes 
 the word or phrase following it. 
 
 9. hu-ma-nl-ta-tg, the humanity, rejinement : abl. sing, fern., used 
 with a like cultu. 
 
 10. pro-vin-ci-ce, of the province: (a) nom. sing. fern, piovin- 
 ciS. ; cf. Gallia, linguS ; (b) -3e indicates nom. plur. fern., and also, 
 as here, the gen. sing. fern, (c) Is it a possessive or partitive gen.? 
 cf. N. 3 (d) (e). 
 
 11. ISn-gis-si-me, farthest, very far: (a) -e is ending of adverb ; 
 (b) -issimus indicates nom. sing. masc. of the superlative of the adj. ; 
 -issime, superlative of the adverb, (c) Give the superlative of the 
 adverb meaning bravely? cf. 3 ; (d) this superlative may mean either 
 most bravely or very bravely ; cf. farthest, very far. 
 
 12. ab-siint, they are away or distant, ; cf. absent : ab, away, and 
 sunt, they are ; cf. 4 : b3 is pronounced like ps. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Ending -se indicates gen. sing, fern., as well as norn. plur. fern. 
 
 2. The ending of the adverb is -e, usually long. 
 
 3. Ending -issime indicates superlative degree of adverb. 
 
 4. Endings -i-um, gen. plur.; -u and -e, abl. sing. 
 
 5. "The gen. is put with words which denote a>part of a thing, 
 in order to designate the whole which is- divided (the partitive 
 
 gen.)-" 
 
 6. The name of the person or thing to whom something belongs is 
 often put in the gen., which then has the force of the Eng. possessive. 
 
26 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 7. The Lat. adj., including the participle, agrees in case, number, 
 and gender, with the noun to which it belongs. 
 
 8. In Lat. all inflected words (i. e. all words which change their 
 form when they change their use) have a common base called the 
 stem, to which the inflectional endings are added. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Genitive case . . . A. & G. p. 146, note, H. 393, 394, 395. 
 
 without classification, 
 and 213. 
 
 2. Possessive genitive . A. & G. 214 and foot- H. 396, I. 
 
 note. 
 
 3. Partitive genitive . A. & G. 216. H. 397. 
 
 4. Agreement of adjectives A. & G. 186. H. 438. 
 
 5. The stem .... A. & G. 20 and 21. H. 46, 1 and 3. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. &b-sttnt, (they) are away or distant; ab-6st. he, she, or it it 
 
 away. 
 
 2. 5t-quS, and, and also. 
 
 3. cttl-tu, abl. sing., culture, civilization. 
 
 4. f5r-tis si-mi, nom. plur. masc. superlative, bravest. 
 
 5. hu-ma ni ta tg, abl. sing, fern., refinement. 
 
 6. 16n-gi3 si me, adv., farthest, very far. 
 
 7. 6-mni ttm, gen. plur., of all. 
 
 8. pr6p tgr S-a, adv.,ybr this reason. 
 
 9. pro-vm-ci-a, a province. 
 10. qu6d, conj., because. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 1. al tls si mi, nom plur. masc. superlative, highest. 
 
 2. fi 1113, nom. sing, masc., the end. 
 
 3. fi nes, nom. plur., limits, confines, territory. 
 
 4. GS na-va or Gg-nii-a, nom. sing, fern., Geneva, a town in 
 
 Switzerland. 
 
 5. no-bi Ha, nom. sing., well-known, noble by birth. 
 
 6. pgr, prep, with accus., through. 
 
LESSON VI. 21 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 Translate, distinguish the possessive from the partitive gen., and give the agree- 
 ment of every adjective. 
 
 1. (a) Hi omnes fortes sunt. (b) Horum omnium fortissimi sunt 
 Belgse. (c) Fortissimi sunt propterea quod longissime absunt. 
 (d) Ab kumanitate provincise absunt. (e) Gallorum omnium fortis- 
 simi sunt Belgae, propterea quod a cultu longissime absunt. 
 
 2. (a) Hi montes sunt altissimi. (b) Helvetiorum omnium nobil- 
 lissimus est Orgetorix. (c) Copiae provincise fortes sunt. (d) Nostrse 
 copise a Germairis longe absunt. (e) Per fines Sequanorum in Hel- 
 vetiam legiones contendunt. (f) Montes qui ab Romanis Helvetios 
 dlvidunt, Alpes sunt. 
 
 3. (a) From the refinement and also from the civilization of the 
 province, (b) The ambassadors are the most noble of the Gauls. 
 (c) They are very far distant from the province, (d) The three parts 
 of Gau! differ from one another, (e) Three parts, of which the Belgse 
 inhabit one. 
 
 4. (a) Four soldiers, of whom these are the tallest (highest). 
 
 (b) They send all their own possessions beyond the province. 
 
 (c) The Helvetii hasten through the territory of the Germans. 
 
 (d) The clients of the Sequani are sent, (e) The Sequani surpass 
 (overcome) the Belgae in civilization 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The gen. case. 2. The possessive gen. 3. The gen. of the 
 whole. 4. The difference between the two. 5. Agreement of adj, 
 6. The stem of fern, nouns and adj. learned thus far. 7. Of masc. 
 8. Of verbs like appellat. 9. Of sunt. 10. The ending of adverb. 
 11. The formation of the superlative. 12. Two translations of the 
 superlative. 13. Difference between adj. and adv. in form (or 
 spelling) ; in meaning. 14. New endings, -u, -e, -i-um. 15. Two 
 uses of the ending -ee. 16. Difference between abl. and gen. 
 
28 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod 
 a cultu atque humanitate provincise longissime absunt, 
 
 ml-m-me-que ad e-os mer-ca-to-res sse-pe com-me-ant 
 least also to them merchants often go-to-and-fro 
 
 at-que e-a quae ad ef-fe-ml-nan-dos a-nl-mos 
 
 and those (things) which to enervate minds 
 
 per-tl-nent Im-por-tant ; 
 
 (they) tend (they) bring in ; 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. mi-ni-me-qug, least also ; cf. Eng. minimum : (a) -e in mi- 
 nime indicates ending of adv.; cf. longissime VI.; (b} -qug, conj., 
 and, also, always attached to some other word, and called enclitic, 
 *'. e. leaning upon ; (c) joins the word to which it is attached so 
 closely to that which precedes as to form with it one idea; cf. et 
 (Matrona et Sequana V.), which joins less closely things equally 
 important, and atque (cultu atque humanitate VI.), which throws 
 the emphasis on what follows. 
 
 2. ad, to near : prep., with the accus. ; cf in, inter, extra, per. 
 
 3. 8-6s, these, them: (a) -6-s indicates accus. plur. masc., cf. Gal- 
 16s V. ; (b) a pron., having for its antecedent Belgee ; (e) both eos 
 and Belgas are 3d plur. masc. ; cf quarum II. and its antecedent 
 partes I. ; both are 3d plur. fern. In what respects does the pron. 
 agree with its antecedent ? In what respect does it not agree ? 
 
 4. mgr-ca to res, merchants ; cf. merchandise, commerce: (a) -es 
 indicates nom. or accus. plur.; (b) here nom., subject of commeant. 
 
LESSON VII. 29 
 
 5. sae-pS, often: -g here indicates an adv. 
 
 6 c6m-mg ant, they go-to-and-fro, visit: (a) cf. mercatores 
 commeant, Orgetorix commeat ; in what respects does the verb 
 agree with its subject ? (b) What is the stem of this tense of the 
 verb? VI. N. 4. 
 
 7. S a, those (things] : (a) accus. plur. neut., direct object of im- 
 portant ; (b) the nom. and accus. plur. neut. always end in -%.. 
 
 8. quee, which : (a) nom. plur. neut. (irregular ending), subject 
 of pertinent; (b) antecedent is ea ; (c) cf. qui, nom. plur. masc., 
 who ; quos, accus. plur. masc., whom; quarum, gen. plur. fern., of 
 which. 
 
 9. 6f fe mi-nan-dos (in connection with ad and animos), to 
 enervate or weaken minds ; cf. effeminate ; (a) -6-s indicates accus. 
 plur. masc. ; (b) a participle in agreement with animos ; cf. Gallia 
 divisa. 
 
 10. a nl mos, minds, feelings, courage, accus. plur. masc.. after 
 prep. ad. 
 
 11. pr ti iie'nt, they stretch out, pertain, tend; cf. Eng. perti- 
 nent, impertinent ; cf. pertine-t, it tends, pertine-nt ; commea-t, 
 commea-nt ; dividi-t, dividu nt. 
 
 12. im-p6r-tant, they bring in; cf. import, important: (a) com- 
 pounded of in (changed to im before p) into or in, and portant, they 
 bring, carry; (b) subject is mercatores; (c) stands at the end of 
 the clause to which it belongs ; cf., as to position, pertinent, com- 
 meant, absunt VI., dividit V., differunt IV., appellantur III., 
 incolunt II., est L, sunt VI. ; (d) incolunt is followed by its 
 subject, and is made emphatic by being placed first; while (e) the 
 verb meaning to be in Lat. does not follow the usual rule as to 
 position. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Et simply connects, -que is an enclitic and connects more 
 closely than et, atque gives prominence to what follows. 
 
 2. The ending -3. is the ending of all neut. nouns and adj. in nom. 
 and accus. plur., as well as of nom. sing. fern. 
 
30 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. There are three classes of verbs as to the formation of present 
 tense indicative mode ; one with a before the personal ending, one 
 with e and one witli i in 3d sing, and u in 3d plur. 
 
 4. In composition n before p is changed to m ; d before p, to p ; 
 and a before f, to f. 
 
 5. The prep, in, inter, ad, take the accus., a or ab the abl. 
 
 6. The pron. agrees with its antecedent in person, number, and 
 gender, but not in case. 
 
 7. The verb agrees with its subject in number and person. 
 
 8. In genera], the verb stands at the end of its clause, but the verb 
 meaning to be (est, sunt) does not follow this rule. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Enclitics . . . . A. & G. 19, c. H. 18, 2, 1). 
 
 2. Et, -que, atque . . A. & G. 156, a. II. 554, 2. 
 
 3. Agreement of pron. A. & G. 198. H. 445. 
 
 4. Agreement of verb . A. & G. 204. H. 460. 
 
 5. Position of verb . . A. & G. 343, 344, . H. 560, 561, I., II. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. a-ni-mi (cf. Galli), nom. plur. masc., souls, minds, feelings. 
 
 2. c6m-mg-ant, they go back and forth, visit. 
 
 3. gf-fe-mi nat, he, she, or it makes effeminate, enervates. 
 
 4. I-i or 6-1, nom. plur. masc., they ; cf. 6a, nom. and accus. plur. 
 
 neut., and Sos, accus. plur. masc. 
 
 5. Im p8r-tant, they bring in, import. 
 
 6. mgr ca-to res, nom. and accus. plur. masc., merchants. 
 
 7. mi nl me, adv., superlative degree, least, by no means. 
 
 8. pSr-ti ngnt, they stretch out, tend, pertain. 
 
 9. -qug, conj., and ; enclitic. 
 
 10. qui, nom. plur. masc., who; quae, nom. and accus. plur. neut., 
 
 which; quartim, gen. plur. fern., of which. 
 
 11. sse-pg, adv., often; minime Scepg, by no means often, i. c. 
 
 very seldom. 
 
LESSON VII. 31 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 (1) Translate, (2) explain significant endings, (3) give the number, gender, and 
 antec. of the pron. so far as you can. 
 
 1. (a) Minime ad ecs mercatores ssepe com meant, (b) Ad eos 
 mercatores ea quae ad effemiuandos ariimos pertinent important. 
 
 (c) Animi eorum qui a cultu proviucise lougissime absunt minirne 
 etfemiuantur. (d) Ad eos quorum terrain tinmen dividit mercatores 
 mittunt. 
 
 2. (a) Provincia Romanorum ad Galliam pertinet. (b) Roman! ad 
 Gallos saepe comrneant. (c) Belgae et Celtfe partes Gallise incolunt. 
 
 (d) Horum omnium linguae, Instituta, 1 leges inter se differunt. 
 
 (e) Nobilissimi Belgarum propterea quod eorum fines longissime 
 absunt, humanitate ab Sequanis difterunt. 
 
 3. (a) Tlie merchants very seldom bring in those things which 
 tend to weaken courage, (b) Those (things) which tend to enervate 
 minds are very far distant from the Belgae. (c) Those who are 
 called Belgre overcome the Aquitani. (d) The merchants hasten 
 from our province into the territory of the Tigurini. 
 
 4. (a) The Belgre differ from the Eomans in civilization and 
 refinement, (b) The merchants often go to and fro to the Celtse. 
 (c) The Belgse are the bravest of all the Gauls, (d) Those (things) 
 which merchants send to the Sequani are very seldom brought to the 
 
 Belgae. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Two uses of the endings -5, -ae, -e or -g. 2. Three classes 
 of verbs. 3. Agreement of verb. 4. Position of verb. 5. Antec. 
 and agreement of pron. 6. List of pron. in first seven lessons. 2 
 7. Enclitics. 8. Three words meaning and, with difference. 
 9. Changes in spelling in compounds. 10. Pour accus. plur. end- 
 ings. 11. The various forms which have occurred of that pron. the 
 plur. neut. of which is ea. 
 
 1 Nom. plur. neut., rf. ea. 
 
 2 The instructor should aid the pupil in this work of classifying his material. 
 Blank -books, properly ruled, should be used. It is of extreme importance that, 
 from the beginning, the pupil should be encouraged to do independent work. 
 
32 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 pro-xT-mi-que sunt Ger-ma-nis, qui trans Rhe-num 
 nearest also they are to-the-Germans, who across the Khine 
 
 In-co-lunt, qul-bus-cum con-tl-nen-ter bel-lum ge-runt. 
 dwell, with whom continually war they wage. 
 
 2 NOTES. 
 
 1. pr6 xl mi-quS, nearest also ; cf. minimeque, and proximate, 
 proximo : (a) case, number, gender ? (b) What part of speech, and 
 with what does it agree? (c) irregular superlative; (d) force of -que? 
 
 2. Ggr-ma-nis, to the Germans: (a) -is indicates here the case 
 of the indirect object in the plural; (b) this case is called the da- 
 tive; (c) in the Eng. expressions nearest the Germans, like his 
 father, he gave the boy a book Germans, father, and boy are in the 
 dative case; (d) the ending -is is also used for the abl. plur. ; cf. 
 ab Aquitanis V. x. 3. 
 
 3. Rhe-num, the Rhine: (a) -u-m indicates accus. sing. masc. or 
 neut. cf. un-a-m, accus. sing, fem., II. N. 2; (b) after the prep, 
 trans ; cf. in, inter, ad. 
 
 4. qui-bfis-cftxn, with whom ; two words, quibus and cum : 
 
 (a) cum, prep, with abl.; cf. a or ab ; (b) joined to the end of qui- 
 bus and some other pronouns, though it usually has the same position 
 as a or ab ; (c) quibus, abl. plur. masc. ; cf. legibus IV. ; quarum 
 II. N. 1; qui III. N. 2; quae VII. N. 8; (d) antecedent? 
 
 5. c6ii-tl-ngn-tgr, adv., continually; cf. per-ti-nent VII. N. 11; 
 -t6r (as well as -6 or -g) is an ending of adverbs. 
 
 6. bgl-ltim, war; cf. bellicose: (a) -ti m, accus. sing, neut.; 
 
 (b) why accus. ? (c) in all neut. nouns and adj. the nom. is like 
 accus. in both sing, and plur.; cf. ea VII. x. 7; (d) nom. and 
 
LESSON VIII. 33 
 
 accus, plur. bella ; cf. ea ; dat. and abl. plur. bellis ; cf. institutls, 
 from nom. sing', institutum. 
 
 7. ge-rtint, they carry on, wage ; cf. belligerent, from bellum and 
 stem of gerunt ; gerit, he wages, cf. dividit V. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The dative is the case of the indirect object. 
 
 2. The ending -is is that of dat. and abl. plur. 
 
 3. The preps, in, inter, ad, trans, take the accus. ; a or ab and 
 cum take the abl. 
 
 4. With the abl. of qui, who, cum is attached to the end of the 
 word. 
 
 5. The ending -u-m is that of the accus. sing. masc. and neut. ; 
 -a-m, that of the amis. sing. fein. 
 
 6. Endings of adverbs, -e, -e, and -ter. 
 
 7. Neut. endings : nom. and accus. sing., -u-m ; nom. and accus. 
 pltir., -a; dat. and abl. plur., -la. 
 
 8. The nom. is used as the subject, the gen. as an adj., the dat. as 
 the indirect object, the accus. as the direct object, and the abl. as an 
 adv. 
 
 9. All the above cases, except the abl., are found in Eng., though 
 they are not always called by these names. 
 
 10. Having arranged, in the order of cases used in Obs. 8, all the 
 forms of nouns and adjs. which have the nom. sing, in -a, like Gallia, 
 observe that : (a) all these forms contain a except the abl. plur., and 
 
 (b) here the absence is only apparent, as -Is is contracted from a-is ; 
 
 (c) the stem (cf. VI. N. 4 (b) ) ends in a, and for this reason these 
 words are called a nouns or adj. ; (d) they belong to what is called 
 the first declension; (e) they are all fern, except where masc. by 
 meaning; cf. II. N. 4 (e), V. N. 4 (c). 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Declension . . A. & G. 20, 26. H. 46. 
 
 2. First declension A. & G. 35, stella. H. 48, mensa. 
 
 3. Dative case . . A. & G. 224 and read note. H. 382, 383. 
 
34 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. bSl-lftm, nom. and accus. sing, neut., war. 
 
 2. c6n-t!-ngn-t6r, adv., continually. 
 
 3. ciiin, prep, with abl., with. 
 
 4. gg-rtint, they carry on, wage. 
 
 5. pr6-xi-mi, nom. plur. masc., the nearest. 
 
 6. Rhg-niim, accus. sing, masc., the Rhine. 
 
 7. trans, prep, with accus., across. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 Collect from all preceding vocabularies the a nouns and adj. which they contain. 
 
 1. bona, nom. sing, fern., good, goodly. 
 
 2. frumentum, nom. and accus. sing, neut., grain. 
 
 3. magna, nom. sing, fern., great, large. 
 
 7. EXERCISES. 
 
 (1) Translate; (2) explain significant endings; (3) give the case of every noun 
 and adj. 
 
 1. (a) Belgse fortissim! sunt propterea quod proximi sunt Germa- 
 nls, quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt. (ft) Galli cum Germanis 
 continental* bellum gcrunt. (c) Helvetil proximi sunt Sequanis. 
 
 (d) Germam trans Rhcnum incolunt. 
 
 2. (a) Belgse et Celtse Galliam incolunt. (b) Gallia est dlvlsa in 
 partes tres quftrum una Aqultania est. (c) Copise Celtarum sunt 
 proximse Helvetils. (d) Una via est per provinciam nostram. 
 
 (e) Instituta provinciae inter se difFerunt. (f) Tlumen a Belgis 
 Celtas dlvidit. 
 
 3. (a) Parts of a divided province, (b) They hasten across the 
 country of the Belgae. (c) The road is nearest to the Sequani. 
 (d) All the Germans differ from the Gauls in culture and courage. 
 
 4. (a) Switzerland is called a goodly land. () The Belgse in- 
 habit a large country, (c) He goes back and forth across the Matrona 
 and the Seine, (d) The Germans send ambassadors to (ad) the 
 Celtse. 
 
LESSON IX. 35 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. New endings : -is as dat., -u-m, -ter. 2. Two or more uses of 
 endings -Is, -u-m, -e, -ae, -a. 3. Various forms of the pronoun qui, 
 all genders, plur. 4. Neuter nouns. 5. Cases in Eng. and Lat. 
 6. Formation of cases from the stem in -a nouns. 7. Gender of -a 
 nouns. 8. Parts of speech having -a stems. 9. The use of the dat. 
 10. Declension in Eng. 11. Position of cum. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Qua de cau-sa Hel-ve-tl-i quo-que re-11-quos 
 "Which from cause the Helvetii also the-rest-of 
 
 Gal-los vlr-tu-te prae-ce-dunt, quod fe-re quo-ti-dl-a-ms 
 the Gauls in valor surpass, because almost (in) daily 
 
 proe-11-is cum Ger-ma-nis con-ten-dunt, cum aut 
 battles with the Germans they contend, when either 
 
 su-is fi-nl-bus e-6s pro-hl-bent, aut 
 
 from their own boundaries them they keep away, or 
 
 I-psi In e-o-rum fi-nl-bus bel-liim ge-runt. 
 themselves in their boundaries war wage. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Qua, which: (a) abl. sing, fern., 1st deol.; (b) here an adj. 
 agreeing with causa ; (c) cf. qui, quarum, quae, quibus ; (d~) when 
 
36 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 it stands at the beginning of a sentence, as here, it may be translated 
 like ea, this, for this reason. 
 
 2. de, from, for ; prep, with abl., cf. a, ab, cum. 
 
 3. cau-sa, cause, reason : (a) diphthong au ow in how ; 
 (b) case? (c) stein and decl. complete? 
 
 4. qu6-qug, conj., also, likewise: (a) follows the emphatic word 
 of the clause, Helvetii ; (b) Helvetii quoque, the Helcetii also ; 
 atque Helvetii, and also the Helvetii. 
 
 5. rg-li-quos, adj., the-rest-of ; cf. relique, relic: (a) rase, num- 
 ber, gender, and why ? cf. VI. N. 2 (b), and Obs. 7 ; Gallos, V. N. 1 
 (a) ; (b) of, in the translation the-rest-of, is part of the meaning of 
 reliquos, and not the translation of a gen. 
 
 6. vir-tu tg, in valor , cf. virtue : (a) case ? cf. humanitate 
 VI. N. 9; (b) why ? cf. lingua IV. N. 3 (b). 
 
 7. prce-ce-dttnt, they go before, surpass ; cf. precede, precedent: 
 prae, before, and ceiunt, they go. 
 
 8. qu6 ti-dl-a ms, daily, adj. in agreement with prceliis. 
 
 9. prce-H-is, in or by battles: (a) diphthong ce == oi in coin; 
 (b) nom. sing, prcelium, cf. bellum VIII. N. 6; (c} abl. plur. 
 neut., cf. institutes IV. 
 
 10- ciim, prep., with ; here in its usual position ; cf. quibuscum, 
 VI [[. N. 4 (b). 
 
 11. Ggr-ma ms, the Germans: (a) abl. plnr. masc. ; (b) cf. 
 proximi Germanis VIII., where Germanis is dat. plnr. mase., 
 though having the same form as here. 
 
 12. ciim, conj., when: (a) also written quum ; (5) not to be con- 
 founded with prep. ciim. 
 
 13. aut, or, either: (a) for diphthong au, sec caus 3; (b) where 
 aut is repeated in the same sentence, as here, the first aut is trans- 
 lated either, the other or others or. 
 
 14. stt is, their or their own: (a) possessive adj. limiting fini- 
 bus ; (b) cf. the corresponding reflexive se IV. N. 7. 
 
 15. fT-ni-btis, from boundaries ; cf. confines, finite : (a) abl. 
 plur. masc., cf. legibus, quibus ; (b) the nom. sing, is finis, end, 
 limit ; cf. omnis I.; (c) the abl. here denotes removal or separation, 
 and is used with the verb prohibent, which means they keep away ; 
 
LESSON IX. 3T 
 
 (d) the prep, is usually expressed with the aid. of separation ; cf. ab 
 Aquitanis V., a cultu VI., but with prohibent it is often omitted. 
 
 16. 6 63, them ; cf. e 6s VII. N. 3. What is its antec.? 
 
 17. pro hi bent, they keep away; cf. prohibit: (a) contrast pro- 
 hibent, prohibet, pertinent VII., and appellat, appellantur, im- 
 portant ; (b) what difference of stem ending ? 
 
 18. in, with abl., means in ; with abl., it denotes rest in a place ; 
 with aceus., motion toward a place; cf. in partes I., into parts ; 
 and in flnibus, in territory. 
 
 19. 6 6 -rum, of those, of them, their: (a) gen. plur. niasc. ; cf. 
 ipsorum III., horum VI. ; (b) suis 14, and eorum both mean 
 their ; but suis refers to Helvetii, the subject of the clause in which 
 it stands, while eorum refers to Germanis. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The relative pronoun at the beginning of a sentence may be 
 freely translated by the corresponding demonstrative, i. e. this cause 
 for which cause, these things for which things, these for who, etc. 
 
 2. The abl. regularly expresses separation, generally with but often 
 without a prep. 
 
 3. With in, the accus. is used to express motion toward a place ; 
 the abl., position in a place. 
 
 4. The relative, like which in Eng., is often an adj. 
 
 5. a, ab, cum, de, take the abl. 
 
 6. quoque, conj., immediately follows the emphatic word of its 
 clause. 
 
 7. Diphthongs au = ow in how, ce = oi in coin. 
 
 8. cum is a conj. meaning when, as well as a prep, meaning with. 
 
 9. sui, nom. plur. masc., their, and se must refer to the subject of 
 some verb in the sentence, but eorum, of them, their, need not so 
 refer. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Ablative of separation A. & G. 243 and a. H. 413 and N. 3. 
 -2 Sui A. & G. 196, 197. H. 448, 449. 
 
38 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Hereafter, if uo case is given after a noun, adj., or pron., it is iu the nom. sing. 
 
 1. aut, conj., or ; aut . . . aut, either . . . or. 
 
 2. cau-s5, fern., cause, reason. 
 
 3. de, prep, with M., from, down from, concerning , for. 
 
 4. fS re, adv., almost. 
 
 5. prae-c-duiit, they precede, surpass. 
 
 6. prce II ttm, neut., battle. 
 
 7. pr6 hi bgnt, they keep away, prevent. 
 
 8. qu6-qu, conj., also. 
 
 9. qu6-ti-di-a niim, adj., neut., daily. 
 
 10. rg-li-qui, adj., nom. plnr. masc., the rest of. 
 
 11. stt-5, i'eui., stt-tim, neut., adj., his, her, its, their. 
 
 12. vlr-tu-tg, abl. sing. fern, virtue, valor; vlrtutgs, nom. and 
 
 accus. plur. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Belgne cum Germanis continenter bellum gerunt. (b) Hel- 
 vetii cum GerinanTs fere quotldianis projliis contendunt. (c) Proxi- 
 mi sunt Germanis quibuscum fere quotldianis prceliis contendunt. 
 (d) Helvetii aut suls finibus Germanos prohibent, aut ipsi in Germa- 
 norum finibus bellum geruiit. 
 
 2. (a) Gallorum omnium fortissimi sunt quod prosliis cum Germa- 
 nis saepe contendunt. (5) Mini me cum Belgis Aquitani proeliis con- 
 tendunt. (c) Romani cum GallTs saepissime bellum gcrunt. (d) Ad 
 Ehenum flnesque Germanorum Helvetii contendunt. 
 
 3. (a) The Romans keep the Germans from the territory of the 
 Sequani. (b) The Helvetii are overcome in battles, (c) Wars are 
 waged in the territory of the Germans, who dwell across the Rhine. 
 
 (d) When the brave Romans keep the Gauls from their country. 
 
 (e) The large river divides their province into parts. 
 
 4. (a) The Tolosates are in the province. (b) These excel the 
 rest of the Belgre in valor, (c) Gaul is their province, (d) They 
 
LESSON X. 
 
 39 
 
 send soldiers into their province, (e) The Belgic are very far distant 
 from the civilization of the province, and for this reason (Lat. idiom, 
 for which reason) excel the Celtae in valor. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The abl. endings in this lesson. 2. The uses of the abl. in this 
 lesson. 3. Two meanings of cum. 4. Two meanings of in. 
 5. Difference in meaning between bellum and prcelium. 6. Usual 
 position of verb in clause; of sunt ; position of cum, prep.; of 
 quoque ; of -que ; of relative pronoun. 7. Antecedent of each pron. 
 in lesson. 8. Difference in use of suis and eorum. 9. Verb stems 
 ending in -e ; in -a. 10. Masc., fern., and neut. words in the lesson. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 E-5-rum u-na pars, quam Gal-los cb-tl-ne-re 
 Of these one part, which the Gauls to hold 
 
 die-turn est, 
 it has been said, 
 
 In-I-t!-um 
 beginning 
 
 ca-plt 
 
 takes 
 
 a 
 
 from 
 
 flu-ml-ne 
 the river 
 
 Rh6-da-no; con-tl-ne-tur Ga-ru-mna flu-ml-ne, 
 
 Ehone ; it is bounded by the Garumna river, 
 
 6-ce-a-no, fi-nl-bus Bel-ga-rum ; 
 
 by the ocean, by the territory of the Belgae ; 
 
 at-tln-glt 
 
 it reaches 
 
 e-tl-am ab Se-qua-nis et Hel-ve-tl-Is 
 
 also on-the-side-of the Sequani and the Helvetii 
 
 flu-men Rhe-num ; ver-git 
 the river Rhine ; it slopes 
 
 ad sep-ten-trl-o-nes. 
 
 toward tne north. 
 
40 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. E-6-rttm, of these : (a) Possessive or partitive genitive? VI. N. 
 3 (c) (d) (e) ; (b) the these here referred to means all the inhab- 
 itants of Gaul; (c) decline in plur. masc., fein., and neut. 
 
 2. pSrs, part: (a) nom. sing, fein.; (b) cf. abl. sing, parte, like 
 virtute ; nom. and accus. plur. partgs I. ; gen. plur. partium, like 
 omnium ; dat. and abl. plur. partibus, like finibus ; the nom. sing, 
 is formed by adding a, and t of the stem is dropped before it : pars 
 = par(t)s ; (c) cf. stein ornni-, nom. sing, omnis ; stem humani- 
 tat-, nom. humanita(t)s ; stem virtut-, nom. virtu(t)s ; (d) subject 
 of capit, continetur, attingit, vergit. 
 
 3. quam, which : (a) accus. sing. fern. ; cf. abl. sing. fein. qua 
 IX., gen. plur. fein. quarum II.; (b) obj. of obtinere; (c) antec. 
 and why? VII. N. 3. 
 
 4. 6b-ti-ne-r6, to hold, occupy, possess: (a) compounded of ob, 
 against, and tengre, to hold, to hold against (all comers] ; cf. per- 
 tinent ; (b) -re, the sign of the pivs. infinitive act.; cf. obtine-t, 
 obtine-nt ; importa-nt, importa re. 
 
 5. die-turn, said, or having been said; cf. dictation, diction,' 
 
 (a) with est translated it is said, or it has been said ; (b) nom. sing. 
 neut., cf. bellum ; (c) pass, participle, cf. divisa I.; (d) quam 
 Gallos obtinere dictum est, which it has been said the Gauls 
 occupy; (e) the Gallos here referred to are the Celtae III. 
 
 6. 111 it-I-um, beginning; cf. initiative; accus. sing, neut., cf. 
 bellum VI I L 
 
 7. c& pit, it takes ; cf. capture, and dividit V. 
 
 8. flu-mi-ng, the river: (a) abl. sing, nent., cf. virtute; (b) cf. 
 nom. sing, flumen V., and note change in vowel ; (c) cf. flumina, 
 nom. and accus. plur., rivers, cf. ea ; fluminum, cf. omnium ; 
 fluminibus, cf finibus; (d) why abl.? IX. N. 15. 
 
 9. RhS da-no, the Rhone: (a) abl. sing, masc., distinguished by 
 -6, cf. abl. sing. fern, causa ; also abl. sing, virtute, cultu VI. ; 
 
 (b) explains flumine, and refers to the same thing; is therefore in the 
 same case; cf. flumen V. N. 5 (b). Such a word is called an 
 appositive. 
 
LESSON X. 41 
 
 10. c6n-ti-ne-tiir, it is held together, bounded ; cf. Eng. conti- 
 nent, noun and adj. : (a) compounded of con, together, and tenere, 
 to hold; cf. pertinent VII. N. 11; obtinere 4; (b) 3d sing, pass., 
 ending -tur ; (c) cf. dividi-t, pertine-iit, appella-ntur, appella-t, 
 appella-tur, dividi-tur, differu-nt, dividu-ntur, and note that the 
 ending is the same for the same voice, person, and number, while the 
 stem is different in different verbs. 
 
 11. GS-rtt-mna, by (i. e. by means of] the Garumna : (a) the 
 prep, expressed in the translation does not appear in the Lat.; cf. 
 lingua HI., lingua IV., provinciae VI., finibus IX. ; (b) ex- 
 presses the means by which one part is bounded, and is ealled an 
 abl. of means or instrument ; lingua' III. and prceliis IX., though 
 translated by in are really examples of the same use of abl. 
 
 12. 5-cS-S-no, by the ocean : (a) abl. sing. mase. 0f means, like 
 Garumna, and finibus following ; (b) abl. sing. masc. of animos, 
 eorum? (c) position of accent, and why? 
 
 13. at-tin-git, it touches upon, it reaches to : (a) compounded of 
 ad, to, and taiigit (he, she, it) touches ; cf. tact, contact; (b) d 
 before t changed to t, cf. appellaiitur I If.; (c) a of tangit changed 
 to i, cf. tenere and obtinere, flumen and flumiiie. 
 
 14. %b,from } on the side of; occasionally indicates position rather 
 than separation. 
 
 15. Rhe-num, Rhine: (a) the ending -u-m indicates here the 
 accus. sing, masc.; (b) in apposition with flumen, which is the 
 object of attingit. 
 
 16. sgp-tgii-tri-o-nes, the constellation of the Great Bear (''the 
 Great Dipper"), which is in the northern part of the heavens, the 
 north: (a) accus. plur. masc. ending -5s ; cf. partes I. N. 6; mer- 
 catores VII.; (b) sing, in sense, though plur. in form. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. An appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains. 
 
 2. Means or instrument is expressed by the abl. without a prep. 
 
 3. An ending in Lat. often expresses an idea which requires a prep, 
 in Eng. 
 
42 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. Noun endings: -B, noin. sing.; -6, abl. sing, masc.; -u-m, 
 accus. sing. masc. 
 
 5. Verb endings : -t, he, she, or it, act.; -tur, he, she, or it, pass.; 
 -nt, they, act.; -ntur, they, pass.; -re, ending of pres. intinitive act. 
 
 6. The letter t is dropped before a, d before t is changed to t, a 
 and e are often changed to i when a word is lengthened. 
 
 7. Many stems ending in t and i form the nom. by adding B. 
 
 8. Ob in composition means against, in the wry of; con, 
 together, or simply strengthens the meaning of the word with which it 
 is compounded. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Abl. of means . . . A. & G. 248. H. 420. 
 
 2. Apposition . . . . A. & G. 183, 184. H. 363. 
 
 3. Change of a or e to i . A. & G. 10, b. H. 22, 1. 
 
 4. Assimilation . . . A. & G. 11, /. 3. H. 344, 5, ad. 
 
 5. Omission of t before B A. & G. 44. H. 36, 2. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY A. 
 
 1. aVtlu-gttnt, they touch upon, reach. 
 
 2. cS-pit, he, she, or it takes. 
 
 3. c6n-ti-nnt, they hold together, bound. 
 
 4. dic-ttim, neut., said, or having been said. 
 
 5. 8-tI am, even, also. 
 
 6. I-ni-ti-ttm, neut., beginning. 
 
 7. 8b-ti-n8nt, they hold against (all comers], occupy, possess. 
 
 8. Sb-tl-ne-rS, to possess. 
 
 9. O-cS-a-iium, accus. sing, masc., the ocean ; Oceano, abl. sing. 
 
 10. pars, fern., part; nom. plur., partes. 
 
 11. sSp-tgn-tri-6-nes, the Great J3ear, the north. 
 
 12. vgr-gttnt, they slope, verge, are situated. 
 
 6. VOCABULARY B. 
 
 1. amid, nom. plur. masc., friends. 
 
 2. carri, nom. plur. masc., carts, wagons. 
 
LESSON X. 43 
 
 3. influit, it flows, or flows into. 
 
 4. numerum, accus. sing, inasc., a number. 
 
 5. pagi, uoin. plur. mase., cantons, districts. 
 
 7. EXERCISES 
 
 (1) Translate; (2) select and classii'y all the abl. in these exercises ; (3) name 
 all the appositives. 
 
 1. (a) Una pars, ad quara Gallos commeare dictum est, vergit ad 
 septentriones. (b) Alia pars, quani iiicolunt Aquitani, continetur 
 Garumna flurnine, (Jceano, Pyrenseis montibus. (c) Tertia pars, 
 quam Belgae obtinent, a Morinls et Menapils Oceanum attingit. 
 (d) Una Galliae pars initium capit a flumine Rhodano. (e) Britannia 
 Oceauo continetur. 
 
 2. (a) Legati riobiles ad Sequanos mittuntur. (b) Magnum carro- 
 rum numerum importat. (c) Flumiua sunt qua3 per fines Gal- 
 lorum in Khodanuin influiiut. (d) Helvetia omnis in quattuor pagos 
 divisa est. 
 
 3. (a) One part of Gaul reaches the river Rhine. (b) The 
 Garumna river divides the Gauls from the Aquitani. (c) A good way 
 into the province is very fur distant, (rf) Orgetorix surpasses in valor 
 the rest of the soldiers who are in Helvetia. 
 
 4. (a) Those things which are brought in enervate the minds of 
 the Gauls, (b) The Hsedui are called friends, (c) The Belga3 keep 
 the Germans from their territory, (d) The bravest of all the Gauls 
 are overcome in war. 
 
 8. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The abl. of means. 2. Difference between abl. of means and 
 abl. of respect. 3. When the prep, is expressed with abl. 4. When 
 omitted. 5. New endings : -tur, -re, -s, -5, -u-m as accus. masc. 
 6. Uses of endings -u-m and -a. 7. Change of vowels in words. 
 8. Change or omission of consonants. 9. Distinguish endings -t, 
 -ntur, -nt, -tur. 10. Force of ob and con in composition. 
 11. Translation of the infinitive with a verb of saying. 12. Dis- 
 tinguish -u-m and -a-m ; also -u-m, -um, and -rum. 13. Four end- 
 ings of abl. in sing., two in plur. 
 
44 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 Beginning with this lesson, only long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels 
 should be treated as short. Diphthongs are long. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Bel-gae ab ex-tre-mis Gal-li-ae fi-ni-bus 
 
 The Belgse from the remotest of Gaul boundaries 
 
 o-ri-un-tur, per-ti-nent ad in-fe-ri-6-rem par-tern 
 take their rise, they extend to the lower part 
 
 flu-min-is Rhe-ni, spec-tant in sep-ten-tri-o-nem et 
 of the river Ehine, they look into the north and 
 
 o-ri-en-tem so-lem. A-qui-ta-ni-a a Ga-ru-mna 
 the rising sun. Aquitania from the Garumua 
 
 flu-mi-ne ad Py-re-nse-os mon-tes et e-am par-tern 
 river to the Pyrenean mountains and that part 
 
 O-ce-a-m quae est ad His-pa-ni-am per-ti-net, 
 of the ocean which is near Spain extends, 
 
 spec-tat in-ter oc-ca-sum so lis et sep-ten-tri-o-nes. 
 it looks between the setting of the sun and the north. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Gal-li-ae, of Gaul: gen. sing, fern., cf. provincise VI. N. 
 10 (b). 
 
 2. o-ri-un-tur, they rise, begin ; cf. orient : (a) third plur., pass, 
 form, cf. appellantur ; (b) this verb is puss, in form, but act. in 
 meaning. 
 
 3. par-tern, part : (a) accus. sing, fern., after ad. (b) What is the 
 
LESSON XL 45 
 
 case ending ? cf. pars X. N. 2 (c) limited by iiiferlorem, which 
 has tlie s;nne ending:. 
 
 4. flu-mi-nis, of the river: (a) gen. sing. neut. (b) What is the 
 case ending-? cf. flumine X. N. 8 (b) (c). 
 
 5. Rhe-ni, of the Rhine: (ec) -I is here the ending of the gen. 
 sing, in a so. ; (b) distinguish -I, the ending of the nom. plur. masc. ; 
 cf. Galll [[[.hi IV.; (c) case, and why? 
 
 6. o-ri-en-tem, rising : (a) participle, cf. divisa I., dictum X. ; 
 (b) from verb oriuntur 2 ; (c) for ending -em cf. partem 3, and 
 septentrionem, solem ; (d) for nom. sing, orieiis, cf. pars X. N. 
 2 (b) (c). 
 
 7. e-am, that: (a) here an adj. limiting partem, which is used 
 with prep, ad; cf. qua IX. N. 3 ; (b) cf. quam, and ea, eos, eorum. 
 
 8. quee, which: (a) nom. sing. fern, (irregular ending); (b) a 
 masc. or fern. pron. in Lat. may be translated which or it when the 
 antee. in Eng. is neut.; (c) carefully distinguish the neut. quoe VII. 
 N. 8; (d) antec. ? How do you know it ? 
 
 9. so-lis, of the sun: (a) for ending cf. flumiiiis 4; (b) cf. 
 solem ; (c) possessive or partitive ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. New endings : -em of uccus. sing. ; -I and -is, gen. sing. 
 
 2. Masc. and fern, words which have the gen. sing, -is have the 
 accus. sing, -em; soils, solem, and the nom. and accus. plur. -es ; 
 partem, partes, mercatoies. 
 
 3. Select the neuter nouns and adjs. from the text and vocabularies 
 of the lessons, and note that all but flumen have the nom. and 
 accus. sing, in -um, the nom. and accus. plur. in -a, and the abl. 
 plur. in -is. 
 
 4. Distinguish carefully ending -I, gen. sing, and nom. plur. masc. ; 
 -a, nom. sing. fern, and nom. and accus. plur. neut. ; -ae, gen. sing, 
 fern, and nom. plur. fern. ; -e abl. sing., and -e or -e adv. ; -Is abl. 
 plur., and -is gen. sing. 
 
 5. Some verbs are pass, in form but act. in meaning. 
 
 6. The form quee is both the nom. sing. fern, and the nom. and 
 accus. plur. neut. of the rel. pron. 
 
46 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 1. Neut. 2d clecl., A. & G. 38, bellum ; H. 51, templum. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. ex-tre-ml, nom. plur. masc., extreme, the end of; cf. reliqui. 
 
 the rest of. 
 
 2. Hi-spa-ni-a, fein., Spain. 
 
 3. m-fe-ri-6-rem, accus. sing., lower. 
 
 4. oc-ca-sum, accus. sing, masc., the falling, setting. 
 
 5. o-ri-ans, adj., rising ; accus. sing, orieiitem ; oriuntur, they 
 
 rise. 
 f>. Fy-re-iiae-i, adj., nom. plur. masc., Pyrenean, of the Pyrenees. 
 
 7. so-lis, gen. sing, masc., of the sun; accus. sing., solem. 
 
 8. spec-taut, they look, face. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. () Belgae ab extremis Galliae flnibus oriuntur. (b) Belgse ad 
 inferiorem partem fluiniiiis Rheiti pertinent, (c) BelgrB in septentri- 
 onein ct orientem solem spectant. (d) Aquitania a Garumna flumine 
 ad Pyreusuos monies pertinet. (e) Aquitania ad earn partem Occam 
 qiuu est ad Hispfmiam pertinet. (f) Aquitania inter occiisum solis 
 et septentriones spectat. 
 
 2. (a) Quotidifino prrulio coutendit. (b) Bellis magnis German! 
 Gallos superaut. (c) Pyreiuei moutes sunt altissiml. (c?) Via per 
 extremes fines est. (e) Suos fines dividunt. (/) Eorum pages 
 capit. 
 
 3. (a) The Nervii keep the Germans from their boundaries. 
 
 (b) Aquitania is bounded by the Garumna river and the ocean. 
 
 (c) One part of the river is near Spain, (d) The Belgae touch upon 
 the part which the Gauls occupy. 
 
 4. (a) They wage great wars, (b) The good soldiers of the Ro- 
 mans surpass the Gauls in war. (c) The customs which the Romans 
 bring in are good, (d) The land which is called Gaul slopes toward 
 the north. 
 
LESSON XII. 47 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Agreement of pron. 2. Agreement of adj. 3. Agreement of 
 verb. 4. Three gen. sing, endings. 5. Three accns. sing, end- 
 ings. 6. Three gen. plur. endings. 7. Three accus. plur. endings. 
 8. Peculiarities of neut. nouns. 9. Why ab extremis finibus, but 
 a Garumna? 10. Contrast the Roman and the Eng. way of express- 
 ing the points of the compass. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 This lesson is a review of all that have preceded it. Nothing is so necessary, in 
 the acquisition of a language, as constant and thorough review. One should carry 
 forward with him at least nine-tenths of what he has learned. The preceding 
 lessons contain in all one hundred and forty-seven different words, together with a 
 large number of grammatical forms. Many of the most important principles of the 
 language have been considered. Others might have been brought forward, but it 
 has been deemed wise to hold them in reserve. It is understood that the student 
 will in no case proceed to take up Lesson XIII. until this lesson, with all that 
 it includes, is learned. Let every word, every phrase, every principle, be mastered 
 absolutely. 
 
 1. TEXT. OESAR'S "GALLIC WAR," BK. I. CHAP. 1. 
 
 In the review of the text which has thus far been taken, pursue the 
 following order of work : 
 
 1. Pronounce aloud the Lat. text repeatedly. 
 
 2. With only the Eng. translation before the eye, pronounce the 
 Lat., until this can be done rapidly and without hesitation. 
 
 3. With only the Eng. translation before the eye, write out the 
 Lat. ; compare the result with the printed Lat. text ; note and correct 
 mistakes. 
 
 4. Write out, under the following heads, a grammatical analysis 
 of the material of the text thus far studied : (1) noun forms, classify- 
 ing separately in both sing, and plur., (a) nom. forms, (b) gen. 
 
48 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 forms, (c) dat. forms, (d) accus. forms; (2) verb forms, classifying 
 separately in both sing, and plur., (a) act. forms, (b) pass, forms. 
 
 5. Go through the text and select those forms and phrases which, 
 perhaps, still remain unmastered. Read again the notes given upon 
 them in previous lessons. Do not leave them before they have been 
 conquered. 
 
 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1 
 
 1. Pronun., Roman method A. & G. 16. H. 5, 6, 7. 
 
 2. Pronun., Eng. method . A. & G. 17. H. 9, 10, 11, 12,13. 
 
 3. Division into syllables . A. & G. 14, a, b. H. 8, 1, 2, 3. 
 
 4. Quantity of vowels . . A. & G. 18, a, b, H. 16, notes 1, 2, 3, 
 
 c. 4, foot-note 3. 
 
 5. Quantity of syllables . . A. & G. 18, d, e. H. 16, I. II. II [. 
 
 6 Accent A. & G. 19, a, b. IT. 17, 18. 
 
 7 Gender A. & G. 28, a, c, IT. 41, and foot- 
 
 and N. note. 
 
 8 Gender of names of rivers A. & G. 29. H. 42 entire. 
 9. Number A. & G. 31. II. 44. 
 
 10. Enclitics A. & G. 19, e. H. 18, 2, 1). 
 
 11. Change of a or e to i . . A. & G. 10, b. H. 22 and 1. 
 
 12. Assimilation . . . . A. & G. 10, /, 3. H. 344, 5, read ad. 
 
 13. Omission oft before B . A. & G. 44. H. 36, 2. 
 
 14. Position of cum with rel- 
 
 ative A. & G. 104, e. H. 187, 2. 
 
 15. Use of a and ab H. 434, N. 2. 
 
 1G. Position of verb in sen- 
 tence A. & G. 343, H. 560, 561, I. II. 
 
 344, a. 
 
 17. Et, -que, atque . . . A. & G. 156, a. H. 554, 2. 
 
 18. Meaning of reliqui . . A. & G. 193. H. 440, 2, N. 1. 
 
 19. Inter A. & G. 196, /, H. 433, I. 
 
 153. 
 
 20. In, with accus. or abl. . A. & G. 152, c. IT. 435, N. 1. 
 
 2L Adv. in -e and -ter . .A. & G. 81 : b, H. 304, If. 2, IV. 
 
 84, d. 
 
 1 In taking up this " Grammar Lesson " the student should look up all the 
 references which he cannot already give in substance. The heading of each refer- 
 ence shows what the student is expected to learn from it. 
 
LESSON XT I. 49 
 
 22. Compound verbs (ad, con, 
 
 ob) A. & G. 170, a. H. 344, 5. 
 
 23. Personal endings of third 
 
 person A. & G. 116. H. 247. 
 
 24. Agreement of verb . . . A. & G. 204. H. 460. 
 
 25. Two or more subjects with 
 
 sing, verb H. 463, II. 3. 
 
 26. Sterns A. & G. 20, 21. H. 46, 1, 3. 
 
 27. Declension A. & G. 20, 26. H. 46. 
 
 28. Stemofsunt . . . . A. & G. 119, foot- H. 204, foot-note 2. 
 
 note. 
 
 29. Stella, mensa .... A. & G. 35. H. 48. 
 
 30. Absence of a in abl. plnr. 
 
 of -a nouns H. 48, foot-note 3. 
 
 31. Bellum, templum . . A. & G. 38. H. 51. 
 
 32. General view of cases . . A. & G. 31, a, b, H. 365, I. II. III. 
 
 c, d, e, f. IV. V. VI. 
 
 33. Agreement of adj. . . . A. & G. 186. H. 438. 
 
 34. Agreement of appositive . A. & G. 183, 184. H. 363. 
 
 35. Agreement of pron. . . A. & G. 198. H. 445. 
 
 36. Antecedent of BUI . . . A. & G. 196, 197. H. 448, 449. 
 
 37. Translation of the relative 
 
 at the beginning of a 
 
 sentence A. & G. 201, e. H. 453. 
 
 38. Use of the gen A. & G. p. 146, H. 393, 394, 395. 
 
 N., 213. 
 
 39. Possessive gen A. & G. 214 and II. 396, I. 
 
 foot-note. 
 
 40. Partjtivegen A. & G. 216. H. 397. 
 
 41. Accns. and abl. with prep. A. & G. 31, d, H. 432, 433. 
 
 260. 
 
 42. Accus. as object . . . A. & G. 31, d. H. 365, III. 
 
 43. Abl. of separation . . . A. & G. 243, a, b. H. 413, N. 3. 
 
 44. Abl. of respect . . . . A. & G. 253. H. 424. 
 
 45. Abl. of means . . . . A. & G. 248. H. 420. 
 
 46. Useofdat A. & G. 224; read H. 382, 383. 
 
 note. 
 
50 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. WORD REVIEW. A. 
 
 Classified alphabetical list of all the words occurring in Chapter I. of the text of 
 Caesar's " Gallic War." 
 
 
 1. VERBS 
 
 
 absunt 
 
 dictum est 
 
 obtinere 
 
 appellantur 
 
 differunt 
 
 oriuntur 
 
 attingit 
 
 dividit 
 
 prrtinet, pertinent 
 
 cap it 
 
 est, sunt 
 
 praecedunt 
 
 commeant 
 
 gcrunt 
 
 prohibent 
 
 contendunt 
 
 important 
 
 spectat, spectant 
 
 continetur 
 
 incolunt 
 
 vergit 
 
 
 2. A STEMS. 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 Adj. 
 
 Pron. 
 
 Aquitania 
 
 aliam 
 
 earn 
 
 Belg-se, -arum, -is 
 
 divisa 
 
 nostra 
 
 causa 
 
 nostra 
 
 qu-a?, -am, -a, -arum 
 
 Celtse 
 
 tcrtiam 
 
 
 Galli-a, -aj 
 
 una 
 
 
 Garumn-a, -a 
 
 
 
 HispFuiiam 
 
 
 
 lingua 
 
 
 
 Matron a 
 
 
 
 prGvineise 
 
 
 
 Sequaua 
 
 
 
LESSON XII. 
 
 51 
 
 3. MASC. WORDS having gen. ending -I, arous. -u-m, abl. -6. Nora. plur. -I, gen. 
 plur. -6-ruin, dat. and abl. -Is, accus. -6-s. 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 At/j. 
 
 Pron. 
 
 animos 
 
 effeminandos 
 
 e-os, e-orum 
 
 Aqultau-i, -Is 
 Germauis 
 Gall-I, -os 
 Helveti-I, -Is 
 
 extremis 
 fortissimi 
 proximl 
 Pyrenseos 
 
 hi, horum 
 ips-I, -orum 
 qul 
 
 SUIS 
 
 Ocean-I, -o 
 Khen-u-m, -I 
 
 rcliquos 
 
 suis 
 
 
 Khodano 
 
 
 
 Sequanis 
 
 
 
 
 4. NEUT. NOUNS, PRON., 
 
 AND ADJ. 
 
 bellum 
 dictum 
 
 iuitium 
 mstitutis 
 
 quotldianis 
 flumen, fliimin-is, -e 
 
 ea 
 
 prreliis 
 
 
 5. WORDS having gen. sing, in -is, gen. plur. in -urn, and abl. plur. in -ibus. 
 
 finibus 
 
 ilumen, fluminis, -e 
 humanitate 
 legibus 
 mercatores 
 
 6 
 cultu 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 montes 
 
 pars, part-em, -es 
 
 septentrion-em, -es 
 
 sol-is, -em 
 
 virtute 
 
 Adj. 
 
 Inferiorem 
 
 omnis, omnes, omnium 
 
 orientem 
 
 tres 
 
 UNCLASSIFIED NOUNS AND PRON. 
 occasum quibus 
 
 7. ADV. 
 
 8. PKEP. 
 
 9. CONJ 
 
 . 
 
 contiuenter 
 fere 
 
 a, ab 
 ad 
 
 atque 
 aut 
 
 
 longissime 
 mini me 
 
 cum 
 de 
 
 cum 
 et 
 
 
 ssepe 
 
 in 
 
 etiam 
 
 
 
 inter 
 
 propterea 
 
 quod 
 
 
 trans 
 
 -que 
 quod 
 
 
 
 
 quoque 
 
 
52 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. WORD REVIEW. B, 
 
 Alphabetical list of words used in the exercises, but not found in the text. In 
 nouns and adj., the nom. plur. masc. is given unless otherwise stated; hi verbs, 
 the present indicative act. 3d plur. 
 
 altissimi 
 
 aimci 
 
 Aquitania, nom. sing. 
 
 boni 
 
 earn 
 
 clientes 
 
 co pi a?, fern. 
 
 extra, prep. 
 
 frumentum, nom. sing. 
 
 Genava or Gciuia, nom. 
 
 sing. 
 German! 
 Graecl 
 Hellenes 
 
 Helvetia, nom. sing. 
 
 Helvetii 
 
 lufluunt 
 
 legati 
 
 legiones 
 
 Lingones 
 
 magnl 
 
 mllites 
 
 in it tun t 
 
 montes 
 
 natura, nom. sing. 
 
 nobiles 
 
 numeii 
 
 Orgetorix, nom. sing. 
 
 pagl 
 
 per, prep. 
 possessiones, fern. 
 quattuor, indeclinable 
 
 adj. 
 
 Khodani, gen. sing. 
 Roman! 
 SequanI 
 snperant 
 terra, nom. sing. 
 Tiguilul 
 Tolosfites 
 Verbigeni 
 via, nom. sing. 
 
 5. SENTENCE REVIEW. 
 
 1. Gaul is as a whole divided into three parts, one of which the 
 Celtae inhabit, another the Belga3, the third the Aqnitani. 
 
 2. The Aquitani, the BelgaB, the Celtae inhabit the three parts of 
 Gaul 
 
 3. The Gauls who inhabit the third part are called in their own 
 language Celta?. 
 
 4. The Celtte, who in the language of the Romans are called Gauls, 
 differ in customs from the Aquitani and the Belgaa. 
 
 5. The Gauls and Germans differ from one another in temperament. 
 
 6. The Aquitani, the Belgae, the Celtee, differ from one another in 
 language and laws. 
 
 7. The Pyrenean mountains separate Spain from Gaul. 
 
 8. The Matrona and the Seine separate the Gauls from the Belgse. 
 
LESSON XII. 53 
 
 3. The Belgae are bravest, because they are farthest away from 
 civilization and refinement. 
 
 10. Civilization and refinement tend to weaken the courage of the 
 Belgse. 
 
 11. Merchants often visit the Gauls, and bring in those (things) 
 which tend to weaken (their) courage. 
 
 12. The Belgse are nearest to the Germans, with whom they contend 
 in almost daily battles. 
 
 13. The Belgre surpass the Gauls and the Aquitani in valor. 
 
 14. The Heivetii likewise are the bravest oi all the Gauls, because 
 they wage war continually with the Germans, who live across the 
 Rhine. 
 
 15. For this cause the Heivetii contend with the Germans, when 
 either the Heivetii keep the Germans from Helvetian territory, or 
 themselves wage war in the territory of the Germans. 
 
 16. One part of these, which it has been said the Gauls hold, slopes 
 toward the north. 
 
 17. Another part, which the Belgse inhabit, looks into the north 
 and the rising sun. 
 
 18. The third part, which is called Aquitania, looks between the 
 setting of the sun and the north. 
 
 19. Aquitania is bounded by the Garumna river, the Pyrenean 
 mountains, and that part of the ocean which is next to Spain. 
 
 20. The Belgae begin from the remotest bounds of Gaul, and ex- 
 tend to the lower part of the river Rhine. 
 
 21. The Celtae begin at the Garnmna river, and on-the-side-of the 
 Heivetii reach the river Rhine. 
 
 22. The Gauls are bounded by the Garumna river, the ocean, (and) 
 the territory of the Belgae. 
 
 23. One part, which the Celts inhabit, takes (its) beginning from the 
 river Rhone. 
 
 24. The Belgae extend from the Rhine to the ocean. 
 
 25. Our province, in which it has been said the Tolosates dwell, ex- 
 tends to Aquitania. 
 
 '<-J' 
 
 fi'tnnTET 
 
 
54 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et 
 Among the Helvetii by far the highest-born was and 
 
 ditissimus Orgetorix. Is, M. Messala et M. 
 
 the richest Orgetorix. He, Marcus Messala and Marcus 
 
 Pisone consulibus, regm cupiditate 
 
 Piso (being) consuls, of the royal power by a desire 
 
 inductus conjurationem nobilitatis fecit et 
 being led a conspiracy of the nobility made and 
 
 civitati persuasit ut de finibus suis 
 
 upon the citizens prevailed that from territory their 
 
 cum omnibus copifs exirent. 
 
 with all forces they might go out. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. longe, adv., by far. (a) What shows that it is an adv.? cf. 
 VI. N. 11 (a) (b) (c). (b) What is its superlative? (c) What does it 
 modify ? . 
 
 2. nobilissimus, highest-born, most famous : (a) nom. sing, 
 masc. ; cf. ditissimus. inductus following ; (b) nom. sing, formed by 
 adding -a to the stein nobilissimo-, and weakening o to u ; cf. X. N. 
 2, 13 (c); A. & G. 10 b; H. 22, 1, 2 ; (c) in the accus. sing, -m is 
 added and o weakened to u ; cf. Rhenu-m for Rheno-m ; in the nom. 
 piur. -i is contracted from o-i, and in dat. and abl. plur. -is is con- 
 
LESSON XIII. 55 
 
 tracted from o-is ; cf. VIIT. N. 10; (d) since the stems of nouns and 
 adj. of this class end in -o they are called -o nouns and adj. They 
 belong; to the 2d decl. ; cf. Galli, Gallos, Aquitanis, Rhenum, 
 Oceano; (e) neuters in -urn are also -o steins, u being- weakened 
 from o, and -a of the norn. and accus. plur. being for o-a ; (jT) -issi- 
 mus, ending of the superlative ; cf. fortissimi VI. N. 3 (b). 
 
 3. fuit, he was: (a) perfect tense of eat, equivalent to a simple 
 past; (6) cf. est, sunt, and note that the stem changes from es- to fu-. 
 
 4. is, he: (a) norn. sing. masc. ; cf. eos, ea, eorum. (b) What is 
 its antec. ? 
 
 5. M. Messala et M. Pis one consulibus, Marcus Messala and 
 Marcus Piso (being) consuls, or in the consulship of Marcus 
 Messala and Marcus Piso : (a) M. in a Roman proper name always 
 stands for some case of Marcus, Eng. Mark, (b) In what case are all 
 these words ? (c) the phrase is unconnected grammatically with the 
 rest of the sentence ; (d) the consul was a Roman magistrate, some- 
 thing like an American president ; the year of an event was indicated 
 by naming the consuls of that year. 
 
 6. regni. of the royal power ; cf. regnant : (a) gen. sing, iieut., 
 declined like bellum XI. Obs. 3; (b) cf. gen. sing. masc. Ocean! 
 XI. 
 
 7. inductus, having been led into, induced: (a) participle, de- 
 clined like an adj.; cf. divisa, dictum, (b) What does it limit? 
 (c) How does the preceding noun cupiditate modify it ? 
 
 8. conjurationem, a conspiracy: accus. sing, fern.; cf. partem, 
 solem XI. 
 
 9. nobilitatis, of the, nobility : (a) gen. sing. fern. ; cf. fluminis, 
 soils, (b) Upon what does it depend? 
 
 10. fecit, he made, pf. ind. ; cf. facit, he makes; so capit X., 
 he takes or it takes, cepit, he took. 
 
 11. civitati, upon the citizens : (a) the nom. sing is civitas, stem 
 civitat-; cf. pars X. N. 2, (b) civitas means strictly citizenship, 
 then the state itself, sometimes the body-politic, citizens ; (c) -I is the 
 ending of the dat. sing. ; (d) all nouns with stems ending in a conso- 
 nant belong to what is called the 3d decl. ; cf. humaiiitate, pars, 
 partem, soils, legibus. 
 
56 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12. persuasit, he prevailed upon, persuaded: (a) pf. ind. ; 
 (b) used with dat. case civitati. 
 
 13. ut, that, conj. ; introduces the verb exirent. 
 
 14. suis, their, (a) What does it limit ? VI. N. 2. (b) What is its 
 antec. ? 
 
 15. exirent, they might go out ; persuasit ut exirent, he per- 
 suaded in order that they might go out, i. e. exirent tells the ob- 
 ject or purpose of his persuasion. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. In Lat. as in En jr., a noun may be introduced into a sentence 
 without any grammatical connection with it. It is then said to 
 be used independently or absolutely. Absolute means loosed from 
 (the rest of the sentence) ; see Welsh's "Lessons in English Gram- 
 mar," pp. 154, 155. In Lat. the abl. is frequently used absolutely. 
 
 2. persuadere, to persuade, is followed by the dat. of the person 
 who is persuaded. 
 
 3. The ending -u-s is th.it of the nom. sing. masc. ; -i that of the 
 dat. sing. 3d dccl., as well as of the gpn. sing, in all -o stems, and 
 of the nom. plur. in masc. -o stems. 
 
 4. All masc. nouns ending in -u-s in nom. sing, and I in nom. 
 plur, are -o stems. The o of the stem is sometimes weakened to u, 
 and sometimes disappears by contraction with the real suffix 1 of the 
 case. 
 
 5. All stems ending in a consonant are of the 3d decl. ; and have 
 in masc. and fern, nouns the following endings: sing. gen. -is, dat. 
 -I, accus. -em, abi. -e ; plur. nom. and accus. -gs, gen. -um, dat. 
 and abl. -ibus. 
 
 6- Every Lat. adj. with the nom. sing. masc. ending -us has also 
 complete fern. decl. like mensa, and complete neut. decl. like bellum. 
 
 7. The participle, though expressing action like a verb, is an adj. in 
 decl. and agreement. 
 
 8. The Lat. pf. tense is often translated like a simple past. 
 
 1 /. e. the ending as distinguished from the stem. 
 
LESSON XIII. 5T 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. 2d or o dec].; nouns in 
 
 -us ... . A. & G. 38, servus; H. 51, servus, 2, 
 
 ulso N. near hot- 1), 2), 3). 
 torn of p. 16. 
 
 2. Adj. of 1st and 2d 
 
 dec! A. & G. 81, bonus, H. 148, bonus, 
 
 bona, bonum. bona, bonum. 
 
 3. Dental stems of the 
 
 3d decl. A. & G. 54, aetas. H. 56, I.; 58, setas, 
 
 and virtus. 
 
 4. Abl. absolute . A. & G. 255 and a. H. 431 and 1, 4. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Let the pupil give the stems of the following words, and the gen. sing, of the 
 nouns, adj., and partic., so far as he should be expected to know them. 
 
 1. apud, prep, with accus., among. 
 
 2. civitas, fern., citizenship, a state, the body-politic. 
 
 3. conjui atioiiem, accus. sin\ fein. (from con and jurare, to 
 
 swear, take oath), a swearing together, a conspiracy. 
 
 4. consules, inasr., consuls ; cf. N. 5 (d). 
 
 5. cupiditas, fern., desire, cupidity. 
 
 G. ditissimus, ditissima, ditissimum, richest. 
 
 7. exire, to go out ; cf. obtinere X. 4 (5). 
 
 8. facit, he makes or does ; fecit, he made. 
 
 9. est, he is ; fuit, he was or has been. 
 
 10. inductus, inducta, inductum, led into, induced. 
 
 1 1. is, that one, he. 
 
 12. nobilitas, nobility ; cf. nobilis, high-lorn. 
 
 13. ut or utl, conj., that, in order that, so that ; if followed by the 
 
 inch, as or when. 
 
 14. persuadet, he persuades ; persuadere, to persuade ; persma- 
 
 sit, he persuaded or has persuaded. 
 
 15. regnum, neut., royal power, kingdom. 
 
58 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 Decline and describe each dental stem of the 3d decl. 
 
 1. (a) Helvetiorum omnium longe uobilissimus fuit Orgetorix. 
 (b) Orgetorix, M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, conjurationem 
 nobilitatis fecit, (c) Orgetorix Helvetiis persuasit ut cle finibus suis 
 exirent. (d) Helvetii virtute induct! belluiu gerunt. 
 
 2. (a) Marcus fuit consul. (b) Civitas inducta humanitatis 
 cupiditate, ea quse animos effeminant importat. (c) Aquitania spectat 
 inter occasum solis et septentriones. (d) Belga3 pertinent ad luferi- 
 orem partem fluminis Kheni. (e) Hclvetii montibus et fluminibus 
 continentur. 
 
 3. (a) Orgetorix is by far the richest, (b) In the consulship of 
 Marcus the nobility makes a conspiracy, (c) These (men) being in- 
 fluenced by a desire for war send soldiers into Aquitania. (d) That 
 (man) persuades a large part of the state. 
 
 4. (a) The possessions of the merchants are imported, (b) The 
 large state is nearest to the province. (c) The Eomans are far 
 distant from the Bulgie. (d) The river Rhine, which (qui) separates 
 the Gauls from the Germans, rises in the Alps mountains. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The endings of the o decl. masc. and neut. 2. Masc. and fern, 
 endings of the 3d decl. 3. Different uses of the ending -I. 4. All 
 the -o stems in text thus far. 5. All the 1st and 2d decl. adj. 
 6. Analysis of endings -us, -um, -i, -Is. 7. The use of the participle. 
 8. The absolute case. 9. The meaning of the pf. tense. 10. Changes 
 in the stem of pres. to find the stem of pf. tense. 11. Case with 
 persuadere. 12. The decl. of civitas magna, Belgee fortissimi, 
 bellum reliquum together. 1 
 
 1 The instructor should give the pupil constant practice in declining nouns and 
 adj. together, using very frequently nouns and adj. of different decl., e. g. civitas 
 magna. 
 
LESSON XIV. 59 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Perfacile esse, cum virtute omnibus prsestarent, 
 Very easy to be, since in valor all they stood before, 
 
 totius Gallise imperio potiri. Id 
 
 of entire Gaul the supreme power to obtain. This 
 
 hoc facilius els persuasit, quod 
 
 on this account more easily them he persuaded, because 
 
 undique loci natura Helvetii 
 
 on all sides of the place by the nature the Helvetii 
 
 continentur : 
 are hemmed in : 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. perfacile, adj., very easy ; per, intensive prefix, very, and 
 facile, easy; cf. Eng. facile, facility: (a) accus. neut. sing. ; the 
 form of the nom. sing, is the same; () nom. sing. masc. perfacilis, 
 accus. facilem, nom. plur. faciles, gen. plur. facilium ; cf. omnis I., 
 omnes IV., omnium VI.; (e) of the 3d decl. in masc., fern., and 
 neut., but the masc. and fern, are alike in all cases both sing, and 
 plur.; stem f acili- ; (d) -i stems are distinguished from consonant 
 stems by the i before the ending -um of gen. plur. (cf. omnium and 
 virtutum), and in neut. by the i before the ending -a of nom. and 
 accus. plur., e. g. omnia ; (e) in -i stems the -i frequently disappears 
 in the nom. sing., generally before the accus. ending -em, very often 
 in the abl., always before the nom. plur. ending -es, and often before 
 the accus. plur. ending -5s. 
 
60 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. esse, to be: (a) pres. inf. of est, sunt ; (b) follows a verb 
 of saying suggested by persuasit in preceding sentence ; cf. Gallos 
 obtinere dictum est X. ; (c) perfacile esse, (saying} it to be very 
 easy, is better translated (saying} that it was very easy ; (d) the 
 exact words of Orgetorix were perfacile est, it is very easy. 
 
 3. cum, since : (a} conj. followed by verb praestarent ; (b) cf. 
 cum, conj., ivhen IX. ; and cum, prep., with, cum Germanis IX. 
 
 4. omnibus, all: (a) dat. plur. with praestarent; (b} here a 
 noun, though usually an adj. 
 
 5. praestarent, they stood before : (a) prse in composition means 
 before ; (b} cf. ex-I-re-nt and prae-sta-re-nt ; in what respects are 
 they alike ? 
 
 6. totius, of the whole of, entire ; cf. total : (a) -Jus, irregular 
 gen. ending ; (b) cf. reliquus, the rest of; extremus, the end of; 
 (c) i in ending is long by exception before another vowel. A. & G. 
 18, a ; H. 16, II. ; (d) limits Galliae. 
 
 7. imperio, supreme power, supremacy ; cf. imperial, emperor ; 
 abl. sing, after potlri, with practically the same force as the accus. 
 
 8. potlri, to obtain, get possession of: (a} -ri, ending of pres. 
 inf. pass. ; cf. -re ending of pres. inf. act. ; obtinere X., to hold ; 
 obtine-ri, to be held ; (b) pass, in form but act. in meaning ; cf. 
 oriuntur Xf. 
 
 9. id, that thing, it ; cf. Eng. i. e. for id est, that is ; (a} accus. 
 sing, neut.; direct object of persuasit ; (b) demonstrative pron., often 
 used as personal ; cf. is, he XL IE. ; eorum. their IX. ; (c} aritec. ? 
 
 10. hoc, (on account of) this ; cf. hi IV., horum VI. ; abl. 
 sing. neut. 
 
 11. facilius, more easily ; adv. in comp. degree, modifying per- 
 suasit ; ending -ius. 
 
 12. els, them: (a) cf. eos, ea VII., eorum IX,, earn XL, is 
 XIII., id 9, and give the case, number, and gender of each ; (b) dat. 
 plur. masc., indir. obj. of persuasit, id being the direct ; he per- 
 suaded it to them,, or better, he persuaded them of it ; (c) antec. ? 
 
 13. loci, of the place ; cf. local: (a) gen. sing, masc., cf. Rheni 
 XL; (6) nom. sing, and stem? 
 
 14. natura. by the nature, character ; why abl. ? X. X. 11. 
 
LESSON XIV. 61 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Many nouns and adj. of the 3d decl. have stems ending in -i, 
 which appears in gen. plur., but which often disappears in other 
 cases. 
 
 2. The nom, sing, ending -e is often found in neut. of the 3d decl. 
 
 3. Many adj. of the 3d decl. have the norn. sing. masc. and fern, 
 ending -is, neut. -e. 
 
 4. The prefix per in adj. means very, and often has the force of 
 the superlative ending. 
 
 5. Distinguish cum, prep., with ; cum, conj., when, but fre- 
 quently because, since. 
 
 6. Several common adj. and pron. have -lus irregularly in gen. 
 sing. The i is long by exception. 
 
 7. The ending -ri is that of the pres. inf. pass. ; -re, of pres. inf. act. 
 
 8. The demonstrative pron. is, masc., ea, fern. (cf. earn), id, neut. 
 may become a personal pron. or an adj. 
 
 9. After a verb of saying, when the words of another are adapted 
 to the sentence in which they stand, i. e. indirectly quoted, the Lat. 
 uses the inf. where the Eng. uses the ind. 
 
 10. The abl. is used after potiri with the force of an obj. 
 
 11. Persuadere takes the accus. of the thing as dir. obj., the dat. 
 of the person as indir. obj. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Third decl. -i stems, nouns 
 
 and adj A. & G. 52, H. 62, hostis ; 63, 
 
 turris, nubes, mare ; 154. trist- 
 mare; 84, lev- is, -e. 
 is, -e. 
 
 2. Use of demonstrative as 
 
 personal pron. or adj. . A. & G. 195. H. 438, 1. 
 
 3. Force of per in composi- 
 
 tion A. & G. 93, d. H. 170, 1. 
 
 4. The inf. after a verb of 
 
 saying A. & G. 335. 336. H. 522, 535, I. 
 
62 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. cum, conj., when, since. 
 
 2. esse, to be, pres. inf. ; cf. est, sunt, fuit. 
 
 3. facilis masc. and fern., facile neut., easy ; perfacil-is, -e, 
 
 very easy. 
 
 4. facile, adv., easily ; facilius, conip., more easily. 
 
 5. hoc, abl. sing. masc. and neut., this ; cf hi, horum. 
 
 6. imperium, neut., supreme power. 
 
 7. is, ea, id, dera. prou., this, that ; he, she, it. 
 
 8. locus, masc., a place ; loca, nom. plur. (as if from nom. sing. 
 
 locum). 
 
 9. potitur, he obtains ; potiuntur (cf. oriuntur), they obtain t 
 
 potiri, to obtain ; takes abl. 
 
 10. praestare, to stand before, to excel. 
 
 11. totus, tobius gen., the whole, the whole of, entire. 
 
 12. undique, adv., from all sides, on all sides. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 Decline all -i stems. 
 
 1. (a) Perfacile est totlus GalliaB imperio potiii. (b) Virtute 
 omnibus Helvetii prsestant. (c) Dictum est Helvetios totius Gal- 
 liae imperio pothi. (d) Una pars, qnam Gallos obtinere dictum est, 
 initium capit a flumine Rliodano. (e) Dicit (he says) mercatores fm- 
 mentuni importarc. 
 
 2. (a) Cum proximls civitatibns bellum gerit. (b) Regnnm in 
 civitate sua obtinet. (c) Clientes sunt fortissimi. (d) Provincia a 
 montibus oritur et ad flumen pertinet. 
 
 3. (a) He persuades them of this easily on this account, (b) He 
 persuaded his friend to go out by another way. (c) It was easy to 
 keep the Sequani from the territory of the Helvetii. (d) The high- 
 born Orgetorix, influenced by his desire for the rest of Gaul, obtains 
 soldiers. 
 
 4. (a) They send ambassadors to all the states, (b) The Helvetii 
 are hemmed in by rivers and mountains, (c) The nearest states 
 differ from the most remote (states), (d) In the consulship of Pom- 
 peius and Crassus, the Romans obtain a great part of Gaul. 
 
LESSON XV. 
 
 t>3 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Force of per in composition of adj. 2. -i steins. 3. 3d decl. 
 adj. 4. Different meanings of cum. 5. The development of the 
 causal force of cum from the temporal. 6. The ending -lus. 
 
 7. Difference between act. and pass. inf. in form and meaning. 
 
 8. Difference in meaning between regiium and imperium. 9. The 
 pron. is in all genders ; forms and use. 10. Pour uses of -e final. 
 11. Cases with persuadere and potiri. 12. The indirect quotation 
 and the way of expressing it in Lat. 13. Uses of the dat. in lessons 
 thus far. 14. The decl. together of amicus tristis, frumentum 
 omne, pars magna. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 una ex parte flumine Rheno latissimo atque 
 
 one on side by the river Rhine very broad and 
 
 altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a 
 
 very deep, which the country" Helvetian from 
 
 Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte 
 
 the Germans divides ; the second on side 
 
 monte Jura altissimo, qui est inter 
 
 by the mountain Jura very high, which is between 
 
 Sequanos et Helvetios ; tertia 
 
 the Sequani and the Helvetii; on the third (side) 
 
 lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano, 
 
 by the lake Geneva and by the river Rhone, 
 
 qui prSvinciam nostram ab Helvetiis dividit. 
 which province our from the Helvetii divides. 
 
64 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. ex, prep., out of, from (within): (a) followed by abl.; cf. a, 
 ab, cum, de, and in when it means in; (b) cf. meaning with that of 
 . or ab, from a position on or by the side of; (c) here to be trans- 
 lated on ; cf. ab Sequanis X. N. 14. 
 
 2. flumine, by the river : (a) for nom. sing, and gender see V. N. 
 5 (a); (b) stem, flumen ; for weakening of vowel, see X. N. 13 (c), 
 and A. & G. 10, b; H. 22, 1. (c) What is accus. sing.; nom. and 
 accus. plur. ? (d) used with contiuentur, in preceding lesson ; (e) why 
 abl. ? 
 
 3. altissimo, very deep : (a) degree, case and why ? (b) nom. 
 sing, masc., fern., and neut.? (c) the positive degree, alt-us, -a, -um, 
 means strictly nourished, grown (great), and may refer to growth 
 either up or down, hence either high or deep ; cf. exalt, adult, old, 
 alderman; (d) how different in form and meaning from latissimo ? 
 
 4. qui, which: (a) nom. sing, masc.; cf. the same form as nom. 
 plur. masc. VIII. ; (b) antec. ? (c) Why is it correct to translate the 
 masc. qui by the neut. which? 
 
 5. agrum, field, territory; cf. agriculture, acre: (a) accus. sing. 
 masc. ; cf. Rhenum X. N. 15 (a) ; (b) why accus.? (c) What would 
 you expect as nom. sing. ? (d) stem? 
 
 6. Helvetium, Helvetian : (a) adj. limiting agrum ; (b) cf. Hel- 
 vetii, the Helvetii or Helvetians, and note that the name of the 
 people and the adj. meaning belonging to that people have the same 
 stem, Helvetic- ; cf. the Americans, and the adj. American. This is 
 not always so in Lat. ; cf. the Turks, Turkish. 
 
 7. altera, adj., the other, the second: (a) one of two, the other 
 of two, while ali-us, -a, -ud (cf. aliam II.) means one of any 
 number ; thus in Eng. an alternate is a second man appointed as a 
 substitute, while a man may have half a dozen aliases ; (b) abl. sing, 
 fern., limiting parte ; (c) note the position of the following prep, ex, 
 between the adj. and its noun. Monosyllabic (one syllable) prep, very 
 often have this position; cf. qua de causa IX., una ex parte above. 
 
 8. monte, by the mountain : (a) abl. sing. ; why ? (b) nom. sing. 
 mons ; for formation, see X. N. 2 ; (c) stem strictly monti-, gen. 
 plur. montium, but i is dropped in all the cases of the sing., as in nom. 
 
LESSON XV. 65 
 
 9. tertia, third: (a} abl. sing., limiting parte in ex parte 
 understood ; cf. altera ex parte above, and, for omission of noun, 
 unam II. 2, nostra III. N. 6. (b) Decline it in all genders. 
 
 10. lacu, by the lake: (a) abl. sing. masc. ; (b) why abl. ? (c) cf. 
 cultu VI., una, Rheno, parte above. In what respect are all these 
 
 abl. sing, alike ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The prep, ex means strictly out of a position in a thing, a or 
 ab, away from a position on or by a thing, though both are often 
 translated simply from. 
 
 2. Many neut. of the 3d decl. end in -en. 
 
 3. Altus means high or deep ; latus, wide. 
 
 4. The name of the people of a nation and the adj. meaning 
 belonging to that nation are often the same in form in Lat., just 
 as they are in Eug. 
 
 5. Altera means one of two ; alia, one of any number. 
 
 6. A monosyllabic prep, often stands between an adj. and its noun. 
 
 7. Nouns and adj. in -ns and -rs are of the 3d decl., and have i 
 steins ; but are often classed as consonant stems, since the i appears 
 only in the gen. and (sometimes) the accus. plur. 
 
 8. All the abl. sing, thus far end in a vowel. 
 
 9. The four rules for agreement in Lat. are as follow : (a) A 
 finite verb agrees in person and number with its subject, (b) An ap- 
 positive agrees in case with the noun which it limits, (c) An adj. 
 agrees in gender, number, and case with the noun which it limits. 
 (d) A pron. agrees in gender and number with its antec. 1 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. 3d decl. neut. in -en . A.& G. 49,nomen. H. 60, carmen. 
 
 2. 3d decl. nouns in -ns 
 
 and -rs . . . . A. & G. 44, 54, 1, H. 64, cliens, urbs, 
 urbs. foot-note 1, also 
 
 1, 1), 2), 2, 1). 
 
 1 The importance of these simple rules cannot be over-estimated, for no Lat. sen- 
 tence can be properly constructed without using at least one of them. 
 
 5 
 
66 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. A or ab and ex . . A. & G. 153. JL 434, I. 
 
 4. Altera and alia . . A. & G. 203, a, b. H. 459. 
 
 5. Position of monosyl- 
 
 labic prep. . . . A. & G. 345, a. H. 565, 3. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. agrum, accus. sing, masc., field, territory. 
 
 2. ali-us, -a, -ud, adj. or pron., one of any number, another. 
 
 3. altera, fern., alterum, neut., adj. or pron., one of two, the 
 
 other. 
 
 4. alt-us, -a, -um, high or deep. 
 
 5. ex, prep, with abl., out of, from, 
 
 6. Helveti-us, -a, -um, Helvetian, of the Helvetii. 
 
 7. Jura, a mountain chain extending from the Khone to the Rhine, 
 
 (for gender see A. & G. 29 ; H. 42, I. 2). 
 
 8. lacu, abl. sing, masc., a lake. 
 
 9. Jat-us, -a, -um, wide, broad. 
 
 10. Lemannus, masc., the name of a lake, Leman or Geneva. 
 
 11. mons, mentis gen., masc., a mountain. 
 
 12. Rhenus, masc., the Rhine. 
 
 13. Rhodanus, masc., the Rhone. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 Find in these exercises every illustration of the rules for agreement which they 
 contain. 
 
 1. (a) Una ex parte Helvetii continentur fltimine Rheno, altera ex 
 parte monte Jura, tertia ex parte lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano. 
 (b) Flumen Rhenus agrum Helvetium a Gerrnanis dividit ; m5ns Jura 
 est inter Sequanos et Helvetios ; lacu Lemanno iiostra provincia ab 
 Helvetiis divlsa est. (c) Rhenus flumen est latissimus atque altissi- 
 mus. (d^) Natura loci Helvetii a reliquis Gallis divisi sunt. 
 
 2. (a) Germanos ab agro Helvetic flumen Rhenus dividit. (b) Co- 
 piae Ariovisti a Romanis non longe absunt. (c) Trium partium Gal- 
 liae unam incolunt Belgae. (c) Orgetorix Helvetiis persuadet, quod 
 
LESSON XV. 67 
 
 undique fluminibus, montibus, lacu continentur. (e) Milites civitatis 
 cum uobilitate proelils contendunt. 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetii are hemmed in by a broad and deep river. 
 (5) The very high mount Jura is between the Sequani and the 
 Helvetii. (c) Our province extends from the Alps to the river 
 Rhone, (d) The Helvetii begin at the province and face north-east. 
 
 4. (a) Of all these mountains the highest is Jura, (b) Gauls and 
 Germans differ from one another in valor, (c) To gain the supreme 
 power of the whole of Spain is very easy, (d) The Rhine takes its 
 beginning in the Alps mountains and flows toward the north into the 
 ocean. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. 3d decl. nouns in -en, -ns, and -rs. 2. Difference between 
 ab and ex, altus and latus, alia and altera. 3. The relative 
 strength of vowels. 4. Development of the meaning of altus. 
 
 5. Difference between Eng. and Lat. in method of determining gender. 
 
 6. Position of monosyllabic prep. 7. The form of the abl. sing. 
 8. Relative number of abl. and dat. in lessons thus far. 9. Examples 
 illustrating rules for agreement in text of this lesson. 10. Decl. 
 together of flumen latum, mons altus, mons Jura, bellum omne. 
 
68 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 His rebus fiebat ut et 
 
 On account of these things it came to pass that both 
 
 minus late vagarentur et minus facile 
 
 less widely they wandered and less easily 
 
 fmitimis bellum inferre possent, 
 
 (upon their) neighbors war to bear into they were able, 
 
 qua ex parte homines bellandi cupidi 
 which in respect men of warring fond 
 
 magno dolore adficiebantur. 
 with great grief were affected. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. His, these: (a) abl. plur. fern. ; cf. and give cases of hi IV., 
 horum VI., hoc XIV. ; (b) the form is the same as here in the masc. 
 and neut. plur. abl., and in all genders of the dat. plur. ; cf. insti- 
 tutis, abl. neut., IV., Aquitanis, abl. masc., V., copiis, abl. fern., 
 X1IL, Germanis, dat. masc., VIII. (c) What is the form of the 
 regular nom. plur. fern. ; gen. plur. fern. ; accus. plur. masc. and fern.? 
 (d) here an adj. limiting rebus ; cf. qua IX., earn XI. 
 
 2. rebus, because of things ; cf. Eng. rebus (by things'): (a) abl. 
 plur. fern.; (b) stem re-, ending -bus ; cf omni-bus XIV.; (c} abl. 
 of cause, since it gives the cause of the action expressed by the follow- 
 ing verb fiebat ; cf. hoc XIV., which gives the cause of persuasit. 
 
 3. fiebat, it was being done, it was coming to pass: (a) force of 
 pers. ending -t ? (5) -ba-, tense sign of the imperfect ind. ; importa-t, 
 
LESSON XVI. 69 
 
 he is importing; importa-ba-t, he was importing; (c) the word 
 " imperfect " when used to designate this tense means that the action 
 or state was going on (i. e. was not perfect or complete) in past time. 
 
 4. minus, adv., less ; cf. Eng. minus, minority : (a) irregular 
 comp. ; (b) cf. sup. minime, least, VII. 1. 
 
 5. late, widely,' cf. latitude: (a) latius, comp., more widely; 
 cf. facilius XIV. 11; (b) sup. latissime, most widely; cf. longis- 
 sime VI. 11 ; (c) cf. masc. forms of adj. latus, latior (cf. Inferior- 
 em XL), latissimus. (d) How may we form the adv. from the masc. 
 form of the adj. in each degree? Comp. the adv. formed from altus. 
 
 6. vagareiitur, they wandered, or, more accurately, were wander- 
 ing about; cf. vagrant: (a) cf. exirent XII L, preestarent XIV., 
 all have the sign -re-, the sign of the impf. tense, subjunctive mode ; 
 
 (b) stem? personal ending? (c) pass, in form, act. in meaning; cf. 
 oriuntur XL, potiri XIV. 
 
 7. finitimia, neighbors; (a) dat. plur. masc.; (b) used with in- 
 ferre in conjunction with accus. bellum ; cf. omnibus prae-starent 
 XIV. 
 
 8. mferre, to bear into, to wage upon ; cf. differunt IV., and 
 infer : (a) -re, ending of pres. inf. act. ; cf. obtinere X. ; (b) com- 
 pounded of prep, in (into, upon), and ferre (to bear) ; cf. prse-sta- 
 rent XIV. 5 (a). 
 
 9. possent, they were able, could ; cf. possible ; impf. subjv., and 
 follows ut, that, like vagareiitur. 
 
 10. i qua ex parteJ from which consideration, in this respect: 
 (a) note meaning of parte ; (b) for arrangement, cf. XV. 7 (c) ; 
 
 (c) qua is here an adj. ; cf. qua de causa IX. 
 
 11. homines, men ; cf. homicide; nom. plur. masc.; cf. merca- 
 tores VII. 
 
 12. bellandi, of warring ; cf. bellum, war: (a) verbal noun, 
 from bellare, to war ; this noun, corresponding in many of its uses 
 to the verbal noun in -ing, is called the gerund ; (5) gen. sing, 
 depending upon cupidi. 
 
 13. cupidi, desirous, fond: (a) nom. plur. masc., limiting homi- 
 nes ; (b) distinguish -I, the ending of nom. plur., from -i of gen. 
 sing., cf. bellandi ; -I of dat. sing., cf. clvitati XIII. ; I of abl. sing., 
 
70 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 omni, marl; and I of pres. inf. pass., cf. poti-ri XIV.; (c) cf. the 
 name of the quality, cupidi-tas, and Eng, ending -ty in cupidi-ty ; 
 (d) in the quality word or abstract noun, -o of adj. stem cupido- 
 is weakened to i. 
 
 14. dolore, by sorrow; cf. dolorous: (a) case, and why? 
 
 (b) What do you know about its gender from the ending of magno? 
 
 (c) cf. mercator-es VIE., inferior-em XE. ; the nom. sing, in all 
 these cases ends in -or. 
 
 15. adficiebantur, they were affected or were being affected:^- 
 (a) force of -ba-? (b) act. or pass. ? How does the ending show ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The tense sign -ba- is that of impf. ind., both voices ; -re-, that 
 of impf. subjv., both voices. 
 
 2. Stems in - end in abl. plur. in -bus like stems in -i. 
 
 3. The imperfect tense (so called) represents the action as going on 
 in past time. 
 
 4. The Eng. very often allows a simple past tense where the Lat. 
 requires an imperfect. 
 
 5. Adj. having the endings -us masc. positive, -ior comp., and 
 -issimus sup., generally form the corresponding adverbs by changing 
 these endings to -e positive, -ius comp., and -issime sup. 
 
 6. The Lat. has a verbal noun corresponding in some respects to 
 the Eng. verbal noun in -ing. This verbal is called the gerund, and 
 is of the 2d decl. 
 
 7. The name of the quality is sometimes formed by adding the 
 ending -tas to the stem or weakened stem of the adj. 
 
 8. Nouns in -or are of the 3d decl., and their stems generally 
 end in -or. 
 
 9. The abl. is used without a prep., to express the cause of the 
 action. 
 
 10. The dat. is used with many verbs compounded with prep. 
 
 1 The teacher who wishes his pupils to appreciate the extreme nicety of the Lat. 
 use of tenses, foreign as it is to our Eug. usage, must insist from the first on the 
 exact value of the impf. teuse. 
 
LESSON XVI. 71 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. 3d dec], nouns and 
 
 adj. in -or . . . A. & G. 49, con- H. 60, sol, pastor; 
 sul; 86, melior, 154,tristior, masc. 
 masc. and fein. and fern. 
 
 2. Comparison of adj. 
 
 and adv A. & G 81, b, 89, 92. H. 162, 306. 
 
 3. The gerund . . . . A. & G. 114, a. H. 200, II. 
 
 4. The irapf. tense . . A. & G. 115, a, 2, b. H. 468. 
 
 5. Nouns in -tas ; forma- 
 
 tion and meaning . A. & G. 163, e. H. 325. 
 
 6. The abl. of cause , . A. & G. 245. H. 413, 416. 
 
 7. The clat. with com- 
 
 pounds ; in, pra? . A. & G. 228. H. 386 and 1. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adficiebant, they were doing to (somebody}, they were affect- 
 
 ing ; compounded of ad. to, and faciebant, they were doing ; 
 adfecit, he affected; cf. fecit XIII. N. 10. 
 
 2. bellare, to war, wage war. 
 
 3. cupid-us. -a, -um, desirous, fond. 
 
 4. dolor, masc., pain, grief. 
 
 5. flebat, it was being made, it was being done, it was happen- 
 
 ing ; used as pass, of simple verb faciebat, but not of its 
 compounds with prep. The vowel I in fiebat is long by ex- 
 ception before e. 
 
 6. finitim-us, -a, -um. adj. (from fines, borders, boundaries), bor- 
 
 dering upon, neighboring; in plur. masc. usually a noun 
 meaning neighbors. 
 
 7. homines, men. 
 
 8. inferre, to bear into or upon, to wage upon. 
 
 9. late, adv., widely. 
 
 10. minus, adv. in comp., less ; miiiime, sup., least. 
 
 11. posse (compound of esse, to be), to be able. 
 
 12. rebus, abl. plur. fern., things. 
 
 13. vagarl, to wander (pass, in form, act. in meaning). 
 
72 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6, EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Fiebat ut Helvetii minus late vagarentur. (b) Flebat ut 
 mercatores frumentum importarent. (c) His rebus fiebat ut homines 
 bellandi cupiilT minus facile finitimis bellum Inferre possent. (d) Qua 
 ex causa Helvetii magno dolore adficiebantur. 
 
 2. (a) Qua de causa Helvetii reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt. 
 (b) Casticus regnum in sua civitiite obtinebat. (c) His causis Ger- 
 man! prcelio contendebant. (d) Initium prcelii Ariovistus facit. 
 
 (e) Instituta eorum qui in els finibus incolebant inter se difl'erebant. 
 
 (f) Bella cum Germanis sunt magnn. 
 
 3. (a) On account of these things the Helvetii used to wander 
 less widely, (b) He easily persuaded them that they were able to ob- 
 tain the country of the rest of the Gauls, (c) Orgetorix goes back 
 and forth through the kingdoms of Gaul, (d) It came to pass that, 
 since they surpassed all in valor, they went out of their territory. 
 
 4. (a) The Germans contend with the Helvetii in daily battles. 
 (b) That (man) is good, (c) It has been said that the Belgae are far 
 distant from the refinement of the Romans, (d) These men, in- 
 fluenced by the desire for good fields, were waging war upon the 
 Sequani. (e) The sun is higher. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 I. Three modes, three tenses, two tense signs, and two voices. 
 
 2. All the forms which the pupil should know of importare. 
 
 3. Different kinds of abl., with an example of each kind. 4. The 
 meaning and form of the gerund. 5. The impf. tense. 6. Differ- 
 ence between form of adj. and that of adv. in each degree. 7. Dat. 
 with compound verbs. 8. Five uses of the ending -I. 9. Nouns 
 in -tas, and Eng. derivatives. 10. Decl. of nouns in -or. 11. Com- 
 parison between Eng, and Lat. use of tenses. 
 
LESSON XVII. 73 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Pro multitadine autem hominum, 
 
 in proportion-to the-great-number moreover of men, 
 
 et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, 
 
 and in-proportion-to the glory of war and of bravery, 
 
 angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, 
 
 narrow themselves territory to have they thought, 
 
 qui in longitQdinem milia passuum ducenta 
 which in (into) length thousands of paces two-hundred 
 
 et quadraginta, in latitudinem centum et 
 and forty, in (into) width a hundred and 
 
 octoginta patebant. 
 eighty extended. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. pro, prep, witli abl., for, in proportion to, considering ; cf. & 
 or ab V., in meaning in, de, cum IX., ex XV. 
 
 2. angustos, narrow: (a) case, number, and gender? (b) agrees 
 with what ? (c) decl. in all genders. 
 
 3. se, themselves, they : (a) accus. plur. mase. ; cf. inter se IV, 
 N. 7 ; (b) the subj. of habgre ; cf. Gallos obtinere X. 
 
 4. habere, to have; cf. prohibent IX. (pro and habent, they 
 hold in front, check) and habit: (a) mode and tense? correspond- 
 ing pass, form ? (b) cf. habg-re, obting-re, conting-tur, with com- 
 
74 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 mea-nt, specta-t, praesta-rent, and state how the two classes of 
 verbs represented are distinguished ; (c) se habere arbitrabantur, 
 they thought themselves to have, or, better, they thought that they had ; 
 the thought in their minds was, we have ; cf. XIV. N. 2 (&) (c). 
 
 5. arbitrabantur, they were judging, they thought ; cf. arbitrate: 
 (a) stem, tense sign, personal ending ? (&) pass, in form, act. in 
 meaning ; such verbs are called deponent ; cf. oriuntur XL, potlri 
 XIV., vagarentur XVI. 
 
 6. qui, which: (a) antec. ? How do you know it? (b) subj. of 
 what ? 
 
 7. milia, noun, thousands; cf. million, mile: (a) accus. plur. 
 neut., decl. like plur. of facile XIV. N. 1 (d) ; (b) accus. of extent of 
 space, like Eng. objective in same use. 
 
 8. passuum, of paces ; cf. pass, pace: (a) -um is the ending of 
 the gen. plur. ; (b) partitive gen., depending upon milia ; cf. VI. N. 3 
 
 (c) (d); (c) stem, passu-; cf. cultu VI., lacu XV., occasu-m XL ; 
 
 (d) cf. the following words having vowel steins : provincia-m, an- 
 gusto-s, omni-um, re-bus ; and the following having consonant 
 stems : cupiditat-e, conjuration-em, flumin-e, dolor-e, homin-um. 
 All the consonant stems are of what decl.? 
 
 9. ducenta, adj., two hundred: (a) accus. plur. neut., agreeing 
 with milia ; (b) found only in plur. ; ducentl, ducentae, ducenta, 
 uorn. 
 
 10. quadraginta, forty ; cf. quadragesima, the first Sunday in 
 Lent; centum, a hundred, cf. cent, centennial; octoginta, eighty, 
 cf. octogenarian. All are indecl. numeral adj. limiting milia. 
 
 11. latitudinem, width; cf. latus, wide, and latitude, also mul- 
 ti-tudin-e, forti-tudin-is, longi-tudin-em. (a) What similarity of form 
 have the three words last given? (b} in latitudinem means strictly 
 into width, though translated properly in width ; cf. ab Sequanis 
 X. N. 14. 
 
 12. patebant. they were lying open, extending; cf. Eng. patent: 
 (a) analyze and classify the form ; see 4 (b) ; (b) cf. } as to exact mean- 
 ing, with pertinent VII. N. 11. 
 
LESSON XVII. 75 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. All nouns and adj. may be divided into -a, -o, -i, -u, -g, and 
 consonant stems. Consonant stems are all of the 3d decl. 
 
 2. Many consonant steins of the 3d decl. end in -tudin-. 
 
 3. One class of verbs is distinguished by the final -a of the pres. 
 stem, another by the final -e. 1 These letters are called the characteris- 
 tics of these classes of verbs. 
 
 4. Verbs w.hich have the meaning of the act. with the form of the 
 pass, are called deponent. 
 
 5. a or ab, cum, de, e or ex, in meaning in, pro, and a few 
 other less common prep., take the abl. case. 
 
 6. The principal verb of an indirect quotation, from either the 
 speech or the thought of another, is in the inf. mode. This mode is 
 then translated like an hid., and has an accus. for its subj. 
 
 7. Extent of space is expressed by the accus. 
 
 8. The partitive gen. depends upon superlatives, nouns of number, 
 and other nouns denoting a part of a thing. 
 
 9. Where the Eng. uses a prep, denoting position in a place, the 
 Lat. frequently uses a prep, denoting motion to or from a place. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Characteristics of decl. A. & G. 32. H. 47. 
 
 2. Prep, with the abl. . A. & G. 152, b, c. H. 434, 435. 
 
 3. Subj. of the inf. . . A. & G. 240 / II. 523, I. 
 
 4. Accus. of extent . . A. & G. 240, e. H. 379. 
 
 5. Words used with par- 
 
 titive gen. . . . A. & G. 216, a, 1, H. 397, 1, 2, 3. 
 2, 3. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. angust-us, -a, -um, narrow. 
 
 2. arbitrarl, dep., to judge, think. 
 
 1 The vowels 3. and e are changed to a and e wherever they come before nt or 
 final -t. 
 
76 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. autem, conj., but, moreover. 
 
 4. centum, iudecl. numeral adj., one hundred. 
 
 5. ducent-I, -ae, -a, numeral adj., two hundred. 
 
 6. fortitudinis (derived from fortis, brave), of bravery. 
 1. gloria, f/lory. 
 
 8. habere, to Jiave, hold. 
 
 9. latitudinis, of width. 
 
 10. longitudinis, of length. 
 
 11. mille (in sing, usually an indecl. adj. ; in plur. a noun decl. like 
 
 mare), a thousand. 
 
 12. multitudiiiis, of a great number, multitude. 
 
 13. octogiuta, indecl. adj., eighty. 
 
 14. passuum, gen. plur., of paces (the Roman mile was a thousand 
 
 paces, and the lloman (double) pace was a little less than five 
 feet). 
 
 15. patere, to lie open, extend. 
 
 16. pro, prop, with abl., in front of, in behalf of, instead of, for, 
 
 in proportion to. 
 
 17. quadraginta, indecl. &<\]., forty. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Pro multitudine hominum angustos fines Helveti! habebant. 
 (b) Pro gloria atque fortitudine Helvetii angustos esse suos fines arbi- 
 trantur. (c) Fines angustos Helvetii Iiabent, qtii in latitudinem rnilia 
 passuum centum et octoginta patent. (d) Quod Helvetii lacu et 
 fluminibus et montibus continebantur, fiebat ut minus late vagari 
 possent. 
 
 2. (a) Magnum hominum numerum habebat. (6) Magnam fru- 
 menti copiam Hsedui mittebant. (c) lleliquas copias Helvetiorum 
 Roman! superant. (d) Cum reliqua Gallia Roman! Haeduos supera- 
 bant. (e) Gallum animum bonum habere dictum est. (f) Eorum 
 fines Sequan! attirigebarit. 
 
 3. (a) The territory of the Helvetii is narrow, (b) The Helvetian 
 country extended two hundred and forty miles in length, (c) The 
 Celtae hold a third part of Gaul, (d) He was holding the supreme 
 power of the state. 
 
LESSON XVII. 77 
 
 4. (a) The mountain was sloping to the river, (b) The soldiers 
 are warring, (c) All the clients, of whom he had a great number. 
 (d) The Romans used-to-call (were calling) the Celtae Gauls (accus.). 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. All the forms of habere which the pupil may now be 
 expected to know. 2. The verb characteristics -a and -e. 3. The 
 meaning of word "deponent." 4. Connection of the various meanings 
 of pro with the first meaning, in front of. 5. Analysis of spectare, 
 spectabat, spectarent. 6. The verbs which stand at the end of 
 their clauses in the last five lessons. 7. The five dec!. 8. The list 
 of prep, which take the abl. 9. A use of the inf. where the Eng. 
 uses the ind. 10. How to express extent, or answer question "how 
 far." 11. Words in the text thus far on which the partitive gen. de- 
 pends. 12. Difference in use of prep, in Eng. and Lat. with respect 
 to rest or motion. 13. Two translations for the inf. according to 
 connection. 14. Nouns and adj. with nom. plur. ending -i-a. 
 15. Likeness in form between quadraginta and octoginta. 
 
78 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD, 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 His rebus adducti, et auctoritate Orgetorigis 
 
 By these things led, and by the advice of Orgetorix 
 
 permoti, constituerunt ea quse ad 
 
 deeply moved, they determined those things which to 
 
 proficiscendum pertinerent comparare, jumentorum 
 
 departure pertained to prepare, of beasts of burden 
 
 et carrorum quam maximum numerum coemere, 1 
 and of carts as much as the greatest number to buy up, 
 
 sementes quam maximas facere, ut 
 
 sowings as much as the greatest to make, in order that 
 
 in itinere copia frumenti suppeteret. 
 
 on the journey plenty of grain might be on hand. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. adducti, having been led, being led, led : (a) pf. pass, partic. ; 
 cf. divisa I., dictum X., inductus XIII. ; (b) agrees as an adj. with 
 the subj. of constituerunt ; (c] rase, number, gender ? 
 
 2. Orgetorigis, of Orgetorix : (a) stem Orgetorig- ; (J) forms 
 the nom. sing, by adding -s ; cf. omni-, omnis ; part-, par(t)s ; civi- 
 tat-, civita(t)s ; inducto-, inductus. (c) gs always appears as x; 
 hence the nom. sing, is Orgetorix; cf. legibus IV., nom. sing. leg-s 
 lex. 
 
 1 The two dots (diaeresis) over the e indicate that it does not unite with the 
 preceding O to form a diphthong. 
 
LESSON XVIII. 79 
 
 3. permoti, deeply moved, influenced: (a) cf. adducti 1; (b) per 
 in composition has the force of old Eng. throughly, or, as we now say, 
 thoroughly ; cf. perfacile XIV. N. 1. 
 
 4. constituerunt, they determined; (a) pf. ind. act. 3d plur. ; 
 cf. pf. ind. act. 3d sing 1 , fecit, persuasj.t XIII. ; (b) fecerunt, they 
 made; persuaserunt, they persuaded- 
 
 5. ea quae; cf. ea quse VI f. N. 7, 8. 
 
 6. proficiscendum, the setting out, departure ; accus. of the 
 gerund; cf. bellandi XVI. N. 12, Obs. 6. 
 
 7. pertinereiit, they were pertaining, pertained; cf. pertinet, 
 pertinent XL ; (a) mode and tense ? cf. vagarentur XVI. N. 6 ; 
 (b) stem? 
 
 8. comparare, to prepare ; used after constituerunt, they deter- 
 mined to prepare ; cf. inferre possent XVI. 
 
 9. quam, adv. how, as; with the sup. degree it is best translated JDOS- 
 sible; thus, quam maximum numerum, the greatest possible number. 
 
 10. maximum, greatest; cf. Eng. maximum; irregular sup. of 
 magnus. 
 
 11. coemere, to buy up : (a) completes the meaning of consti- 
 tuerunt, like comparare 8 and facere following ; (b) cf. com- 
 para-re. habe-re, coeme-re, and poti-ri, and note that the stems end 
 respectively in -a, -e, -e, and -I. These verbs represent four different 
 classes of verbs as to inflection, (c) In -e verbs, in the pres. ind., -e 
 is varied to i in 3d sing, and to u in 3d plur. ; cf. dividit V., gerunt 
 VIII. ; (d) the pers. ending -t, -nt, -tur, -ntur, the tense signs -ba- 
 and -re-, and the inf ending -re, are the same for all verbs ; cf. ad- 
 ficie-ba-ntur, arbitra-ba-ntur, pate-ba-nt, appella-ntur, contine- 
 ntur, praesta-re-nt, pertine re-nt, and the above inf. 
 
 12. itinere, the journey ; cf. itinerant : (a) abl. sing. neut. ; 
 
 (b) with in meaning in or on. When does in take the accus. ? 
 
 (c) stem itiiier-, abl. ending -e ; -ere is not in this instance an inf. 
 ending. 
 
 13. suppeteret, it might be on hand: (a) mode, tense, number, 
 and person ? (b) its subject is copia ; (c) denotes state or condition 
 rather than an act; (d) the clause ut . . . suppeteret gives the 
 purpose of the Helvetii in making their plantings of grain as large as 
 possible ; so ut . . . exirent XIII. gives the purpose of persu&sit. 
 
80 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The following stems form the noin. sing, by adding -s : very 
 many rnasc. in -o, most masc. and fern, in -i, -d, -t, -c, -g, and others 
 to be learned later. 
 
 2. In stems in -c or -g, the B unites with c or g to form x, which 
 is a double consonant equal to cs or gs. 
 
 3. The pf. pass, partic. is declined like adj. of the 1st and 2d decl. 
 
 4. The ending -erunt is that of the pf. ind. act. 3d plur. 
 
 5. Verbs are divided into four systems of inflection, or four conju- 
 gations, distinguished from one another by the final or characteristic 
 vowel of the pres. stem. The pres. stem may always be found by 
 dropping -re of the pres. inf. 
 
 6. The characteristic of the 1st conjug. is a, of the 2d g, of the 
 3d e, and of the 4th I. 
 
 7. All conjug. are alike in the ending of the pres. inf. act., in the 
 endings of the 3d pers. both act. and pass., and in the tense signs 
 of the impf. ind. and of the impf. subjv. 
 
 8. The stem characteristic of the 3d conj. is changed to i in the 
 pres. ind. 3d sing., to u in the pres. ind. 3d plur. 
 
 9. Quam with the sup. denotes the highest degree possible. 
 
 10. Ut, that, so that, is used with the subjv. to denote purpose. 
 
 11. The inf. is used (without a subj.) with many verbs which 
 imply another action to complete their meaning. This is called 
 the complementary inf. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. 3d decl. stems in -c and -g A. & G. 44, 46, rex H. 59, and 1, 1;, 
 
 and dux. 3) ; 3, II. N. 2. 
 
 2. The characteristics of the 
 
 four conjug. . . . A. & G. 122 and a. H. 201. 
 
 3. Quam with sup. degree A. & G. 93, b. H. 170, 2. 
 
 4. Subjunctive of purpose 
 
 with ut . . A. & G. 317. H. 497 and IL 
 
LESSON XVIII. 81 
 
 5. Complementary inf. . . A. & G. 271. H. 533. 
 
 6. The nature and use of 
 
 the partic A. & G. 25, e; 289, H. 2CO, IV. and 
 
 186. foot-note; 438, 1. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adducere, to lead to, to draw to, to induce. 
 
 2. auctoritas, fern., advice, authority, influence. 
 
 3. carrus, carri gen., a cart. 
 
 4. coemere (can and emere), to purchase together, to buy up. 
 
 5. comparare (con, here intensive, and parare), to prepare with 
 zeal, to make ready. 
 
 6. constituere, to set together, arrange, determine. 
 
 7. itinere, abl. slug., Journey, route, march. 
 
 8. jumeiitum, nent., a yoke animal, beast of burden. 
 
 9. maxim-us, -a, -um, greatest, irregular sup. of magii-us, -a, -um. 
 
 10. permovere, to move thoroughly or deeply, to influence strongly ; 
 permot-us, -a, -um, pf. pass, partic., having been moved, being 
 moved, moved deeply. 
 
 11. proficiscendum, accus. sing-., gerund of proficisci, to set out 
 (pro and facere, to make forward, to make headway), a setting 
 out, departure. 
 
 12. quam, adv., how, as, with sup. denotes the highest possible 
 degree. 
 
 13. sementis, sementis gen., sing, fern., a sowing , planting . 
 
 14. suppetere (sub and petere), to be on hand, in store. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 In the following exercises, wherever a noun is qualified by an adjective, decl. 
 both together completely. 
 
 1. (a] Helvetil his rebus perrnoti constituerunt de flnibus suls 
 exire. (b) Helvetil constituerunt jumenta et oarros coemere, sementes 
 magnas facere, copiam frumenti comparare. (e) Homines bellandi 
 
82 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 cupidi cum fmitimis bellum gerebant. (d) Ea quae ad bellandum 
 pertinerent comparabant. 
 
 2. (CL) Quam maximus numerus carrorum comparatur. (&) Dic- 
 tum est Sequanos ad Helvetios jumenta bona mittere. (c) Quod 
 Helvetii fortissinii fuerunt, prceliis cum reliquls Gallis contendere 
 coiistituerunt. (d) Orgetorix els persuasit ut quam maximos carros 
 importarent, ut cum copia frumeiitl exirent. 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetian state is nearest to Mount Jura, (b) It came 
 to pass, because of the influence of Orgetorix, that the Helvetii pos- 
 sessed a very great supply of grain, (c) It was very easy, since they 
 surpassed all in courage, to wage wars upon their neighbors, (c?) The 
 Gauls, whom they have determined to overcome, are not-at-all (least) 
 hemmed in by the character of the country. 
 
 4. (a) The highest mountains are nearest the province. (&) The 
 very wide river divides the Gauls from the Germans, (c) The great- 
 est wars were being waged in Gaul, (d) He contends with all the 
 forces of the Romans. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The equivalent of x. 2. The nom. sing, ending -B. 3. Force 
 of per in composition. 4. The endings -i-t, -gru-nt. 5. Char- 
 acteristic vowels -a, -, -e, -I in verbs. 6. Pres. ind. of 3d conjug. 
 7. -t, -nt, -tur, -ntur, -ba-, -re-, -re. 8. Difference between partic. 
 and other adj. 9. The pf. pass, partic. 10. Meaning of complement- 
 ary. 11. Difference between Eng. and Lat. ways of expressing 
 purpose. 
 
LESSON XIX. 83 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 (Constituerunt) cum proximis civitatibus pacem et 
 amicitiam confirmare. Ad eas res conficiendas bien- 
 nium sibi satis esse duxerunt, in tertium annum pro- 
 fectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res conficiendas 
 Orgetorix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civitates sus- 
 cepit. 
 
 To the Teacher. The literal translation will no longer be given in connec- 
 tion with the lesson. The pupil henceforth should be taught to translate the text 
 for himself. But let the teacher see to it that the text is mastered in the order of 
 the original, and not by finding first predicate, then subject, etc. A plan by which 
 this object may be attained is suggested in Appendix A, to which teachers are re- 
 ferred. The notes of this lesson and of those which follow are adapted to the plan 
 there suggested. (See p. 279, Appendix A.) 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. pacem, peace; cf. pacify, pacific: () stein pSc-y (6) norn. 
 formed by adding -o to stem ; pac-s = pax ; cf. Orgetorix XVIII. 
 N. 2. 
 
 2. amicitiam, friendship ,- cf amicable : a quality word or abstract 
 noun formed by the addition of -tia to the weakened stem of amicus, 
 as cupiditas is formed by adding -tas to the weakened stem of 
 cupidus. 
 
 3. eas, these ; accus. plur. fern. ; cf. eos, accus. plur. masc., VII., 
 and earn, amis. sing, fum., IX. 
 
 4. res, things ; accus. plur. fern.; cf. rebus XV L 
 
 5. conficiendas, to be accomplished, completed: 1 (a) a partic. 
 
 1 The writer is aware that the translation of the gerundive here given may be 
 fairly questioned, but thinks it better to give an explanation to the beginner which 
 will be modified later than to give no explanation at all, the alternative often 
 adopted in books for beginners. 
 
84 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 limiting res ; (I) pass., cf. adducti XVIII. ; (c) ad eas res confi 
 ciendas, though meaning literally to or for these things to be accom- 
 plished, may be translated to accomplish these things,' cf. ad 
 effeminandos animos VII. ; (d ) this partic. is declined like an adj. 
 of the 1st and 2d decl. ; () it ends in the noin. sing, in -ndus, -nda, 
 -ndum. 
 
 6. sibi, /or them; irrrg. dat. plur., cf. se, accus. plur., XVII. 
 
 7. satis, enough, sufficient ; here an indecl. adj. limiting bien- 
 nium. 
 
 8. duxgrunt, they led, they drew, they tltouyht ; cf. Eng. expres- 
 sions to draw an inference, a train of thought: (d) pf. ind. act. 3d 
 plur. ; cf. constituerunt XVIII.; (b) for biemiium satis esse duxe- 
 runt, cf. XIV. N. 2, Obs. 9; XVII/Obs. 6. 
 
 9. in tertium annum, for the third year ; ad and in with accus. 
 often have the meaning for, especially in expressions of time. 
 
 10. lege : (a) abl. sing., meaning law; (b) used without a prep.; 
 (c) four ablatives used without a prep, have already been met : legi- 
 bus IV., respect ; finibus IX., separation ; rebus XVI., cause ; 
 Garumna X., means; (d) with confirmant, the last word in the 
 sentence, the abl. of means seems the most appropriate for lege. 
 
 11. deligitur, he is chosen ; pres. ind. pass. 3d sing. ; cf. dividit 
 V., continetur X. 
 
 12. suscepit, he undertook, took upon: (a) compounded of subs 
 for sub, under, from under (as one places his arms in lifting), and 
 capere, to take; cf. capit X.; (b) pf. ind. act. 3d sing.; cf. fecit 
 XIII. ; (c) takes dir. obj. legatioiiem, and indir. sibi ; the latter, be- 
 cause compounded with sub ; cf. omnibus praestarent XIV.; (o?) sibi 
 here means himself, though earlier in this same lesson it means them- 
 selves or them. The reason is this : The pronoun of which sibi is a 
 case, always refers to some subj. in the sentence, generally to the subj. 
 of the clause in which it stands ; hence it gets its number, gender, and 
 person from the subj. which is its antecedent ; the former sibi refer- 
 ring to the subj. of confirmant, a plur. verb, was plur. ; this sibi, 
 referring to is, the subj. of the sing, verb suscepit, is sing. 
 
LESSON XIX. 85 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Endings of names of qualities ; -tas, -tia. 
 
 2. There is in Lat. a pass, partic. referring to the future. It ends 
 in -ndus, -nda, -ndum in the nom. sing., and is of the 1st and 2d 
 decl. This partic. is called the gerundive. 
 
 3. The dat. is used as the indir. obj. of many verbs compounded 
 with prae, sub, and some other prep. 
 
 4. Be, sibi always refer to some subj. in the sentence, generally to 
 that of the clause in which they stand. They have the same forms in 
 the sing, and the plur. The corresponding adj. pron. suus, sua, suum 
 also refers to the subj. These are called reflexive (bending back) pron. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The gerundive; form 
 
 and meaning . . A. & G. 113, d. H. 248, 543. 
 
 2. Dat. with compound 
 
 verbs . . . . A. & G. 228. H. 386. 
 
 3. The reflexives ; form 
 
 and use . . . . A. & G. 98, c, 196, 197. II. 184, 448, 449. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. amlcitia, friendship ; cf. amicus, friend. 
 
 2. aiinus, anni gen., a year. 
 
 3. biennium (bis and annus), the space of two years. 
 
 4. coiificere (con and facere), to accomplish, complete. 
 
 5. confirmare, to strengthen, establish, encourage, affirm. 
 
 6. deligere, to choose from, select. 
 1. dii^ere, to lead, draw, consider. 
 
 8. legationem, accus. sing, fern., embassy; cf. Iggatus, artt, 
 
 bassador. 
 
 9. pax, fern., pads, gen., peace. 
 
 10. profectioiiem, accus. sing, fern., a setting out^ departure / cf, 
 
 proficiscendum XVIII. 
 
 11. satis, adv. or adj., sufficiently, enough. 
 
86 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12. sui, gen. sing, or plur., of himself , herself, itself, themselves. 
 
 13. su-us, -a, -um, possessive adj. pron., his, hers, its, their. 
 
 14. suscipere (sub and capere), to take from under, to take up 
 
 or upon, to undertake. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Cum Hseduis reliquisque civitatibus Helvetii pacem confir- 
 maiit. (b) Ad eas res couficiendas Helvetii Orgetorigem, qui apud eos 
 longe uobilissimus fuit, deligunt. (c) Ea qiue ad effeminaudos animos 
 pertinent important, (rf) Ea qtiae ad proticiscendum pertinent impor- 
 tantur. (e) Homines cupidos bellandi magnus dolor adficiebat. 
 
 2. (a) Ducnnt, duxerunt, diicebant. (It) Els persuasit ut omries 
 copias ducerent. (c) Ad omnes res comparandas cjuattuor annos 
 Helvetiis satis esse ducit. (d) Virtute suis finitiinis pnestabant. 
 
 3. (a) They establish friendship with the state nearest the Rhine. 
 (b) These men took upon themselves an embassy, (c) They estab- 
 lished (were establishing) peace with their neighbors, so that they might 
 have friends on their inarch, (c?) A part of Gaul is separated from 
 the Helvetii by the river Rhone. 
 
 4. (a) Orgetorix led his own clients to the war. (b) The Helvetii, 
 because they thought their boundaries were narrow, determined to 
 possess very broad fields, (c) Orgetorix, influenced by the desire for 
 kingly power, was making ready his departure. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The nom. sing, endings -ndus, -nda, -ndum. 2. Force of sub 
 and con in compound verbs. 3. Two uses of the dat. 4. Two pass, 
 partic. 5. Peculiarities of the reflexive substantive. 6. Of the reflex- 
 ive adj. 7. Four uses of the abl. without a prep. 8. Reason for dis- 
 cussing the second sibi of text in connection with suscepit instead of 
 separately ; see N. 12. 9. How the word is, standing where it does, 
 helps us about the meaning of the next word, sibi. 10. Vowel 
 changes 'when words are compounded. 
 
LESSON XX. 87 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Catamantalcedis filio, 
 Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanls multos annos 
 obtinuerat, et a senatu populi Roman! amicus appellatus 
 erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod pater 
 ante habuerat. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. cujus, of whom, whose: () j = y in year; (b) gen. sing. 
 masc. of the rel. pron. qui ; in like manner the gen. sing, of is XtX. 
 is ejus, and of hi IV. is hujus ; (c) i between two vowels, or i at 
 the beginning of a word, before a, e, o, or u, becomes a consonant, and 
 is conventionally written j j 1 the ending in this case is really the same 
 as in totius XIV ; (d) antec. ? 
 
 2. pater, father ; cf. paternal ; nom. sing. 
 
 3. obtinuerat, he had held: (a] analysis: obtinu- pf. stem (the 
 basis of all tenses of act. voice which denote perfect or complete 
 action) ; cf. pres. stem obtine, in obtine-re X. ; -era-, tense sign of 
 pluperfect ind. act.; cf. Eng. had; -t, pers. ending 3d sing.; 
 (b) when this verb is reached in order, the pupil will see that pater 
 must be its subj. and regnum its obj., and that the accus., multos 
 annos, limits the verb like an adverb, telling how long he had held 
 the kingdom. Such an accus. is called an accus. of duration of time, 
 cf. milia XV [f. N. 7 (). 
 
 4. appellatus erat, he had been called: (a) pluperfect ind. pass., 
 3d sing. ; (b) cf. the plpf. ind. act., 3d sing., and note that both 
 forms end in erat, but that the pass, consists of two words : erat, the 
 impf. ind. of est, fuit, esse, and appellatus, the pf. pass, partic. of 
 
 1 The teacher should consult on this point Koby's Lat. Grammar, Book I., 137- 
 139, or Harper's Lat. Dictionary under j. 
 
88 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 appellare. (c) On reaching this verb the pupil will see that the 
 meaning of a senatu is by the senate, and not from the senate as 
 previous uses of a would lead him to translate it ; seiiatu is an abl, 
 of agent; see Gram. Less. How does it differ from the abl. of 
 means? (d) amicus (the preceding word) is nom., like the subject 
 pater, refers to the same person as pater, and is part of the pred- 
 icate ; cf. qui Galli appellantur III. 
 
 5. occuparet, that he might seize, or, better, to seize ; (a) iinpf. 
 subjv. act. 3d sing., 1st or a conjug. ; cf. impf. subjv. act. 3d sing., 3d 
 or e conjng., in suppeteret XVIII., and read XVIII. N. 11 with Obs. 
 5, 6, 7 ; (b) the clause ut . . . occuparet is in the accus., obj. of 
 persuadet, just as id is accus., obj. of persuasit, in XIV. (c) How 
 does it dutenm no the case of regnum (after ut) and the meaning 
 of sua? 
 
 6. quod, which : (a) rel. pron., accus. sing. neut. ; (b) distinguish 
 from quod, conj., because, IX.; (c) antec. ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 In this and succeeding lessons only Ihosc subjects will be treated under the 
 " Observations" which are not covered by the " Grammar Lesson." 
 
 1. Initial i before a, e, o, u, or i between two vowels, becomes 
 a consonant, is usually written j, and is pronounced like y in year. 
 
 2. The pf. stem, upon which as a base all tenses of completed 
 action are formed, may be found as a rule in the 2d conjug., and often 
 in the 1st and 3d, by changing the final vowel of the pres. stem to u. 
 
 3. The plpf. iiul. act. has the tense sign -era- in all conjng.. and the 
 plpf. ind. pass, is made up of two words, viz. the pf. pass, partic. and 
 the impf. ind. of the verb esse. 
 
 4. Two new forms of qui: cujus, the gen. sing, all genders, and 
 quod the nom. and accus. sing. neut. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The accus. of duration 
 
 of time .... A. & G. 240, e. H. 379. 
 
 2. The abl. of agent . . A. & G. 246. H. 415, I. 
 
LESSON XX. 89 
 
 3. The predicate noun or 
 
 adj A. & G. 183, 184, H. 362, 363. 
 
 185. 
 
 4. The obj. clause of pur- 
 
 pose A. & G. 331 and a. H. 498 and II. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. ante, adv. and prep., before. 
 
 2. Catamantaloedes, Catamantaloedis gen., a Gallic name. 
 
 3. filius, son. 
 
 4. mult-us, -a -uni, much ; plur. many. 
 
 5. occupai'e, to seize, to take possession of. 
 
 6. pater father. 
 
 7. populus, people. 
 
 8. senatu, abl. sing, masr., a body of old men, a senate. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Hsedui a senatu populi Rdmani amicl appellantur. (b) Pater 
 Castici regnum multos annds obtinebat. (c) In suo itinere Sequano 
 nobili persuasit. (c?) Multa regna quse ab hoininibus nobilissimis 
 occupata erant in Gallia erant. 
 
 2. (a) Cresar duxit Orgetorigera C'astic5 persuadere. (b) Casticus 
 auctoritate Orgetorigis addnetus regnum occnpare constituit. (c) Hi 
 homines qui suis flnibus Germanos prohibuerant fortissimi fuerurit. 
 (d) Ab Orgetorige Casticus inductus erat ut regnum occuparet. 
 
 3. (a) It came to pass that the kingly power was seized by Casti- 
 cus. (b) Orgetorix had had many friends, (c) The friends of Orget- 
 orix were many, (d) Orgetorix persuaded his friends to seize the 
 kingly power in their states, (e) The country of the Sequani is 
 bounded by the great Rhone river. 
 
 4. (a) They determined to wage war upon the nearest states. 
 (b) Rivers rise in the mountains and flow into the ocean, (c) Peace 
 and friendship are established by the Helvetii. (d) Orgetorix had 
 the largest possible number of friends, so that through them he might 
 seize the royal power of Gaul. 
 
90 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The use of the pf. stem. 2. The difference between the plpf. 
 act. and plpf. pass. 3. Likeness and difference of pred. noun and ap- 
 positive. 4. Likeness between accus. of time and accus. of space. 
 5. Difference between abl. of agent and abl. of means. 6. The use of 
 a clause as a noun in Eng. and Lat. 7. Difference between the inf. 
 to go in the sentences he was able to go and he made ready to go. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Itemque Dumnorigi Hseduo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo 
 tempore principatum in civitate obtinebat ac maxime 
 plebi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur persuadet, eique 
 filiam suam in matrimonium dat. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. fratri, the brother: (a) dat. sing, from nom. frater; cf. pater 
 XX. ; (b) stem fratr- ; the e of the nom. is developed in the effort to 
 pronounce this stem ; (c) why dat. ? 
 
 2. eo tempore, at that time ; the time at which an action occurs 
 is expressed by the abl. without a prep. 
 
 3. acceptus, a pf. pass, partic., but having here the meaning ac- 
 ceptable rather than accepted ; (a] cf. divisa I., dictum X., inductus 
 XIII., permoti XVII L, appellatus XX., and note that the nom. sing, 
 ends in -us, -a, -um, added to a stem ending in -t or sometimes -B. 
 This is called the supine stem of the verb; (b) the preceding word 
 plebi is a dat. completing the meaning of acceptus ; cf. VIII. N. 2 (c) ; 
 (c) What is the nom. sing, of plebi? cf. XVIII. Obs. 1. 
 
LESSON XXI. 91 
 
 4. idem, the same (thing) ; accus. neut. sing., obj. of deponent 
 verb conaretur. 
 
 5. el, to him: (a) dat. sing, masc. of is XIX. ; so cui 1 from qui; 
 
 (b) indir. obj. of dat ; (c) antec. ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Collect from the text all the forms which have been used of is, 
 ea, id, and qui, quae, quod, and note : (a) that these forms are gen- 
 erally of the 1st and 2d (led. ; (b) that the following have the endings 
 of the 3d decl. : is, ei, cui, quibus, and quern accns. sing. masc. 
 (not yet used) ; (c) the following have peculiar endings : qui as 
 nom. sing, masc., quee as nom. sing. fern, and nom. and accus. plur. 
 neut., id, quod, ejus, cujus. 
 
 2. As these pron. are difficult and yet the most frequently used in 
 the language, the following points must be thoroughly mastered : (a) 
 in both, the gen. sing., the dat. sing., and the dat. and abl. plur. have 
 but one form for all genders; (b) quae, nom. sing, fern., is the same 
 in form as the nom. plur. fern, and the norn. and accus. plur. neut. ; 
 
 (c) qui, nom. sing, masc., is the same in form as nom. plur. masc. ; 
 (c?) quam, accus. sing, fern., is the same in form as the adv. quam. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of is, ea, id, and 
 
 qui, quce, quod . . A. & G. 101, 103. H. 186, IV., 187. 
 
 2. The supine stein . . . A. & G. 125. H. 256 and 1. 
 
 3. Abl. of time . . . . A. & G. 256. H. 429. 
 
 4. Dat. with adj. . . . A. & G. 234. H. 391. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 The pupil should be prepared with Eug. words related to those in Vocabularies. 
 
 1. ac, another form for atque, cf. VI. N. 8; it is used only before 
 
 consonants. 
 
 2. accept-us, -a, -um, pf. pass, partic. (from accipere), accepted, 
 
 acceptable. 
 
 1 To be pronounced as a monosyllable. 
 
92 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. conari, dep., to try. 
 
 4. dare, 1 to give. 
 
 5. Dumnorix, -igis, 2 a man's name. 
 
 6. filia, daughter. 
 
 7. f rater, -tris, brother. 
 
 8. Hseduus, a ffceduan, one of the Hcedui. 
 
 9. idem, noiri. and aecus. sing, neut., the same (thing). 
 
 10. item, adv., likewise, also. 
 
 11. matrimonium, marriage. 
 
 12. maxime, very greatly, most, especially ; cf. maxim- us, -a, -um. 
 
 13. plebs, -bis, plebeians, common people. 
 
 14. principatum, accus. sing-, masc., leadership. 
 
 15. tempore, abl. sing, neut., time. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Divitiacus et Dumnorix fratres fuerunt. (b) Orgetorix Hel- 
 vetius Dumnorigi Hsedno persuasit. (c) Hoc tempore Divitiacus in 
 civitate principatum obtinuit. (c?) Id hoc facilius persuasit quod 
 undique loci natura Helvetii rontinentur. 
 
 2. (a) Pat 11 persuasit ut arnico nobili filiam in matrimonium daret. 
 (b) Imperio Gallise terti5 anno potiii constituerant et tres annos eas 
 res cornparabant. (c) Dumnorix eujus f rater erat Divitiacus, regni 
 cupiditate inductus principatum in sua civitate esse satis sibi minime 
 arbitrabatur. 
 
 3. (a) He persuaded them to try the same thing, (b) The father 
 of Casticus held the leadership many years in the territory of the 
 Sequani. (c] Dumnorix had led in marriage out of that state the 
 daughter of Orgetorix. (d) At that time Casticus was a friend of 
 the Helvetii. 
 
 4. (a) The Sequani send ambassadors to Dumnorix the Hseduan. 
 (b) The men with whom Orgetorix had made a conspiracy were de- 
 sirous of warring, (c) Those men who were seizing the kingly power 
 in Gaul took the leadership upon themselves. (d) Dumnorix was 
 called friend by Orgetorix. 
 
 1 The -a of the pres. stem of dare is short by exception. 
 
 2 The final letters of the s;en. 
 
LESSON XXII. 93 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The formation and meaning' of the pf. pass, partic. ? 2. Like- 
 ness in decl. of is and qui. 3. Number of times eaeh is used in 
 text thus far. 4. Stems of the nouns in this lesson. 5. Datives in 
 this lesson. 6. Difference between accus. and abl. of time. 7. Uses 
 of abl. without a prep. 8. Three steins of Lat. verb. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Perfacile factii esse illis probat conata perficere, prop- 
 terea quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset ; 
 non esse dubium qum totius Gallise plurimum Helvetil 
 possent. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. factu, in doing or to do ; a verbal noun used as an abl. of re- 
 spect or specification with perfacile ; it is called a supine, and the 
 supine stem, which is the base of the pf. pass, partic. and other forms, 
 is found by cutting off the final vowel. 
 
 2. probat, he proves: (a) a verb of saying, using that term in its 
 widest sense, hence followed by the inf. esse in indir. discourse ; 
 
 (b) the preceding illis is a dat. used with it; he proves to them; 
 cf. el dat, he gives to him, XX L 
 
 3. perficere, to accomplish: (a) from per and facere ; cf. X. N. 
 13 (a) (c) ; (b) the simple subj. of esse ; the neut. peifacile is a 
 pred. adj. agreeing with it; (c) cf bellandl XVI. N. 12 ; factu 1. 
 
 4. ipse, himself: (a) the intensive pronoun; (b) nom. sing, masc., 
 limiting and thus rendering emphatic the subj. of the following verb; 
 
 (c) declined like is, ea, id, with exception of form ipsurn, nom. and 
 accus. sing. neut. ; illis, above, has nom. sing. masc. ill-e like ips-e, 
 and in the other cases, the endings of is, ea, id. 
 
94 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. obtenturus, about to possess : (a) future act. partic. ; (b) 
 formed on the supine stem by the addition of -urus ; cf. pf. pass, 
 partic. XXI. N. 3 (a), and pres. stern in obtine-re X., pf. stem in 
 obtinu-erat XX.; (c) nom. sing, masc., agreeing- with the subj. of 
 following verb. 
 
 6. esset, he ivas : (a) impf. subjv. 3d sing, (b) What is the stem? 
 (c) What is impf. ind. 3d sing.? 
 
 7. possent, were powerful: (a) impf. subjv. 3d plnr. ; cf. XVI. 
 N. 9 ; (b) following quin, just as in XVI. it follows ut ; (c) modified 
 by the adv. plurimum, most, upon which totius Galliae depends ; 
 translate, the Helvetii were most powerful of all Gaul. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The endings -urus, -ura, -urum are added to the supine stem to 
 form the future active partic. ; -us, -a, -um, to the same stem to form 
 the pf. pass, partic. 
 
 2. Verbs having a as the vowel of the first syllable often weaken 
 this a to i when compounded with prep. 
 
 3. Verbs of giving and saying take a dat. of the person to whom 
 the thing is given or said. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of ille and ipse . . A. & G. 101. H. 186, HI. V. 
 
 2. The supine, gerund and inf. ; 
 
 form and use . . . . A. & G. 112, d; H. 200,1. II. III., 
 
 114, , b. 538, 547. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 j. conatum, in form a pf. pass, partic. of the verb conari, a thing 
 attempted, 1 an attempt, an undertaking. 
 
 2. dubi-us, -a, -um, doubtful. 
 
 3. ille, ilia, illud, that, used of what is remote in contrast to what 
 
 is near. 
 
 4. ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive or emphatic pron., self. 
 
 1 The ]>f. pnrtic. in dep. verbs is sometimes pass, in sense. 
 
LESSON XXII. 95 
 
 5. non, adv., not. 
 
 6. perficere, to accomplish, finish. 
 
 7. plurim-us, -a, -um, irreg sup. of multus (the corresponding 
 
 adv. has the form of the 110111. sing', iieut. positive and sup.), 
 very much, most. 
 
 8. probare, to test, prove, approve. 
 
 9. quin, conj., that, bat that, that not. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Perfacile factu est totius Gallise imperio potlrl. (b) Perfacile 
 factu erat conata perficere. (c) Orgetorix Castico et Dumnorigi pro- 
 bat perfacile esse ea facere. (d) Ipse suac civitatis imperium obtentu- 
 rus est. (c) Non dubiiun fuit, quin Helvetii reliquos Gallos superare 
 possent, cum virtute omnibus prsestarent. 
 
 2. () Non erat dubium, quin Belgre ab humanitfite provinciae lon- 
 gissime abessent. (b) Dictum est Orgetorigem in sua clvitate imperium 
 obtentururn esse. (c) Qua de causa Helvetii ipsi bellum gerere consti- 
 ttierunt. (o?) His rebus induct! conjuration em nobilitatis facturi sunt. 
 
 3. (a) He is about to hold the supreme power in the Helvetian 
 state, (b) There was no doubt that Orgetorix was most powerful 
 among the Helvetii. (c) Orgetorix persuaded Casticus and Dum- 
 norix that they could accomplish their undertakings, (c?) Dumnorix, 
 whose brother was a friend of the Roman people, was trying the same 
 thing. 
 
 4. (a) Those men at that time were acceptable to the common 
 people, (b) In order to influence him, Orgetorix was proving that 
 the attempt was easy, (c) He determined to persuade the nobility 
 in the largest possible states, (c?) To seize the whole of Gaul is 
 not a very easy thing to do. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Difference between fut. act. and pf. pass, partic. in meaning and 
 form. 2. Between ipse and ille. 3. Different words introducing 
 subjv. thus far. 4. Three verbal nouns. 5. The verbal adj. 6. The 
 three stems of 2d conjug. 7- Different forms of esse thus far. 
 8. When and why vowels are weakened. 
 
96 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Se suis copiis suoque exercitu illis regna conciliatu- 
 rurn confirmat. Hac oratione adducti, inter se fidem et 
 jusjurandum dant, et, regno occupato, per tres potentissi- 
 mos ac firmissimos populos, totius Gallise sese potiri 
 posse sperant. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. se. Taking this word alone, what cases are possible for it, and 
 what uses of those eases, i. e. the possibilities for this word, reading 
 in order? 
 
 2. exercitu; copiis, just before, may from its form be either dat. 
 or abl., but the close connection with exercitu, indicated by -que, 
 shows that it is probably the same case, i. e. abl. What possibilities 
 for copiis and exercitu ? 
 
 3. confirmat, he makes strong (by words) i. e. affirms : (a) esse 
 is to be supplied, as often, (b) What does confirmat show about sg, 
 suis, and suo? (c) What is the only word in the sentence with which 
 conciliaturum can possibly agree ? 
 
 4. Hac, this: (n) abl. sing, fern.; cf. hoc, abl. sing, neut., XIV.; 
 (i) the pronoun of which hac is a form poiuts to what is near. 
 
 5. occupato, having been seized: (a) cf. cona-t-a XXII., con- 
 cila-t-u-rum, and note that the supine stem of the 1st con jug. is found 
 l>v adding -t to the pres. stem ; (#) forms with regno the abl. absolute 
 construction ; see XIII. N. 5 (b) (c), Obs. 1. 
 
 6. potentissimos, most powerful : (CL) positive potens, of which 
 the gen. sing, is potentis ; cf. X. x. 2. (b) the com p. and sup. end- 
 ings are added to gen. sing, less -is ; (c) What is the comp.? cf. XVI. 
 N. 5 (c). 
 
 7. potiri, to get possession of: (a) followed by the gen. Gallise ; 
 cf. its more common use with the abl., XIV. ; (b) complement- 
 ary inf. with posse; cf. inferre possent XVI., and XVIII. Obs. 11. 
 
LESSON XXIII. 97 
 
 8. posse, are able, can : (a) compounded of potis, able, and 
 esse, to be; the last syllable of potis and first of esse are dropped, 
 and t is assimilated, thus pot(is es)se, potse, posse ; cf. possent 
 (potis essent) XVI., potens (potis and ens, partic., being) 6 ; 
 (b) inf. after sperant, a verb of thinking; (c) its subj. is sese, 
 another form for se. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The verb to be is often omitted in Lat. as in Eng. 
 
 2. The supine stem of the 1st conjug. may usually be found by 
 adding -t to the pres. stem. 
 
 3. Adj. having the noin. sing. masc. endings -us and -is form the 
 comp. and sup. by substituting -ior and -issimus for these endings, 
 but those having noin. sing. masc. ending -ns form the comp. and sup. 
 by adding -ior and -issimus to the gen. sing, less the ending -is. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Composition of posse, and 
 
 form in pres. ind. 3d 
 sing, and plur. and in 
 
 pres. partic A. & G. 120, b. H. 290, II. and N. 
 
 1, 2. 
 
 2. The abl. and gen. with 
 
 potiri A. & G. 249 and H. 421, I. ; 410, 
 
 a. V. 3. 
 
 3. Abl. absolute, noun and 
 
 partic.; how translated? 1 A. & G. 255 and H. 431 and 1, 2. 
 
 N. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. conciliare, to bring together, to win over. 
 
 2. exercitii, abl. sing, masc., an exercised and disciplined body, 
 
 an army. 
 
 3. fidem, accus. sing, fern., faith, a promise, a promise oj 
 
 protection, protection. 
 
 1 Study very carefully examples under this rule iu grammars. 
 
 7 
 
98 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. firm-us, -a, -um,Jirm, strong. 
 
 5. jusjurandum (really two words, jus and jurandum), an oath. 
 
 6. oratione, abl. sing, fern., a speech, oration. 
 
 7. populus, a people. 
 
 8. poteiis, being able, powerful. 
 
 9. sperare, to hope, expect. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Sibi eorum regua conciliat. (b) Regna, quse Galli multi 
 obtinuerant, ab Orgetorige occupantur. (c) Potentissimi populi exer- 
 citu magno regnis totlns Gallic potni possunt. (d) Se omnia regna 
 occupaturos csse arbitrantur. (e) Ills persuasit ut Helvetii et Se. 
 quani et Hsedm populi potentissimi h'rmissiinique essent. 
 
 2. (a) Fmperio conciliilto, in alias partes fininm milites raitteban- 
 tur. (b) Efi legatione, quani ille suscepit, tres GalJi nobiles concilia- 
 bantur. (c) Orgetorix conjurationem fecit, ut ipse quam maximum 
 immeruin regnorum occuparet. (d) Ad amicitiam confirmandam inter 
 se fidem et jusjuraudum dabant. 
 
 3. (a) [ntiuenced by these speeches, the men give a promise to one 
 another, (b) He was winning the kingdom for them with his army. 
 (c) By his speech that (man) influences the nobility, (d) The nobil- 
 ity having (first) been influenced, he persuaded (he common people 
 to wage war with their neighbors. 
 
 4. (a) Because they were wandering widely, they thought they 
 "had very narrow boundaries, (b) Orgetorix, by whose speech the 
 Sequanian and Hoeduan were influenced, was very rich, (c) Having 
 given a pledge (a promise having been given), he proves that it is 
 very easy to get possession of all Gaul. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 I. Difference in meaning between ill! and hi. 2. Different mean- 
 ings of confirmare. 3. Different ways of translating the abl. abso- 
 lute. 4. Two cases with dare. 5. Constructions after persuadere. 
 6. After potiri. 7. After posse. 8. All forms of posse which pupil 
 should now know. 9. To what the endings of comp. and sup. are 
 added. 
 
LESSON XXIV. 99 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Mori- 
 bus suis Orgetorigem ex vinclls causam dicere coege- 
 runt. Damnatum pcenam sequi oportebat, ut igni 
 cremaretur. Die constituta causae dictionis, Orgetorix 
 ad judicium omnem suam familiam, ad hominum milia 
 decem, undique coegit, et omnes clientes obaeratosque 
 suos, quorum magnum numerum habeBat, eodem con- 
 duxit. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. res, thing, fact, conspiracy; (a) nom. sing, fora., formed by 
 the addition of -B to the stein re- ; cf. re-bus XVIII. , re-s XIX., and 
 XVIII. Obs. 1. (b) Note the position of ea, and cf. his rebus 
 XVIII., eas res XIX., eo itinere XX., hac oratione XXIII. Wliat 
 is the position of the demonstrative adj. in all these cases ? Is this 
 always the position of the adj.? see Text. 
 
 2. coegerunt ; see A r ocabulary for appropriate meaning : (a) pf. 
 ind. act. 3d plur. ; cf. constituerunt XVIII. ; (5) mSribus, the first 
 word in the sentence, is best considered an abl. of cause; cf. XVI. N. 
 2 (b) ; (c) here followed by the accus. (Orgetorigem) and inf. 
 (dicere), though usually verbs of urging take ut with the subjv. ; cf. 
 occuparet XX. N. 5 (b). 
 
 3 oportebat, it was necessary ; (a) this verb is used only in 3d 
 sing, and cannot have the name of a person as its snbj., i. e. it is imper- 
 sonal ; (5) its subj. is the clause damnatum pcenam sequi, pcenam 
 being the subj. of sequi ; cf. XX. N. 5 (b), XXII. N. 3 (b) ; (c) dam- 
 natum, with Orgetorigem understood, is the obj. of sequi. Why 
 could not damnatum agree with poenam? (r/) ut igni cremaretur is 
 a noun in apposition with pcenam ; in what case then ? (e) sequi is, in 
 form, a pres. inf. pass, of the 3d con jug. ; cf. potiri, 4th conjng., XXIII. 
 
100 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. coegit : (a) note "that in the clause of which this is the princi- 
 pal verb the words are arranged i' 1 g'' ll ps, thus : die-constituta- 
 causae-dictioiiis, omiiem-suam-familiam, ad-hominum-milia-de- 
 cem ; (b) for die, cf. tempore XX.I. ; the nom. sing, is dies, cf. res 
 1; (c) constitute here limits die as a simple attributive adj., on the 
 appointed day ; (d) dictionis is a gen. depending on die, while 
 causae depends on dictionis; stem? cf. profectionem, legationem 
 XIX., oratione XXIII.; (e) for hominum milia, cf. milia pas- 
 suum XVII. What kind of a gen. is passuum? see VI. N. 3 (d). 
 
 5. conduxit : (a) pf. ind. act. 3d sing. 3d conjug. ; (b) pres. inf. 
 act. conduce're (cf. dicgre above), pres. stem ducS-; (V) pf. stem 
 may be found by cutting off -it in pf. ind. act. 3d sing, (thus, condux- 
 it), or by adding -B to the pres. stem less characteristic e, thus, dues = 
 dux; cf. XVIII. N. 2, Obs. 2; (d) the supine stem may be found 
 by cutting off the ending of the pf. pass, partic. or supine (thus, 
 induct-us XIII.), or by adding -t to the pres. stem less e ; (e) cf. 
 face -re XVIII., fee -it XIII., fact-u XXII., and note that the pf. 
 stem is, in this word, formed in a different way. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Every form of the verb must have as its base some one of the 
 three stems, pres., pf., or supine. 
 
 2. In any conjug., the pres. stem may be found by cutting off -re 
 of the pres. inf. act, the pf. stein by cutting off -it of the pf. ind. act. 
 3d sing., and the supine stem by cutting off -us of the nom. sing, 
 rnasc. in pf. pass, partic. 
 
 3. The stems of the 3d conjng. must in many cases be memo- 
 rized. It is well, however, to remember that the pf. and supine stems 
 may often be found by one of two methods : (a) by adding to the 
 pres. stem less e, -s for the pf. stem and -t for the supine stem, or ( b) 
 by adding -t as before for the supine stem and by changing the first 
 vowel of the pres. stem, and dropping the characteristic vowel, for the 
 pf. stem ; * with the last method, cf. Eng. fall, fell, fallen. 
 
 1 It is not asserted here that the pf. stem is formed from the pres. stem. The 
 statement simply suggests to the beginner an easy and practical method of finding 
 
LESSON XXIV. 101 
 
 4. In the 3d conjug. the pres. inf. pass, ends in -I, before which -e 
 of the pres. stem is lost. 
 
 5. In the Lat. as in the Eng. sentence, words are arranged in 
 groups, and should be closely connected in thought. When read 
 aloud, the words in the same group should be pronounced together, 
 almost like one compound word, thus, die-constituta-causee dic- 
 tioiiis, on-the-day-appointed-for-pleading-the-case. 
 
 6. The demonstrative adj. precedes its noun; other adj. very often 
 follow their nouns. 1 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Impersonal verbs . A. & G. 145, 146, d. H. 298. 
 
 2. Substantive clauses A. & G. 329, 29, c. H. 540, II. III., 42, \. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. cogere (compounded of con, together, and agere, to drire, 
 lead), coegit pf. ind. act., coactus' 2 pf. pass, partic., to drive together, 
 to compel. 
 
 2. conducere, conduxit pf. ind. act., conductus pf. pass, partic., 
 to bring together, to hire. 
 
 3. cremare, to burn. 
 
 4. damnare, to condemn. 
 
 5. decem, indec. numeral, ten. 
 
 6. dictionis (from dicere), a saying , pleading . 
 
 1 . dies (stem die-), masc., sometimes fern., day, time. 
 
 8. enuntiare, to say out or openly, make known. 
 
 9. eodem, adv., to the same place. 
 
 the pf. stem when the pres. stem is known. The introduction of the verb stem, on 
 which no form of the verb is directly based, would be confusing and unnecessary at 
 this point. 
 
 1 Some may expect the statement here that the adj. commonly follows its noun. 
 In view of the fact, however, that in the first four chapters of Csesar the attributive 
 adj. is used forty-one times before its noun and only nineteen times after, the state- 
 ment would be out of place here. 
 
 ' 2 For the change of coagtus to coactus, see A. & G. 11, / 1 ; II. 33, 1. 
 
102 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 10. familia, a body of slaves, household, retinue. 
 
 11. indicium, information. 
 
 12. judicium, a judgment, a trial, a court of justice. 
 
 13. nioribus, abl. plur. masc., customs, manners, character. 
 
 14. obseratus, obaerati gen., one bound to service for debt, a 
 debtor. 
 
 15. oportet, impers. verb, it is necessary, it behooves. 
 
 16. pcena, punishment, penalty. 
 
 17. sequi, pres. inf. of dep. verb, to follow ; pf. partic. secutus, 
 having followed. 
 
 18. vinculum or vinclum, that which binds, hence, a rope, chain, 
 fetter. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Enuntiant Orgetorigem conjuration em facere. (b) Ex vin- 
 clls euin causain dlcere oportet. (r) Omnis ejns familia ad judicium 
 conducebatur. (d) Moribus Helvetiorum damnatos igni cremari 
 oportebat. (e) Orgetorix, quod nobilissimus erat et ditissimus, mag- 
 num clientium immerum habebat. 
 
 2. (a) Arbitratur se liominum quam maximum numerum con- 
 ducturum esse. b) Flebat ut illo anno frater Divitiaci principatum 
 obtineret. (c) Fines sunt in multas partcs divisi. (d) Dumnorix 
 Haeduus cui Orgetorix filiam in matrimonium dat, reguum occupare 
 non potest. 
 
 3. (a) There was no doubt that Orgetorix could bring together 
 ten thousand men. (b) A great part of the clients and debtors of 
 Orgetorix were many miles distant from court, (c) At the appointed 
 time the forces of these men try the same thing, (d) They fix the 
 day for the pleading of the case. 
 
 4. (a) They hope that they can obtain the power of their states by 
 means of their army, (b) He himself, when that fact was made 
 known (that thing having been announced), was about to bring together 
 ten thousand soldiers, (c) Considering (in proportion to) his high 
 birth, Orgetorix thinks that his power (potentia) is not great, (d) The 
 Gauls whom he persuaded to make a conspiracy were very high-born. 
 
LESSON XXV. 103 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Two meanings of cogere. 2. The pf. stem in 2d and 3d con- 
 jug. 3. The supine stein in 1st and 3d conjug. 4. The ending 
 -t, two uses. 5. Impers. verbs. 6. Clauses as nouns in Eng. and 
 in Lat. 7. The expressions for ten thousand men, ten thousand, 
 paces. 8. Proper pauses in reading a Lat. sentence. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Per eos, ne causam diceret, se eripuit. Cum civitas 
 ob earn rem incitata armis jus suum exsequi conaretur, 
 multitudinemque hominum ex agrls magistratus coge- 
 rent, Orgetorix mortuus est ; neque abest suspitio, ut 
 Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse sibi mortem consciverit. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. ne . . . diceret, that he might not plead : (a) subjv. of purpose, 
 expressing purpose of eripuit; (b) ne introduces a clause of negative 
 purpose ; cf. positive purpose XV I II. N. 13 (d) ; (c) tense and analysis 
 of form ? 
 
 2. jus, the law: (a) gen. juris ; so tempore XXT. is from nom. 
 sing, tempus, and moribus XXIV. is from nom. sing, mos ; (b} neut. 
 gender, like tempore ; (c) in all of tlies:; words s of the stem is changed 
 to r when it stands between two vowels ; cf. erat for es-at. 
 
 3. magistratus, the magistrates: (Y/) nom. plur. masc. of a -u stem, 
 for full form magistratu es ; cf. cultu for cultu-e VI. ; (b) the u is 
 long here because it is a contract of u and e ; in the nom. sing., which 
 is formed by adding -B to the stem, the u is short. 
 
104 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. mortuus est, he died or is dead : (a) in form a pf. ind. pass. ; 
 (b) formed by the union of the pf. pass, parfcic. and the pres. ind. of 
 the verb esse ; cf. appellatus erat XX. N. 4 (b). (c) Why is it here 
 translated like an act. ? 
 
 5. suspitio, suspicion: (a) nom. sing. fern. ; (b] stem suspition- ; 
 cf. septentriones X., conjurationem Xlii., oratione XXI II., dic- 
 tionis XXIV. ; (c) cf. fortitudiiiis, longitudinem, latitudinem 
 XVII., multitudinem, above, which weaken the ending -on of stem to 
 -in before an additional syllable, but form nom. in -o, thus, multitude. 
 What likeness of form have the four words just mentioned? (d) What 
 seems to be the force of the nom. sing, ending -tio ? what of the end- 
 ing -tudo ? 
 
 6. arbitrantur : (0) ind. mode, introduced by ut, which here means 
 as. (b) What mode follows ut when it means that, so that, or in order 
 that? 
 
 7. mortem : (a) nom. sing, mors ; cf. pars X. N. 2, oriens, mons; 
 (Z) all the above words are, strictly speaking, -i stems, but drop the -i 
 as a rule in the sing., and become practically dental stems. 
 
 8. consciverit . (a) pf. subjv. act., of the 4th conjug. in form ; (b) 
 introduced by quin ; cf. non esse dubium quin . . . possent XXI I., 
 and note that in both cases quin is preceded by a negative. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The so called 4th decl. is composed of -u stems, which have in 
 general the suffixes of the 3d decl., but in several cases contract these 
 suffixes with -u of the stem. 1 
 
 2. All mute stems (see Gram. Less.), and masc. and fern, -i stems, 
 -u stems and -e stems, and almost all masc. stems of the 2d decl., 
 form the nom. sing, by adding -s to the stem. 
 
 3. In nouns, the nom. ending -tio names the action ; the endings 
 -tas and -tudo, the quality. 
 
 4. The conj. ut when followed by the ind. means as or when; fol- 
 lowed by the subjv., that, so that, in order that. 
 
 1 See Iloby, 300. 
 
LESSON XXV. 
 
 105 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The mutes . . . . A. & G. 3. 
 
 2. Change of s to r . . A. & G. 11, a. 
 
 3. Quantity of contracts . A. & G. 18, c. 
 
 4. The 4th decl. . . . A. & G. 68, manus 
 
 and lacus, and 
 both notes in con- 
 nection. 
 
 5. The 3d decl. ; muse, in 
 
 -os, and neut. with 
 
 gen.in-urisand-oria A. & G. 48, d; 49 
 corpus, and 50. 
 
 6. The 3d decl.; sum- 
 
 mary of -i stems 
 
 7. The 3d decl.; nouns 
 
 with nom. in -o . 
 
 8. Negative purpose . 
 
 A. &G.51; 53,a,b, 
 54, 1. 
 
 A. & G. 48, a, b ; 
 
 leo and virgo. 
 A. & G. 317. 
 
 H. 3, .II. 5. 
 H. 31, 1. 
 
 H. 23 and 2; 576, I. 
 H. 116, fructus and 
 
 foot-note 4. 
 
 H. 61, flos, jus, and 
 corpus. 
 
 II. 65, 1, 2, 3. 
 
 H. 60, leo, virgo, 
 
 andl.l),2),3),4. 
 H. 497, II. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. arma, nom. plur. neut., armor, arms. 
 
 2. consciscere, cSnscivit pf. hid. act., conscitus pf. pass, partic., 
 
 to decree, determine. 
 
 3. eripere, eripuit pf. hid. act., ereptus, pf. pass, partic., to snatch 
 
 away. 
 
 4. exsequi, to follow out, follow up, enforce. 
 
 5. incitare, to urge on, incite. 
 
 6. jus, neut., juris gen., right, law, justice ; cf. judicium XX TV. 
 
 7. magistrates, magistrates gen., a civil office, a civil officer, 
 
 magistrate. 
 
 8. mori, rarely moriri, mortuus pf. partic., to die. 
 
 9. mors, fern., death. 
 
 10. ne, corij., that . . . not, not to, lest ; after words of fearing, that. 
 
 11. neque or nee, adv. and conj., and not; neque . . . neque, 
 
 neither . . . nor. 
 
106 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12. ob, prep, with accus., on account of; in composition, in ike 
 
 way of, against. 
 
 13. suspitio or suspicio, fern., suspitionis gen., suspicion. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Magistratus conjuratione incitati jus civitatis exsequi conati 
 suut. (b) Non (lul)iuni est qum Orgetorix multitudinem hominum 
 coegerit. (c) Orgetorix sibi inortein conscivit, ne civitas jus suum ex- 
 sequeretnr. (d) Dictum est civitatem incitatam ob conata nobilitatis 
 rnultitudinem hominum cogere. (e) Helvetii arbitral! sunt Orgetori- 
 gem incitatum ob cam rein sibi mortem conscisccre. 
 
 2. (a) Orgetorix, quern esse nobilem dictum est, mortuus est. 
 
 (b) Is, quod plebi maxime acceptus erat, maximam conjurationem fecit, 
 (e) Eoruin exercitus omnibus exereitibus praestabat. (d) Persuadet 
 Gallo cujus pater ft seuatu amicus appcllatus est. 
 
 3. (a) A multitude of men from the fields was being collected by the 
 magistrates, (b) The Helvetii think that suspicion is not wanting. 
 
 (c) On account of the death of Orgetorix, the nobility did not try to 
 seize the supreme power of Gaul, (d) Brave men, aroused by the 
 attempt of the nobility, are about to enforce the law by arms. 
 
 4. (a) That state extended a hundred miles in length, (b) Orget- 
 orix determined to bring together the largest possible number of men. 
 (c) The magistrates persuaded the common people that it was fitting 
 for Orgetorix to plead his cause, (d) It is not very easy to compel 
 the richest man of the state to plead his cause. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The sign of the pf. subjv. 2. The formation of the pf. ind. pass. ; 
 the plpf. ind. pass. 3. Comparison of the declension of magistratus 
 and Ignis. 4. Liquid stems. 5. Difference in case of the ending -o 
 and in quantity of the ending -o 1 in the 2d and 3d decl. 6. Two mean- 
 ings of ut. 7. Peculiarity of decl. in monosyllables with nom. sing, 
 ending -s preceded by a consonant. 8. Eng. derivative endings with 
 the same meanings as -tio, -tas, -tudo. 
 
 1 It has been thought best to mark as long only those vowels which are known 
 to b:> long invariably. Final O in the 3d dec!, is usually long. 
 
LESSON XXVI. 107 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 REVIEW of LESSONS XIII. to XXV. inclusive. 
 
 The student who thoroughly masters the first twenty-six lessons of this book 
 may congratulate himself upon having learned the most difficult things about the 
 forms of the language. There is nothing else in the forms of the language so 
 hard as the 3d decl., the 3d conjug., and the decl. of pron., and nothing more 
 necessary in using the language than a thorough knowledge of these three things. 
 Remember that you will pay dearly for any neglect in learning the 3d decl., the 
 3d conjug., and the decl. of prou. Read the note at the head of Lesson XII. 
 
 1. TEXT. CESAR'S "GALLIC WAR," BK. I., CHAP 2, 3, 4. 
 
 1, 2, 3. Follow implicitly the directions given in XI I. under 
 "Text," 1, 2, and 3. 
 
 4. Write out a grammatical analysis of the material of the text 
 of Chap. 2, 3, and 4, under the following heads : (1) noun forms and 
 adj. forms, classifying separately in both sing, and plur. () norn. 
 forms, (&) gen. forms, (c) dat. forms, (c?) accus. forms, (e) abl. forms ; 
 (2) verb forms, classifying according to the verb diagram in " Word 
 Review " below, and separating by hyphens the steins, tense signs, 
 and pers. endings. 
 
 5. The same as in XCL 
 
 6. Classify by genders the 3d decl. nouns given under the "Word 
 Review," and, using the last two letters of the nom. sing., make a 
 list of the masc., fern., and neut. endings of the 3d decl. which have 
 been used thus far. 
 
 2. GRAMMAR LESSON- 
 
 1. Characteristics of decl. . A. & G. 32. H. 47. 
 
 2. The 2d or o decl. ; nouns 
 
 in -us A. & G. 38, ser- H. 51, servus, also 
 
 vus, also N. 2, 1), 2), 3). 
 near bottom of 
 p. 16. 
 
108 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. Adj. of 1st and 2d decl. . A.&G.81,bon- II. 143, bon-us, 
 
 us, -a, -um. -a, -um. 
 
 4. The mutes A. & G. 3. H. 3, IL 5. 
 
 5. Change of s tor . . . A. & G. 11, a. H. 31, ]. 
 
 6. Quantity of contracts . . A. & G. 18, c. H. 23 and 2 ; 576, 
 
 I. 
 
 7. The 3d dec!.; mute stems 1 A. & G. 44-47 H. 55-59 inclusive. 
 
 inclusive. 
 
 8. The 3d dec!.; liquid stems 
 
 and stems in -a . . . A. & G. 48-50 H. 60, 61, 154, 
 inclusive, 86, trlsti-or, -us. 
 meli-or, -us. 
 
 9. The 3d decl.; -i steins . A. & G. 51-55 II. 62-65 inclusive, 
 
 inclusive, 84. 154, trist-is, -e. 
 
 10. The 3d dec].; rules for 
 
 gender A. & G. 65, a, II. 99, 100, 1, 3, 
 
 b, c. 105,107,1,110, 
 
 1, 111, 115, 2. 
 
 11. The 4th decl A. & G. 68, ma- H. 116, fructus 
 
 nus and lacus, and foot-note 4. 
 
 and both N. in 
 
 connection. 
 
 12. Dec], of is, ille, ipse, and 
 
 qui A. &G. 101, 103. H. 186, III. IV. 
 
 V., 187. 
 
 13. The reflexive; form and 
 
 use A. & G. 98, c, H. 184, 448, 449. 
 
 196, 197. 
 
 14. The use of the demonstra- 
 
 tive as pers. pron. or 
 
 adj A. & G. 195. H. 438, 1. 
 
 15. Comparison of adj. and 
 
 adv A. & G. 81, b, H. 162, 306. 
 
 89, 92. 
 
 1 In this and the two following references, the pupil should learn the paradigms 
 and enough of the fine print beneath them to enable him to give the stem of each 
 noun or adj., and the method of forming the nom. from the stem. 
 
LESSON XXVI. 100 
 
 16. Force of per in composi- 
 
 _tion A. 86 G. 93, d. II. 170, I. 
 
 17. A or ab and ex . . . A. & G. 153. II. 434, I. 
 
 18. Altera and alia . . . A. & G. 203, a, H. 459. 
 
 b. 
 
 19. Position of monosyllabic 
 
 prep A. & G. 345, a. H. 565, 3. 
 
 20. Nouns in -tas ; formation 
 
 and meaning . . . A. & G. 163, e. H. 325. 
 
 21. The characteristics of the 
 
 four conjug A. & G. 122 and H. 201. 
 
 a. 
 
 22. The impf. tense . . . A. & G. 115, a, H. 468. 
 
 2,6. 
 
 23. The nature and use of 
 
 partic A. & G. 25, e, II. 200, IV. and 
 
 289, 186. foot-note ; 438 
 
 and 1. 
 
 24. The gerundive ; form and 
 
 meaning A. & G. 113, d. H. 248, 543. 
 
 25. The gerund, supine, and 
 
 inf. ; form and use . . A. & G. 112, d, II. 200, I. II. III., 
 
 114, a, b. 538 547. 
 
 23. The supine stem . . . A. & G. 125. H. 256 and 1. 
 
 27. Composition of posse, 
 
 and form in pres. ind. 
 3d sing, and plur., and 
 
 in pres. partic. . . . A. & G. 120, b. H. 290, II. and N. 
 
 1, 2. 
 
 28. Impersonal verbs ... A. & G. 145, H. 298. 
 
 146, d. 
 
 29. The pretl. noun or adj. . A. & G. 183, H. 362, 363. 
 
 184, 185. 
 
 30. Quam with sup. degree . A. & G. 93, b. H. 170, 2. 
 
 31. Words used with partitive 
 
 gen A. & G. 216, a, 
 
 1, 2, 3, 4. H. 397, 1, 2, 3, 4. 
 
110 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3.2. The dat. with compound 
 
 verbs A. & G. 228. H. 386 and 1. 
 
 33. The dat. with adj. . . . A. & G. 234. H. 391. 
 
 34. Subj. of the inf. . . . A. & G. 240, /. H. 523, I. 
 
 35. Accus. of time and space A. & G. 255, H. 379. 
 
 257. 
 
 36. Prep, with the abl.. . . A. & G. 152, b, H. 434, 435. 
 
 c. 
 
 37. The abl. of cause . . . A. & G. 245. H. 413, 416. 
 
 38. The abl. of agent . . . A. & G. 246. H. 415, I. 
 
 39. The abl. and gen. with 
 
 potiri A. & G. 249 and II. 421, L, 410, V. 
 
 a. 3. 
 
 40. The abl. of time . . . A. & G. 256. H. 429. 
 
 41. The abl. absolute . . . A. & G. 255 and H. 431, and 1, 2, 
 
 a; also N. 4. 
 
 42. The complementary inf. . A. & G. 271. H. 533. 
 
 43. The inf. after verbs of 
 
 saying and thinking . A. & G., Read N. H. 535, L, 1, 2, 3, 
 on p. 247, 522. 
 24 8; 335, read 
 remark ; 336. 
 
 44. Substantive clauses . . A. & G. 329, 29, II. 540, II. III., 
 
 c. 42, N. 
 
 45. Purpose clauses, positive, 
 
 negative, and object .A. & G. 317, H. 497 and II., 
 331 and a. 498 and II. 
 
 3. 'WORD REVIEW. 
 
 Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Chap. 1, 2, 3, of 
 Caesar's " Gallic War." 
 
 1. VERBS. 
 
 The form given is the pres. inf. act. (pass, in form, of course, in dep. verbs). 
 accipere adficere bellare cogere 
 
 adducere arbitral! coemere comparare 
 
LESSON XXVI. 
 
 Ill 
 
 coriarf 
 
 dan; 
 
 incitare 
 
 persuadere 
 
 conciliate 
 
 deligere 
 
 inducere 
 
 posse 
 
 conducere 
 
 ducere 
 
 inferre 
 
 potiri 
 
 conficere 
 
 enuntiare 
 
 moil 
 
 prae stare 
 
 confirmare 
 
 eripere 
 
 occupare 
 
 pro bare 
 
 consciscere 
 
 exlre 
 
 oportere 
 
 proficiscl 
 
 constituere 
 
 exsequi 
 
 patere 
 
 sequi 
 
 cremare 
 
 facere 
 
 perficere 
 
 sperare 
 
 damnare 
 
 habere 
 
 permovere 
 
 suscipere 
 
 2. NOUNS HAVING -A STEMS. 
 
 amlcitia 
 
 familia fllia 
 
 gloria 
 
 Jura pcena 
 
 
 3. -0 
 
 STEMS. 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 agrura, accus. 
 
 sing, fill us 
 
 
 locus 
 
 masc. 
 
 Hseduus 
 
 
 matrimonium 
 
 annus 
 
 imperium 
 
 
 obseratus 
 
 arma, nom. 
 
 plur. indicium 
 
 
 populus 
 
 neut. 
 
 judicium 
 
 
 Rhenus 
 
 bienriium 
 
 juraentum 
 
 
 Rhodanus 
 
 conatum 
 
 Lemannus 
 
 
 vincalura (vinclum) 
 
 
 AJj. (having also 
 
 fern, stems 
 
 in -a). 
 
 alius 
 
 ditissimus, 
 
 sup. 
 
 Helvetius 
 
 alter!, nom. 
 
 plur. dubius 
 
 
 latus 
 
 masc. 
 
 duceuti, nom. plur. 
 
 rnaximus 
 
 alt us 
 
 masc. 
 
 
 multus (plurimus) 
 
 angustus 
 
 fmitimus 
 
 
 totus 
 
 cupidus 
 
 firm us 
 
 
 
 4. THIRD DECL. 
 Nouns. 
 
 auctoritas, fern. civitas, fern. 
 
 Catamantalcedes, masc. bij mean- conjuratio, fern. 
 
 ing 1 consul, masc. by meaning 
 
 1 Remember that names of males are masc., and names of females fern., without 
 regard to endings. 
 
112 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 cupiditas, fern. mllle, neut. 
 
 dictio, fern. mons, masc. by exception 
 
 dolor, muse. i\\oYS,fem. 
 
 Dumnorix. masc. by meaning inos, muse. 
 
 fortitiido, fern. multitude, fern. 
 
 frater, masc. by meaning nobilitas,jfem. 
 
 homo, \io\m\\isgen., sing., masc. oratio, fern. 
 
 by meaning Orgetorix, masc. by meaning 
 
 itinere, abl. sing., neut. by excep- pater, masc. by meaning 
 
 tion pfix, fern. 
 
 jus, juris gen., sing. neut. plc-bs, yw. 
 
 jusjurandum, neut. profectio, fern. 
 
 latitude, yew. suspltio, fern. 
 
 legatio, fern. tempus, temporis gen., sing, neut 
 longitude, Jem. 
 
 Adj. 
 facil-is, -e potGns, masc., fern., and neut. 
 
 5. -U STEMS. 
 
 exercitus lacus magistratus passus piincipatus senatus 
 
 6. -E STEMS. 
 
 dies fides res 
 
 7. INDECL. NUMERAL ADJ. 
 centum decem octoginta quadraginta 
 
 8. PKON. 
 
 idem, nom. sing. neut. ille, nom. sing. masc. 
 
 9. PHEP. 
 
 ante opud ex (e) ob pro 
 
 10. ADV. 
 
 eodem item maxime non satis 
 
 facile late minus, comp. quam undique 
 
 11. CONJ. 
 ac (for atqne) antem Tie neque quin ut 
 
LESSON XXVI. 
 
 113 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 X 
 
 =0 
 
 ._ ,-ij 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 >_ " 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 "V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 C5 
 
 
 
 o 'C 
 
 P-i O 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PL, 
 
 
 
 
 
 +f 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rS 
 
 M 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 .; 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 z-t 
 
 Tj 
 
 
 ia 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 tS 
 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 ~ to" "^ 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nV S 3 
 
 
 =J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 5 
 
 If, 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 1 rf CO CO 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? CO 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 '3 ~0 tj 
 
 
 
 
 
 /, 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^cj 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 1 d 1 d p :5 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .^ ^* 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 T3 -T3 T3 -T3 
 
 
 -73 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ P! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -S a) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 -t- 3 -*J 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q 
 
 5 
 
 
 rt ^ ;i 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 S 
 
 U i. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "fc^ 
 
 TC 
 
 i 
 
 
 -^ ^ ' , 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 'f^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 c 
 
 .^ ICU ' I 
 
 5 
 
 O 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 K 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ( 
 (J 
 
 fl 
 
 bi 
 
 ' 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 13 
 
 if 
 
 C 
 
 3 
 
 -5 
 
 -u '-2 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 K 
 
 *-< A 
 
 ^ lo 
 
 > 
 
 v 
 'g 
 
 H 
 
 jH 
 
 BL> 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 i 
 
 (JONJUGAT 
 
 
 INDICATI 
 
 || 
 
 SUBJUNC'l 
 
 _o 
 
 :" 
 ^; 
 
 -O 
 
 -5 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 c/T 
 
 c 
 
 55 
 
 C 
 
 
 SUPINES, 
 
 
 CO ti. 
 cu O 
 
 
 "j| ^ rt 
 
 - 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 "- 
 
 
 3J l(U 3 3 
 
 ^0 ^ ^ ^2 
 
 ^; J5 J5 _s 
 
 
 _^ 
 
 
 a 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ CO 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 Ilo ? ? 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 S "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co a 
 
 O 
 
 c^ 
 
 
 irf 1 '"* rC& I'"* 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 Jj 
 
 
 irt r; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "" ^3 
 
 H 
 
 <: 
 
 
 
 S S 
 
 a cu CD cu 
 
 
 S 
 
 S" 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5e^ 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 O o O i; 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ CO 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jO 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 50 
 
 ^r 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a i5 
 
 
 ,| 
 
 
 
 -5 
 
 
 r 
 
 a S 
 
 
 
 '1 
 
 
 *-* ^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 7 _/> 
 
 
 ^J, 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 *5 ( 
 
 
 
 
 ci id 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 irt 
 
 
 
 ed 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 -E 
 
 
 3 
 
 lo 
 
 
 
 
 V) U 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 a w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 ^ o3 
 
 
 
 IM 
 
 
 !^ 
 
 
 |3 
 
 
 . "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hi 
 
 
114 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Write the gen. sing, and gen. plur. of all the 3d decl. nouns 
 in the " Word Review." (b) Give the gender and write the gen. sing, 
 and gen. plur. of the following noni. sing. : ars, avis, ovile, egestas, 
 munitio, similitude, mater, (c) Write the noni. sing, of the fol- 
 lowing stems, and explain its formation in each case : nee-, palud-, 
 pont-, praetor-, ortu-, fulmin-, turpitudin-, acie-. 
 
 2. (Oil Chap. 2.) () The Helvetii, influenced by Orgetorix, deter- 
 mined to go out of their own territory into the territory of their 
 neighbors, (b) Orgetorix easily persuaded the Helvetii, since he was 
 the highest-born and richest among them, (c) The province which 
 the Romans possessed was next to Helvetia, (d) For this reason the 
 Helvetii were wandering very widely, and were often able to wage war 
 upon the rest of the Gauls, (e) Mount Jura, by which the Sequani 
 were separated from the Helvetii, is very high. (/) High-born 
 (men) are obtaining that part of Gaul which is hemmed in by the 
 mountains, (g) The Helvetii do not think that Orgetorix will make 
 (is about to make) a conspiracy. 
 
 3. (On ('hap. 3.) (a) Orgetorix, having influenced the common 
 people (the common people having been influenced), tried to persuade 
 those who held the power in the neighboring states. (II) The Hel- 
 vetii made their plantings as large as possible so that they might have 
 a supply of grain, (c) The men whose fathers had held the kingly 
 power thought that it was easy to seize it for themselves, (d) These 
 (men) were not able to seize the kingly power which had often been 
 seized in Gaul, (e) Orgetorix gives a promise to Dmnnorix and hopes 
 that he himself will accomplish his attempts. (/) The Helvetii pre- 
 pare all those things which' pertain to accomplishing their under- 
 takings, (g) Peace and friendship were established by the Helvetii, 
 in order that they might have friends on their march. (Ji) They 
 think that by seizing the kingly power (the kingly power having 
 been seized) they can be more powerful. 
 
 4. (On Chap. 4.) (a) The man who was condemned pleaded his 
 own cause, (b) All the debtors to whom Orgetorix gives arms are 
 trying to rescue him. (c) Through many men the magistrates were 
 following up Orgetorix, that he might not wage war upon the state. 
 
LESSON XXVII. 115 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G-. I. 5, 1 through subeunda essent. 
 
 2. NOTES. 2 
 
 1. nihilo : -the abl. sing, in connection with the comp. minus in- 
 dicates how much less, and may be literally translated, less by nothing, 
 freely translated, nevertheless. 
 
 2. exeant : (a) pres. subjv. act. of verb exire ; cf. impf. subjv. 
 act. exlrent XIII.; (b) denotes purpose; (c) the clause ut . . 
 exeant is in apposition with id; cf. XXIV. N. 3 (d). 
 
 3. praeterquam : (a) a compound word made up of praeter, fur- 
 ther, and quam, than ; (b) id and erat are understood after it, and 
 the full sense is : they burned all the grain farther than (that was) 
 which, etc. 
 
 4. secum : (a) cum appended as in quibuscum ; cf. VIII. N. 4 
 (b) ; (b) meaning of se? why? 
 
 5. portaturi : (a) exact literal meaning? (b) ending and stem ? 
 (c) With what does it agree ? 
 
 6. reditionis : (a) the nom. is reditio, which names the action of 
 the verb redire, to go back; cf. dictio XXIV. ; (b) domum follows 
 it in sense and denotes the direction of the return ; without a prep, 
 just as in Eng. translation. 
 
 7. sublata : (a) pf. pass, parti c. of irreg. verb tollere ; (b) forma 
 what construction with spe ? cf. regno occupato XXIII. 
 
 8. subeunda : (a) from verb sublre ; (b) cf, for form and use, 
 XIX. N. 5. 
 
 1 B. G. I. 5 = Bellum Gallicunv Book L, Chapter 5. 
 
 2 Many difficulties not provided for in the Notes are fully met in the Vocabu- 
 laries, which must, of course, be consulted in translating the Text. 
 
116 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 9. essent : (a) for form, cf. esset XXII. N. 6 ; (b) why subjv. ? 
 (c) paratiores is a pred. adj. utter it; what case, then, and why? cf. 
 XX. N. 4 (d) ; (d) compare paratiores, and decline it in all genders. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1.. The abl. of degree of difference A. & G. 250. H. 423 and N. 1. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 In this and subsequent vocabularies the pf. hid. act. and pf. pass, partic. of all 
 3d conjug. and of all irreg. verbs, will be given. The ending of the gen. sing, 
 will also be given when the form of the nom. leaves the gen. in doubt. It is to 
 be understood that all nouns in -us are of the 2d decl. unless it is otherwise 
 stated ; 4th decl. nouns are comparatively few in Caesar. Only the nom. masc. of 
 adj. will be given. 
 
 1. aedificium, a building. 10. 
 
 2. comburere, combussit, com- 
 
 bustus, to burn up, to con- 1 1 . 
 sume. 12. 
 
 3. domus,-us, (has some forms of 
 
 the 2d decl.), fern., a house, a 13. 
 home. 
 
 4. duodecim (compounded of duo, 11. 
 
 two, and decem), indecl., 
 twelve. 15. 
 
 5. incendere, incendit, incen- 
 
 sus, to set Jire to ; cf. mean- 
 ing of comburere. 16. 
 
 6. jam, adv., at this time (as con- 17. 
 
 trasted with the past or fu- 18. 
 hire), already, at last. 
 
 7. nihilum, nothing ; nihil, the in- 19. 
 
 decl. form, is more common. 
 
 8. oppidum, a stronghold, a toicn. 
 
 9. paratus (pf. pass, partic. of pa- 20. 
 
 rare), prepared, ready. 21. 
 
 periculum, that which tests, a 
 peril. 
 
 portare, to carry. 
 
 post, prop, with accus., after, 
 behind. 
 
 prseterquam, ufa., further than, 
 beyond, besides. 
 
 privatus, belonging to an indi- 
 vidual, private. 
 
 quadringenti, adj., four hun- 
 dred ; cf. quadraginta, in- 
 decl., forty. 
 
 reditio, a going back, return. 
 
 spes, stem spe-, hope. 
 
 subire, subiit, subitus, irreg., 
 to go under or near, to undergo. 
 
 tollere, sustulit, sublatus, ir- 
 reg., to lift up, to remove, to 
 destroy. 
 
 ubi, when, where. 
 
 vicus, a group of houses, a vil- 
 lage, a street. 
 
LESSON XXVII. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Omnia oppida ab Helvetiis inceridebantur. (&) Ubi jam 
 paratl fueruut, earns, quos coemerant, multum frumentum portant. 
 (c) Orgetorix 11011 arbitratus est Hel^etios post suam mortem exlre 
 couaturos esse. (d) Helvetii, aedificiis combustis, alios domes occu- 
 pare conantur. (e) Oppida eorum numero duodecim igiii cremata 
 erant. 
 
 2. (a) All the grain was not carried with them, (ft) (There) were 
 four hundred villages in Helvetia, (c) The common people were 
 very ready to undergo all dangers, (d) The beasts of burden which 
 they had bought were dragging the carts. 
 
 3. (a) Orgetorix was ready to make a conspiracy. (J) When 
 Orgetorix had died, the Helvetii were, nevertheless, able to go out of 
 their territory. (c) They burned all their buildings, so that the 
 hope of returning home might be taken away, (d) Two years were 
 sufficient for preparing all these things. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The Lat. for nevertheless. 2. The Lat. meaning ready for. 
 3. The best Eng. equivalent for the abl. absolute in this lesson. 4. The 
 lit. translation of the gerundive in this lesson. 5. Verbs used thus 
 far which take a complementary inf. 6. Two words meaning when. 
 1. Compounds of sequi, facere, Ire, ferre, ducere, and capere used 
 thus far form and meaning. 8. Difference between Lat. for forty 
 and four hundred. 9. The difference between future act. and pf. 
 pass, partic. 10. The comparison of the adjective. 
 
118 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 5, trium mensium to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. jubent : (a) used with the accus. quemque, and inf. efferre, 
 they order each one to bear out ; (b) domo, from home ; used excep- 
 tionally without a prep.; the place from which regularly requires the 
 prep. ; cf, ex agris XXV., e finibus XXVII. 
 
 2. consilio : abl. sing, with usl, pf. partic. of uti, which takes 
 theabl.; cf. XIV. Obs. 10. 
 
 3. exustis ; note that this partic. means having been burned up, 
 while usi, above, means having used ; both end in -us in nom. sing. 
 How do you explain the difference of voice ? Why does not exustis 
 agree with the subj., as usi does ? 
 
 4. uti . . . proficiscantur, to set out : (a) pres. subjv. ; the -e of 
 the pres. stem is changed to a ; (b) the snbjv. of purpose may often be 
 best translated by the inf., which frequently denotes purpose in Eng. 
 
 5. Boios ; nom. plur. ? What other names of tribes are used in 
 this lesson ? How do you recognize them as names of peoples ? 
 
 6. oppugnarant : (a) contracted form of oppugnav-era-nt ; 
 (b} plpf. ind. act. of 1st conjug. ; cf. habuerat, 2d conjug., XX., in- 
 coluerant, 3d conjug., above. What is the tense sign in each case? 
 (c) formed on the pf. stem oppugnav-. 
 
 7. adsciscunt : (a) What is the obj. of this verb ? (b} receptos 
 agrees with Boios, from which it seems to be widely separated ; if, 
 however, the clauses qui . . . oppugnarant be read according to the 
 direction in XXIV. Obs. 4, and as a parenthetical statement, it will 
 be seen that the partic. is closely connected with its noun ; (c) re- 
 ceptos, though a partic., is well translated as an independent verb, 
 thus, they receive and attach to themselves ; so uti . . . usi . . . ex- 
 ustis . . . proficiscantur, to adopt, to burn up, and to set out. 
 
LESSON XXVIII. 119 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The sign of the pros, subjv. in the 3d con jug. is -a- 1 . 
 
 2. The pf. stem of the 1st conjug. may be found by adding v to 
 the pres. stem. 
 
 3. The plpf. ind. act. is, in all conjug., formed on the pf. stem, and 
 has the tense sign -era- 1 . 
 
 4. Purpose is regularly expressed by the Eng. inf., and the Lat. 
 purpose clause may often be best translated by an inf. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Loss of -v from pf. stem A. & G. 128, a. H. 235. 
 
 2. The partic. translated like 
 
 an independent verb . A. & G. 292, H. 549, 5. 
 Rein. 2 
 
 3. The pf. act. partic., and 
 
 how to supply its place A. & G. 113, c, H. 231, 1 ; 550, N. 
 
 N.; 290, d. 4. 
 
 4. Place from which . . . A. & G. 259, /. H. 412, I. 
 
 5. Domum and domo . . A. & G. 258. H. 412, II. 1 ; 380, 
 
 I. II. 2, 1). 
 
 6. Construction with jubgre A. & G. 330, 2 ; H. 534 2 and foot- 
 
 331, a. note 1 ; 535, II. 
 
 foot-note 1. 
 
 7. Special verbs with the abl. A. & G. 249. H. 421, I. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Proper names will not generally be given in these vocabularies hereafter. They 
 may be readily distinguished by their form and use. 
 
 1. adsciscere, -scivit, -scitus, food ; cibaria, neut. plur. as 
 
 to take to ones self, unite. noun, provisions. 
 
 2. cibarius, adj., pertaining to 3. consilium, a plan. 
 
 1 Remember that a is treated as short before nt and final -t. 
 
 2 Read examples carefully. 
 
120 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. efferre, extulit, elatus, to 11. quemque, accus. sing, masc., 
 
 bear out. each one, every one. 
 
 5. exurere, -ussit, -ustus, to 12. recipere, -cepit, -ceptus, to 
 
 burn up. take back, to receive ; se 
 
 6. jubere, j ussit, jussus, to recipere, to betake one's self, 
 
 order. to retreat. 
 
 7. mensis, -is, masc. by excep- 13. socius, an ally. 
 
 tioiij a month. 14. transire, transiit, trausitus, 
 
 8. molere, moluit, molitus, to to go across. 
 
 grind. 15. una, adv., together. 
 
 9. NoricuB,qft/ieNorici,Noric. 10. uti, usus, to use ; takes abl. 
 10. oppugnare, to jight against, 
 
 to storm. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Boil ab Helvetils receptl sunt. (1} Helvetil, omnibus rebus 
 paratis, proficiscuntur. (c) Boil qui in Galliam a Germanifi vagfitl 
 erant amici appellfibantur. (d) Persuaserunt f'liiitimis ut, vicis incen- 
 sis, de fiuibus exirent. 
 
 2. (a) The Helvetii are about to carry with them meal (sufficient) 
 for three months. (b) The Tilling! attempt the same (thing-), 
 (c) They collected all their men, so as to be able to wage war upon 
 their neighbors. (d) They are about to use the carts which they 
 have prepared, (e) They order all the soldiers to obtain their own 
 provisions. 
 
 3. (a) Those who used to dwell (were dwelling) across the Rhine 
 are dwell ing in Gaul. (b) Noreia had been stormed by the Boil, 
 (c) The Boii, after wandering in many places and storming one large 
 town, are at length the allies of the Helvetii. (d) The Helvetii prove 
 that it is fitting for the Latobrigi to adopt the same plan. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Difference in form and meaning of uti and uti. 2. The best 
 translation for mensium. 3. Whether jubent has two objects or 
 one. 4. The comparative frequency of the use of the partic. in Eng. 
 and Lat. 5. Why the word for home omits the prep. 6. The 
 names of peoples with nom. ending -I in text so far ; with norn. end- 
 ing -se. 1. The names of countries and towns ending in -a. 
 
LESSON XXIX. 121 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 6, through vado transitur, 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. erant, there were ;' the Eng. expletive there, used to take the 
 place of a subj. placed elsewhere, has no corresponding word in Lat. 
 
 2. duo; limits itinera, ways ; peculiar in form; see Gram. Less. 
 
 3. possent: (a) for form, see XXII. N. 7 (a), (b) Why is 
 itineribus abl. ? (c) May the translation of any Lat. word in this 
 clause be properly omitted in Eng. ? 
 
 4. unum ; neut. sing, limiting the Lat. word for ivay, to be sup- 
 plied in thought. 
 
 5. qua ; here an adv. meaning where, not a rel. pron. 
 
 6. ut . . . possent, so that they could: (a) the clause expresses 
 the result (not purpose) of mons impendebat. the mountain was 
 overhanging ; (b) the subj. is perpaucl, usually an adj., but here a 
 noun; cf. XIV. N. 4 (b). 
 
 7. alterum ; for meaning, see XV. N. 7 (a). 
 
 8. facilius : (a) neut. comp. of adj. ; see Gram. Less. What else 
 might it be, so far as form is concerned? cf. facilius XIV. N. 11; 
 (b) for construction of preceding multo, cf. nihilS XXVII. N. 1. 
 
 9. nonnullis locis, in several places ; the prep, exceptionally 
 omitted in Lat. ; see Gram. Less. 
 
 10. transitur : (a) many compounds of Ire, to go, are used in the 
 pass. ; though the Eng. woidd not admit it is gone across, we may 
 say it is crossed ; (b) note that this whole lesson may be well trans- 
 lated in almost the exact order of the original. 
 
122 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Deri, of duo . . . . A. & G. 94, b. H. 175. 
 
 2. Neut. of the comp. of adj. A. & G. 89, 86. H. 162, 154. 
 
 3. Eel. agreeing with re- 
 
 peated an tec. . . . A. & G. 200, a. H. 445, 8. 
 
 4. Adj. used substantively . A. & G. 188. H. 441 and 1. 
 
 5. Prep, omitted with loco 
 
 and locis . . . . A. & G. 253. f. H. 425, II. 2. 
 
 6. Subjv. of result . . . A. & G. 319. H. 500, II. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. difficilis, difficult. 
 
 2. duo, duae, duo, irreg., two. 
 
 3. expedire, -pedivit, -peditus, 
 
 4tli conjug., to set free from 
 (something) ; tne pf. pass, 
 part.ic. is commonly used like 
 an adj. in all respects and 
 means unencumbered, -without 
 bar/gctqe, open. 
 
 4. fiuere, fluxit fluxus, fojforr>. 
 
 5. impendere, no pi', act., nor pf. 
 
 partic., intrans., to overhang. 
 
 G. nonnullus, not none, some. 
 
 7. nuper, recently. 
 
 8. omnino, adv., altogether, in all. 
 
 9. pacare, to pacify, to subdue. 
 
 10. perpaucus, very little ; in plur. 
 
 very few. 
 
 11. qua, irkrr. 
 
 12. singul-i, -ae, -a, one to each, one 
 
 at a time. 
 
 13. vadum, a ford, a shallow. 
 
 14. vix, adv., with effort, with diffi- 
 
 culty, scarcely. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Flumen quod se trausituros esse sperabant, erat Ehodanus. 
 (b} Nostra provincia Khodano flumine ab Helvetiis continetur. 
 (c) Quain maximus numerus carrorum itinere angusto inter flumen 
 et montem ducebatnr. (c?) Allobroges, qnibuscum Eomani uuper 
 contenderant, proximi Sequanis fuerunt. 
 
 2. (a) Jura was the mountain which was overhanging, (b) The 
 Helvetii could go out from home by two ways, (c) They thought 
 that yonder (ille) mountain was much higher, (d) Having dragged 
 their carts to the river, they try to cross by the ford. 
 
LESSON XXX. 123 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetii were much braver than (quam) the Allobroges. 
 (b) At that time it happened that the Allobroges were being subdued 
 by the Romans, (c) Two states were very near, so that (only) the river, 
 which was riot deep, divided them, (d) Many were kept out by few 
 in that place. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The particulars in which the decl. of duo is peculiar. 2. Differ- 
 ence in meaning between pauci and pauca, used as nouns in plur. 
 cases. 3. Two possible meanings for qua, for facilius. 4. Differ- 
 ence in thought between a purpose and a result. 5. In what cases 
 the neut. of the comp. differs from the masc. 6. The development of 
 the last meaning of vix in Vocal), from the first. 7. Similarity in 
 meaning of per- and -issimus in perpaucl and altissimus. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 6, extremum oppidum to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. extremum : stands first in the sentence for the sake of empha- 
 sis ; it is the location of Geneva which the writer wants to tell us. 
 
 2. bono animo, abl., with good mind, of good disposition, well- 
 disposed ; the phrase limits the subj. of viderentur like a descriptive 
 adj. 
 
 3. paterentur, to permit : (a) subjv. of purpose after persuasu- 
 ros and coacturos. (b) Is the verb cogere used with any other con- 
 struction ? XX IV. N. 2 (d) ; (c) antec. of the preceding suos and 
 eos? 
 
 4. dicunt, they appoint ; cf. the meaning of dicere in phrase 
 causam dicere XXIV. How do you translate the preceding abl. 
 absolute ? 
 
124 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. qua die l conveniant, that on this (appointed) day they may 
 come together : (a) qua = ut ea ; (b) a purpose clause ; they appoint 
 a day that all may come together at one time, that they may not 
 straggle along at different times ; (c~) the sign of pres. subjv. -a-, here 
 in 4th conjug. : cf. XXVIII. N. 4. 
 
 6. a. d. v. Kal. Apr. = ante diem quintum Kaleiidas Apriles, 
 a peculiar expression for dies quintus ante Kalendas Apriles, the 
 fifth day before the April Calends : (a) Apriles is an adj. ; (b) Ka- 
 lendae is the Lat. for the first day of the month ; (c) the reckoning is 
 backward from the first day of the month, instead of forward as with 
 us ; (d) in reckoning the time between two dates, both extremes are 
 counted, thus: April 1, March 31, 30, 29, 28; the fifth day before 
 the April Calends is, therefore, March 28, not March 27, as our way 
 of reckoning would make it. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The descriptive abl., or abl. of quality, is accompanied by an adj. 
 or possessive gen. 
 
 2. Dicere may mean to say or to plead or to appoint. The mean- 
 ing of a Lat. word varies with the context (i. c. the words in connec- 
 tion with it) just as that of an Eng. word varies. No Lat. sentence 
 can be even tolerably translated without attention to this fact. 
 
 3. The Romans reckoned the days of the month backward instead 
 of forward, and in reckoning the time between two dates counted 
 both the day from which and the day to which. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of vis . . . . A. & G. 61. H. 66. 
 
 2. The effect of position at 
 
 the beginning of a sen- 
 tence A. & G. 344, 1. H. 561, 1. 
 
 3. The abl. of quality . . A. & G. 251. H. 419, II. 
 
 4. Purpose clauses intro- 
 
 duced by a relative . A. & G. 317. H. 497, I. 2 
 
 1 Note that die is here fern, and see Harpers' Lat. Diet., dies, I. B, 1 an 
 
 2 Study examples. 
 
LESSON XXX. 
 
 125 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. Aprllis, -is, masc. (probably 
 
 from aperire, to open), the 
 month of April ; also very 
 frequently an adj. 
 
 2. Aulus, a Roman first or indi- 
 
 vidual name ; generally re- 
 presented in Lat. authors by 
 the initial A. 
 
 3. convenire, -venit, -veil- 
 
 tus, to come together, to 
 meet' 
 
 4. existimare (ex and sesti- 
 
 mare), to estimate., think. 
 
 5. ire, ivit, itum 1 , to go. 
 
 6. Kalendee, arum, the Calends , 
 
 day of a month. 
 
 7. Lucius, a Roman first name, 
 
 usually represented by L. 
 
 8. nondum, not yet. 
 
 9. pati, passus, to endure, per- 
 
 mit. 
 
 10. pons, masc. by exception, a 
 
 bridge. 
 
 11. qumtus, fifth. 
 
 12. ripa, the bank of a river. 
 
 13. vel, or ; vel . . . vel, either 
 
 ... or. 
 11. videre, vidit, visus, to see ; in 
 
 pass., often, ft? s^m. 
 15. vis, vis gen., force, violence ; in 
 
 plur., vires, si 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Orgetorix apud Helvetios viiMnagna auctoritate erat. (b) Du- 
 onun itineruin unurn perfacile, alterura multo difficilius erat. (c) AUo- 
 broges non amici Rornanis sunt. (d) Persuadent omul plebi ut uria 
 die ad rlpam fluininis conveiiiat. 
 
 2. (a) The town Geneva is very near Lake Geneva. (6) They 
 came together on the thirtieth of March, (c) The Helvetii thought 
 the Allobroges would allow them to go through their territory. 
 (d) When the day had been appointed, they collected all their 
 soldiers. 
 
 3. (a) They determined to compel the Allobroges to allow (subjv.) 
 these wagons to cross the fields, (b) Geneva, which is very near the 
 Helvetii, is very far distant from the towns of the-3elgpe. (c) After 
 trying (partic.) to take away the hope of return, they sent men to per- 
 suade their neighbors. 
 
 The neut of the partic. will be given when the masc. is not used. 
 
126 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. A new use of the abl. 2. How it differs from the abl. of 
 means 3. Prom the abl. of respect. 4. Different ways of trans- 
 lating the abl. absolute. 5. The leading thought in each sentence of 
 the Text. 6. The noiri. plur. of vis; of locus. 7. Two striking 
 differences between Roman and Eng. methods of reckoning time. 
 8. Why an important word should be placed at the beginning of a 
 sentence. 9. Examples in Eng. of variation in the meaning of a 
 word because of a different context. 10. Analysis, when they intro- 
 duce purpose clauses, of the following relatives : qui, sing., qui, plur., 
 quo, quam, cujus. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 7, through jubet rescind!. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Caesari : (a] dat. case ; (b) other uses of the ending -I ? XVI. 
 N. 13 (b) ; (c) note the emphatic position ; to Caesar, a new actor on 
 the scene, our attention is now directed ; cf. XXX. N. 1. 
 
 2. nuntiatum esset : (a) a new compound tense, the plpf. subjv. 
 pass. ; it is made up in all conjng. of the pf. pass, partic. and the 
 impf. subjv. of verb esse ; cf. XXlf. N. 6 and plpf. ind. pass., XX. 
 N. 4 (a) (b) ; (b) const. 1 of Ceesari ? XXII. Obs. 3. 
 
 3. iter facere, to make a journey, to march (when used of an 
 army) ; iter (ire, to go) is the amis. sing, neut.., shortened form of 
 stem itiner- ; cf. itiner-e, itiner-a, itiner-ibus. 
 
 4. eos . . . conari ; the clause is in apposition with id preceding. 
 
 5. quam maximis potest itineribus, a peculiar shortened ex- 
 pression for tarn magnis itineribus quam potest maximis itineri- 
 bus, by so great journeys as he is able (to hasten} by means of the 
 
 1 Construction, i. e. relation to other words in the sentence. 
 
LESSON XXXI. 127 
 
 greatest journeys, i. e., by the longest possible stages ; cf. quam 
 maximum numerum XVI II. (where possunt is omitted) and the 
 Eng. expression by easy stages. 
 
 6. ad Genuam, to the vicinity of Geneva, not into the city ; ab 
 urbe, just before, means from the vicinity of Rome, not out of 
 Rome. What would out of Rome be in Lat. ? 
 
 7. toti ; peculiar dut. of totus, the same for all genders ; cf. 
 totius, ipsius, illius, ejus, cujus and XX. N. 1; also ipsi, illi, ei, 
 cui. 
 
 8. imperat, takes dat. of the person, provinciae ; cf. per- 
 suadere. 
 
 9. erat . . . legio : (a) cf. order of words with that in erant 
 . . . itinera XXIX. ; in each case the subj. is made emphatic by 
 being taken out of its regular position at the beginning of its clause 
 and placed at the end ; (b) gen. sing, and plur. of legio ? 
 
 10. jubet ; note in this lesson the rapid succession of pres. ind., 
 impressing us with the energy and rapidity of Cicsar's movements. 
 It was Caesar who said " I came, I saw, I conquered." 
 
 11. rescind-! ; cf. the ending -i in this verb and in proficisc-i 
 with -ri in cona-ri. Where is each of these forms found ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The p'pf. subjv. pass, is formed in all . onjug. by combining the 
 pf. partic. pass, with the impf. subjv. of esse. 
 
 2. The 3d decl. noun iter is neut. by exception, and its stem 
 is itiner-. 
 
 3. The us3 of quam with the sup., where it may be translated 
 possible, involves the omission of tarn, so, of the positive of the adj., 
 and sometimes of the verb posse. 
 
 4. The ending -I occurs as a dat. sing, ending in totus, and 
 several other 1st and 2d decl. adj., as well as in all the demonstrative 
 pron. 
 
 5. Imperare, like persuadere, is followed by the dat. of the 
 person. 
 
 6. The pres. inf. pass, of the 3d conjug. ends in -i, while that of 
 other conjug. ends in ri. 
 
128 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Meaning of ad \\ith 
 
 names of towns . . A. & G. 258, /., H. 433, I., 380, 
 Hem.; 259, / II., 1. 
 
 2. The effect of placing the 
 
 subj. at the end of a 
 
 sentence 1 A. & G. 344 and H. 561, II. 
 
 a. 
 
 3. The force of the pres. 
 
 ind. in narrative . . A. & G. 276, d. II. 467, III. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. Caesar, Ceesaris, full name 5. pervenire, to come through, to 
 
 Caius Julius Caesar, a arrive. 
 
 great Roman, writer, gen- 6. rescindere, -scidit, -scissus, 
 
 eral, statesman. to break down. 
 
 2. imperare, 2 to command', pro- 7. ulterior, adj., positive wanting, 
 
 vinciae milites imperare, farther. 
 
 to give orders to the produce 8. urbs, a city; to a Roman, often 
 
 for soldiers. the city of Rome, just as " the 
 
 3. maturare, to hasten. city " means Boston to one liv- 
 
 4. nuntiare, to announce. ing in the suburbs of that city. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Csesaii ntintiant Helvetios faciliore itinere exire conaturos 
 esse. (b) Caesar, ut provincia Helvetios prolii beret, qnam maximas 
 copias cogere maturabat. (c) Erat omnino pons unus quo ad Genu- 
 am iter facere poterant. (d) Caesar, factis itineribns magnis, Gallis 
 qui provinciam incolebant milites multos imperavit. (e) Cum quam 
 maxima; copise coactae essent, in provinciam maturavit. 
 
 1 On emphatic position in the Eng. sentence, consult Welsh's " Lessons in Eng. 
 Grammar," Chap. XXIX., Sec. 2 and 6. 
 
 2 The pupil must not forget that all verbs with inf. in -are form pf. regularly 
 in -avit, and partic. in -at-us, -a, -um. 
 
LESSON XXXI. 129 
 
 2. (a) He sets out from Rome, makes his way through the farther 
 province, and cornes to the vicinity of Geneva, (b) After the bridge 
 had been broken down (abl. absolute) by Caesar, the Helvetii could 
 cross the Rhone by a ford, (c) Caesar, who was at that time in the 
 city, hastened to the Rhone, which was many miles away. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar tries to keep out the Helvetii by breaking down the 
 bridge, and levies soldiers upon the province, (b) Many who lived in 
 our province were well-disposed toward Caesar. (c) The Helvetii 
 hope to be able to seize the bridge, so that by this bridge they may 
 cross into the province. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1 . The Lat. for to set out, to march, to come, to go, to go lack and 
 forth, to arrive at. 2. A word with two more syllables in the gen. 
 than in the nom. sing. 3. Three translations of ad, with illustra- 
 tions from text of Csesar. 4. Difference in construction or thought 
 between quemque efferre jubent and pontem jubet rescind!. 
 5. Comparison of the Eng. expression to arrive at and the Lat. 
 pervenire ad. 1 6. Similarity in formation of plpf. iud. pass, and 
 plpf. subjv. pass. 7. The effect of arrangement in the sentences, 
 "What a piece of work is man," "Blessed are the peace-makers." 
 8. The expanded form of quam maximum numerum coemunt. 
 
 1 See Webster's Unabridged Diet, arrive and at. 
 
130 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 7, Ubi dg through facere liceat. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. adventu ; the noin. is formed by uniting the root 1 of advenlre, 
 and the ending -tus, which denotes the name of the action; cf. redi- 
 tio, dic-tio ; (led. of adventu ? 
 
 2. certiores f actl sunt ; they are having been made more certain, 
 they were made more certain, they were informed: (a] fact! sunt is 
 the pf. ind. pass, of facere ; cf. XXV. N. 4 (a) ; (b) fact! and 
 certiores are both pred. adj. agreeing with the subj. of sunt ; cf. XX. 
 N. 4 (d) ; (c) in de adventu, modifying this phrase, de means of in 
 sense of concerning. 
 
 3. qui dicerent, to say ; cf. XXX. N. 5. To what is qui equiv- 
 alent here ? 
 
 4. sibi esse in animS, it is to them in mind, they have (it) in 
 mind, they intend; (a) antec. of sibi? (b) the dat. Avith esse has 
 the force of a nom. indicating the person who has or possesses a thing, 
 as in above translation they have (it) in mind. 
 
 5. aliud, neut. accus. sing., limiting iter ; for ending -d, cf. i-d, 
 quo-d, illu-d. 
 
 6. propterea quod . . . haberent ; cf. propterea quod . . . 
 absunt VI., quod . . . contendunt IX., quod . . . continentur 
 XIV., propterea quod . . . fluit XXIX., Avith propterea quod 
 
 . . . obtenturus esset XXII., quod . . . viderentur XXX. and 
 the present instance ; note that in the first four instances the verb 
 after quod is ind. and the clauses stand in ordinary narrative, i. e. 
 in direct discourse, Avhile in the last three the verb is subjv. and the 
 clauses stand after verbs of saying or thinking, i. e. in indirect dis- 
 course ; note, too, that all these quod clauses are subordinate. 
 
 1 The root is the basis of derivation for groups of words, while the stem is the 
 basis of inflection for one word. 
 
LESSON XXXIL 131 
 
 7. nullura : (a) translate the sentence of which this is the last 
 word in the exact order of the original, and cf. Eng. sentence, " Silver 
 and gold have I none;" (&) has -lus in gen. sing., -I in dat., like 
 totus, unus, altera and preceding aliud and ullo. 
 
 8. rogare ; se is to be supplied as its subj. 
 
 9. ut . . . liceat : (a) an obj. clause of purpose; cf. XX. N. 
 5 (b), Gram. Less. ; (b) liceat is an impersonal verb ; cf. XXIV. N. 
 3 (a) (b) ; (c) subj. of liceat? (d) antec. of ejus and sibi ? (e) the 
 translation of what the Helvetii actually said, beginning with rogare, is, 
 " We ask that it be permitted to us to do this with your consent." 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The endings -tio and -tus name the action. The name of the 
 action in -tus is of the 4th decl. 
 
 2. An expression freely translated to inform, but meaning lit. to 
 make more certain, is found in Caesar. It is formed by combining 
 facere and certior, an adj. in the comp. agreeing with the name 
 of the person who is informed. 
 
 3. The prep, of, when used in the sense of concerning, is repre- 
 sented in Lat. by de with the abl. and not by the gen. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Adj. forming gen. sing. 
 
 in -lus, dat. in -I . . A. & G. 83 and H. 151 and 1. 
 a, b. 
 
 2. The dat. of the possessor A. & G. 231. II. 387. 
 
 3. The subordinate clauses of 
 
 iridir. discourse . . . A. & G. 336, last H. 524. 
 clause. 
 
 4. Change of order for em- 
 
 phasis A. & G. 344 and e. H. 560, 561, III. 
 
132 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adventus, -us, a coming to, 5. nullus, adj. (ne, not, and ullus, 
 
 approach. am /]i n t am/, no. none. 
 
 2. certus, sure, certain ; homi- G. princeps, piincipis, adj. or 
 
 nem certiorem facere, to noun, chief, 
 
 inform a man. 7- rogare, to ask. 
 
 3. licet, it is permitted; ei licet, 8. sine, prep, with abl. 3 without. 
 
 it is permitted to him, he 9. ullus, adj., any. 
 
 may. 10. voluntas (volent-, shortened 
 
 4. maleficium (male, adv., badly, stem of pres. part.ic. of velle, 
 
 and facerej, wrong-doing, an to wish, and-tas), willingness, 
 
 evil deed. will, desire. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. () Ubi Helvetica certiorcs do Ctt'saris adventu fecerunt, hi lega- 
 tionem mittunt. (b) Nammeius et Yertidoctius principes nobilissimi 
 sure civitatis fuerunt. (c) Legates, qul ad Caesarem irent, nnsenmt. 
 (G?) Els est in animo vl cogere Sequanos ut itinere difficiliore eos exlre 
 patiantur. 
 
 2. (a) They determined to go, they tried to go, they could go, 
 they hastened to go. (b) They ordered them to go, they compelled 
 them to go, they allowed them to go. (c) They persuaded them to 
 go, they asked them to go. (d) They tried to persuade Caesar not to 
 keep them out of the province. 
 
 3. (a) Cnesar, being informed of the plans of the Helvetii, hastened 
 into his province, (b) They intend, because they have 110 other way, 
 to march through the province without wrong-doing. (c) They 
 ask permission to do this with Caesar's good pleasure, (d) After 
 getting everything ready, they may go. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The Lat. for to march, to intend, to inform, he may. 2. Ullus, 
 nullus, nonnullus. 3. Two ways of translating o/'into Lat. 4. Two 
 ways of translating for. 5. Two ways of translating have. 6. Two 
 very common uses of the subjv. 7. When, as a rule, to translate to 
 by the complementary inf. 8. When by the subjv. 9. Some excep- 
 tions to 8. 
 
LESSON XXXIII. 133 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 7, Caesar, quod to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. tenebat ; cf. XXXII. N. 6. 
 
 2. missum : (a) esse understood, as with the preceding occisum 
 and pulsum ; cf. XXIII. Obs. 1 ; (b) the pf. pass, partic. with esse 
 forms the pf. inf. pass. ; cf. missus est; (c) inf. in indir. discourse, 
 memoria tenebat being equivalent to a verb of thinking ; cf. XVII. 
 Obs. 6 ; (d) What is the pres. inf. pass. ? 
 
 3. putabat : (a) note that in this sentence the subj. stands first, 
 the pred. last. How many clauses in this chapter have exactly this 
 order? (b) esse is understood with concedendum, a gerundive in 
 the neut. ; the clause is translated, literally, he did not think it was 
 to be allowed, a little more freely, it ought to be allowed. 
 
 4. inimico animo ; cf. XXX. N. 2. 
 
 5. faciundi : (a) gerundive form for faciendi ; see Gram. Less.; 
 (b) limiting itineris, which depends on facultate ; literally, the oppor- 
 tunity of a journey to be made, more freely, the opportunity oj 
 leaking a journey ; cf. XIX. N. 5 (c). 
 
 6. imperaverat ; for form, see XXVIII. N. 6. 
 
 7. dum . . . convenirent : (a) impf. subjv. of 4th conjtig. ; cf. 
 pres. subjv. same conjug., conveniant XXX., and that of the 3d conjug., 
 proficiscantur XXVIII. ; (b) until they should come together, but 
 just as accurately, for them to come together. In what respect, then, 
 is this clause like ut ... posset just before ? 
 
 8. deliberandum ; gerund; cf. XVIII. N. 6. 
 
 9. quid, indefinite pron., anything ; cf. quemque XXVIII. ; note 
 its position immediately after si. 
 
 10. ad Id. Apr. = ad Idus Apriles, on the April Ides ; the Ides 
 in April came on the 13th ; cf. XXX. N. 6. What is the usual way 
 of expressing the time at which? XXI. N. 2, XXIV. N. 4 (b). 
 
134 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 11. reverterentur, let them return ; what Caesar said to the legates 
 was, " I will take time to think about it ; if you want anything, return 
 on the Ides of April." 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The pf. inf. pass, of all conjug. is compounded of the pf. pass, 
 partic. and the pros. inf. esse ; the pf. ind. pass, is compounded of 
 the same partic. and the pres. ind. of esse. 
 
 2. The substantive form of the indefinite pron. quis differs from 
 the relative pron. only in the noin. masc. sing, quis and the nom. and 
 accus. neut. quid. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The deel. of the indefi- 
 
 nite quis, quae, quid . A. & G. 104. H. 190, 188. 
 
 2. The endings -uiidus and 
 
 -undi H. 239. 
 
 3. Dum clauses of purpose . A. & G. 328. H. 519, II. 2. 
 
 4. The gerundive meaning 
 
 ought or must . . . A. & G. 113, d. H. 234. 
 
 5. The unemphatie order of 
 
 the Lat. sentence . . A. & G. 343 and x. II. 559, 560. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. concedere, -cessit, -cessus, 0. inimlcus (in negative and 
 
 fo -if it-Id. amlcus), unfriendly. 
 
 2. deliberate (from de and II- 7- injuria, injustice., wrong. 
 
 brare, to weiy/i) to weigh 8. intercedere, -cessit, -cessu- 
 
 well, ponder. rus, tor/o between, to intervene. 
 
 3. dum, OOTIJ., while, until. 9. jugum, that which joins, a yoke', 
 
 4. facultas, opportunity. conquered armies, in token of 
 
 5. Id-us, -uum, fern, by exception, submission, were often com- 
 
 the Lie*, the 13th of the pelled to pass under a yoke 
 
 month, except in March, May, consisting of a spear set on two 
 
 July, and Oct., when they uprights ; rf. Eng. subjugate. 
 
 came on the 15th. 10. memoria, 
 
LESSON XXXIII. 135 
 
 11. occidere, -cidit, -cisus (ob 17- si, conj., if. 
 
 and ceedere, to cut}, to cut 18. spatium, extent, either of space 
 down, to kill. or time. 
 
 12. pellere, pepulit, pulsus, to 19. sub, prep, with accus. or abl., 
 
 drive. under. 
 
 13. putare, to think. 20. sumere, sumpsit, sumptus, 
 11. quis, quae, quid, indefinite to take up, to assume. 
 
 pron., any one, am/thing. 21. tamen, adv., yet, nevertheless. 
 
 15. respondere, -spondit, -spon- 22. temperare, to govern one's self, 
 
 sus, to answer. to refrain. 
 
 10. reverti, reversus, dep., to re- 23. teiiere, tenuit, tentus, to hold. 
 
 turn; in ths pf. tenses, the 24. velle, voluit, irreg., to wish. 
 
 stem of the pf. act. form rever- 
 
 tit was used by Csesar. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Ea facultas quam Helvetii rogaverunt non concedenda est. 
 (b) Romano exercitu ab Helvetiis jam pulsd, Csesar cos ire per pro- 
 vinciam non patebatur. (c) Caesar diem ad dellberandum, ut quam 
 maximus immerus militum sibi esset, sumpsit. 
 
 2. (a) Men of unfriendly disposition are not likely (about to) 
 refrain from wron. (b) For several years the Romans had an army 
 in the province, (c) It is not permitted to the Helvetii to go through 
 the province, because in the consulship of Lucius Cassius they did 
 harm. 
 
 3. (a) The province must not be seized, (b) Csesar does not in- 
 tend to allow the Helvetii to cross the Rhone, (c) The good son 
 may see the soldiers of whom he has becm informed. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. All the verbs you know meaning to think. 2. A conj. which 
 in some sentences suggests both time and purpose. 3. The differ- 
 ence between gerund and gerundive. 4. All the compound tenses 
 learned thus far. 5. Change of personal pron. in Eng. in passing 
 from dir. to indir. discourse. 6. Difference in form and meaning be- 
 tween qui and quis, quod and quid. 7- Possible meanings for the 
 form quae. 8. Mittere, mitti, missus est, missus esse. 9. Pres. 
 and impf. subjv. in 3d and 4th conjug. 
 
136 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 8, through prohibere possit. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. milia passuum ; cf. XVII. N. 7, 8 (a) (b). 
 
 2. pedum : (a) <ren.pl ur. ; stem and nom. sing. ? XVIII. Obs. 1; 
 A. & G. 44, II. 36, 2 ; (b) limited by sedecimand depends on murum ? 
 deseribing it like an adj.; similar to what abl. use? 
 
 3. perducit: (a) the long sentence ending here is not difficult if 
 translated in order, since the words are arranged in natural groups ; 
 cf. XXIV. N. 4 (a), Obs. 4 ; (b) the verb is modified by legione and 
 militibus, ablatives of means, 1 by the phrases a lacii and ad montem, 
 by mflia, and by murum and fossam, direct obj. ; which of these 
 four groups of modifiers stands nearest the verb? why? 
 
 4. opere : (a) opus, nom. sing. neut. ; cf. tempus, -oris ; 
 (b) why abl. ? 
 
 5. possit: (a) pres. snbj. ; cf. possent. impf. subj., XXIX. ; 
 (b) quo, the introductory word of this clause, = ut eo, that by this 
 (means). What degree of comparison immediately follows quo in 
 the word facilius ? 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The first ten cardinal 
 
 numbers ..... A. & G. 94. H. 174. 
 
 2. 3d decl. neut. in -us, 
 
 -eris A. & G. 48, d. H. 61, opus. 
 
 1 Although names of persons, they are ablatives of means rather than of agent, 
 because the persons are not regarded here as voluntary agents but as the instruments 
 which Caesar used. 
 
LESSON XXXIV. 137 
 
 3. The gen. of quality 
 
 (especially measure) . A. & G. 215 and H. 396, V. and N.I. 
 
 4. The subjv. of purpose b. 
 
 after quo .... A. & G. 317, b. H. 497, II. 2. 
 
 5. The order of the modi- 
 
 fiers of the verb . . A. & G. 343. H. 560, 567 and 3. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. altitudo, height, depth ; cf. 10. opus, -eris, a work, a piece of 
 
 alt us. work. 
 
 2. castelliim, a small fort, a castle. 11. perducere, -duxit, -ductus, to 
 
 3. communire, to fortify strongly. lead through. 
 
 4. disponere, -posuit, -positus, 12. pes, pedis, a foot of man or 
 
 to place apart, here and there. beast, and also a measure 
 
 5. fossa, that which has been dug, of length. 
 
 a ditch. 13. praesidium, a sitting before, a 
 
 6. interea, adv., meanwhile* guard. 
 
 7. invitus, unwilling. 14. sedecim (sex and decem), in- 
 
 8. murus, a wall. decl. numeral, six and ten, 
 
 9. iiovem, indecl. numeral, nine. sixteen. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Els rebus quas secum habebant firmissimi milites Roman! 
 octo castella communiverunt. (b) Lacu Lemanno Helvetii contine- 
 bantur. (c) Csesar, lie in provincia ulluin inaleficium facerent, murum 
 fossamque perduxit. (d) Si vi trail sire couatl erant, mur5 fossaque 
 prohibebantur. 
 
 2. (a) All the legions which were coming together had not yet 
 arrived at the Rhone, (b) The soldiers who were already with Caesar 
 were bringing the ditch along to the mountain for several days. 
 (G) At that time the boundaries of Italy (Italia) were far distant 
 from the Rhone, (d] Mount Jura was overhanging, so that a very 
 narrow way intervened between the mountain and the river. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar thought it was not fitting for the Helvetii to go 
 through our province, the men of which were not yet well disposed. 
 (b) Ceesar, when they asked his permission, did not inform the Helvetii 
 
138 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 that they must not march through our province, (c) Caesar intends 
 to finish these works, that the Helvetii may not be able to accomplish 
 their undertaking. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Instances from the text of an abl. absolute formed with a noun 
 and a noun, a noun and an adj., a noun and a partic. 2. A 
 peculiarity of construction in militibus perducit, and explanation. 
 3. Best Eng. expression for miirus pedum sedecim. 4. Difference 
 in Eng. between may a\\d caw and their Lat. representatives. 5. Decl. 
 and indecl. cardinals to ten. G. The adj. case of the noun. 7. The 
 adv. case. 8. One use of the latter with the force of an adj. 
 9. The pres. subjv. of esse in this lesson and the forms of esse thus 
 far met with. 10. The position of the direct obj. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 8, Ubi ea to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. dare : the translation of Caesar's words, when speaking to the 
 legates, is : "I cannot, consistently with the custom and precedent 
 (because of the custom and precedent) of the Roman people, give to 
 anv one the right of way through the province." 
 
 2. coiientur ; in form a pres. subjv. pass, of the 1st conjug. ; cf. 
 proficiscantur XXVIII., conveniant XXX. 
 
 3 prohibiturum : (a) prohibit-, a supine stem of 2d conjug. ; 
 pres. stem, prohibe- ; pf. stem, prohibu- ; (b) supply esse, the subj. 
 of which is se in the preceding clause; (c) Caesar's words when 
 speaking to the legates : " I shall prevent." 
 
LESSON XXXV. 
 
 139 
 
 4. Helve tii . . . destiterunt : (a) cf., for order and translation 
 of this sentence, XXXilL N. 3 (a), XXXLV. N. 3; (b) find in it two 
 abl. of separation, six abl. of means ; (c) note how the successive adj. 
 dejecti, alii, conati, repulsi, keep the subj. Helvetii in rniud. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The sign of the pres. subjv. is -e- in the 1st conjug., and 
 -a- in the 3d and 4th. In the 1st and 3d this sign takes the place 
 of the final vowel of the pres. stem, in the 4th it is added to that 
 stem. 
 
 2. The supine stem of the 2d conjug. may be found by weaken- 
 ing the final vowel of the pres. stem to -i and adding -t. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. complures, complura neuf., 
 
 very many. 
 
 2. conatus, -us (conari), an 
 
 attempt; cf. conatum ;iud 
 XXXIT. N. 1, Obs. 1. 
 
 3. concursus, -us (con and 
 
 currere, to run), a running 
 tor/ ether. 
 
 4. dejicere, -jecit, -jectus, to cast 
 
 down. 
 
 5. desistere, destitit, desti- 
 
 turus, to stand off", to desist. 
 
 6. exemplum, an example. 
 
 7. mterdiu, adv., fit/ day. 
 
 8. jungere, junxit, junctus, to 
 
 join. 
 
 9. minimus (irreg. sup. of par- 
 
 vus), least, very small. 
 
 10. munltio, a fortifying, a forti- 
 
 Ji cat ion. 
 
 11. navis, 1 a ship, a boat. 
 
 12. neeare, to say . . . not, to deny. 
 
 13. noctu, adv., by ninht. 
 
 14. iionnunquam, not never, some- 
 
 times ; cf. nonnullus. 
 
 15. ostendere, -tendit, -tentus, 
 
 (obs for ob, and tendere 
 to stretch) to stretch in Jhe 
 way of, to show. 
 
 10. perrumpere, -rupit, -ruptus, 
 to break through. 
 
 17. ratis a raft. 
 
 18. repellere, -pulit, -pulsus, to 
 
 drire back. 
 
 19. telum, a ireapon. 
 
 20. venire, venit, ventum, to come. 
 
 1 It will be understood that nouns in -is have the gen. like the nom. unless 
 otherwise stated. Nouns in -is with gen. in -idis, are mostly Greek, and but few 
 of them are found in Caesar. 
 
140 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. () Naves quibus numcn translre conati sunt, parvae fuerunt. 
 (&) His omnibus conatis repulsis, difficiliore itinere inter montem Ju- 
 ram et flumcn Rliodanum ire constituerunt. (c) Cum perrumpere 
 conarentur, tells a mllitibus Remains repulsi sunt. (d) Ripam flu- 
 ininis muro sedecim pedura communlvit. 
 
 2. (a) The Helvetii went into the territory of their neighbors, that 
 they might roam about more widely, (b) The Helvetii were not 
 able to break down the works of the Romans, (c) Caesar says that 
 he will not allow the Helvetii by using (having used) force to hold 
 the bank of the river. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar intends to keep the Helvetii out of the province. 
 (>) If Caesar is unwilling, they think they will break through the wall 
 which he has made, (c) The Helvetii were trying to drive back the 
 Romans from the Avail, (d) In order to cross the river, they use very 
 many boats which they have seized. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The number of facts stated in the last sentence of the Text. 
 2. Difference in form between pres. ind. and pres. subjv. of 1st, 
 3d, and 4th con jug. 3. Comparative frequency thus far of the differ- 
 ent con jug. 4. Difference in form and meaning between venit and 
 venit. 5. The Lat. for they returned, they return. 6. Two mean- 
 ings of qua. 7. Exact difference in meaning of conatum and co- 
 natus, -us. 8. Decline both. 
 
LESSON XXXVI. 141 
 
 LESSON XXXYI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. i. 9, through obstrictas volebat. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Relinquebatur ... via ; for order, cf. Erant . . . duo 
 XXIX. and erat . . . uiia XXXI. 
 
 2. possent : (a) impf. subjv. after cum, which is not the prep, as 
 one might at first suppose from position of sponte ; when this verb 
 is reached, sponte proves to be an abl. of means, which is used with- 
 out a prep. ; (b) note that his is drawn out of its position within the 
 cum clause and becomes the first word in the sentence, because it 
 is the word of the sentence most closely connected with the preced- 
 ing-. 1 What is its antec. in preceding sentence? 
 
 3. eo deprecatore : (a) eo is here a substantive, not an adj. ; 
 (b) const, of eo deprecatore? XIII. N. 5 (b) (c), Obs. 1; XXIII. 
 N. 5 (b) and Sequanis invitis, above. What parts of speech are 
 combined to form this const. ? 
 
 4. plurimum poterat; cf. XXII. N. 7 (c). 
 
 5. studebat; used with rebus the dat. of the thing desired; 
 cf. and contrast imperare, persuadere. 
 
 6. beneficio; cf. nom. sing, beneficium with maleficium, matri- 
 monium, imperium, indicium, judicium. In what respect are they 
 alike in form and in meaning? 
 
 7. volebat, he was wishing: (a) irreg. verb velle, to wish; 
 (b) expanded form for quam plurimas ? XXXI. N. 5. 
 
 1 The teacher will find a full discussion of the order of words and clauses in the 
 Lat. sentence, abundantly illustrated by examples, in Pott's " Hints toward Lat. 
 Prose Composition " (Maomillan). The point here noted is treated on pp. 91 and 
 92. On the whole subject, Thacher's Madvig, pp. 425-440 may also be consulted. 
 
142 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The ending's -tio, -tus, -ium name the action. 
 
 2. The verbs persuadere, imperare, studere take the dat. 
 
 3. Either a noun and a noun, a noun and a pron., a noun and a 
 partic., or a noun and an ordinary adj. may be combined to form the 
 abl. absolute const. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Position of word closely con- 
 nected with preceding or 
 following sentence . . . A. & G. 344, b. II. 569, III. 1. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. angustiae, -arum (angustus), 7- novus, new ; novae res, new 
 
 narrowness, straits, a narrow t/iinr/s, revolution. 
 
 pax ft. 8. obstriiigere, -strinxit, -stric- 
 
 2. beiieficium (bene, well, and tus, to bind. 
 
 facere) ircll-rloi/ifj, n favor. 9. propter, prep, with accus., on 
 
 3. deprecator (deprecari, to beg account, of. 
 
 off, to intercede) an intercessor, 10. relinquere, -liquit, -lictus, to 
 
 mediator. leacr. 
 
 4. gratia, favor cither shown or re- 11. spontis, sponte, wanting in 
 
 ceived, hence, either kindness other cases, in abl., with sua, it 
 
 or popularity. means of one's oivn accord, by 
 
 5. impetrare, to obtain one's re- one* self. 
 
 f/itcxf. 12. studere, studuit, partic. want- 
 
 6. largitio, l/iriah yi^ing, bribery, ing, to be eager for, to desire. 
 
 liberality. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Helvet.ii Dumnorige deprecatore a Sequanis impetrant. 
 (J) Sequani a Diunnorige induct! eos per suos fines ire patiuntur. 
 (c) Altera via Helvetii, quod aliam viam liabent nullam, exire 
 volunt. (d) Sua sponte Sequanis persuadere non possunt ut sibi 
 eorum voluntate iter facere inter inontem et flumen liceat. 
 
LESSON XXXVII. 143 
 
 2. (a) If their neighbors are not willing, the Helvetii intend to 
 compel them. (6) They say it is necessary to go through the territory 
 of the Sequani, because Caesar did not allow them to go through the 
 province. (c) That (woman), whom Dumnorix had married, was 
 the daughter of Orgetorix. 
 
 3, (a) They sent an embassy to persuade the Sequani. (b) Dum- 
 norix, the Haecliian chief, was of an unfriendly mind toward the 
 Romans, because he desired revolution, (c) Dumnorix asks that the 
 Helvetii may cross the territory of the Sequani. (d) Orgetorix, who 
 is (now) dead, and Dumnorix were two very powerful chiefs. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The Lat. for to marry (said of the man), to give in marriage, 
 revolution, to favor revolution, to be very powerful, as many as 
 possible. 2o He can, he could, he may, he might. 3. Difference 
 between imperare and impetrare. 4. Two nouns plur. in form 
 which may be sing, in sense. 5. List of verbs used thus far which 
 are followed by the inf. without a subj. 6. Esse and posse^in pres., 
 impf., pf., plpf. iud. 3d sing., and in pres. and impf. subjv. 7. De- 
 cline together is deprecator, ea civitas. 8. Difference between the 
 dat. with studere and that with persuadere- 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 ( 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 9, Itaque rem through in Provincia in 10. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. patiantur: (a) pres. subjv. in an obj. clause of purpose; cf. 
 XX. N. 5 ; (b) a 4th conjug. form ; cf. paterentur, impf. subjv. 3d 
 conjug. ; also persuadere but persuasit, facere but adficiebantur, 
 consciscere but cousciverit, conveniant but convenerant ; (c) cf. 
 proficiscantur, pres. subjv. 3d conjug., XXVIII. 
 
144 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. utl . . dent : (a) uti is the conj., not the inf. ; (b) the clause 
 is the obj. of perficit; (c) obsides is the obj. of dent ; (d} mode 
 and tense of dent? 
 
 3. Sequani; the subj. of dent drawn forward from preceding 
 clause. 
 
 4. prohibeant : () pres. subjv. 2d conjug. ; for form, cf. dent, 
 patiantur, proficiscantur and XXXV. Obs. 1 ; (b) case of itinere, 
 preceding'. 
 
 5. Tolosatium ; gen. plur. ; cf. same case in Santoiium, just 
 before. What difference in stem ending is indicated by these forms ? 
 What is the nom. plur. in each case ? 
 
 6. civitSs ; the state of the Tolosates is here referred to. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Some verbs have forms of different conjug. The most common 
 of those already used are facere, capere, pati, jubere, suadere, 
 venire and their compounds. Such verbs are said to belong to the 
 co n jug. indicated by the pres. inf. 
 
 2. The sign of the pres. subjv. in the 1st conjug. is -6-, in the 2d, 
 3d, and 4th it is --. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. itaque, and so, therefore. fulfillment of an agreement; 
 
 2. obses, obsidis, a hostage ; host- if the agreement was broken, 
 
 ages were human beings given the hostages might be killed, 
 
 by one person or nation to an- 3. renuntiare, to bring back word, 
 other, in order to guarantee the to report. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Helvetii, obsidibus datis, sese obstrinxerunt ut sine injuria 
 fines Sequanorum transirent. (b) Non perfacile factu est a maleficio 
 maximam multitudinem. cupidam bellandi prohibere. (c) Civitas 
 quam Ctesar non longe a Tolosatibus abesse dixit a provincia qua- 
 
LESSON XXXVIII. 145 
 
 draginta passuum milia abest. (d) Dumnorigis gratia Helvetii im- 
 petrant ut itinere quod sit difficilius proficiscantur. 
 
 2. () He took this commission upon himself, and had (perficere) 
 the two states exchange (impf. subjv.) hostages. (b) Influenced by the 
 desire to roam about, the Helvetii give hostages to the Sequani, in 
 order that they may eross their territory, (c) On account of the nar- 
 rowness of the way, it was necessary to draw the carts one at a time. 
 
 3. (a) The mountain was overhanging, so that a very few could stop 
 them, (b) They used to give (were giving) their sons and daughters 
 as hostages (appositive). (c) Caesar is informed that the Helvetii 
 are about to make a journey to the vicinity of Tolosa, a state of the 
 province. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Deel. of itinere, Santonum ; qui, quse, quod. 2. The best 
 Eng. for obsides uti inter se dent perficit. 3. For quae civitas. 
 4. Different kinds of purpose clauses in this lesson. 5. The object, 
 in general, of giving hostages. 6. The correctness of Caesar's state- 
 ment about the distance of the Santones from the Tolosates. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII, 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 10, Id si through ire contendit. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. id ; for position, cf. his XXXVI. N. 2 (b). 
 
 2. fieret : (a) for voice, see fiebat XVI., Vocab. ; (5) mode and 
 tense ? 
 
 3. cum ; for position, cf. XV. N. 7 (c). 
 
 4. futurum : (a) with esse, to be supplied, forms the fut. inf. 
 act. of esse ; cf. conciliat-urum (esse) XXIII. ; (b) for fu-, cf. fu-it 
 XIII. 
 
 10 
 
146 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. maxime frumentariis, most fruitful, very fruitful ; a sup. 
 degree formed by prefixing the adv. maxime, most greatly, most, to 
 the adj., instead of by adding 1 -issimus. 
 
 6. ut . . . haberet : (a) clause of result; cf. XXIX. N. 6 (a); 
 (b) a substantive clause, subj. of futurum (ease) ; cf. ut . . . vaga- 
 rentur XVI., which is a result clause and subj. of fiebat ; (c) subj. 
 is provincia, suggested by the gen. provinciae in preceding clause; 
 (d) for case of locis, cf. XXI. N. 3 (b) ; (e) patentibus is here an 
 ordinary adj. limiting locis, though in form a pres. partic. ; nom. 
 pate-ns, lying open, from patere ; cf. orie-ns, pote-ns. 
 
 7. praefecit : followed by dir. obj. legatum, and indir. muniti- 
 6m ; cf. XIX. N. 12 (c). 
 
 8. tres ; agreement ? 
 
 9. coiitendit : (a) On reaching the end of the sentence with this 
 word, how may we decide whether qu5 in the preceding clause is a 
 pron. or an adv.? (b) for the effect of rapid succession of pres. tenses 
 in this sentence, cf. XXX L N. 10. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The fut. act. partic. combined with esse forms the fut. inf. act. 
 
 2. The ending of the pres. act. partic. is -ns. 
 
 3. The stems of esse are es- pres., fu- pf., fut- supine. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Comparison by adv A. & G. 89, d. H. 170. 
 
 2. Substantive clauses of result . A. & G. 332, a. H. 501, and 
 
 I. 1. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. bellicosus (bellum), warlike. 4. educere, -duxit, -ductus, to 
 
 2. circum, prep, with accus., lead out. 
 
 around, about. 5. frumentarius (frumentum), 
 
 3. conscribere, -scripsit, -scri- belonging to grain, fruitful. 
 
 ptus, to write together, enroll, 6. hlbernus (hiems, winter,} be- 
 enlist. longing to winter ; hlberna, 
 
LESSON XXXVIII. 147 
 
 -orum (with word for quar- legere, to choose), to under- 
 
 ters, camp, understood), winter stand, to know. 
 
 quarters. 10 praeficere, -fecit, -fectus, to 
 
 7. hiemare, to pass the winter, to put before, to set over, to put 
 
 winter. in command. 
 
 8. ibi, there ; cf. ubi, where, when. 11. quinque, /<;<?. 
 
 9. intellegere or -ligere, -lexit, 12. Titus, a Roman first name, usu- 
 
 lectus (inter, between, and ally represented by initial T. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Tres legiones quas circum Aquileiam habebat ex hlbernis 
 eductae sunt. (b) Novae legiones in ea parte Italiae quae proxima 
 Galliae est con scribe ndse suut. (c) Legiones Romanse, cum Caesar 
 in Gallia esset, nuinero quattuor hominum milia erant. (d) Futurum 
 est cum periculo ut provincia homines inimico animo finitirnos patenti- 
 bus agiis habeat. 
 
 2. (a) Caesar, having led three legions out of winter quarters, de- 
 termines to enroll new legions, (b) It happened that three legions 
 were already in winter quarters near Aquileia. 1 (c) The soldiers 
 of the legions which were about to wage war were very brave. 
 (d) Caesar did not allow the Gauls to seize the territory of the 
 Eoman people. 
 
 3. (a) The senate had put Caesar in command of the army. 
 (b) Caesar knows that those places where the Tolosates dwell are very 
 fruitful, (c) For several days he was hastening into Italy by forced 
 inarches. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The Lat. for arms, weapons, lieutenant, winter quarters, forced 
 marches, fortification. '2. To march, to enroll, to levy upon, to put 
 in command of. 3. Dec!, of is, ea, id. 4. Gender and decl. of 
 munitio. 5. Connection between derivation of intellegere and 
 its meaning to understand. 6. The formation of pres. and fut. partic. 
 in all conjug. 7. The tenses in which esse is used as an auxiliary. 
 8. Three ways of saying very. 9. Substantive clauses in text thus 
 far. 
 
 1 Pronounced in Eng. Aq-we-le-yah. 
 
148 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Caesar, B. G. T. 10, Ibi Centrones through agros populabantur 
 in 11. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. superiSribns : for form of nom., cf. XVI. N. 5 (c). 
 
 2. compluribus his prceliis pulsis : (a) for form of pulsis, see 
 pulsum XXX LI I. ; (b) pulsis agrees with his, witli which it 
 forms an abl. absolute; (c) proeliis is an abl. of means, limited by 
 compluribus. 
 
 3. die; why abl.? XX L N. 2. 
 
 4. septimo, seventh; tells which oue, or the order, in a series, 
 hence called an ordinal ; cf. the corresponding 1 cardinal septem, and 
 the ordinals, primi, Jirst, below, tertiam, third, III. ; note that the 
 ordinals are of the 1st and 2d clecl. 
 
 5. eorum : (a) antec. ? (b) Why is not su6s used here? 
 
 V 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 1. The first ten ordinals . . . A. & G. 94. H. 174, 179. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. citerior, adj. in comp. (positive 4. popular!, to lay icatle. 
 
 not found), nearer, hither; 5. primus,//-^. 
 
 citerior Gallia, Gaul this 6. septimus, seventh. 
 
 side the Alps, i. e. the lloman 7. superus, superior comp., su- 
 
 or eastern side; ulterior premus or summus sup., 
 
 Gallia, Gaul beyond the Alps. high, higher, highest ; supe- 
 
 2. inde, from that place, thence ; rior, when used of time, 
 
 cf. ibi, there. means former. 
 
 3. Ocelum, a town iu Cisalpine S. traducere or transducere, 
 
 Gaul. -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 across; cf. transire. 
 
LESSON XXXIX. 149 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Mllites quos Caesar conscripserat citeriore ex provincia con- 
 veniebant. (b) Caturiges itinere nostras legiones prohibere conati 
 erant. (c) Caesar, multis occisis, imle reliquos pcpulit. (c?) Caesar, 
 quod Helvetios fminentarios Haeduorum agros popular! intellegebat, 
 ut eos prohiberet, magnis itiueribus traus Alpes contendit. 
 
 2. (a) The last town which is in the hither province is called Oce- 
 lum. 1 (&) It was necessary for the Helvetii to lay waste the fields, in 
 order that they might have a supply of grain, (c) The Helvetii had 
 at length marched across the territory of the Sequani, 1 and were roam- 
 ing about in the fields of the Hasdui. 
 
 3. (a) For many years the Haedui had been friends of the Bomaris. 
 (&) When these had been routed by Caesar, he led his army across the 
 Alps, (c) The result was (it came to pass) that the Gauls who dwelt 
 in the mountains could not drive back the Romans. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Adj. irreg. in comparison found thus far. 2. The complete 
 decl. of superioribus. 3. Two riom. possible for the form Ocelo. 
 4. The three stems of ducit, pulsis, pervenit. 5. The Lat. for there, 
 thence, where. 6. The difference in meaning between ordinals arid 
 cardinals. 7. The 3d sing, and plur. iud. and subjv. act. and pass, 
 of all the tenses you know of occupatis, prohibere, pulsis. 
 
 1 In Eng. O-ce-]um not O-ce-lum, Se-kwa-nl not Se-kwa-ni ; the tendency in 
 Engr. being to shorten the vowel of the first syllable in words of three syllables 
 accented on the first. H. 11, 3 and 1). 
 
150 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 11, Haedui, cum through non debuerint. 
 
 The passage of indir. discourse in this lesson is changed to its direct Lat. 
 form just below on the left of the page. On the right the indir. form is given for 
 comparison with the direct. The words changed iu passing from the original to 
 the quoted form are in full-faced type. 
 
 The exact words of the Hscduan Am- 
 bassadors : 
 
 Ita - omni tempore de populo 
 Romano merit! sumus, ut panic 
 in conspectu exercit.us R6ma.nl 
 agii vastan, liberi nostri in scr- 
 vitutem abduci, oppida expiignarl 
 non debuerint. 
 
 The words of the Ambassadors as 
 quoted : 
 
 Ita se onini tem]>ore de populo 
 Romano meritos esse, ut psene 
 in couspectu exercitus nostri 
 agii vastari, liberi eorum in ser- 
 vitutem abduci, oppida expugnarl 
 non debuerint. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. sua, their own things, possessions ; cf. XXIX. N. 6 (b). 
 
 2. rogatum, to ask; (a) supine in -um, denotes purpose after 
 mittunt; cf. factu XXI. N.I; (b) it is evident at this point that 
 the preceding cum, which is followed by the subjv. possent, denotes 
 cause as well as time; they sent for aid because they could not de- 
 fend themselves, not simply at the time when they could not defend 
 themselves. In XXXI. and XXXVI. also, cum with the subjv. ex- 
 presses both time and cause. The Eng. when in many sentences 
 is both temporal and causal. In XIV., the force of cum with the 
 subjv. seems to be almost wholly causal. 
 
 3. omni: (a) -I is the ending of abl. sing., as it is in all adj. in 
 -is, -e ; (b} omni tempore, at all times. 
 
 4. meritos esse : (a) for mode and tense, see XXXIII. N. 2 (I), 
 Obs. 1; (b) for stem merit-, see XXXV. N. 3 (a), Obs. 2; (e) cf. with 
 
LESSON XL. 151 
 
 the words of direct discourse, merit! sumus (dep. verb), we have 
 deserved; sumus, ive are, is for es-u-mus (cf. es-u-nt) ; the end- 
 ing -mus means we just as -nt means they ; (d ) se, the subj. of 
 meritos esse, is expressed as a separate word, while the subj. of 
 merit! sumus is not so expressed, as it is indicated in the ending 
 -mus. 
 
 5. nostri : (a) gen. sing, limiting exercitus ; (I) Caesar, a Roman, 
 writing for Roman readers, uses the word nostr!, our; to the Ha> 
 duan ambassadors the army was not our army but the Roman army, 
 hence Roman!. 
 
 6. eorum : (a) depends on liber! ; (6) to the Hredui, our chil- 
 dren not their children, hence nostri in the direct form. 
 
 7. debuerint: (a) pf. subjv. of the 2d conjug., stem debu- ; 
 cf. habu-erat XX. ; tense sign -eri-, as in all conjug., cf. consciv- 
 eri-t XXV. ; (b) a subjv. of result; cf. XXLX. N. 6 (a) (c) when 
 this verb is translated ought, the pres. inf., after it, is best represented 
 in Eng. by the pf. inf. ; thus, our children ought not to have been led 
 away. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS 
 
 1. The ending is -I in the abl. sing, of adj. in -is, -e. 
 
 2. The pers. ending -mus is that of the 1st pers. plur. 
 
 3. The sign of the pf. subjv. act. in all conjug. is -eri-. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The use of the supine in -um . A. & G-. 302. H. 546. 
 
 2. Cum causal A. & G. 326. H. 517. 
 
 3. The subj. of the inf. in indir. 
 
 discourse regularly expressed A. & G. 336, a. H. 530, N. 3). 
 
 4. Personal pronouns as subj. often 
 
 omitted A. & G. 194, a. H. 446. 
 
 5. Translation of pres. inf. after 
 
 past tense of debere ... A. & G. 238, a, H. 537, 1. 
 
 and Rein. 
 
152 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. abducere, -duxit, -ductus, to 6. expugnare (tojight ouf) to take 
 
 lead aicay. by storm. 
 
 2. auxilium, hdp, aid. 7. ita, adv., so. 
 
 3. conspectus, -us (conspicere, 8. liberi (the sing., meaning child, 
 
 to ace) xiyht. not found), children. 
 
 4. debere, debuit, debitus (de 9. merer!, meritus, to merit, de- 
 
 and habere, to have or keep serve, earn, 
 
 from some one) to owe, to be 10. paene, almost, 
 
 bound; debet, he ought. 11. servitus, -utis, (servus, a 
 
 5. defendere, -fendit, -fens as, to si it re) servitude. 
 
 ward oJ/' } to defend. 12. vastare (vastus, empty) to 
 
 make empty, to lay waste. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Agii Hacduonim erant finibus Sequanorura proximi. 
 (b) HuHlui, legatis missis, auxilium rogaverunt. (c) Ob eas causas 
 nostris agiis prohiberl nori debemus. 
 
 2. (a) Almost in sight of a brave army, our children are being 
 carried away into slavery, (b) When the Helvetii were marching 
 through fruitful fields, they did not refrain from wrong, (c) Since 
 Cresar was not very far distant, the Hsedui sent ambassadors to 
 him. 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetii ought to have crossed the territory near their 
 route (iter) without wrong-doing, (b) The Haedui have deserved so 
 well (have so deserved) at the hands of (from) the Roman people, that 
 Caesar ought to have sent an army into their fields, (c) By the aid 
 of Caesar they defend all their property and the towns which have 
 been taken. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. A new pers. ending. 2. A new tense sign. 3. The abl. sing, 
 of adj. in -is. 4. The two supines and their uses. 5. The mode 
 used with cum causal. 6. How the idea of cause is developed from 
 the idea of time. 7. Where the subj. is, in the sentence eat. 
 
 8. Difference between dicit se rogare and dicit eum rogare. 
 
 9. Two ways of saying all tilings in Lat. 10. The conjug. and 
 exact meaning of the Eng. verb ought. 
 
LESSON XLL 153 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 11, eodem tempore to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. eodem, the same ; the abl. sing. neut. of idem, eadem, idem, 
 composed of is, ea, id and the urideclined termination -dem ; cf. idem 
 XXL N. 4. 
 
 2. AmbarrT, the name of a people ; in apposition with Heedui, 
 the Hcedui Ambarri. 
 
 3. Caesarem certiorem faciunt ; for pass, form of the expression, 
 
 cf. xxxir. N. 2. 
 
 4. depopulates ; though a dep. verb, pass, in sense as well as in 
 form in this instance. 
 
 5. se . . . prohibere ; certiorem faciunt is equivalent to a verb 
 of saying, and is therefore followed by an inf. with subj. accus. 
 
 6. reliqui : partitive gen. of reliquum, which is here a neut. noun 
 meaning the rest ; it depends upon nihil. 
 
 7. statuit : (a) may from its form be either pres. or pf. ind. ; it is 
 probably the pf. in this case ; (b) for the preceding exspectandum, 
 cf. XXXIII. N. 3 ; (c) sibi is a dat. of the agent, used with the ger- 
 undive with the force of the abl. of agent. 
 
 8. pervenirent : (a) impf. subjv. of the 4th conjug. ; (b) for ex- 
 planation of mode, cf. XXXIII. N'. 7 (b) (c). 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The decl. of Idem, eadem, 
 
 idem A. & G. 101. H. 186, VI. : 
 
 p. 73, foot- 
 note 6, 
 
154 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. The pass, meaning of the pf. 
 
 panic, in dep. verbs . . . A. & G. 135, b. H. 231, 2. 
 
 3. The dat. of the agent . . . A. & G. 232. H. 388, and 
 
 2 ; also foot- 
 note 3. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. consanguineus, adj. or noun bad) ; in plur. goods, posses- 
 
 (con and sanguis, blood}, sions. 
 
 a k'ni by blood. 7- faga, flitjht. 
 
 2. consumere, -sumpsit, -sump- 8. necessarius, necessary; as 
 
 tas (con, intensive, 10 holly , no an, a close friend or near 
 
 and sumere, to take), to con- relative. 
 
 aitme, destroy. 9. praeter, prep, with accus., along 
 
 3. denaonstrare, to show. b>/, beyond, except. 
 
 4. depopulate, to lay waste. 10. solum, the soil, the ground. 
 
 5. exspectare, to wait for, to ex- 11. statuere, statuit, statutus, to 
 
 pect. cause to stand, to establish, 
 
 6. fortuna, fortune (either good or to decide. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. () Quibus rebus deinousti'atls, Caesar in agros Hseduorum 
 contendere constituit. (b} Multa milia jumentorum ab Helvetiis jam 
 consumpta erant. (c) H? res Caesaii, principi Romano, cum Hsedul 
 Romfinls amici sint, non conredendae sunt. (d) Caesar, cum certior 
 factus esset magnam mnltitudinem Helvetiorum, oppidls expugnatls, 
 liberos sociorum abducere, permotus est. 
 
 2. () The Helvetii did very great wrong, because tliey were un- 
 friendly to their neighbors. (5) Caesar informs the Haedui that he 
 will not allow the Helvetii to seize their towns, (c) We cannot defend 
 our children from violence. 
 
 3. (a) The Allobroges are leaving the villages which they possess 
 across the Rhone, (b) The multitude is not easily kept out of the 
 towns, and nothing has been left but the soil, (c) Caesar says that 
 he ought to drive out these men if he can. 
 
LESSON XLIT. 155 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Difference between idem and idem in form and meaning. 
 2. Analysis of pervemrent. 3. The Lat. for he informed Ctzsar, 
 Ccesar was informed. 4. Two cases which express agency. 5. The 
 lit. meaning 1 of the gerundive, and how the idea of necessity comes 
 from this meaning. 6. Three ways of expressing necessity in Lat. 
 7. The dir. disc, in Eug. for the indir. disc, of this lesson. 8. The 
 two parts of speech possible for the form facile. 9. The comparison 
 of certior, 10. The iioin. sing, of possessiones, 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 
 REVIEW of LESSONS XXVII. to XLI. inclusive. 
 1. TEXT. CAESAR, B. G. I, 5 TO 11 INCLUSIVE. 
 
 1. 2. 3. Follow implicitly the directions given in XII., under 
 "Text," 1, 2, and 3. 
 
 4. Make a study of the material of the text under the following 
 heads : (a) pronouns ; write the case, number, gender, and antec. of 
 every pronoun; (b) 3d decl. forms; classify all 3d decl. nouns and 
 adj. according to the ending of the stem ; (c) verbs ; classify all verb 
 forms under their proper conjug., voice, mode, tense, number and 
 person ; then compare your result with the " Verb Diagram " of 
 XXVL, and see what new verb forms have been discovered since the 
 last Eeview. 
 
 5. Same as in XII. 1 
 
 1 In the review of the text, it will be well to assign to the class, for Lat. writing, 
 Eng. sentences based upon each Chapter of the Review. These may be selected from 
 the Exercises already given, or, better, may be new exercises prepared by the teacher. 
 Many of the sentences in Daniell's " Short Sentences for Practice in Writing 
 Latin " (Tvison, Blakeinan & Co.) or Welch and Duffield's " Helvetian war" (Mac- 
 millan) may be used. The teacher should take care, however, that these practice 
 sentences contain only those forms and constructions which the pupil has met in 
 the text of Caesar. 
 
156 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. GRAMMAR LESSON- 
 
 1. 3d decl. neut. in -UB, gen. -eris A. & G. 48, c?. H. 61, opus. 
 
 2. Decl. of vis A. & G. 61. H. 66. 
 
 3. Adj. which form gen. sing, in 
 
 -lus, dat. in -I A. & G. 83 and H. 151 and 1. 
 
 a, b. 
 
 4. Decl. of duo A. & G. 94, b. H. 175. 
 
 5. The first ten cardinals and 
 
 ordinals A. & G. 94. H. 174, 179. 
 
 6. Neut. of the comp. of adj. . . A. & G. 89, 86. H. 162, 154. 
 
 7. Comparison by adv A. & G. 89, d. H. 170. 
 
 8. The decl. of idem . . . . A. & G. 101. H. 186, VI. ; 
 
 p. 73, foot- 
 note 6. 
 
 9. The decl. of the indefinite quis A. & G. 104. H. 190, 188. 
 
 10. Loss of -v from pf. stem . . A. & G. 128, a. H. 235. 
 
 11. The endings -undus and -undi H. 239. 
 
 12. The pass, meaning of pf. partic. 
 
 in dep. verbs A. & G. 135, b. H. 231, 2. 
 
 13. The pf. act. partic., and how to 
 
 supply its place . . . . A. & G. 113, c, H. 231, 1 ; 
 
 N.; 290, d. 550, N. 4. 
 
 14. The gerundive, meaning ought 
 
 or must A. & G. 113, d. H. 234. 
 
 15. Place from which . . . . A. & G. 259, / H. 412, I. 
 
 16. Domum and domo . . . . A. & G. 258. H. 412, II. 1; 
 
 380, I. II. 
 2, 1). 
 
 17. Prep, omitted with loco and 
 
 locis A. &G. 258,/. H. 425, II. 2. 
 
 18. Rel. agreeing Avith repeated 
 
 antec A. & G. 200, a. H. 445, 8. 
 
 19. Adj. used substantively . . . A. & G. 188. H. 441 and 1. 
 
 20. Meaning of ad with names of 
 
 towns A. & G. 258,/, H. 433, I.; 
 
 Hem.; 259, /. 380, II. 1. 
 
LESSON XLII. 157 
 
 21. Pers. pron. as subj. often 
 
 omitted A. & G. 194, a. H. 446. 
 
 22. The subj. of the inf. in iudir. 
 
 discourse regularly expressed A. & G. 336, a. H. 530, N. 3). 
 
 23. The gen. of quality (especially 
 
 measure) . . . . . . A. & G. 215 H. 396, V. 
 
 and b. and N. 1. 
 
 24. The dat. of the possessor . . A. & G. 231. H. 387. 
 
 25. The dat. of the agent . . . A. & G. 232. H. 388 and 2 ; 
 
 also foot- 
 note 3. 
 
 26. Theabl.of measure of difference A. & G. 250. H.423andN.l. 
 
 27. The abl. with special verbs . A. & G. 249. H. 421, I. 
 
 28. The abl. of quality . . . . A. & G. 251. H. 419, II. 
 
 29. The partic. translated like an 
 
 independent verb .... A. & G. 292, H. 549, 5. 
 
 Rem. 
 
 30. Construction with jubere . . A. & G. 330, 2; H. 534, and 
 
 331, a. foot-note 1. 
 
 31. The force of the pres. ind. in 
 
 narrative A. & G. 276, d. H. 467, III. 
 
 32. The use of the supine in -urn . A. & G. 302. H. 546. 
 
 33. Translation of pres. inf. after 
 
 past tense of debere . . . A. & G. 288, a, H. 537, 1. 
 
 and Rem. 
 
 34. Subjv. of result A. & G. 319. H. 500, II. 
 
 35. The substantive clause of result A. & G. 332, a. H. 501, I. 1. 
 
 36. The purpose clause introduced 
 
 by a rel A. & G. 317. H. 497. I. 
 
 37. The subjv. of purpose after quo A. & G. 317, b. H. 497, II. 2. 
 
 38. Dum clauses of purpose . . A. & G. 328. H. 519, II. 2. 
 
 39. Cum causal A. & G. 326. H. 517. 
 
 40. The subordinate clauses of in- 
 
 dir. discourse A. & G. 336, last H. 524. 
 
 clause. 
 
 41. The unemphatic order of the 
 
 Lat. sentence A. & G. 343 and H. 559, 560. 
 
 N. 
 
158 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 . 42. Change of order for emphasis . A. & G. 344 and H. 560, 561, 
 
 e. III. 
 
 43. The effect of position at the 
 
 beginning of sentence . . A. & G. 344, 1. H. 561, I. 
 
 44. The effect of placing the subj. 
 
 at the end of sentence . . A. & G. 344 and H. 561, II. 
 
 a. 
 
 45. The order of the modifiers of 
 
 the verb A. & G. 343. H. 560, 567 
 
 and 3. 
 
 46. Position of word closely con- 
 
 nected with preceding or 
 
 following sentence . . . A. & G. 344, b. 
 
 3. WORD REVIEW. 
 
 Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Caesar, B. G. I. 
 
 5-11. 
 
 1. VERBS. 
 1st Conjug. (-a verbs). 
 
 These verbs, unless it is otherwise stated, bave pf. stem in -V, the supine in 
 -t; thus, para-re, parav-it, parat-us. 
 
 deliberare 
 
 impetrare 
 
 popular! 
 
 demonstrare 
 
 maturare 
 
 portare 
 
 depopulari 
 
 negare 
 
 putare 
 
 existimare 
 
 nuntiare 
 
 reniintiare 
 
 expugnare 
 
 oppugnare 
 
 rogare 
 
 exspectare 
 
 pacare 
 
 temperare 
 
 hiemare 
 
 parare 
 
 vastare 
 
 imperare 
 
 
 
 2c? Conjug. (- verbs). 
 
 Jubere, respondere, and videre have pf. and supine stems like those 
 of 3d conjug. 
 
 debere licet studere 
 
 impendere mereri tencre 
 
 jubere respondere videre 
 
LESSON XLII. 
 
 159 
 
 3d Conjug. (-e verbs). 
 Write the pf. and supine steins of these verbs. 
 
 abducere dejicere intellegere 
 
 adsciscere desistere intercedere 
 
 comburere disponere jungere 
 
 concedere educere molere 
 
 coiisciibere exurere obstringere 
 
 consumere fluere occidere 
 
 defendere incendere ostendere 
 
 pati 
 
 pellere 
 
 perducere 
 
 pemmipere 
 
 preeficere 
 
 recipere 
 
 relinquere 
 
 repellere 
 
 resciiidere 
 
 revertl 
 
 statuere 
 
 sum ere 
 
 traducere 
 
 utl 
 
 th Conjug. (-1 verbs). 
 
 Venire and its compounds have pf. and supine stems like those of 3d conjug. 
 communire convemre expedire pervenire venire 
 
 efferre ire 
 
 Irregular verbs. 
 subire tollere transire 
 
 velle 
 
 angustise, plur. 
 
 fortuna 
 
 fossa 
 
 2. NOUNS HAVING -A STEMS. 
 
 fuga 
 
 gratia 
 
 injuria 
 
 Kalendse, plur. 
 
 memoria 
 
 ripa 
 
 sedificium 
 
 Aulus 
 
 auxilium 
 
 beneficium 
 
 castellum 
 
 consilium 
 
 exeraplum 
 
 jugum 
 
 3. -O STEMS. 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 
 liberi, plur. 
 Lucius 
 
 presidium 
 socius 
 
 maleficium 
 
 sol um 
 
 murus 
 nihilum (nihil) 
 Ocelum 
 
 spatium 
 telum 
 
 Titus 
 
 oppidum 
 periculum 
 
 vadum 
 
 V1CUS 
 
160 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 
 Adj. (having also fern, stems in 
 
 -a). 
 
 bellicosus 
 
 invitus 
 
 primus 
 
 certus 
 
 minimus 
 
 privatus 
 
 cibarius 
 
 necessarius 
 
 quadringenti, plur. 
 
 consanguineus 
 
 nonnullus 
 
 quint us 
 
 duo 
 
 Noricus 
 
 septimus 
 
 frumentariua 
 
 novus 
 
 singuli, plur. 
 
 hiberuus 
 
 nullus 
 
 superus 
 
 iuimicus 
 
 perpaucus 
 
 ullus 
 
 
 4. THIRD DECL. 
 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 
 
 Give the geu. and geiider of each. 
 
 
 altitude 
 
 munitio 
 
 ratis 
 
 Caesar 
 
 11 avis 
 
 reditio 
 
 deprecate r 
 
 obses, -sidis 
 
 servitus, -utis 
 
 facultas 
 
 opus, -eris 
 
 sponte, abl. sing. 
 
 largitio 
 
 pes, -edis 
 
 urbs 
 
 men sis, masc. 
 
 by ex- pous, masc. by excep- 
 
 vis 
 
 ception. 
 
 tion . 
 
 voluutas 
 
 
 Adj. 
 
 
 Aprilis 
 
 complures, plur. 
 
 princeps 
 
 citerior 
 
 difficilis 
 
 ulterior 
 
 
 5. -U STEMS. 
 
 
 adventus 
 
 concursus domus, fern, by 
 
 Idus, plur., fern. 
 
 conatus 
 
 conspectus exception. 
 
 by exception. 
 
 duodecim 
 
 6. -E STEM. 
 spes 
 
 7. INDECL. NUMERAL ADJ. 
 novern quinque 
 
 sedecim 
 
 8. PRON. 
 quemque, accus. sing. 
 
 quis 
 
LESSON XLIII. 
 
 161 
 
 9. PREP. 
 circum post praeter propter 
 
 10. ADV. 
 
 ibi noctti 
 
 inde nondum 
 
 ita nonnunquam 
 
 interea nuper 
 
 interdiu omriino 
 
 jam paene 
 
 11. CONJ. 
 dum itaque si 
 
 sine 
 
 sub 
 
 praeterquam 
 
 qua 
 
 tamen 
 
 ubi 
 
 Qua 
 
 vix 
 
 vel 
 
 LESSON XLIII. 
 
 l. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 12, through flumen transierat. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. incredibill lenitate ; the abl. limited by an adj. modifies the 
 preceding verb influit and tells how the river Hows ; hence called an 
 abl. of manner ; cf. voluntate XXXII. 
 
 2. possit : (a) for form, cf. XXXIV. N. 5 ; (b) for const., cf. 
 XXIX. N. 6 (a) ; (c) in utram partem fluat ; tliis clause is a 
 quoted question and the subj. of possit; the thought of a person 
 looking at the river would be, " In utram partem fluit? " 
 
 3. transibant : (a) impf., because they were in the act of cross- 
 ing ; (b) for position of id, the first word in the sentence, cf. XXXVI. 
 N. 2 (b). 
 
 11 
 
162 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. Caesar certior factus est ; cf. the similar expressions in 
 XXXII. and XLL, and note that the adj. certior always agrees with 
 the name of the person who is informed. 
 
 5. traduxisse : (a) a pf. inf. act., formed on the pf. stem by the 
 addition of -isse ; cf. the pres. inf. act. duce-re ; (b) the preceding 
 word, flumen, is governed by trans with which ducere is here 
 compounded. 
 
 6. profectus : (a) from dep. verb proficisci. How, then, is it 
 translated? (b) de vigilia, just before, lit. from (i. e. beginning in) 
 the watch, may be translated during or in the watch. 
 
 7. transierat ; from transire, -v of the pf. stem being dropped. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The pf. inf. act. is formed in all conjug. by adding -isse to the 
 pf. stem. 
 
 2. The pf. of ire is regularly ivit, but compounds of Ire usually 
 drop -v of the pf. stem. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Two accus. after compound 
 
 verbs A. & G. 239, b. H. 376. 
 
 2. Abl. of manner A. & G. 248 and H. 419, III. 
 
 Hem. 
 
 3. The question indirectly quoted A. & G. 338, H. 523, II. 1 ; 
 
 334. 529, I. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. Arar or Araris (Ararim ac- 3. citra, prep, with accus., on this 
 
 cus., and Arari abl., are side of. 
 
 found), the name of a Gallic 4. explorator (exploraro, to 
 
 river, now the Saone. search out}, a spy, a scout. 
 
 2. castra, -orum (the sing, cas- 5. incredibilis, not to be believed, 
 
 trum, a fortress, is not found incredible, remarkable. 
 
 in Caesar), a camp. 6. judicare, to judge. 
 
LESSON XLIIL 163 
 
 7. lenitas (lenis, smooth}, smooth- 11. utram, accus. sing, fern., which 
 
 ness, gentleness. ' (of two] ? 
 
 8. linter, -tris, fern, by exception, 12. vigilia, watchfulness, a watch of 
 
 a boat. the niyht ; the Romans di- 
 
 9. oculus, an eye. vided the night from sunset 
 10. quartus, fourth. to sunrise, whatever its length, 
 
 into four equal watches. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Decline incredibilis lenitas together, fiumen, and finis. 
 (b) Decline liiitribus, and explain formation of the nom. (c) Write 
 all the forms that you know of posse, (d) Write all the inf. act. 
 and pass, that you know of traduxisse. 
 
 2. (a) Caesar saw a river which was of remarkable smoothness. 
 (b) Three parts of the Helvetian forces had crossed the river, (c) The 
 Helvetii were hastening, that Caesar might not destroy their boats, 
 (c?) The river flows neither toward the east nor toward the west. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar could not judge with his eyes in which direction the 
 river was flowing. (6) They inform Caesar that the remaining fourth 
 part is at last being led across the river, (c} Caesar led to the river 
 three legions which he had with him. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The ending -isse. 2. The pres. stem of translre. 3. The pf. 
 stem of ire, of translre. 4. Difference in form and mode of fluit 
 and fluat. 5. Two kinds of abl. which are usually qualified by an adj. 
 6. All the kinds of abl. learned thus far. 7. The exact literal mean- 
 ing of the Lat. translated to inform. 8. The principal clauses of 
 indir. discourse. 9. The subordinate clauses of indir. discourse. 
 10. The interrogative clauses of indir. discourse. 11. The position 
 of the word most closely related to preceding sentence. 12. The 
 time of the third watch. 
 
164 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 12, Eos impeditos through pcenas persolvit. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. impeditos ; pf. pass, purtic. formed from the supine stem of the 
 4th co u jug. verb impedire. 
 
 2. maiidarunt ; for maiidaverunt, cf. oppugnarant XXVIII. 
 
 3. in silvas abdideruiit ; cf. XVII. N. 11 (b). 
 
 4. hie ; nom. sing, uiasc. of the pron. hi. What other forms have 
 been used ? 
 
 5. exisset ; for exi(v)isset : (a) plpf. subjv. act., sign -isse- ; 
 cf. plpf. subjv. pass, nuiitiatum esset XXXI. ; (b) cf. instances of 
 the use of cum in IX., XLV., XXV., XXXI., XXXVL, XL., and note 
 that, whenever it is used with the impf. and plpf. tenses, cum is fol- 
 lowed by the subjv. ; (c) for omission of prep, with domo, rf. domo 
 XXVIII. 
 
 6. memorial for const., cf. XXI. N. 2. 
 
 7. intulerat; for const, of preceding populo, cf. XIX. N. 12 (c). 
 
 8. persolvit : () ea, the subj. of this verb, refers to pars in the 
 preceding relative clause ; (b) princeps is here an adj. limiting ea 
 (pars), and may be best translated by a clause ; thus, that part was 
 the first to pay the penalty, lit. that part first paid the penalty, 
 i. e. before the other parts, not before doing something else. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The plpf. subjv. act. has the sign -isse- in all conjug., and is 
 formed on the pf. stem because it denotes completed action. 
 
 2. The stems of all four conjug. have now been learned from the 
 text. These stems are shown in representative verbs as follows : 
 
LESSON XLIV. 165 
 
 
 Pres. stem. 
 
 Pf. stem. 
 
 Supine stem. 
 
 1st conjtig. 
 2d con jug-. 
 3d conjug-. 
 4th conjug. 
 
 crema- 
 habe- 
 duce- 
 impedi- 
 
 cremav- 
 habu- 
 dux- for ducs- 
 impedlv- 
 
 cremat- 
 habit- 
 duct- 
 impedit- 
 
 3. The pres. inf., the pf. iud. act., and the pf. pass, partic., since 
 they are very commonly found and invariably show the three stems of 
 the verb, may properly be called the principal parts (or the parts) of 
 the verb. 1 
 
 4. In Caesar the conj. cum, meaning- when, if followed by the impf. 
 or plpf. tenses, commonly takes the subjv. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The antec. in the rcl. clause . A. & G. 200, b H, 445, 9. 
 
 and N. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. abdere, -didit, -ditus, to put 7. immortalis(inneg.,andmors), 
 
 away, to hide. undying, immortal. 
 
 2. aggredi, -gressus (ad and gra- 8. impedire -pedivit, -peditus 
 
 di) to go towards, to attack. (in, against, and pea), to 
 
 3. calamitas, disaster, calamity. impede, to place at a disad- 
 
 4. casua, -us (cadere, to fall), a vantage. 
 
 falling, accident, misfortune, 9. inopinans,adj., unexpecting, un- 
 chaiice. aware. 
 
 5. concidere, -cidit, -cisus (con 10. insignis (in, upon, and signum, 
 
 intensive, and ceedere, to a mark}, marked, remarkable, 
 
 cut), to cut to pieces, to kill. 11. interficere, -fecit, -fectus, to 
 
 6. deus, a god. kill. 
 
 1 These principal parts, though not the same as those usually given, will answer 
 the purpose equally well. The 1st pers. sing, of the pres. ind., which is usually 
 included, is almost never found in Caesar, and in many cases does not show the pres. 
 stem. 
 
166 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12. mandare (manus, the hand, 15. silva, a forest. 
 
 and dare), to gioe into ones 16. sive, couj. (si and vel), or 
 
 hand, to commit. sive . . . sive, whether . 
 
 13. nam, con]., for. or, either . . . or. 
 
 14. persolvere, -solvit, -solutus, 
 
 to loose thoroughly, to pay in 
 full. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Write all the forms that you know of impedire. (b) Of 
 mandare. (c) Decline the adj. iuopinans, insignia in all genders. 
 (d] Decline silva, casus, -us. 
 
 2. (a) The forests in which the rest hid themselves were very near 
 to the river, (b) The part which was left was cut to pieces when 
 taken at a disadvantage (partic.). (c) The rest of the Helvetii were 
 taken at a disadvantage, because they were in the river, (d) That 
 part of the Helvetii which had brought signal calamity upon the 
 Roman people, was the first to pay the penalty. 
 
 3. (a) Tigurinus was one out of the four districts into which the 
 Helvetian state was divided. (b) In the memory of our fathers, a 
 Roman army was defeated and a Roman consul sent under the yoke. 
 (c) Caesar said that it came to pass, either by chance or the design of 
 the gods, that the Tigurini were the first to pay the penalty. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The stems of all conjug., and how to find them. 2. Likeness 
 between the 1st and 4th conjug. in formation of stems. 3. Difference 
 in the formation of pf. stem in 3d and 4th conjug. 4, Difference be- 
 tween the 2d and 4th conjug. in quantity of i in supine stem. 5. Dif- 
 ference in characteristic of 2d and 3d conjug. 6. The principal parts 
 of every verb in the lesson except intulerat. 7. Instances in which 
 a prep, expressed in Eng. is omitted in Lat. 8. In which the Lat. 
 uses a different prep, from that which the Eng. translation suggests. 
 9. All you know about the form cum. 
 
LESSON XLV. 16T 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. GK I. 12, Qua in through Helvgtiorum fuerat in 13. 
 
 2. NOTES. 1 
 
 1. qua in re; for order, cf. XV. N. 7 (c) and XXXVI. N. 2 (b). 
 
 2. interfecerant : (a) supply this verb in the subordinate clause, 
 where it will have Tigurini for its subj. and Cassium for its obj. ; 
 (b) ejus, referring to Caesar, depends upon soceri; it is not an adj. 
 agreeing with soceri; (c) appositives in this sentence? (d) antec. and 
 const, of quo? 
 
 3. curat : (a) poiitem the obj. is limited by the gerundive 
 faciendum ; lit., he cares for a bridge to be made, more freely, 
 he has a bridge built; (b) What clause gives the purpose of this 
 bridge-building ? 
 
 4. ipsi ; for meaning and use, cf. ipse XXII. N. 4. 
 
 5. ut . . . transirent ; substantive clause, in apposition with pre- 
 ceding id, which is the obj. of confecerant ; cf. XXIV. N. 3 (d). 
 
 6. ilium : (a) refers to Caesar, and is the word naturally used by 
 the Helvetii in thinking of their enemy ; cf. XXII. A T ocab. ; (b) What 
 is the dir. disc, for ilium fecisse ? or, in other words, what was the 
 exact thought of the Helvetii ? 
 
 7. Divico ; nom. sing., not abl. sing. What, then, is its gen. ? 
 
 8. princeps; here a noun ; for const., cf. XX. N. 4 (d). 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The gerundive after curare and 
 
 similar verbs A. & G. 294, d. H.544,2,N.2. 
 
 1 The pupil should remember that many difficulties unprovided for in the Notes 
 are fully met in the Vocab., which must, of course, be consulted in translating the 
 Text. 
 
168 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. aegerrumeoraegerrime,adv.iii 7. dux -cis (ducere), a leader. 
 
 sup., with the greatest trouble. 8. publicus, public. 
 
 2. avus, grandfather. 9. BOGeil, fathers-in-law. 
 
 3. Cassianus, adj., pertaining to 10. repeiitinus, sudden. 
 
 Caseins ; bellum Cassia- 11. solum, adv., only; non sSlum 
 iium, the war icith Caxxiux. . . . sed etiam, not only . . . 
 
 4. commovere, -movit, -m5tus, but also. 
 
 to mo oe deeply. 12. ulcisci, ultus, to avenge, to pun- 
 
 5. consequi, -secutus, to follow i*h. 
 
 ui), 1 obtain. 13. viginti, iudccl. numeral, 
 
 6. curare, to take care. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Principal parts of facere, transire, intellegere, mittere. 
 (b) Decline ille, ipse. (c) Decline Divico, princeps. (d) Write 
 all the forms you know of ulcisci. 
 
 2. (a) Caesar had married Calpurnia, the daughter of Piso. (b) The 
 grandfather of Lucius Piso, from whom he received his name, had been 
 killed by the Tigurini. (c) Therefore Caesar said he avenged a private 
 wrong, when he cut to pieces the Tigurini. (d) Caesar has boats 
 joined together, in order to lead his army across the river. 
 
 3. (a) For twenty days the Helvetii were building the bridge by 
 which they crossed, (b) Divico, whom they sent to Caesar, had 
 waged war with the Romans, (c) Caesar intended to punish those 
 who had brought marked disaster upon the Romans, (d) Cassius 
 led the army in which was the grandfather of Csesar's father-in-law. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Two cases possible for the form socerl. 2. The gender of 
 pons. 3. Difference in meaning between hie and ille. 4. Force 
 of non solum . . . sed etiarn, aut . . . aut, sive . . . slve, 
 et . . . et, ita . . . ut. 5. Two meanings of the form quod in this 
 lesson. 6. Meaning of Cassianus in this lesson. 7. The Lat. for 
 
LESSON XLVI. 169 
 
 father, son, daughter, brother, father-in-law, grandfather, kinsman 
 (by blood). 8. The abl. of time in this lesson. 9. The abl. of place. 
 10. Difference between them. 11. The subjv. with cum in this 
 lesson. 12. The translation of the abl. absolute in this lesson. 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 13, Is ita through virtutis Helvetiorum. 
 
 Is ita cam Csesare egit : 
 
 " Si pacem populus Romaiius cum 
 HelvetiTs faciet, in earn par- 
 tern ibunt atque ibi erunt 
 
 Helvetii, ubi eos con- 
 
 stitueris atque esse volue- 
 ris; smbello perseqm perseve- 
 rabis, reminiscere et veteris 
 iucommodi populi Romani, et 
 pristiuse virtutis Helvetiorum." 
 
 SI pacem populus Romanus cum 
 Helvetils faceret, in earn par- 
 tern ituros atque ibi futures 
 Helvetica, ubi eos Caesar con- 
 stituisset atque esse voluis- 
 set; sin bello persequi perseve- 
 raret, reminisceretur et veteris 
 iiicornmodl populi Romani et 
 pristiuse virtutis Helvetiorum.' 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. faceret : (a) impf. subjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. disc., 
 quoted after a past or historical tense, egit ; (b) the direct form is 
 faciet, a fut. ind. ; (c) the tense sign of the 4th conjug. form faciet 
 is -e- ; (c?) faceret, should make ; faciet, shall make. 
 
 2. Helvetios : (a) subj. of esse understood with ituros and 
 futures, which are fut. act. partic. agreeing with Helvetios ; (b) the 
 fut. inf. ituros (esse) stands for the fut. ind. ibunt in the dir. disc., 
 and futures esse for erunt, the fut. ind. of the irreg. verb esse ; 
 (c) the subj. of the ind. is the nom. Helvetii. 
 
 3 constituisset : (a) plpf. subjv., sign -isse- ; cf. XLIV. N. 5 (a) ; 
 
 (b) in the subjv., because it is in a subordinate clause of indir. disc. ; 
 
 (c) the dir. form is the fut. pf. ind. constitueris, you shall have 
 
170 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 placed them ; (d) the sign of the fut. pf. ind. is -eri- ; (e) the pers. 
 ending of the 2d sing, in the act. is -a, thou or you ; cf. -t, -nt, -mus ; 
 (/) as Divico is addressing Caesnr, he would not use the Lat. word for 
 C(zscir, hut the Lat for thou or you, which is expressed sufficiently by 
 the pers. ending -&. 
 
 4. voluisset : (a) in the same construction as constituisset ; 
 
 (b) note that hotli are formed on the pf. stem, which in constituisset 
 (litters in form from the pres. stem only in the loss of the final -e ; 
 
 (c) voluisset is followed hy (eos) esse, that they be or them to be. 
 
 5. perseveiaret : (a) impf. suhjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. 
 disc. ; (b) it stands for the fut. ind. perseverabis in the dir. form ; 
 (c) perseverabis is formed on the pres. stem, because it denotes 
 incomplete action ; (d) its tense sign is -bi- ; this -bi- is varied to 
 -bu- in the 3d plur. ; cf. i-bu-nt 2 (b) ; (e) for use of 2d pers. and 
 2d pers. ending, cf. 3 (e} (/"). 
 
 6. reminisceretur : (a) impf. suhjv. of the dep. verb reminisci ; 
 (b} stands for the pres. imperative, 2d pers. sing., reminiscere; 
 (c) reminisce-re is formed on the pres. stem with the ending -re ; 
 cf. the ending of the pres. inf. act; (d) it is used with the gen. case 
 in the words incommodi and virtutis ; cf. the Eng. expression be 
 mindful of. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. New pers. endings : -s, 2d pers. act.- ; -re, 2d pers. pass. 
 
 2. New 7 tense signs : -bi-, fut. 1st conjug. (-bu- in 3d plur.) ; 
 --, fut. 4th conjug. ; -eri-, fut. pf. all conjug. 
 
 3. Examples of every tense in both the ind. and subjv. have now 
 been found in Caesar. The tenses of the ind. are the pres., impf., fut., 
 pf., plpf., and fut. pf. ; the tenses of the subjv. are the same, with the 
 omission of the fut. and the fut. pf. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of vetus A. & G. 85. H. 158. 
 
 2. The 3d sing, and plur. in all 
 
 tenses of the ind. and subjv., 
 and the inf. and partic. of 
 the iiTeff. verb esse , . A. G. 119. H. 204. 
 
XLVI. 171 
 
 3. Changes of mode in indir. disc. xv. & u. 336, H. 523, LIT. 
 
 339. 1,111., 524. 
 
 4. Put. time in the subjv. . . . A. & G. 110, H. 496, I. II. 
 
 a, 286, Hem. 
 last sentence. 
 
 5. Change of pers. in indir. disc. . .... H. 526. 
 
 6. The gen. with verbs of remem- 
 
 bering A. & G. 219. H. 406, II. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. agere, egit, actus, to set in 3. persequi, secutus, to follow 
 
 motion, to drive, to do, to dis- up, to pursue. 
 
 cms- 4. perseverare, to continue, to 
 
 2. incommodus, inconvenient; as ptrxixt. 
 
 a noun in the neut., an incon- 5. pristinus, former, 
 
 venience, a mild term for mis- 6. reminisci, to remember, 
 
 fortune. 7- sin (si and n, not), but if. 
 
 8. vetus, -eris, old, former. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Write the 3d sing, of all ind. and subjv. tenses act. and pass, 
 of perseverare, in the following order : pres., iinpf., fut., pf., plpf., 
 fut. pf. ; or, in other words, give the synopsis of persevgrare in the 
 3d sing. act. and pass, (b) Write the synopsis of agere in the 3d 
 plur. subjv. (c) Write five inf. and three partic. of constituere. 
 
 2. (a) Remember the former war, in which the Roman consul 
 Cassius was killed, (b) If peace shall be made by the Roman people, 
 we will go to that place where Caesar shall have commanded us (nos) 
 to be. (c) It is not fitting (oportet) for Caesar to pursue us. 
 (d) By a speech Divico tried to persuade Caesar not to follow up the 
 Helvetii. 
 
 3. (a) Divico discusssed this matter (thing) with Caesar, in order 
 to obtain this request, (b) The Helvetii sent Divico to discuss this 
 matter, because they saw that Csesar was very powerful, (c) When 
 Caesar had determined to cross the river, he made a bridge in one 
 day. 
 
172 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The tenses of the ind. and snbj. act. formed on the pres. stem. 
 2. The pf. stem. 3. The formation of the pres. ind. 4. The tense 
 signs of the impf.. plpf., fut. pf. ind., and irapf., pf., and plpf. subjv. in 
 all conjug. 5. The endings of the pres. and pf. inf. act. in all conjug. 
 G. The formation of the fut. act. and pf. pass. inf. in all conjug. 
 7. The formation of the fut. act. and pf. pass, pnrtic. in all con- 
 jug. 8. Peculiarities of conjng. in the verb esse. 9. The kind of 
 clauses which take the inf. in indir. disc. 10. Special verbs which 
 take the gen., the dat., the abl. 11. Why the fut. ind. is not changed 
 in indir. disc, to the fut. subjv. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 13, Quod improvise through insidiis nlterentur. 
 
 "Quod improvise liuum paguin ad- 
 ortus es, cum ii, qui iluinen 
 transierant, sins auxilium ferrc 
 11611 posseut, ne ob earn rein aut 
 tuae magiiopere virtuti tribu- 
 eris, aut nos despexeris ; 
 nos ita a patribus majoribusque 
 nostrls didicimus,ut magis vir- 
 tute quam dolo contendamus 
 aut insidiis nitamur." 
 
 ' Quod improviso unum pagum ad- 
 ortus esset, cum ii, qtii flumen 
 trSnsissent, suis auxilium ferre 
 non posseut, ne ob earn rem aut 
 suee magnopere virtuti tribu- 
 eret, aut ipsos despiceret ; 
 se ita a patribus majoribusque 
 suis didicisse, ut magis vir- 
 tute quam dolo contenderent 
 aut insidiis nlterentur.' 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. adortus esset : (a) plpf. subjv. of a dep. verb ; for form, 
 cf. XXXI. N. 2; (b) in the subjv. only because a subordinate clause 
 of indir. disc.; cf. adortus es the direct form and XXXII. N. 6; 
 
LESSON XLVIL 173 
 
 (c) in the 2d pers., because Divico is addressing Caesar ; ea is the 
 2d pers. sing, of the pres. ind. of esse; (d) adortus es, the pf. is 
 changed to the plpf. adortus esset, because the latter is quoted after 
 the past tense egit ; thus in Eng. we would say, Do not despise us 
 because you have attacked a canton, but. He said not to despise us 
 because he had attacked a canton. 
 
 2. traiisissent ; simply changed to the subjv. from transierant, 
 because in a subordinate clause. 
 
 3. possent : (a) in the subjv. in both dir. and iridir. disc., because 
 after cum ; cf. XLfV. N. 5 (b) ; (b) the preceding suis is a dat. 
 case and a noun, to theirs, to their (countrymen), cf. XL. N. 1. 
 
 4. suae, his ; changed from tuae, your (sing.) in the direct form, 
 where Divico is addressing Caesar and referring to the valor of 
 Csesar. 
 
 5. ipsos, them; refers to the Hclvetii, and so stands for n 6s, us, 
 in the speech of the Helvetian Divico. 
 
 6. ne aut . . . tribueret, aut . . . despiceret, not to ascribe it 
 to his valor especially, or despise them ; both these verbs are changed 
 from the pf. subjv. M sing, in the dir. form, and the clause is then 
 translated, Do not ascribe it to your own valor especially, or 
 despise us. 
 
 7. se, they, in the reported speech stands for nos, we, in the direct 
 form. 
 
 8. didicisse : (a) pf. inf., ending -isse ; cf. XLITI. N. 5 (a) 
 (b) stands for the direct form didicimus, which is the pf. ind. act. 1st 
 plur. ; (c) nos, the subj. of didicimus, is here expressed because 
 emphatic, but cf. XLVI. N. 3 (/) and XL. N. 4 (d). 
 
 9. contenderent : (a) a result clause, giving the result of didi- 
 cisse ; (b) stands for the direct form contendamus, the pres. subjv. 
 act. 1st plur. ; (c) for change of tense, cf. 1 (d). 
 
 10. nitamur : (a) pres. subjv. of a dep. verb, same construction 
 as conteiidamus ; (b) -mur is the ending of the 1st plur. pass. ; 
 cf. -mus, the ending of 1st plur. act. ; (c) the clause aut iiitamur 
 is peculiar in its connection with the rest of the sentence ; it is best 
 translated, and (so) that we do not rely on ambuscades; (d) for 
 insidiis, see Gram. Less. 
 
174 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Tenses of the subordinate 
 
 clauses in indir. disc. . . . A. & G. 285, H. 491, 492, 
 
 286. 1, 2, 493, 
 
 1, 2. 
 
 2. The pf. subjv. in prohibitions . A. & G. 269, a. H. 484, IV. x. 
 
 1. 
 
 3. Abl. with nitl A. & G. 254, H. 425, II. 1, 
 
 and b. 1) and N. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adoriri, -ortus, to rise against, 
 
 to attack. 
 
 2. despicere, -spexit, -spectus, 
 
 to look down upon, to despise* 
 
 3. discere, didicit, to learn. 
 
 4. dolus, craft, deceit. 
 
 5. ferre, tulit, latus, irrcg., to 
 
 bear. 
 
 6. improvise, adv. (in neg., pro, 
 
 before, fore, visus, seen), unex- 
 pectedly. 
 
 7. insidiae, no in. plur. (in, in, and 
 
 sedere, to sit) an ambush, 
 treachery. 
 
 8. magnopere, adv. (magno and 
 
 opere), with great toil, great- 
 ly ; magis, comp., more ; 
 
 maxime, sup., very greatly, 
 most, especially. 
 
 9. major (comp. of magnus), 
 greater; majores natu or 
 simply majores, those greater 
 by birth, ancestors. 
 
 10. ne, adv., not; cf. ne, conj., 
 
 that not. 
 
 11. niti, nisus or nixus, to rest 
 
 upon, rely upon, to strive. 
 
 12. nos, nom. or^accus. plur., we or 
 
 11*. 
 
 13. quam, adv., than. 
 
 14. tuus, tua, tuum, thy, thine, 
 
 your ; cf. suus. 
 
 15. tribuere, tribuit, tributus, to 
 
 assign, ascribe. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Decline pagus, auxilium, flumen, pater, virtus, res. 
 (b) Decline unus and give the cardinal numbers up to ten. (c) Write 
 the synopsis of posse in 3d sing. 
 
 2. (a) You will not overcome the Helvetii by your valor. (5) The 
 Helvetii themselves proved that they were very brave in the war with 
 
LESSON XLVITI. 175 
 
 Cassius. (c) In that war they defeated the Roman army and sent 
 it under the yoke. 1 (d) Our fathers, when they waged war upon their 
 neighbors, used to rely (were relying) on their own valor, not upon 
 trickery. 
 
 3, (a) The Helvetii will be in that land where Cuesar shall have 
 wished them to be. (b) For twenty days the Helvetii were crossing 
 the river, which Caesar crossed in one day by the bridge which he had 
 built, (c) Divico says that Caesar is ascribing it to his own valor, 
 that (since) he has killed those whom their friends had left behind. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The exact translation of Divico's own words. 2. All the inf. and 
 partic. of mti. 3. Comparison of magnus and magnopere. 4. Two 
 meanings for ne, for quam, for quod, for virtus. 5. The endings 
 -mus and -mur. 6. The sign of each tense of the subjv. in the 
 3d conjug. 7. In the 1st. 8. All the pers. endings you now know, 
 both act. and pass. 9. The reason for each change of pers. in the 
 Text in passing from dir. to indir. disc. 10. The reason why some 
 subordinate verbs are in the subjv. in both dir. and indir. disc., and 
 some in the subjv. only in the indir. 
 
 LESSON XL VIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 13, Quare ne to the end. 
 
 Quare ne commiseris, ut is locus, 
 ubi constiterimus ex calami- 
 tate populi Roman! et interne- 
 cione exercitus ndmen capiat, 
 aut memoriam prodat." 
 
 ' Quare ne committeret, ut is locus, 
 ubi constitissent, ex calami- 
 tate populi Roman! et interne- 
 cione exercitus nomen caperet, 
 aut memoriam proderet.' 
 
 1 Lit. -. They sent the defeated Roman army under the yoke. 
 
176 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. committeret : for construction and change to commiseris, 
 cf. XLV1I. N. 6. 
 
 2. constituisset ; stands for the fut. pf. ind. constiterimus, we 
 shall have taken our stand ; cf. XLYL N. 3. 
 
 3. caperet . . . proderet : (a) impf. subjv. of the 3d conjug. ; 
 (b) denote purpose after coramitteret, a verb of urging ; cf. XX. 
 N. 5 (b) ; (e) stand for tlie direct forms capiat and prodat, which are 
 in the pros, subjv. because after the primary tense commiseris ; 
 cf. XLVIL N. 2 (d) t Grain. Less.; (d) capiat is of the 4th conjug. 
 and prodat of tlie 3d, though in the impf. subjv. both are of the 3d ; 
 some 3d conjug. verbs, (e. g. capere and facere), have 4th conjug. 
 forms in several tenses formed on the pros, stem ; (e) distinguish 
 capiat, prodat from capiet, prodet, fut. ind., and capit, prodit, 
 capiuut, produnt, pivs. ind. ; (f} internecione has the same con- 
 struction as calamitate. (a) How does tlie form exercitus differ 
 from that of nom. sing. ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. We have now learned from the text the 3d sing, and plur. of 
 every tense of the ind. and subjv. act. and pass, in all conjug.; also the 
 partic., gerunds, supines, and the inf., with the exception of the 
 fut. pass, inf., which is uncommon and may be omitted in the grammar 
 references given below for review. 
 
 2. The pupil will save himself much confusion in learning these 
 conjug., by fixing in mind the following facts : 
 
 (a) The conjug. differ in the main, only in their characteristics and 
 the formation of their stems ; the method of forming the tenses, the 
 pers. endings, the endings of partic. and inf., and most of the tense 
 signs, are the same for all conjug. 
 
 (b) The pass, differs from tlie act., in tenses formed from the pres. 
 stem, Oi:ly in its pers. endings, and forms all tenses of completed 
 action by uniting the pf. pass, partic. and some tense of the verb 
 ease. 
 
LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 i i 
 
 (c) The most difficult tenses are the pres. ind., fut. ind., and pres. 
 subjv., which must be carefully distinguished : the 3d conjug. in the 
 pres. ind. changes -e of the pres. stem to -i in 3d sing, and -u'in 3d 
 plur. ; the tense sign of the fut. is -bi- in the 1st and 2d conjug. and 
 e- in the 3d and 4th ; and the sign of the pres. subjv. is -e- in the 
 1st conjug., but -a in the 2d, 3d, and 4th. For sterns of all conjug., 
 see XLLV. Obs. 2. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Tenses formed from the pres., 
 
 pf., and supine stems . . A. & G. 127. H. 222, I. II. 
 
 2. The four conjug. ; ind. and III. 
 
 subjv. 3d sing, and plur. act. 
 and pass., and act. and pass. 
 
 inf. and partic A. & G. 128- H. 205-212. 
 
 132. 1 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. committere, -misit, -missus, 4. internecio, destruction, exter- 
 
 to let go together, to commit, to urination.. 
 
 cause that; prcelium com- 5. prodere, -didit, -ditus, to put 
 
 mittere, to join bal.tle. forth, to transmit, to hana 
 
 2. consistere, -stitit, to take a do/en. 
 
 stand, stop. 6. quare (qua and re), on account 
 
 3. n5men, a name. of which thing, wherefore. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Synopsis of committere in 3d sing. act. and passive ; 
 (b) Of prodere in 3d plur. act. and pass, (c) Inf. and partic. of 
 capere with meaning of each form, (d) Decline is, internecio, 
 locus, memoria. 
 
 2. (a) Caesar will not cause this place where he shall take his stand 
 (shall have taken his stand) to receive a name from the extermina- 
 
 1 Select from these articles only what the heading of this reference calls for. 
 
 12 
 
178 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 tion of his army. (&) In the battle which Caesar is about to join with 
 the Helvetii, he will avenge the former disaster of the Roman consul. 
 (c) The memory of that (illius) misfortune has been handed down to 
 those who are dwelling in Italia. 
 
 3, (a) After enrolling new legions, Caesar hastened to his army and 
 attacked that part of the Helvetii which had not yet crossed the river. 
 (b) Follow up the Helvetii, that they may not arrive at the boundaries 
 of the Santones. (c) Caesar causes new legions to be enrolled, to 
 contend with the Helvetii. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. All the tense signs of the ind. and subjv. 2. All the endings 
 of inf. and partic., and the stem upon which each is formed. 3. The 
 tenses of the pres. system. 4. The pf. system. 5. The supine 
 system. 6. The impf. ind. and impf. subjv. of the 4th conjug. 
 
 7. Peculiarity of the ending of the pres. inf. pass, in 3d conjug. 
 
 8. Similarity between 1st and 4th conjug. 9. Differences between 
 the 1st and 4th conjug. 10. Some verbs which have forms of differ- 
 ent conjug. 11. The pres. and fut. ind. and pres. subjv. 3d sing, of 
 cremSre, habgre, ducere, and impedire. 
 
LESSON XLIX. 
 
 179 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 14, through difficile cavgre. 
 
 His Caesar ita respondit : 
 
 " E6 mihi minus dubitationis datur, 
 
 quod eas res, quas 
 
 commemoravistis 
 
 memoria teneo, atque eo gra- 
 vius fero, quo minus merito 
 populi Roman! acciderunt : 
 qui si alicujus iujurise sibi 
 conscius fuisset, non fuit diffi- 
 cile cave re ; " 
 
 ' Eo sibi minus dubitationis dari, 
 quod efis res, quas legati 
 Helvetii commemorassent, 
 memoria teneret, atque eo gra- 
 vius ferre, quo minus merito 
 populi Roman! accidissent : 
 qui s! alicujus injuries sibi 
 conscius fuisset, non fuisse diffi- 
 cile cavere ; ' 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. respondit : (a) for the construction of the preceding his, cf. 
 XXII. N. 2, Obs. 3 ; (b) respondit is a pf. indefinite referring to 
 simple past time. What is the form of the pres. ind. act., 3d sing. ? 
 What tenses will follow respondit in the subordinate clauses of indir. 
 disc.? XLVII. N. 1 (d) ; (c) remember that the subj. is Caesar; he 
 is about to speak to the Helvetian ambassadors, for whom Divico has 
 acted as spokesman. 
 
 2. dari : (a) in the principal clause of indir. disc., for datur in 
 the dir. ; (b) note that the tense of the principal verb in indir. disc, 
 is not changed after a past tense as in Eng. ; in Lat., lit., Ccesar re- 
 plied that less doubt is given, where the Eng. requires Ccesar replied 
 that less doubt was given ; (c) for construction of preceding eo, 
 cf. XVI. N. 2 (c) ; (d) instead of the indir. sibi, to him, Caesar, 
 in speaking to the legates, used mihi, to me ; (e) minus is a neut. 
 adj. in form, here a noun, the subj. of dari, with the partitive gen. 
 
180 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 dubitationis dependent upon it ; cf. the adv. minus, and XYI. N. 5, 
 Obs. 5. 
 
 3. commemorasseiit for commemoravissent : (a) plpf. subj. 
 act., 1st conjug. ; for form, cf. XXVIII. N. 6 (a) (c}, XLIV. N. 5 (a); 
 (b) for change from commemoravistis, cf. XLYII. N. 1 ; (c) the 
 subj. legati takes the place of the Lat. for you, plur., in the direct 
 form, and you, plur., is expressed by the ending -tis in the verb com- 
 memorav-i3-tis. 
 
 4. teneret : (a) explain mode and tense ; (b) takes the place of 
 the verb tene-o, I hold, the pers. ending 1 -o meaning' /. 
 
 5. ferre : (a) for fero, / bear, of the dir. disc. ; (b) modified by 
 the adv. gravius, in the eomp., lit. / bear more heavily, freely / 
 am more angry ; (c) for construction of eo before gravius, cf. 
 XXVII. N. 1. 
 
 6. accidissent : (a) for change from acciderunt, cf. 3 ; (b) quo, 
 the rel pro n. in abl. neut. before the adv. minus, has the same 
 construction as eo 5 (c) ; lit. by that f bear these things more heavily, 
 by which less they happened because of the desert of the Roman 
 people, freely, / am the more angered, in proportion as they did not 
 happen deservedly to the Roman people ; (c) the subj. of both the 
 dir. and indir. verb is eae res, these things, supplied from what pre- 
 cedes ; (d) for construction of merito, cf. XVI. N. 2 (c). 
 
 7. fuisset : (a) the subj. is qui, of which the antec. is populi Ro- 
 man! , for translation of qui, cf. IX. N, 1 (d), Obs. 1 ; (b) conscius 
 is a pred. adj. agreeing with qui; it is followed by the dat. sibi and 
 the gen. injuriae ; (c) alicujus is an indef. adj. (from no in. aliqui), 
 limiting injuriae ; (d) the collective noun populus is sing, in agree- 
 ment, not plur., as the word people would more commonly be in Eng. ; 
 (e) fuisset is the plpf. subjv. in both dir. and indir. form, to imply 
 that the Roman people were not conscious of wrong ; the clause is 
 lit. translated if the Roman people had been conscious to itself of 
 any wrong-doing. 
 
 8. fuisse : (a) pf. inf. of esse, standing for fuit, it was, of the 
 dir. disc, (fuisset, would have been, seems more natural in connection 
 with the si clause which precedes) ; (b) the subj. is cavere, and 
 difficile is the pred. adj. agreeing with this subj. ; cf. XXII. x. 3 (b). 
 
LESSON XLIX. 
 
 181 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The pers. ending -tis, you, is that of the 2d plur. in the act. 
 voice ; -o is used as the pers. ending of the 1st sing, in the pres. hid. 
 act., and in some other tenses. 
 
 2. It is the subordinate and imperative clauses which change the 
 tenses of their verbs in indir. disc, after a past tense. The inf. in the 
 principal clauses has, as nearly as the forms of the inf. will admit, 
 the tense of the principal verb for which it stands. 
 
 4, GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The partitive gen. depending 
 
 on neuters and comparatives A. & G. 216, 2, H. 397, 3. 
 
 3. 
 
 2. Quo . . . eo A. & G. 106, c. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. accidere, -cidit (ad and ca- 5. 
 
 dere, to fall), to fall upon., 
 to fall out, to happen (used 
 generally of unfortunate oc- 6 
 currences, hence Eng. acci- 7- 
 denf). 
 
 2. aliqui, iudef. adj., any. 
 
 3. cavere, cavit, cautus, to take 8, 
 
 care, beware of. 
 
 4. commemorare, to call to mind, 9. 
 
 to mention. 10. 
 
 conscius (con, with, and scire, 
 to know}, knowing with one's 
 self or with others, conscious. 
 
 dubitatio, doubt. 
 
 gravius, adv. in romp., more 
 heavily ; gravius ferre, to be 
 more annoyed, aitf/i'i/. 
 
 raeritum (mereri), desert, 
 merit. 
 
 mihi, dat., me. 
 
 minor, adj. in comp., smaller, 
 
 less. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Give the principal parts of all the verbs in this lesson, 
 except dare. (J) Decline sibi, qui, conscius, throughout, (c) De- 
 cline in all genders difficilia, minor. 
 
182 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. (a) Caesar said there was no doubt 1 that the Helvetii at- 
 tacked the Romans without cause. (6) I am more angry because 
 that former disaster did not happen on account of any wrong which 
 the Romans had committed, (c) I remember that the Romans were 
 not waging war upon the Helvetii when the Helvetii attacked them. 
 (d) It will not be easy to send the brave Helvetii under the yoke. 
 
 3. (a) If Caesar contends (shall contend) with the Helvetii, he will 
 overcome them. (b) The more I think of it, the more difficult it 
 seems (pass, of videre) to me. (c) Having prepared all things for 
 waging war, Caesar on that day discussed the matter with the Helvetii. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Comparison between the forms of the adj. and those of the cor- 
 responding adv. in positive, comp., and sup. 2. All the pers. endings 
 learned thus far. 3. Two uses of the inf. in this lesson. 4. Con- 
 struction used with conscius. 5. The Lat. for to be more angry, 
 to remember, the more . . . the more. 6. Tenses in the subordinate 
 clauses of indir. disc. 7. Tn the principal clauses. 8. Different kinds 
 of abl. in this lesson. 9. The agreement of the collective noun. 
 10. The antec. of every pi on. in lesson. 11. Changes of pers. in this 
 lesson in passing from dir. to mdir. disc. 12. The gender of a sub- 
 stantive clause. 
 
 1 See XXII. Text and N. 7. 
 
LESSON L. 
 
 183 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 14, sed eo through deponere posse. 
 
 "sed eo deceptus est, qnod neque 
 commissum a se intellegebat 
 quare time ret, neque sine causa 
 timendura putabat. Quod si 
 veteris coutumelise oblivisci 
 volo, imm etiam receutium in- 
 juriarum, quod me iuvito iter 
 per proviuciam per vim tempta- 
 vistis, quod Hseduos, quod Am- 
 barros, quod Allobrogas vex- 
 avistis, memoriam depouere 
 possum ? " 
 
 sed eo deceptum, quod neque 
 commissum a se intellegeret 
 quare timeret, neque sine causa 
 timendum putaret. Quod si 
 veteris contumelia3 oblivisci 
 vellet, uum etiam recentiura in- 
 juriarum, quod eo iuvito iter 
 per provincial!! per vim temptas- 
 sent, quod Hseduos, quod Am- 
 barroSj quod Allobrogas vex- 
 assent, memoriam deponere 
 posse ? ' 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. deceptum : (a) forms with esse, understood, the pf. pass. inf. 
 of decipere ; (&) the sill)], is populum Romanum, supplied from 
 what precedes ; (c) cf. the direct form deceptus est, and note that 
 there is no change of tense in the indir. form. 
 
 2. intellegeret : (a) cf. the dir. intellegebat, arid note that 
 subordinate verbs already in a secondary tense remain in the same 
 tense when changed to indir. disc, after a secondary tense ; (&) the 
 subj. is populus Romaiius ; (c) the clause quod . . . intellegeret 
 is in apposition with the preceding eo, which is an abl. of means with 
 deceptum esse ; (W) the subj. of commissum (esse) is indefinite ; 
 it would be some such word as aliquid, anything. 
 
 3. timeret; subjv. in both dir. and indir. disc., is explanatory of 
 commissum (esse). 
 
 4. putaret : (a) has the same construction as iiitellegeret ; 
 (b) for timendum, with esse understood, cf. XXXIII. N. 3 (b) ; 
 
184 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 (c) the whole lesson so far may be thus translated from the direct form 
 very lit., but (the Roman people] was deceived by this, because it knew 
 that it (or anything] had not been committed by itself wherefore it 
 should fear, and it did not think it was to be feared without a cause ; 
 very freely, but the Roman people were deceived by the knowledge of 
 their own innocence, and the belief that they did not need to fear 
 without reason. 
 
 5. quod, before si : (a) an adverbial aecus. translated, with si, as 
 to which if, or, freely, but if, now if; (b) its antec. is the whole 
 preceding sentence. 
 
 6. vellet : (a) irreg. impf. subjv. of velle, to wish ; (b) the 
 change from the dir. volo is perfectly regular ; (c) for -o of volo, 
 cf. XLIX. X. 4 (b) ; (d) followed by the pres. inf. of the 3d conjug. 
 oblivisci ; (e) oblivisci, dep., to forget, is used with the gen. contu- 
 melice; cf. XLVI. N. 6 (d). 
 
 7. temptassent : (a) follows quod, because ; (b) for change 
 from temptavistis, cf. commemorassent XLIX. N. 3 ; (c) eo, after 
 quod, is in the abl. absolute with invito ; cf. Sequanis invitis 
 XXXVT. ; (d) takes the place of me, the abl. sing, of the pers. pron, 
 of the 1st pers. ; cf. mihi XLIX. N. 2 (d), and nos XLVII. N. 5, 7. 
 
 8. vexassent : (a) the same construction as temptassent ; 
 (b] quod, because, is repeated by Csesar before each obj. of the verb, 
 in order to call attention to the repeated instances of wrong-doing on 
 the part of the Helvetii ; (c) Allobrogas is a peculiar form of the 
 accus. for the more common Allobroges. 
 
 9. iium . . . injuriarum . . . memoriam deponere posse ? 
 (a) note that the clause is interrogative ; (b) the interrogative word is 
 num, which stands first ; when this word is used, a negative answer 
 is expected, expressed in Eng. by he could not, could he? or merely 
 the tone of the voice ; (e) the subj. of posse is Ceesarem, understood, 
 which becomes I'm the Eng. of the dir. disc. ; therefore (d) possum? 
 the direct form of posse ? means can I? the -m is the pers. ending 
 of the 1st pers. sing.; (e) interrogative clauses are usually in the 
 subjv. in indir. disc., but possum is changed to posse because it is 
 really, in connection with num, a simple declarative verb meaning 
 I cannot ; (f) injuriarum depends upon memoriam. 
 
LESSON L. 185 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The pers. endings of the act. 
 
 voice A. & G. 116 ami H. 247 and 1. 
 
 foot-note 3. 
 
 2. Force of num in asking a 
 
 question A. & G. 210, e. H. 351, 1, N. 
 
 3. The use of the rel. quod as an 
 
 adv. accns A. & G. 240, a, H. 378 and 2; 
 
 b. 453, 6. 
 
 4. The gen. with verbs of forget- 
 
 ting A. & G. 219. H. 406, [I. 
 
 5. Substantive clauses introduced 
 
 by the conj. quod . . . A. & G. 329, H. 540, 1 IV. 
 
 333. 1 and N. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. contumelia, effrontery, insult. 5. oblivisci, -litus, to forget. 
 
 2. decipere (de and capere), 6. recens,//*^,, recent. 
 
 -cepit, -ceptus, to catch 7- sed. conj., but. 
 
 away, entrap, deceive. 8. temptare or tentare (tenere), 
 
 3. deponere, -posuit, -positus, to handle, to try. 
 
 to place aside. 9. timere, timuit, to fear. 
 
 4. num, interrogative particle ; in 10. vexare, to annoy, vex. 
 
 direct questions expects a 
 negative answer. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Principal parts of committere, intellsgere, putare. (b) Syn- 
 opsis of putare in 3d sing., act. and pass, (c) Write the act. and 
 pass. inf. and partic. of intellegere with the meaning of each, 
 (c?) Decline s, veteris, iter, vim. 
 
 1 Read examples carefully. 
 
186 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. (a) Bv deceiving the Roman people (tlie Roman people having 
 been deceived), the Helvetii were able to overcome the Roman army 
 in battle, (b) I fear because you have already committed evil deeds. 
 (c) I ought not to fear (it is not to be feared by me), for no wrong 
 has been done by me. (d) Forget that wrong which the Helvetii 
 brought upon the Roman people. 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetii use force, in order to make a way through the 
 province, (b) Though Caesar was unwilling, the Helvetii persisted in 
 wandering through the fields of the Hsedui. (c) Caesar told the Hel- 
 vetian ambassadors that he was more indignant, because they had at- 
 tacked the Romans, who were not conscious to themselves of any 
 wrong-doing. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 I. The forms of velle met thus far. 2. The forms me mihi, nos, 
 vos. 3. The difference in form between impf. ind. and impf. subjv. 
 in 1st, 2d, and 3d conjug. 4. In the 4th conjug. 5. Two uses of 
 the form quod in this lesson. 6. Two endings for the 1st sing, in 
 the act. voice. 7. The adv. amis. 8. Different kinds of substantive 
 clauses used thus far. 9. The translation, both lit. and free, of Pon- 
 tem faciendum euro and Fons mihi faciendus est. 10. The 
 mode used in the dir. disc, of this lesson after quod and si. 
 
LESSON LI. 
 
 187 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 14, Quod sua through impunitatem concedere. 
 
 Quod vestra victoria tarn msolen- 
 ter gloriamini, quodque tani 
 did vos inipune injurias tulisse 
 admiramini, eodem perti- 
 net. Consueverunt enim di 
 immortales, quo gravius homi- 
 nes ex cominutatidne reruin 
 doleant, quos pro scelere eorum 
 ulcisci volunt, his secundiores 
 interdum res et diuturniorem 
 impunitatem concedere." 
 
 ' Quod sua victoria tain msolen- 
 ter gloriarentur, quodque tarn 
 diu se impune hijurias tulisse 
 admirarentur, eodem perti- 
 nere. Consuesse enim decs 
 immortales, quo gravius homi- 
 nes ex commutatione rerum 
 doleant, quos pro scelere eorum 
 ulcisci velint, his secundiores 
 interdum res et diuturniorem 
 impunitatem concedere/ 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. gloriarentur : (a) Why impf. subjv. instead of pres. ind. (the 
 dir. form)? (b) gloriamini is the 2d plur. of a dep. verb; note the 
 ending of the pass. 2d plur. -mini; cf. -mur, pass. 1st plur., XLVII. 
 N. 10 (b) and -tur, -ntur ; (c) sua, their, in connection with the 3d 
 plur. verb gloriarentur, corresponds to vestra, your, plur. with the 
 2d plur. verb gloriamini; (d) cf. vestra, 2d pers. plur. possessive 
 adj., with tuae, 2d pers. sing. XLVII. N. 4 and with nostri XL. N. 5 ; 
 (e) victoria is abl. of cause with gloriarentur. 
 
 2. admirarentur : (a) the same construction as gloriarentur ; 
 note the close connection with it indicated by -que in quodque ; 
 (b) followed by the accus. and inf. se tulisse ; (c) sg takes the place 
 of vos, you (plur.) in the dir. disc. ; (d) tulisse seems to be used in 
 an unusual sense ; you have borne wrongs with impunity, i. e. the 
 guilt of them has rested upon you without doing you harm. 
 
188 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. pertinere : (a) has (like the clir. form pertinet) the two pre- 
 ceding substantive quod clauses as its subj. ; (b) the sentence may be 
 in part translated thus, the fact that you glory and wonder tends to 
 the same thing, i.e. to your final punishment, as explained in what 
 follows ; (c) for use of two subj. with sing, verb, cf. V. N. 8 (b) and 
 H. 463, II. 3. 
 
 4. decs: (a) the subj. of consuesse ; (b) changed from nom. di 
 (contracted from del) in the dir. disc. ; (c) coiisuesse for coiisuev- 
 isse is a pf. inf. act. ; note ending -isse ; (d) note the emphatic 
 position of verb at the head of the clause ; cf. XXX. N. 1 ; you are 
 surprised, says Caesar, at ivhat is customary; (c) consueveruiit is 
 pres. in sense though pf. in form; (/) for the position of the conj. 
 enitn after the beginning of the clause, cf. quoque IX. and autem 
 XVII., and contrast nam and ita XLIV. 
 
 5. doleant : (a) for subjv. in both dir. and indir. disc., cf. XXXIV. 
 N. 5; (b) the pres. is here used, rather than the impf., after the past 
 tense of the verb of saying which introduces the whole clause, because 
 a universal truth rather than a particular instance in the past is re- 
 ferred to ; (c) the preceding re-rum is the geu. plur. of res. 
 
 6. concedere : (a) a complementary inf. after consuesse; (b) his, 
 the dat. plur. from hi, is the antec. of quos. which begins the preced- 
 ing clause ; cf. quae pars . . . ea XLIV. ; (c) velint is pres. subj. 
 of velle, to wish, for volunt, the pres. ind. of the dir. disc.; cf. 
 vellent XXXIII., volebat XXXVI., voluisset XLVI. ; (d) degree 
 of comp. of secundiores and diuturniorem ? 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Pers. endings of the pass. . . A. & G. 116. H. 247. 
 
 2. The complete conjng. of the 
 
 irreg. verb velle . . . . A. & G. 138. H. 293. 
 
 3. Position of enim, autem, quo- 
 
 que A. & G. 345, b. H. 569, III. 
 
 4. Position of the rel. clause before 
 
 the principal clause . . . A. & G. 201 c. H. 572, II. 
 
 and N. 
 
LESSON LI. 
 
 189 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 j . admlrari, to wonder at, to ad- 
 mire. 
 9, oommutatio, -onis (mutare, 
 
 (o change), a changing, change. 
 8. consuescere, -suevit, -suetus, 
 
 to accustom ones self; in pf. to 
 
 have accustomed one's self, to 
 
 be wont. 
 4:. diu, adv., long (used of time, not 
 
 space). 
 
 5. diuturnus, adj. (from diu), long 
 
 (in time) 
 
 6. dolere, doluit, to feel pain, to 
 
 grieve for. 
 
 7. enim, for ; used generally after 
 
 the first word of the clause. 
 
 8. eodem, adv., to the same place. 
 9 gloriari, to boast, to glory. 
 
 10. impune, adv., without punish- 
 ment, with impunity. 
 
 11. impunitas, imp unity. 
 
 12. Insoleiiter (in neg. and solere, 
 
 to be accustomed], strangely, 
 insolently. 
 13 iiiterdum, adv., sometimes. 
 
 14. scelus, -eris, a crime. 
 
 15. secundus, following, second, 
 
 favorable (a wind following or 
 right astern would be a favor- 
 able wind). 
 
 16. tarn, so (used mostly before adv. 
 
 and adj.). 
 
 17. vestra, fern., your, plur. ; cf. 
 
 tuus, thy or your, sing. 
 
 18. vos, ncm. and accus. plur., you ; 
 
 cf. poss. adj. vestra and nos, 
 nostra. 
 
 19. victoria, victory. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1, (a) Principal parts of ferre, ulcisci, concedere, velle. 
 
 (b) Synopsis of concedere in 3d sing;, act. and pass, (c) Decline 
 secundus in all genders, (d) Compare diuturnus in all genders. 
 (e) Decline secundiores res tog-ether in plur. 
 
 2, (a) We glory in our victory, because we overcame the brave 
 Romans. (5) We think that when we defeated Cassius the victory 
 was a very great (one), (c) The Helvetii have brought many wrongs 
 upon the rest of the G-auls. (d) The immortal gods are wont to 
 punish those men who glory in their crimes. 
 
 3, (a) The Helvetii wished to fight continually with their neigh- 
 bors. (5) The way was so narrow that carts could be drawn (only) 
 one-by-one, (c) All those countries of which Caesar was informed 
 stretch toward the north, (d] Against my will you were trying to 
 force your way through our province after annoying our allies. 
 
190 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 ]. A letter found in all but one of the pers. endings of the pass. 
 2. Comparison of act. and pass. pers. endings. 3. The tenses for 
 completed action in pass. 4. A verb pf. in form but pres. in sense. 
 
 5. Position in Lat. of the rel. pron., of the demonstrative, of the 
 monosyllabic prep, used with a noun and adj., of cum, of autem. 
 
 6. The sign of the pres. subjv. 7. The verbs used thus far with 
 the complementary inf. 8. With an obj. clause of purpose. 9. Pe- 
 culiarities in the conjug. of velle. 10. You and your, we and our, 
 in Lat. 11. Four kinds of abl. sometimes translated by the Eng. 
 prep. in. 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Csesar, B. G. L 14, Cum ea to the end. 
 
 Cum haec it a Bint, tamen si ob- 
 
 sides a vobis mihi dabuntur, 
 uti ea qua; pollicemini t'actu- 
 ros intellegam, et si Hseduis 
 de injuriis quas ipsis sociisque 
 eorum intulistis, item si Allo- 
 brogibus satisfacietis, ego vo- 
 biscum pace in faciam." 
 
 Divico respondit : 
 
 Cum ea ita sint, tamen si ob- 
 
 sides ab iis sibi dentur, 
 uti ea quse polliceantur factu- 
 ros intellegat, et si Ha3duis 
 de injuriis quas ipsis sociisque 
 eorum intulerint, item si Allo- 
 brogibus satisfaciant, sese 
 cum iis pacem esse facturum.' 
 
 Ita Helvetii a majoribus suis m- 
 stituti sunt, uti obsides acci- 
 pere, non dare consuerint; ejus 
 rei populus Romanus est 
 
 testis." 
 
 'Ita HelvetiSs a majoribus suis in- 
 stitutes esse, uti obsides acci- 
 pere, 11611 dare consuerint ; ejus 
 rei populum Romanum esse 
 
 testem.' 
 
 Hoc responso dato, discessit. 
 
LESSON LIL 191 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. ea, those things : (a) changed from haec, these things, in dir. 
 disc., where it is used to indicate a closer relation to the speaker; 
 cf. XXIII. N. 4 (b) ; (b) haec like ea is the uom. plur. neut, and 
 like ea has the same form in the nom. and accus. plur. neut. and the 
 uom. sing', fein. 
 
 2. tamen, yet ; this word is used in contrast to the preceding 
 cum, which is here used in what is called its concessive sense and 
 means although ; note that it is followed by the subjv. in both dir. 
 and indir. disc. 
 
 3. dentur : (a) a primary is sometimes used after a secondary 
 tense of a verb of saying for the sake of vividness ; see Gram. Less. 
 below ; (b) dabuntur, fut. ind. pass. 3d plur. ; for change to pres. 
 subjv., cf. XLVI. N. 1, Gram. Less. ; (c) vobis is the abl. plur. of 
 vos, you, nom. plur. (d) Why ab iis but a vobis ? (e) Eemember 
 that Csesar is speaking to the Helvetian legates. 
 
 4. polliceantur : (a) mode and tense and sign ? (b) conjug. of 
 verb, and how you know the conjug. from this form? (c) force of 
 the endings -ntur and -mini? 
 
 5. intellegat : (a) used after utl, for form of which, see uti . . . 
 proficiscantur XXVIII.; () mode and tense? why? (c) force of 
 ending -m in intellegam? (d) the subj. of facturos (esse), excep- 
 tionally omitted, would be, if expressed, vos in the dir. and eos in 
 the indir. disc. ; (e) ea, the obj. of facturos, is here the antec. of rel. 
 quae ; note that the pron. is, ea, id is used constantly as the antec. 
 of a rel., e. g. id XLV., ii XLVII. 
 
 6. intulerint : (a) pf. subjv. of the verb inferre ; sign ? In what 
 other tense is this sign found ? (b) intul-istis, pf. ind. 2d plur. ; 
 cf. commemorav-istis XL IX. and note that the ending is the same, 
 though the steins are differently formed ; cf. XLVIII. Obs. 2 (a) ; 
 (c) for the preceding dat. ipsis and sociis, cf. flnitimls inferre 
 XVI. ; (d) ipsis refers to Haeduls, upon the Hcedui themselves. 
 
 7. satisfaciant : (a) How does the dir. form facietis differ from 
 it in mode and tense ? (b) the preceding Allobrogibus is dat. with 
 this verb, lit. if they would do enough for the Allobroges, freely if 
 they would satisfy the Allobroges. 
 
192 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 8. facturum esse : (a) fat. inf. for faciam, the fut. ind. let pers. 
 of the dir. disc. ; (b) note that -S-, the sign of the fut. ind. in the 3d 
 and 4th conjug,, is varied to -a- in the 1st sing-., and the form becomes 
 the same, in that pers., as the pres. subjv. ; cf. faciam, satisfacietis, 
 intellegam : (c) the subj. of faciam is ego, I, which is here ex- 
 pressed as a separate word because of the contrast with vobis ; (cT) for 
 position of cum in vobiscum, cf. VIII. N. 4 (b). 
 
 9. majoribus ; for meaning, cf. XLVII. Vocab. 
 
 10. consuerint : (#) pf. subjv. even in dir. disc, because the verb 
 of a result clause; (b) force of pf. tense in this verb ? LI. N. 4 (e) ; 
 (c) for whole passage from ita, cf. se . . . niterentur XLVII. 
 
 11. rei: the gen. sing, of re's ; cf. gen. plnr. re-rum LI. N. 5 (c). 
 
 12. testem : (a) Why accns. in indir. but uoin. in dir. disc. ? cf. 
 XX. N. 4 (d) (b) What gen. depends upon it? 
 
 13. response ; here from the noun responsum, a reply. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. Nouns with stems in g have the endings of the 3d decl., except 
 in the gen. sing, and the gen. plnr., where the endings are -I sing, and 
 -rum plur. 
 
 2. The following forms of the demonstrative pron. hie, haec, hoc, 
 have been used in the text thus far : hie, hoc, hac, hi, hcec, horum, 
 his. 
 
 3. Cum causal and cum concessive take the subjv. ; cum temporal 
 usually takes the subjv. in Caesar when used with the impf. or plpf. 
 tenses. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The decl. and gender of -e stems A. & G. 72, 73. H. 120. 
 
 2. The decl. of ego throughout 
 
 and of vos in plnr. . . . A. G. 98.^ H. 184. 
 
 3. The complete conjug. of esse 
 
 and posae A. & G. 119, H. 204, 290, 
 
 120, b. II. N.I, 2. 
 
LESSON LII. 193 
 
 4. The clecl. of hie, hsec, hoc . A. & G. p. 51, H. 186, L. foot- 
 
 foot-note 1 and note 4. 
 101 
 
 5. The meaning' and use of hie, 
 
 ille, is, ipse A. & G. 102, a, H. 450, 1, 4, 
 
 b, d, e. 451, 452. 
 
 6. Cum concessive A. & G. 326. H. 514, 515 
 
 TIL 
 
 7. The pres. and pf. after an his- 
 
 torical tense U 525 > ' 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. discedere, -cessit, -cessurus, 4. responsum, the. thing answered, 
 
 to (jo apart, to depart. a reply. 
 
 2. instituere, -stituit, -stitutus, 5. satisfacere, -fecit, -facturus, 
 
 to arrange, construct, instruct. to do enough, to satisfy. 
 
 3. pollicSri, pollicitus, to pro- 6. testis, a witness. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Decline is, ille, ips3. (V) Decline obses, pax, injuria, 
 
 (c) All the inf. and partic. of inferre with meaning- of each, (d) The 
 synopsis of polliceri in 3d plur. 
 
 2. (a) If you shall give me hostages, I will do you no harm. 
 (b) But if, after annoying the allies of the Roman people, you shall lay 
 waste their fields, 1 will kill the largest possible number of your army. 
 (c} The Helvetii said they would not satisfy the Allobroges for the 
 injuries which they had inflicted upon them, (c?) The Roman people 
 have been so instructed by their ancestors that they wage war upon 
 all who inflict wrong upon them. 
 
 3. (a} [ have less doubt because I remember that those things did 
 not happen on account of any misdeed of the Romans, (b) We ought 
 not to fear without reason, (c) I cannot forget that yon have annoyed 
 the tlsedui and Allobroges. (d) For fifty (quinquaginta) years the 
 Romans remembered that disaster in which the Helvetii were glorying. 
 
 13 
 
194 INDUCTIVE L^TIN METHOD. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The cases in which the forms of hie given in Obs. 2 may be 
 found. 2. Likeness between -e and -i stems. 3. Difference between 
 vos and nos, tua and vstra, suus and ejus or eorum. 4. Con- 
 sonant changes in conjng. of esse. 5. Letters dropped in the conjng. 
 of posse. 6. Peculiarities of decl. of hie, haec, hoc. 7. Contrast 
 in meaning between hie and ille. 8. The different uses of conj. cum. 
 
 9. Exact meaning of tamen, etiam, ita, item, autem, ibi, ubi. 
 
 10. Change of a fut. ind. in a subordinate clause in passing from dir. 
 to indir. disc. 11. Of a fut. pf. ind. 12. The forms of the fut. ind. 
 and pres. subjv. in 3d conjug. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 REVIEW of LESSONS XLIII. to LII. inclusive. 
 
 The two most important subjects in this Review are the Conjugation of the 
 Verb and Indirect Discourse. On both of them 7iiuch has been learned from the 
 text of the last ten Lessons. Be sure to gain so complete a knowledge of these sub- 
 jects that it can be readily used in the Lessons which follow. On the necessity and 
 the method of review, see the introduction to Lesson XII. 
 
 1. TEXT. CAESAR, B. G. I., 12 TO 14 INCLUSIVE. 
 
 Follow implicitly the directions given in XLII. under " Text," 1, 
 2, 3, 4, 5, simply omitting under 4 the clause : " then compare the 
 result with the * Verb Diagram ' of XXVI. " 
 
 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The decl. and gender of -5 
 
 stems A. & G. 72, 73. H. 120. 
 
 2. The decl. of vetus . A. & G. 85. H. 158. 
 
LESSON LTTT. 195 
 
 3. The decl. of ego, and of vos 
 
 in plur A. & G. 98. H. 184. 
 
 4. The dec!, of hie, hsec, hoc . A. & G. p. 1)1, H.186, L foot- 
 
 foot-note 1, note 4. 
 and 101. 
 
 5. The meaning and use of hie, 
 
 ille, is, and ipse . . . A. & G. 102, a, H. 450, 1, 4, 
 
 b, d, e. 451, 452. 
 
 6. Force of num in asking a 
 
 question A. & G. 201, c. H. 351, 1, N. 
 
 3. 
 
 7. Quo . . . eo A. & G. 106, c. 
 
 8. The antec. attracted into the 
 
 rel. clause A. & G. 200, b, H. 445, 9. 
 
 and N. 
 
 9. Position of the rel. before the 
 
 principal clause . . . . A. & G. 201 c. H. 572, II. 
 
 and N. 
 
 10. Position of enim, autem, 
 
 quoque A. & G. 345, b. H. 569, III. 
 
 11. The tenses formed on the pres., 
 
 the pf.,and the supine stems A. & G. 127. H. 222, I. II. 
 
 III. 
 
 12. The pers. endings of the act. 
 
 voice A. & G. 116 and H. 247 and 1. 
 
 foot-note 3. 
 
 13. The pers. endings of the pass. 
 
 voice A. & G. 116. H. 247. 
 
 14. The four conjug. complete 1 . .A. & G. 128- H. 205-212. 
 
 132. 
 
 15. The complete conjug. of esse 
 
 and posse A. & G. 119, H. 204, 290, 
 
 120, b. II. N. 1, 2. 
 
 1 Almost all forms of the four conjug. have now been learned from the text, at 
 least in their component parts, and it is probably best to learn all of them from the 
 grammar for the sake of completeness of view. The teacher should see to it, how- 
 ever, that the greatest emphasis is laid upon the 3d pers and the modes and tenses 
 which are most common in Cscsar. 
 
196 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 16. The complete conjug. of velle A. & G. 138. H. 293. 
 
 17. The partitive gen. depending 
 
 on neuters and compara- 
 tives A. & G. 216, 2, H. 397. 
 
 3. 
 
 18. The gen. with verbs of remem- 
 
 bering and forgetting . . A. & G. 219. H. 406, IT. 
 
 19. Two accus. after compound 
 
 verbs A. & G. 239, b. II. 376. 
 
 20. The rel. quod as an adv. accus. A. & G. 240, a, H. 378 and 2 ; 
 
 b. 453, 6. 
 
 21. The abl. of manner . . . . A. & G. 248 and 11.419, III. 
 
 Rem. 
 
 22. The abl. witli niti . . . . A. & G. 254 H. 425, IT. 1, 
 
 and 1. 1), and N. 
 
 23. Cum concessive A. & G. 326. H. 514, 515, 
 
 111. 
 
 24. The pf. subjv. in prohibitions . A. & G. 269, a. H. 484, IV., 
 
 N. 1. 
 
 25. Substantive quod clauses . . A. &G.329,333. H. 540, IV. 
 
 and N. 
 20. The gerundive after curare 
 
 and similar verbs . . . A. & G. 294, d. H. 544, 2, N. 
 
 2. 
 
 27. The question indirectly quoted A.& G.338,334. H. 523, TT. 1; 
 
 529, I. 
 
 28. Changes of mode in indir. disc. A. & G. 336, 339. H. 523, I. II. 
 
 1,111. 524. 
 
 29. Changes of tense in the subor- 
 
 dinate clauses of indir. disc. A.&G.285.286. H. 491, 492, 
 
 1, 2, 493, 
 1, 2. 
 
 30. The pres. and pf. subjv. after 
 
 an historical tense H. 525, 1 
 
 31. Future time in the subjv. . . A. & G. 110, a; H. 496, I. II. 
 
 286, Rem. last 
 sentence. 
 
 32. Changes of pers. in indir. disc II. 526. 
 
LESSON LIII. 
 
 197 
 
 3. WORD REVIEW. 
 
 Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring m Caesar, B. G. I. 
 
 12-14. 
 
 admirari 
 
 com memo rare 
 curare 
 
 cave>e 
 
 1. VERBS. 
 
 1st Conjug. (-a verl 
 gloriarl 
 judicare 
 maudare 
 
 perseverare 
 teniptare (tentare) 
 vexare 
 
 abdere 
 accidere 
 agere 
 aggredi 
 
 committere decipere 
 
 *2d Conjug. (-e verbs'). 
 commovere dolere polliceri 
 
 3d Conjug. (-e verbs). 
 Write the principal parts of these verbs, 
 concidere depoiiere interticere 
 consequi despicere niti 
 consistere discedere oblivisci 
 discere 
 instituere 
 
 consuescere 
 
 persequi 
 
 persolvere 
 
 4fh Conjug. (-1 verbs'). 
 
 adorni impedlre 
 
 Irregular verb. 
 
 ferre 
 
 2. NOUNS HAVING -A STEMS. 
 contumeiia insidiae silva victoria 
 
 3. -O STEMS. 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 avus dens meritum 
 
 castra, plur. in form dolus oculus 
 
 Adj. (having also fern, stems in -a), 
 aliqiri diutnrnus publicus 
 
 Cassianus incommodus quartns 
 
 conscius pristinus repentmus 
 
 vestii, plur. 
 
 prodere 
 
 reminisci 
 
 ?atisfacere 
 
 tribuere 
 
 ulciscl 
 
 visrdia 
 
 responsum 
 soceii, plur. 
 
 secundus 
 tuns 
 utii, plur. 
 
198 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 Arar (Araris) 
 
 calarnitas 
 
 commutatio 
 
 dubitatio 
 
 dux 
 
 immortal is 
 incredibilis 
 
 4. THIRD DECL. 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 Give the gen. and gender of each, 
 explorator nomen 
 
 impuuitas scelus 
 
 interuecio testis 
 
 lenitas 
 \i\\ter.fem. fy exception 
 
 Adj. 
 
 inopinans 
 Insigiiis 
 
 5. -U STEM. 
 
 major 
 
 minor 
 
 recens 
 vetus 
 
 6. INDECL. NUMERAL ADJ. 
 
 aliqui 
 
 ego (milii, me, nos) 
 
 segerrime, sup. 
 
 diu 
 
 eodem 
 
 7. PRON. 
 
 
 tuus 
 utrl, plur. 
 
 vestii, plur. 
 vos, plur. 
 
 8. PREP. 
 
 
 citra 
 
 
 9. ADV. 
 
 gravius, comp. Insolenter 
 improviso interdum 
 
 impune magnopere 
 
 emin 
 
 nam 
 
 10. CONJ. 
 sed 
 
 sin 
 
 ne quare 
 
 num solum 
 quam tarn 
 
 sive 
 
LESSON LIV. 199 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 15, through nostris cadunt. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. idem ; cf. XXL N. 4. 
 
 2. socils ; governed by ex, like provincia and Haeduls. 
 
 3. habebat : (a) the obj. is the rel. quern ; (b) coactum agrees 
 with quern ; (c) coactum habebat is similar in meaning to the Eug. 
 partic. with have, but lays more emphasis on the idea of possession 
 and continuing to possess, thus he was holding after having 
 collected ; note that, in the Eng. expression he has held the cavalry, 
 the pass, partic. held really limits cavalry the obj. of the verb has, 
 just as in the case above coactum limits quern. 
 
 4. videant : (a) mode, tense, and sign ? (b) why subjv. ? cf. 
 
 XXX. N. 5 ; XXXI f. N. 3; (c) pres., because it is after the primary 
 tense praemittit; (d) plur., although its subj. refers to the sing, 
 collective noun equitatum ; for more usual agreement, see XLIX. x. 
 1(d). 
 
 5. in ; for position, cf. XV. N. 7 (c). 
 
 6. faciant : (a) for tense, cf. 4 (c) ; (b) for mode, cf. XLIII. N. 
 2 (c) ; (c) cf. the forms of the text : adficiSbantur, facere, fact! 
 sunt, perficit. faciunt, faciendum, fecisse, facturum. Which are 
 of the 4th conjug.? On what stem are all the forms of the 4th conjug. 
 based? (d) quas, which introduces the clause and agrees with 
 partes, is from the interrogative qui, not the rel. quT. 
 
 7. committunt : (a] Might the preceding cupidius agree with 
 agxnen, so far as for.n is concerned ? How do you know that it does 
 not so agree ? for its meaning, see Gram. Less. ; (b) for loco, see 
 
 XXXI. N. 9. 
 
 8. paucl , for use, sec XXIX. N. 6 (5). 
 
200 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. In Lat. as in Eng., several nouns may be governed by the same 
 prep. 
 
 2. Capio, / take, facio, / make, gradior, / go, morior, / die, 
 patior, I suffer, and their compounds, and some others not yet found 
 in the text, are of the 3d conjug., though having the vowels -io in the 
 pres. hid. 1st. sing, like the 4th conjug. The following forms, all 
 based on the pres. stem, are of the 4th conjug. in both act. and pass. : 
 the pres. ind. 1st sing, and 3d plur., the impf. and fut. ind. and pres. 
 subj., throughout, and the 3d plur. of the fut. imperative; also the 
 pres. act. partic., the gerund, and gerundive. All other forms drop 
 the i, and are of the 3d conjug. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The interrog. adj. qui . . . A. & G. 104. H. 188, II. 
 
 and 1. 
 
 2. Conjug. of capere . . . . A. & G. p. 83. H. 217, 218, 
 
 219. 
 
 3. The com p. meaning too rather 
 
 than more. A. & G. 93, a. H. 444, 1. 
 
 4. The pf. pass, partic. after 
 
 habere A. & G. 292, c. H. 388, 1, N. 
 
 5. Collective nouns with agree- 
 
 ment of plurals . . . . A. & G. 205, c. H. 461, 1. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. agmen (agere), that which is 3. cadere, cecidit, casurus, to 
 
 set in motion, an army on the fall 
 
 march, a line (of march); 4. cupide (rf. adj. cupidus), 
 
 iiovissimum agmen, the eagerly, 
 
 newest or last line, the rear. 5. equitatus, -us, a collection of 
 
 2. alienus (alius), belonging to horsemen, cavalry. 
 
 another, foreign, unfavorable. 
 
LESSON LIV. 201 
 
 6- hostis, a stranger, an, enemy ; 9. pauci (sing, very rare) Jt /ez0. 
 
 in plur., the enemy. 10. posterus (post), coming after \ 
 
 7. insequi, -secutus, to follow following. 
 
 up. 11. prsemittere, -misit, -missus, 
 
 8. movere, movit, motus, to to send before. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Decline together postero die, eo loco, equitatum omnem, 
 omni provincia, novissimum agmen. (b) Synopsis of facit, 3d 
 sing, act- and pass, (c) Decline qui. 
 
 2. (a) Csesar had with him as cavalry four thousand men. 
 () Those men who had been collected out of all the province he sent 
 ahead, (c) Having attacked the enemy in an unfavorable place, they 
 were defeated, (c?) Csesar sent the cavalry to follow up the enemy. 
 
 3. (a) A few of the cavalry fell, since they had joined battle in a 
 very unfavorable place, (b) Caesar told Divico that if the Helvetii 
 would do what they had promised lie would make peace witli them. 
 (c) When hostages had been given, Csesar established friendship with 
 the nearest states, and levied several legions upon them. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The conjug of impedire and facere compared in the pres. 
 system. 2. The Lat. for a more eager line follows, and he follow^ 
 the line more eagerly. 3. The Eng. for novae res, novissimum 
 agmen. 4. Lat. for a soldier, a leader, a lieutenant, an enemy, 
 the enemy. 5. Difference between idem and idem. 6. When the 
 pres. and when the impf. subjv. is used in a purpose clause. 7. The 
 emphasis in the sentence Idem facit Caesar. 8. Comparison of 
 cupidius as adj. ; as adv. 
 
202 INDUCTIVE LATI:* METHOD. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 15, quo proelio to the end. 
 
 Z NOTES. 
 
 1. sublati ; pf. pass, partic., from tollere, means raised (in spirit), 
 elated. 
 
 2. equitibus ; for use, cf. legione mHitibusque XXXIV. and H. 
 415, I. 1. 
 
 3. equitum ; why not equitium? 
 
 4. agmine ; for use as abl. of place without a prep., cf. Gram. 
 Less. 
 
 5. nostros ; for use, cf. suis XLVII. 
 
 6. ccepgrunt ; lacks the pres. system ; see Gram. Less. 
 
 7. prohibere : (a) ohj. of habgbat, which here means he held in. 
 sense of regarded ; (b) satis, which has here the force of a predicate 
 noun, is an accus. in agreement with prohibere ; (c) hostem, the 
 obj. of prohibere, means each one of the enemy ; our Eng. expres- 
 sion, the enemy, is plur. in sense, and is generally represented in Lat. 
 By the plur., cf. hostgs LIV. ; (d) contrast a proelio and rapinis, 
 and cf. IX. N. 15 (c) (d). 
 
 8. fecerunt : (a) for const, of preceding dies, cf. XX. N. 3 (b). 
 How do you know that it is not a nom.? (b) case of iter here? 
 gen. sing? 
 
 9. primum ; limits what word understood ? 
 
 10. interesset : (a) why subjv. ? (b) its subj. is amplius, which 
 is in form a neut. comp. ; (c) milibus is the abl. case after the comp. 
 amplius ; quam, than, being omitted, and the abl. translated by than ; 
 (d) quinis and senis are distributive adj. meaning Jive and six to 
 each or at a time (cf. singuli XXIX.) ; used here to show that the 
 armies were five or six miles apart on each day ; (e) with quim, 
 
LESSON LV. 203 
 
 nom., cf. quinque, jive, quindecim, above (quinque and decem), 
 fifteen, quinquaginta (like octogiiita XVII.), qumgenti (nom. of 
 quingentis, above), ducenta XVII. N. 9, qulntus, fifth. 
 
 3. OBSERVATION. 
 
 1. The cardinal numbers from quattuor to centum are indecl.; 
 the multiples of ten from thirty to ninety end in -ginta ; the multiples 
 of one hundred from two to nine hundred, end in -cent! (centum), 
 changed after n to -genti, and are declined. Almost all the names of 
 cardinals, ordinals, and distributives are derived in some way from 
 the first ten cardinals. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Conjug. of ccepit . . . . A. & G. 143, a. H. 297. 
 
 2. The cardinals to mille . . . A. & G. 94. H. 174. 
 
 3. The use of distributives . . . A. & G. 95 and H. 174, 2, 1). 
 
 . 
 
 4. The abl. after comp. without 
 
 quam A. & G. 247 and H. 417 and 1. 
 
 a. 
 
 5. The abl. of place without a 
 
 prep. A. & G. 258, /. H. 425, II. 1, 
 
 1) and 2. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. amplus, ample, much, great; 7> lacessere, lacessivit or laces- 
 
 adv., amplS. siit, lacessitus, to provoke, 
 
 2. audacter, boldly. assail. 
 
 3. circiter, adv., about. 8. populatio (populari), a laying 
 
 4. ccepit, coepisse, (he, she, it) waste* ravaging. 
 
 began. 9. preesentia (prae and esse), 
 
 5. eques, equitis (equus, a a being present, presence; 
 
 horse), a horseman, a knight. in praesentia, at present. 
 
 6. interesse, interfuit, to be be- 10. propellere, -pulit, -pulsus, 
 
 tween or among, to take part to drive before. 
 
 in; interest, it makes a 11. pabulatio (pabular I), a getting 
 
 difference, it interests. of food, a foraging. 
 
204 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12. quindecim (qumque and de- 16. sen! (sex), distributive, six to 
 
 cem), fifteen. each, sLc at a time. 
 
 13. qumgenti, five hundred. 17. subsistere, -stitit, to make a 
 
 14. quini, distributive, fee to each, stand, resist. 
 
 fee at a time. IS. tantus, adj., so much, so great. 1 
 
 15. rapma (rapere, to seize}, 
 
 plunder. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Give all forms of contiuebat in both act. and pass, which 
 are based on the pres. stem, using 3d sing, in ind. and snbjv. ; in 
 other words, give a synopsis of continebat in the pres. system, 
 (b) Decline proelium, eques, agmen, pabulatio, and give the rules 
 for the gender of the last two. (c) Compare amplus, ample, 
 audacter. 
 
 2. (a) The Helvetii were elated by this battle, (b) It will be 
 enough for Caesar to keep his soldiers from battle and restrain the 
 enemy from foraging, (c) The horsemen who were driven forward 
 by the Helvetii were not Romans but Gauls, (d] Five hundred Hel- 
 vetii are not able to drive before (them) four thousand llomans. 
 
 3. (a) The Helvetii began to think that they could make a stand 
 and wage war upon the Romans, (b) The multitude of Helvetii was 
 so great that Caesar did not attack it in an unfavorable place with his 
 legions, (c) The armies were marching in such a way that the rear 
 of the enemy was five miles distant from the van (first line) of the 
 llomans. (d) Caesar says that the horsemen ought not to attack the 
 rear of the other army so boldly. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The different kinds of numerals. 2. Eng. words derived from 
 the first ten cardinals. 3. Lat. for the line or army on the march, 
 the van, the rear. 4. The case used when quam is expressed. 
 5. The 3d decl. nouns which have i in the gen. plur. 6. Meaning of 
 
 1 Note how many words in this Vocab. are related to other Lat. words. The 
 student must not forget to prepare himself with related Eng. words. 
 
LESSON LVI. 205 
 
 nostri, nostra, sul, sua, as nouns in the plur. 7. Cases which have 
 the same form in the -e decl. 8. In the -u dec]. 9. The use of 
 passuum in connection with milia. 10. All the numerals which 
 contain the syllable sex. 11. Difference between the abl. of means 
 and the abl. of voluntary agent. 12. Between the accus. and abl. of 
 time. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 16, through adesse, dicere. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. flagitare : (a) though an inf. its subj. is the nom. Caesar, and 
 it is translated like the ind., Ccesar kept earnestly asking or kept im- 
 portuning. Such an inf. is used in animated narrative, and is called 
 the historical inf.; (b) it has two objects, Haeduos, the name of 
 the persons who are asked, and frumentum, the name of the thing 
 asked for; with certain words a similar const, occurs in Eng., e. g. in 
 the expression he asks the boy the way, boy has the same const, as 
 Haeduos and way the same const, as frumentum ; (c) essent in the 
 subordinate clause is subjv., because of the idea of saying implied in 
 flagitare ; Ccesar asked for the corn which, as he said, was promised. 
 
 2. ut . . . dictum est ; for ut with ind., cf. XXV. N. 6. 
 
 3. frumenta in agris ; note that the plur. is here used for the 
 grain in the fields, while the harvested grain for which Caesar asks 
 the Haedui is frumentum. Why should the plur. be more appropri- 
 ate for the standing grain ? 
 
 4. subvexerat ; note that flumine and navibus are both necessary 
 means in bringing up the grain. 
 
 5. poterat : (a) followed by the complementary inf. uti ; (b) const. 
 of frumentS? XXVIII. N. 2. 
 
 6. ducere : (a) historical inf. ; (b) diem is not its obj. but an 
 accus. of time; (c) ex, out of, has here the force of after, diem ex- 
 
206 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 die, day after day ; (d) ducere has Caesarem understood as its 
 obj., and means to put off, to delay. 
 
 7. conferri : (a) pres. inf. pass. ; note the doubling* of the r ; 
 (b) cf. differunt IV., efferre (for efferere) XXVILI., intulerat 
 XLIV., ferre (for ferere) XLVIL, fero, dir. disc., XLIX., tulisse 
 LI. and sublati LV. (which though not from ferre, shows the 
 supine stem of that verb); note that the three stems fere-, tul- and 
 lat- have no common base, arid that final -e of the pres. stem is 
 sometimes dropped. 
 
 8. dlcere : (a) historical inf., its subj. is Haedui; (b) conferri, 
 comportari, adesse, inf. in indir. disc. ; subj., frumentum under- 
 stood. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Conjug. of ferre A. & G. 139. H. 292 and 1, 
 
 1), 2). 
 
 2. Two accus. with verbs of ask- 
 
 ing and teaching . . . . A. & G. 239, c. H. 374. 
 
 3. The historical inf. . . . . A. & G. 275 and H. 536, 1 and 
 
 Rem. N. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adesse, -fuit, to be near, to be 5. cotidie or quotidig, daily. 
 
 present, to aftxixf. 6. flagitare, to ask repeatedly or 
 
 2. avertere, -vertit, -versus, to earnestly. 
 
 turn away. 7- frigus, -oris, cold ; in plur. with 
 
 3. comportare, to earn/ together. same meaning. 
 
 4. conferre, tulit, collatus, to 8. interim, meanwhile. 
 
 briny together, to collect, to 9. maturus, ripe, early. 
 
 compare ', where con is inten- 10. niodo, adv., only. 
 
 sive, to briny vigorously or 11. nolle, noluit (ne and velle), 
 
 rapidly, se conferre, to betake to be unwilling. 
 
 ove* self. (In this lesson 12. pabulum (pascere, to feed, 
 
 conferri evidently means is pasture], that which feeds, 
 
 being collected among the food, especially for animals, 
 
 Hasdiii, comportari, is being fodder. 
 
 brought together to Csesar.) 
 
LESSON LVI. 207 
 
 13. ponere, posuit, positus, to quidem enclosing the ein- 
 
 pluce. phatic word, thus ne Caesar 
 
 14. publice, publicly, by public quidem, not eoen Ccesar. 
 
 authority. 16. subvehere, -vexit, -vectus, 
 
 15. quidem, indeed', in Caesar to carry from below, i.e. to 
 
 mostly in the phrase ne . . . carry up. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Analyze polliciti, suppetgbat, subvexerat. (b) Synopsis 
 of averterant in pf. system, (c) Principal parts of polliciti essent, 
 flagitare, uti. (d) Decline frigora, septentrionibus, navibus. 
 
 2. (a) The Haedui did not bring- the grain which they had promised. 
 (b) Caesar kept asking for the grain, because (as he said) the supply 
 of food which he had was riot sufficiently great, (c) The ships which 
 were carrying the grain were left (behind) when Caesar turned away 
 from the river, (d) The cold is greater in Gaul than in Italia, be- 
 cause Gaul stretches toward the north. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar turned away from the river, in order to follow up the 
 Helvetii. (b) The great number of beasts of burden, which were draw- 
 ing the wagons of the Helvetii, had consumed all the fodder, (c) Hav- 
 ing used very much fodder, Caesar asked the Haedui for the grain 
 which they were collecting, (d) Caesar asked the Haedui to bring 
 the largest possible supply of fodder. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Different gen. endings possible for nouns in -us. 2. Meaning 
 and position of nS . . . quidem. 3. Difference in meaning between 
 frumentum and frumenta. 4. Analysis of poterat. 5. Meaning 
 of copia in plur. 6. Exact meaning of the word translated north. 
 7. How does this exact meaning explain the use of sub before it 
 instead of in. 8. Two meanings of ut and two modes used after it. 
 9. Different ways of saying because of in Lat. 10. Difference in the 
 two accus. after a verb of asking. 11. Case of the subj. of the 
 historical inf. 
 
208 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON LVII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 16, Ubi se to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. intellexit : (a) follows ubi, when ; cf. instances of the use of 
 ubi in XXVII. XXXII. XXXV. XLIir. ; what mode and tense follow 
 ubi in all these instances ? (b) diutius is the comp. of diu, with sense 
 of too rather than more; cf. cupidius XLIV. ; (c) duel is used in 
 same sense as in preceding lesson ; snbj.? voice? 
 
 2. oporteret: (a) for use, cf. XXIV. N. 3; for meaning, cf. con- 
 cgdendum XXXIII., debuerint XL.; (b) quo die; cf. quibus 
 itiiieribus XXIX. ; (c) militibus ; for case, see XXII. Obs. 3. 
 
 3. eorum ; antec. ? 
 
 4. Divitiaco, Lisco ; form an abl. absolute const, with convoca- 
 tis to be supplied. 
 
 5. praeerat ; for dat. used with it, cf. XIX. N. 12 (c]. 
 
 6. vergobretum ; accus. in apposition with quern ; magistratui, 
 just before, means the magistracy (office not officer), and the antec. 
 of quern is Lisco. 
 
 7. Haedui. How does its position at the end of the clause modify 
 the meaning of the sentence ? 
 
 8. annuus ; adj., agreeing with qui. 
 
 9. in suds ; into, toward, over his (countrymen), not among his 
 (countrymen), which would be in suis or apud suos ; cf. in his, 
 just before, and apud Helvetios XIII. 
 
 10. graviter ; adv., formed by adding the ending -ter to gravi-, 
 the stem of the corresponding adj. ; cf. the comp. gravius XLIX. 
 
 11. accusat ; the principal verb of the sentence ; note how tho 
 reader is kept in suspense until preliminary statements are brought in. 
 
 12. posset: (a) for mode, cf. XLIV. N. 5; (b) the subj. is 
 frumentum to be supplied. 
 
LESSON LVII. 209 
 
 13. propinquls hostibus : for const,, cf. Sequanis 
 XXXVI. 
 
 14. sublevetur : (a) mode and tense? why? cf. accusat and 
 LVI. N. 1 (c) (b) the subj. is Caesar. 
 
 15. magna ex parte, out of or from a great part, freely, in a 
 great measure, largely ; note position of prep. 
 
 16. susceperit: (a) pf. subjv. ; another tense with same form? 
 (b) for reason of mode, cf. XL. N. 2 (b). 
 
 17. multo gravius; for multo, cf. XXVI T. N. 1. 
 
 3. OBSERVATION. 
 
 1. Many adj. with stems ending in -I form the positive of the cor- 
 responding adv. by adding- -ter to this stem ; most adj. with masc. 
 stems in -o form the positive of the adv. by changing -o of the stem to 
 -S ; both adv. in -e and those in -ter have the comp. like the nom. 
 sing. neut. of the corresponding adj. and usually form the sup. by 
 changing final -um of the neut. sup. of the adj. to -e*. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Difference in meaning of the 
 
 same prep, when used with 
 
 different cases ..... A. & G. 152, c. H. 435 and 
 
 N. 1. 
 
 2. Mode and tense used after ubi A. & G. 324. H. 518 and 
 
 N. 1. 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. accusare (ad and causa), to 6. emere, emit, emptus, to buy. 
 
 call to account, to blame, to 7 . graviter, heavily, severely* 
 
 accuse. 8. Instare, -stitit, -staturus, to 
 
 2. annuus (annus), annual, yearly. stand upon, to approach, to 
 
 3. convocare, to call together, press upon. 
 
 summon. 9 metiri, mensus, to measure. 
 
 4. creare, to make, to elect. 10. nex, necis, death, especially a 
 
 5. destituere, -stituit, -stitutus, violent death. 
 
 to set away from, to aban- 11. potestas (posse), power, law- 
 don. fid authority. 
 
 H 
 
210 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 12."-praeesse, -fuit, to be over, to 17. sublevare, to lift up from be- 
 
 command ; cf. praeficere, to neath, to aid. 
 
 put in command. 18. summus (irreg. sup. of su- 
 
 13. praesertim, especially. perus), highest. 
 
 14. precea, prayers. 19. vergobretus, the title of the 
 
 15. propinquus, near; as noun, a chief magistrate among the 
 
 relative. Hsedui. 
 
 16. queri, questus, to complain. 20. vita, life. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Synopsis of metiri * and susceperit in pres. system. 
 
 (b) Synopsis of perfect system of emere. (c) Synopsis of supine 
 system of accusare. (c?) Compare gravius, grave, gravis. (e) De- 
 cline nex, dies, magistratus. 
 
 2. (a) The chief magistrate among the Haedui is called by them 
 vergobretus. (b) Caesar ought to measure out grain to-day (this 
 day), (c) Although Caesar cannot buy grain or take it from the 
 fields, yet the Haedui do not bring together into the camp the grain 
 which they have promised. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar, influenced by the prayers of the Haedui, has enrolled 
 his legions (abl. absolute) and is waging war. (b) Cnesar was much 
 more angry, because the Hsedui had put him off day after day. 
 
 (c) Caesar could not use the grain which was in the ships, because he 
 had marched away from the river, (d) Many chiefs of Gaul who 
 had followed Caesar were in the camp. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Difference in form and meaning between emit and emit. 2. Two 
 ways of forming adv. from adj. 3. Difference between in castra and 
 in castris. 4. Two meanings of magistratus. 5. Three verbs 
 meaning to command arid one meaning to put in command. 6. Two 
 words meaning ivhen and the const, used with each. 7. How to 
 say when in Lat. without using any word meaning when. 8. Two 
 
 1 Where no pers. or number is mentioned, the 3d sing, may be used in the ind. 
 and subjv. 
 
LESSON LVIII. 211 
 
 possible meanings of diutius ; four possible meanings of gravius. 
 9. Peculiarity in use of oporteret. 10. Three ways of expressing 
 obligation. 11. Difference between Lat. and Eng. as to the number 
 of particulars included in any one sentence. 12. The tense of the 
 subjv. which is used after a pres. ind. to express incomplete action ; 
 to express complete action. 13. Eng. words derived from some form 
 of convocare, appellare, emere, metiri. 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. f. 17, through imperia praeferre ; 
 
 Before translating this Text, review once more the text of Chap. 13 and 14. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1, proponit : (a) its obj. is id understood, which is the antec. of 
 quod ; (b) quod is the obj. of tacuerat; which is here transitive. 
 2 esse ; why inf., and what is the dir. form ? 
 
 3. plurimum vale at ; for meaning, cf. plurimum possent XXII. 
 
 4. magistrates : (a) a nom. plur., has the same const, as the qui 
 before quam, i. e. it is the subj. of possint to be supplied ; lit. 
 translation from qui, who can more than the magistrates themselves 
 (can} ; (b) reason for mode of possint ? for tense ? (c) plus is the 
 irreg. nent. comp. of multum and plurimum. 
 
 5. conferant : (a) for const., cf. XXV. N. 1 ; (b) for the use of 
 plur. number here, cf. LIV. N. 4 (d). 
 
 6. debeant : (a) used with complementary inf. praestare, which 
 here means to furnish ; (b) antec. of quod? 
 
 7. praeferre : (a) the subj. is se, referring to nonnullos, i. e. to 
 the influential H;eduan chiefs who were unfriendly to the Romans; 
 (b) these chiefs say to the multitude, if we cannot any longer hold 
 the chief place of Gaul, we choose the rule of the Gnuls (i. e. to be 
 ruled by the Gauls) rather than the rule of the Ronwns. 
 
212 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Irreg. comparison of the adj. 
 
 exterus, superus, magnus, 
 parvus, multus, propior, 
 
 ulterior A. & G. 90, 91 H. 163, 3; 165 
 
 and a. and N. 1 ; 
 
 166. 
 
 2. Comparatives with quain . . A.&G. 208, a ; H. 417, 1,444, 
 
 247, a. 2. 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. antea, adv., before. 8. proponere, -posuit, -positus, 
 
 2. dSmum, at last. to put or set forth, to ck- 
 
 3. deterrere, reg., to frighten dare. 
 
 away from, to deter. 9. seditiosus, seditious. 
 
 4. improbus, abooe or below the 10. tacere, reg., to be silent ; also 
 
 proper standard, base, exces- sometimes transitive, to be 
 
 sloe, wicked. silent about, to pass over in 
 
 5. plus, pluris (tie ut. comp. of silence. 
 
 multus), more. 11. turn, adv., of lime, then. 
 
 6. praeferre, -tulit, -latus, to bear 12. valere, valuit, valiturus, to 
 
 before, to prefer, to choose. be strong or powerful, to 
 
 7. privatim, privately, as private avail. 
 
 citizens. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Write first the Eng. and then the Lat. of the dir. disc, which is 
 quoted in this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) Dinnnorix, the brother of Divitiactis, was moie powerful 
 than Liscus himself, (b) When Caesar ordered grain to be brought 
 together, some did riot do what he ordered, (c) Some were persuading 
 the multitude not to bring grain to Caesar, (d) Caesar was informed 
 by Liscus that some of the chiefs were unfriendly to the Boinans. 
 
 3. (a) The multitude, (because) influenced by the reckless talk of 
 the chiefs who desired revolution, did not bring the grain to the camp. 
 
LESSON LIX. 213 
 
 (b} The common people ought to furnish the grain which they have 
 promised, (c) When Caesar has called together the chiefs, he asks for 
 the grain, (d) All prefer the rule of their own (countrymen) to 
 (than) the rule of strangers (alienus, as noun). 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Principal parts of tacere and formation of its stems. 2. Gender 
 and decl. of plus. 3. What quam connects in each instance of its 
 use in the Text of this lesson. 4. Difference in form and meaning 
 of possunt, possint, possent, poterunt, poterant, potuerunt. 
 5. Antec. of the pronouns in this lesson. 6. Two cases in which the 
 form ipsl is found. 7. How to decide whether quod means because 
 or which. 8. A transitive and an intransitive meaning of tacere. 
 9. Eng. words related to tacere, proponere, valere. plus. 10. What 
 subjv. in the passage are so simply because they are in indir. disc., 
 and what are subjv. in dir. disc. ? 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 17, neque dubitare to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. debeant : (a) the brackets about this word indicate that it 
 probably does not belong in the Text ; it may be omitted in transla- 
 tion; (b) dubitare is therefore the principal verb of indir. disc.; it 
 has the same subj. as praeferre in preceding lesson. 
 
 2. superaverint : (a) a pf. subjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. 
 disc, after the primary tense, proponit ; (b) changed from a fut. 
 pf. ind. in dir. disc., where, however, its form was the same ; for a 
 fut. pf. quoted after a secondary tense, cf. XLYI. N. 3 (b) (c) (d) ; 
 (c) conjug. and analysis of form ? 
 
214 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. sint erepturl : (a) sint is in the subjv. after quin in both the 
 dir. and indir. disc. ; cf. XXII. N. 7 (b) and XXV. N. 8 (b) ; (b) note 
 how Roman!, which is the subj. of sint, is drawn to the end of the 
 preceding clause, and cf. XXXVI. N. 2 (6) and A. & G. 344, b; 
 (c) una before cum is an adv. meaning together; cf. una cum 
 XXV [II. ; (d) for meaning of reliqua, cf. IX. N. 5 (b) ; (e) Haeduls 
 is here a dat. with erepturl; see Grain. Less.; (/) erepturl is from 
 eripere a verb in -io of the 3d conjug. ; what partic. ? how different 
 from erepti ? 
 
 4. iiuntiari : (a) the subj. are consilia and the clause quae . . . 
 gerantur, quae meaning here whatever or those things which; 
 (b) gerantur means are done; why subjv.? 
 
 5. posse : (a) which of the inf. in this clause is the principal verb 
 of ind. disc.? which complementary? (b) the antec. of se is the subj. 
 of the verb of saying in LVI If. 
 
 6. enuntiarit for enuntiaverit ; pf. subjv. after quod, because ; 
 this substantive quod clause is used as an adv. accus. ; cf L. 
 N. 5 (a). 
 
 7. intellegere sese : (a) in dir. disc, intellego, I know ; (b) in- 
 troduced by quin, which means nay more, in fact ; not that or but 
 that, which is its meaning when followed by the subjv. 
 
 8. fecerit: (a) for mode, cf. XLIII. x. 2 (c), Gram. Less.; 
 (&) preceded by what interrogative word, and what does that word 
 limit? (c) why pf. ? (d) its obj. id has the quod clause for its antec. 
 
 9. quam diu, as long as. 
 
 10. tacuisse; here intrans. ; cf the trans, tacuerat LVIII. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The use of quin with the subjv. A. & G. 332, g H. 501, II. 2; 
 
 and Kern. -504. 
 
 2. The adv. use of the substan- 
 
 tive quod clause .... A. & G. 333*a. H. 516, 1 II. 
 
 2, N. 
 3> The dat. with certain verbs of 
 
 taking away A. & G. 229. H. 386, 2 ; 
 
 385, II. 2. 
 1 Study examples and note their translation, 
 
LESSON LIX. 215 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. coercere, reg., to hold on all 5. quantus, adj. (quam, how\ 
 
 sides, restrain, coerce. how great, as much as ; after 
 
 2. dubitare, to doubt, to hesitate. tantus (so great}, quantus 
 
 3. libertas, freedom, liberty. may be translated as. 
 
 4. necessario, adv., necessarily, 6. quin, conj., when used with the 
 
 of necessity. iiid., but, nay more, in fact. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Write in Eng. and then in Lat. the dir. disc, for the indir. in 
 this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) If the Eomans shall overcome (shall have overcome) the 
 Helvetii, they will take away the liberty of the Haedui. (b) Liscus, 
 although he was vergobretus, could not restrain these reckless men. 
 (c) These same (men) inform the enemy that Caesar has not a large 
 enough supply of fodder, (d) Caesar asks Liscus how great a num- 
 ber of the common people are influenced by the reckless speeches of 
 these men. 
 
 3. (a) (When) compelled to speak, Liscus sets forth the plans of 
 those who are unfriendly to the Eomans. (b) Liscus began to set 
 forth these things, because Caesar had rebuked him sternly, (c) Caesar 
 himself will punish these chiefs, that others may not do the same 
 (thing). 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The tense sign -eri-. 2. Cases possible for the form quae. 
 3. For se. 4. Meaning of quam, tarn, quantus, tantus. 5. The 
 endings -us and -urus. 6. Two meanings of quin. 7. Of una, 
 8. Of quam. 9. How fut. time is represented in the subjv. 
 10. Mode and tense of gerantur, geruntur, gereiitur. 11. Pour 
 interrogative words learned thus far? 12. The best translation for 
 the clause quod . . . eiiuntiarit. 13. Analysis of tacuisse, 
 superaveriiit. 
 
216 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Ctcsar, B. G. 1. 18, through audeat nemo. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. fratrem : (a) stem fratr-, nom. frater, the e before r being 
 developed in the effort to pronounce the stein ; (I) with stem fratr-, 
 cf. stem agro- (cf. agru-m for agro-m XV.) ; here -o of the stem is 
 dropped and e is developed in the nom. as in fratr-, giving ager as 
 the nom. of stem agro- ; (c) in alter-um XXIX. the nom. is formed 
 from the stem by simply dropping the -o, thus stem altero- gives 
 nom. alter. 
 
 2. pluribus praesentibus : (a) for const., cf. Sequams invltis 
 XXXY1. ; (If) pluribus, from nom. plur. masc. plures, means here 
 many. 
 
 3. celeriter: (a) for formation, cf. LVII. N. 10; (b) the nom. 
 masc. of the corresponding adj. is celer ; the sup. of celeriter is 
 celerrime or celerrume ; cf. aegerrume XLV. and LVII. Obs. 1. 
 
 4. solo : (a) agrees with eo understood referring to Liscus ; 
 (b) the gen. and dat. sing, are like those of totus. 
 
 5. conventii: (a) the nom. sing, conventus means, primarily, a 
 coming together, i. e. the ending -tus names the action of the verb 
 convenire; cf. XXVII. N. 6, XXX If. N. 1; (b) the form is the 
 same in the nom. as the masc. of the pf. pass, partic. 
 
 6. esse vera : (a) the subj. of esse is ea, those things, to be sup- 
 plied ; (b) why inf. in esse ? (c) case of vera and why ? 
 
 7. ipsum ; in the sense of very one rather than himself; (he finds 
 out} that Dumnorix is the very man. 
 
 8. audacia ; the name of a quality formed from the adj. audax 
 by the addition of -ia to the stem ; before i of the ending, -i of the 
 stem is dropped ; thus, audac-ia ; cf. XIX. N. 2. 
 
LESSON LX. 217 
 
 9. gratia : (a) qualified by the preceding magna ; (b) for const, 
 and also for that of audacia, cf. XXX. N. 2. 
 
 10. vectigalia ; accus. plur. nent. from nom. sing, vectigal. 
 
 11. redempta habere : (a) for use, cf. LIV. N. 3 (b) (c) 
 (b) pretio ; this word tells at how much he bought the revenues; it 
 is called an abl. of price ; the abl. of price is closely related to the 
 abl. of means or instrument. 
 
 12. licente : () a pres. act. partic. from verb lice-ri; its nom. is 
 lice-ns ; cf. ori-e-iis, inoplna-ns, and note that though the verbs are 
 of different conjug. the ending is the same in each ; (b) forms with 
 illo an abl. absolute const., he bidding or while he ivas bidding; 
 this is the first pres. partic. which has been used as such in the text 
 thus far ; other Avords having the forms of pres. partic. were adj. in 
 all respects ; (c) note that liceri, though dep. and therefore pass, in 
 form, has the pres. act. partic. licente. 
 
 13. nemo ; force of position ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. A few stems in -ro and -ero have the nom. masc. in -er. Those 
 thus far used are as follows ; stems in -ro ; ager, noster, vester, 
 aeger, uter ; in -ero ; socer, alter, liber. 1 
 
 2. The pres. act. partic. is used in Lat. only to represent the action 
 as actually going on at the time of the principal verb, and never loosely 
 as in Eng. to describe an action which preceded that of the principal 
 verb. 2 This partic. ends in -ns in all conjug. 
 
 1 Adj. in -er have forms in -a and -um ; thus, alter, altera, alterum, 
 noster, nostra, nostrum. 
 
 2 In the Eng. sentence " Hobbling to the door he found it locked," the pres. 
 partic. "hobbling" is evidently used to describe an act which preceded the finding 
 of the door locked. A Roman would have used instead of " hobbling," a pf. partic. 
 or a temporal clause 7neaning when he had hobbled to the door. 
 
218 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of neuters in -al . . . A. & G. 52, ani- H. 63, ani- 
 
 mal, mal. 
 
 2. Decl. of nouns and adj. with 
 
 stems in -ro and -ero . . A. &G.38,puer, H. 51, puer, 
 
 ager and N. ager and 2, 
 
 near bottom 1), 4), 5) ; 
 
 of p. 16 ; 82. 149, 150. 
 
 3. Thedecl. of thepres. act. partic. A. & G. 85, b, H.157,amans. 
 
 iens. 
 
 4. Sup. of adj. in -er and adv. 
 
 formed from them . . . . A. & G. 89, a ; H. 163, 1 ; 
 
 92 ; miserg. 306 and 2. 
 
 5. The partic. of dep. verbs . . A. & G. 135 H. 231, 1,232. 
 
 and a. 
 
 6. The name of the quality in -ia, 
 
 -tia, -tas, -tudo . . . . A. & G. 163, e. H. 325 and 1. 
 
 7. Ipse, meaning very . . . . A. & G. 195, / H. 452, 2. 
 
 Rem. 
 
 8. The time denoted by the partic. A. & G. 290. H. 550. 
 
 9. The abl. of price . * . . . . A. & G. 252. H. 422. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. audacia faudax), boldness, 6. conventus, -us, a coming to* 
 
 audacity. gether, a meeting. 
 
 2. audere, ausus est, 1 to dare, 7- designare (signum a mark), to 
 
 3. celeriter, celerius, celerrime, mark out, point out, describe. 
 
 quick!,//. 8. dimittere, -mlsit, -missus, to 
 
 4. concilium, an assembly, coun- send apart, to dismiss. 
 
 cil ; cf. consilium, a plan, 9. jactare, to throw about; when 
 
 counsel. used of words, to discuss. 
 
 5. contra, adv. and prep, with 10. liberalitas (liber, free) the qual- 
 
 accus., against. ity of a freeman, generosity 
 
 1 Dep. in the pf. system, though not in the pres. Such verbs are called semi- 
 deponent. 
 
LESSON LX. 219 
 
 11. libere (from adj. liber), freely. 18. quaerere, quaesivit or -lit, 
 
 12. liceri, reg., to bid {at an auc- quaesitus, to seek ; cf. queri, 
 
 tioti). to complain. 
 
 13. nemo, nemini dat. (ne and 19. redimere, -emit, -emptus, to 
 
 homo), no man, no one ; the buy back, to buy up. 
 
 gen. and abl. sing, of this 20. reperire, repperit, repertus, 
 
 word are supplied by nullius to find out. 
 
 and nullo. 21. re tin ere, -tinuit, -tentus, to 
 
 14. parvus, minor, minimus, little, hold back. 
 
 small. 22. secreto, separately, in private. 
 
 15. portorium (portare), a tax, 23. solus (gen. -lus, dat. -i), alone. 
 
 especially a tax paid on goods 24. sentire, sensit, sensus, to feel, 
 imported. to perceive, to think. 
 
 16. praesens (in form a partic. from 25. vectigal, tax, revenue. 
 
 praeesse), present, immediate. 26. verus, true, right. 
 
 17. pretium, a price. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Synopsis of liceri in 3d plur. hid. and subjv. (b) Write 
 the Eng. and then the Lat. of the dir. disc, which is quoted in this 
 lesson. 
 
 2. (a) After very quickly dismissing the council, Caesar ordered 
 Liscus to speak freely, (b) Those (things) which were said in the 
 council are true, (c) Caesar did not allow these things to be discussed 
 when many were present, (d) Among the chiefs who were in the 
 camp Caesar found enemies of the Romans. 
 
 3. (a) When Dumnorix is a bidder, the rest do not dare to buy up 
 the taxes, (b) Which field (of the two) is ours? (Ft) is the other. 
 (c) Dumnorix was a man of so great popularity among the common 
 people that the magistrates could not restrain him. (d) Having 
 bought up the taxes at a very small price, Dumnorix tried to obtain 
 very much money (pecunia). 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Formation of the nom. from the stems agro-, socero-, patr-. 
 2. The formation of the adv. from the adj., in each degree. 3. The 
 
220 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 form, decl., and use of the pres. partic. 4. The neut. of noster, alter, 
 magnus, gravior, gravis, licens. 5. The fern, of each of the fore- 
 going. 6. Difference in use of the final letters -ia in vectigal-ia 
 and audac-ia. 7. Definition of gravi-tas, desigua-tio, veri-tas, 
 accusa-tio, motus, -us, forti-tudo. 8. Collect from Chap. 12-18 
 the names of qualities and the names of actions which they contain. 
 9. The comparison of multus, parvus, magnus. 10. Other Lat. 
 words related to audere, Hbere. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 18, His rebus through civitatgs collocasse. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. comparasse ; (a) full form ? (b) the subj. is Dumnorigem to 
 be supplied; (c) his rebus is an abl. of means with comparasse and 
 auxisse ; Dumnorix had made money by farming the taxes ; (d) et 
 . . . et, both . . . and; (e) ad largiendum ; for form, cf. XVIII. 
 N. 6 ; it here expresses purpose like ad res conficiendas XIX. 
 
 2. sumptu, expense; for its derivation from sumere, cf. LX. 
 N. 5 ; sumere as the basis of this word means to take from one's 
 means for some purpose, i. e. to spend. 
 
 3. neque = et non, and not. 
 
 4. domi, at home ; the ending -I is not here that of the gen., but 
 the ending of a case which occurs in comparatively few Lat. words ; 
 this case is called the " locative " because it denotes the place (locus) 
 in which. 
 
 5. largiter posse, can largely, has influence ; cf. plurimum 
 possent XXI [., plus possint LVIII. 
 
 6. collocasse, has placed, has given in marriage: (a) hujus 
 potentiae causa, because of, or for the sake of this power, i. e. in 
 
LESSON LXI. 221 
 
 order to secure this power ; the phrase expresses purpose ; (b) for 
 case of causa, cf. XVI. N. 2 (c) (c) for case of hominl, cf. XXII. 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 7. sororem ex matre, a sister from the mother, a sister on the 
 mother's side (only), i. e. a half -sister. 
 
 8. miptum collocasse ; for nuptum, cf. XL. N. 2 (a) ; collo- 
 casse has in this expression the force of a verb of motion. 
 
 3. OBSERVATION. 
 
 1. We have found thus far four different ways of expressing pur- 
 pose in Lat. : (a) By the subjv. with ut (sometimes qui = ut is) or 
 ne. (b) By ad with the gerund or gerundive, (c) By causa with a 
 gen. depending upon it. (d) By a supine in -um, after a verb of 
 motion. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 1. The locative case A. & G. 31, h. H. 45, 2. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. alere, aluit, altus, to nourish, 1. largiter, largely, bountifully. 
 
 support. 8. mater, -tris, mother. 
 
 2. augere, auxit, auctus, trans., 9. nubere, nupsit, nGptus, 1 to 
 
 to increase. veil one's self, hence, to marry 
 
 3. collocare, to place together, to (said of the woman) ; homini 
 
 set up, establish. nftbere, to veil one's self for 
 
 4. familiaris ifamilia), belonging a man, to marry a man. 
 
 to the household, private, inti- 10. potentia (potgns), power, 
 mate', as noun, a friend. 11. semper, always. 
 
 5. illic (ille), in that place, there, 12. soror, sister. 
 
 yonder. 13. sumptus, -us (sumere), ex- 
 
 6. largiri, largitus, to give bounti- pense. 
 
 fully, to give bribes. 14. uxor, wife. 
 
 1 For change of b to p before s and t, see A.'& G. 11, /, 1 ; H. 33, 1. 
 
222 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Write in Eng. and then in Lat. the dir. disc, which is quoted in 
 this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) Dumnorix by buying up the taxes (the taxes having been 
 bought up) amasses large means. () His means were so large that 
 he could support many horsemen. (c) He increased his influence 
 among the neighboring states by giving his female relatives in marriage. 
 (d) Dumnorix was willing to do anything (all things) to increase his 
 own power. 
 
 3. (a) Dumnorix, that bold chieftain, is persuading the common 
 people not to send grain to Caesar, (b) Dumnorix was most powerful 
 among the common people who lived in his country, but was riot well 
 disposed toward the Romans, (c) When he had collected cavalry to 
 defend him, the magistrates did not dare to set forth the things which 
 he had done. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The endings of the pres. act., pf. act., and pres. pass. inf. 2. The 
 Lat. for means, expense, private property, public revenue, customs 
 (i. e. duties on imports). 3. For council, counsel. 4. For father, 
 mother, sister, brother, wife. 5. Lat. words and Eng. words related 
 to alere, posse. 6. One regular verb of each conjug. in this lesson, 
 with principal parts. 7. The other Lat. case which the locative most 
 nearly resembles. 8. The Lat. for Ccesar married Calpurnia, Gal- 
 purnia married Ccesar. 9 Three ways of saying, he came to ask 
 aid. 
 
LESSON LX1I. 228 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Csesar, B. G. I. 18, Favere et through gratia, desperare. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. Helvetiis ; dat. with favere, lie favors (Dumnorigem or 
 eum being understood), and cupere, he is well disposed; note that 
 the meaning of favere might lead us to expect the accus., and cf. 
 XIV. N. 12 (b), XXX [. N. 8, XXXVI. N. 5. 
 
 2. Sdisse, he hates ; pres. in sense, though pf. in form ; cf. LI. N. 
 4 (e) ; lacks the pres. system, like coepisse ; see Gram. Less. 
 
 3. suo nomine ; in his own name, on his own account ; abl. of 
 cause. 
 
 4. deminuta ; supply sit ; why not est ? why not esset ? 
 
 5. si quid ; cf. XXXIII. N. 9, Gram. Less. 
 
 6. accidat ; (a) for meaning, see XLIX. Vocab. ; (b) stands for a 
 fut. in the dir. disc. ; cf. XLVI. N. 1 (b), LIT. N. 3 (b). 
 
 7. per Helvetica, through the ffelvetii, i. e. by their assistance. 
 
 8. regni obtinendi ; regni depends on spem, and obtinendi is a 
 gerundive agreeing with regni ; lit. the hope of the kingly power 
 to be possessed, freely, the hope of possessing the kingly power ; cf. 
 
 xix. N. s, xxxni/N. s. 
 
 9. imperio popull Roman!, under the government of the Roman 
 people ; imperio, like adventu, above, is an abl. of both time and 
 cause ; Dumnorix is losing hope not only at the time of the Roman 
 government, but because of it ; cf. XL. N. 2 (b). 
 
 10. de ea quam habeat gratia ; note that gratia is the antec. of 
 quam, and that quam habeat has the force of an adj. restricting the 
 meaning of ea, and is for that reason placed after it ; the phrase 
 might be translated of his existing popularity ; cf. magna apud 
 plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, of great popular, bribe- 
 bought influence, LX. 
 
224 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. OBSERVATION. 
 
 1. Some verbs, the ordinary meaning of which would lead us to 
 expect the accus., are used with the dat. Pour such verbs have al- 
 ready been found in the text, viz., favere, to favor ; imperare, to 
 command ; persuadgre, to persuade ; studere, to desire. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 1. Conjug. of 5dit . A. & G. 143, b and c, N. H. 297 and 2. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adfinitas (fines), nearness, 5. desperare, to be hopeless, to 
 
 relationship iy marriage. despair. 
 
 2. antlquus (ante), old, ancient, G. favere, favit, fauturus, to 
 
 former. facor ; takes dat. of person. 
 
 3. cupere, cupivit or -iit, ctipi- 7- honor, honor, office. 
 
 tus (a verb in -io of the 3d 8. odisse, to hate ; found only 
 
 conjug.), to long for, desire, in the pf. system, and in the 
 
 be well-disposed towara ?(in the pf. is pres. in sense, 
 
 the last sense it takes a dat.). 9. restituere, -stituit, -stitutus, 
 
 4. deminuere, -minuit, -minutus to set up again, to restore. 
 
 (de and minus), to lessen. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Write first in Eng. and then in Lat. the dir. disc, which is 
 quoted in this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) Influenced by this relationship, Dumnorix favors the Hel- 
 vetii. (b) Influenced by his Helvetian wife, Dumnorix, in order to 
 furnish aid to the Helvetii, tries to take away (to snatch away) the 
 grain from the Romans, (c) Men often hate those who keep them 
 from power, (d) For the sake (causa) of possessing the kingly 
 power, Dumnorix wished to defeat the Roman army. 
 
 3. (a) The high-born chiefs of Gaul were always longing to seize 
 the kingdoms which their fathers had held for many years, (b) In 
 
LESSON LXIII. 225 
 
 former times Divitiacus had been more powerful than Dumnorix. 
 (c) Dumnorix, after amassing- large means and marrying a Helvetian 
 wife, was influential both with the common people of his own country 
 and with the Helvetii. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Likeness and difference between odit and ccepit. 2. The 
 meaning of obtinere, of potm, of consequi. 3. A verb of com- 
 manding which does not take the dat. 4. The meaning of si quid 
 accidet, accidit, accidat. 5. How Eng. accident shows the mean- 
 ing of accidere. 6. The best Eng. for venire in spem. 7. Decl. 
 of nomine, adventu, spem. 8. Compare antiquus by endings, and 
 also by adverbs. 9. Compare summus. 10. Define consanguini- 
 tas, 1 and contrast its meaning with that of adfinitas. 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 18, Reperiebat etiam through equitatum 
 perterritum. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. reperiebat . . . Caesar : (a) note the expressiveness of the 
 transposition in this clause ; the verb first, to show that something 
 important is found out, riot simply related by Divitiacus, who has 
 been speaking, and the subj. last, to show that Caesar was now 
 active and not simply a listener ; (b) quaerendS is a gerund, in 
 seeking. 
 
 1 Do not forget that there is a General Vocabulary at the end of the book. If 
 you have forgotten tha meaning of the adj. consanguineus. look it up. 
 
 15 
 
226 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. equestre ; note stem equestri-, and cf. XXI. N. 1, and Gram. 
 Less, below. 
 
 3. panels ante diebus ; ante is here an adv., and diebus an abl. 
 of degree of difference, before by a few days, a few days before ; cf. 
 XXVII. N. 1. 
 
 4. quod . . . esset factum : (a) for const, of clause, cf. LIX. N. 
 6, Gram. Less.; (b) why subjv. ? LVI. N. 1 (c). 
 
 5. factum ; esse is to be supplied. 
 
 6. ejus equitibus ; (a) for const, of equitibus, cf. LIV. N. 2, 
 Obs. 1; (b) antec. of ejus? why ejus rather than RUIS ? cf. ejus 
 fugse, where ejus is an adj. limiting fugae, of that flight. 
 
 7. niiserant ; the preceding dat. auxilio means for aid, i. e. in 
 order to aid, sometimes called a dat. of " purpose " or " end," and the 
 dat. Caesari means to Ccesar ; cf. Gram. Less. 
 
 8. praeerat ; for const, of preceding equitatui, cf. magistratui 
 praeerat LVII. 
 
 9. perterritum : (a) the antec. of the preceding eorum is equita- 
 tui ; cf. LTV. N. 4 (d) ; (b} reliquum is made emphatic by separa- 
 tion from its noun equitatum ; the rest of the cavalry was terrified, 
 not all of it, for that of Dumnorix ran away for the purpose of creat- 
 ing a panic. 
 
 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. 3d decl. adj. in -er .... A. & G. 84, acer. II. 153, acer. 
 
 2. Two dat., the obj. to which and 
 
 the end for which . . . A. & G. 233. H. 390 and 
 
 I. II. 
 
 3. Time before or after . . . . A. & G. 259, d. 1 H. 430 1 and 
 
 N. 1, 2); 
 also foot- 
 note 3. 
 
 4. The effect of separating words 
 
 naturally connected . . . A. &G. 344 and*. H. 561, III. 
 
 1 Study examples. 
 
LESSON LXIII. 227 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adversus (in form the pf. 2. equester, equestris, eques- 
 partic. of advertere), turned tre, belonging to a horseman, 
 
 toward, in front of, adverse, cavalry, 
 
 unfavorable. 3. perterrere, reg., to frighten 
 
 thoroughly. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Principal parts of all the verbs in this lesson. (5) Synop- 
 sis of reperiebat in pres. system, (c) Of miserant in pf. system. 
 (d) All the inf. and partic. of perterritum. (e) Decline equitibus, 
 quern. 
 
 2. (a) Dumnorix and his horsemen had begun to retreat, in order 
 that the rest of the horsemen might be thoroughly frightened. 
 (fr) The Haedui, influenced by the popularity and liberality of Dum- 
 norix, had put him in command of their cavalry, (c) The battle, 
 which was fought, was unfavorable, because Dumnorix favored the Hel- 
 vetii. (d) The horsemen whom the Haedui had sent to aid Caesar 
 were influenced by Dumnorix. 
 
 3. (d) When the horsemen of Dumnorix began to retreat, the rest 
 followed (them), (b) Dumnorix entertains the hope of defeating the 
 Romans, (c) He intends to obtain the greatest possible influence. 
 (d) Dumnorix is angry because Divitiacus, his brother, has been 
 restored to his former position of honor. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Difference in meaning between reperlre, quaerere, rogare, 
 flagitare. 2. The nom. sing, and plur. neut. of equester, magnus, 
 ceger, gravis, gravior, fluens. 3. The abl. sing, and gen. plur. of 
 each of the foregoing. 4. The position and const, of diebus in the 
 phrase paucis ante diebus. 5. Eng. words related to those in 
 Vocab. 6. The effect of placing a subj. last in a sentence ; a verb first ; 
 an adj. far away from its noun. 7. An example in this lesson of the 
 abl. of agent, and also of the abl. of means. 8. Difference between 
 ejus or eorum and suus. 9. Five ways to express purpose. 
 
-2-28 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 19, through anima dvertere jubgret. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. accederent : (a) accedere, meaning strictly to go to, comes to 
 have the pass, meaning to be added, because of the idea of increase or 
 addition in the original meaning-; l (b) for mode, cf. XL. N. 2 (b). 
 
 2. traduxisset : (a) its subj. is Dumnorix to be supplied ; 
 (b) subjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. disc. ; the thought of Csesar, 
 as suggested by the word suspitiones, is here quoted. 
 
 3. dandos curasset ; (a) dandos agrees with obsides not e5s ; 
 (b) the antec. of eos are Sequanorum and Helvetica ; for the cir- 
 cumstance referred to, cf. XXXVI. and XXXVII.; (c) for use of 
 dandos, cf. XLV. N. 3 (a). 
 
 4. injussu suo et civitatis : (a) injussu, without the command, 
 is an abl. of manner; for form, cf. LX. N. 5 (b) ; (b) suo here refers 
 to Caesar, the unexpressed subj. of a verb which follows ; (c) suo and 
 clvitatis (which depends on injussu) are connected by the co-ordinate 
 conj. et; note that the adj. suo and the gen. clvitatis have exactly 
 the same possessive force. 
 
 5. ipsis ; its antec. are clvitatis and Caesaris (the latter implied 
 in suo) ; it forms an abl. absolute const, with inscientibus ; for decl. 
 of inscientibus, see Grain. Less. 
 
 6. accusaretur ; the four quod clauses which end with this word 
 have the same const. ; they are in apposition with res (the subj. of 
 accederent) and may each be introduced in translating by the phrase 
 the fact that. 
 
 1 Cf. in Harper's Lat. Dictionary, ad, E, 2 and in Webster's Unabridged 
 Dictionary, to, 5 (/). 
 
LESSON LXIV. 
 
 229 
 
 7. arbitrabatur : (a) the subj. is Caesar understood; (b) the 
 preceding causae is a partitive gen. depending 1 on satis ; cf. minus 
 dubitatioiiis XL IX. 
 
 3. OBSERVATION. 
 
 l tt Accedere, though active in form, has often the pass, meaning, 
 to be added. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of adj. in -ns . . . . A. & G. 85, a, H. 157, pru- 
 
 egens. dens, N. 
 
 2. The adj. with the force of the 
 
 gen A. & G. p. 140, H. 393, foot- 
 
 N., 190. note 3; 395, 
 
 N. 2. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. accedere, -cessit, -cessus, to 
 
 go to, to approach, to be added ; 
 accedit, it is added ; with ut 
 or quod, moreover. 
 2 animadvertere (animum, ad, 
 and vertere), to turn, the mind 
 or attention to, to notice (in 
 this sense takes simple accus.); 
 in hominem animadver- 
 tere, to punish a man ; cf. 
 the Eng. expression to attend 
 to in sense of to punish. 
 
 3. cSgnoscere, cognovit, cog- 
 
 iiitus, to learn thoroughly ; 
 cognovit, he has learned, he 
 knows. 
 
 4. injussu (in neg. and jubere), 
 
 found only in abl., without 
 command* 
 
 5. insciens (in neg. and scire, 
 
 to know), adj., though pres. 
 partic. in form, not knowing, 
 'unaware* 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Write all the partic. of cognoscere, dare, (b} Synopsis of 
 traducere in ind. and subjv. act. and pass, (c) Decl. of quis and 
 qui. (d) Comparison of certus. 
 
 2. (a) Dumriorix had done all things without the knowledge of his 
 state, (b) Csesar knows that very certain facts can be added to these 
 
230 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 suspicions, (c) Caesar himself has done all these things very quickly. 
 (d) Caesar was influenced by the fact that (because) Dunmorix was 
 accused by Liscus, a llaeduan magistrate. 
 
 3. (a) There was reason enough why Caesar should punish Dum- 
 norix. (b] Caesar was no longer without knowledge of (de) this 
 matter, since very certain facts had been learned, (c) Caesar having 
 been informed of this crime will punish the man by whom it- was 
 committed, (d) Caesar noticed many things which others were not 
 able to find out. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Similarity in use of fiebat and accedebat. 2. Difference in 
 the decl. of pres. partic. and that of other adj. in -na. 3. The adj. 
 case of nouns. 4. The adv. case. 5. The Lat. for to notice, to pun- 
 ish, to have a thing done, to lead across, to cross, to learn, to know. 
 6. The translation of the substantive quod clause. 7. The various 
 classes of words with which the partitive gen. is used. 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Ccesar, B. G. I. 19, His omnibus through sint dicta ; 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. repugn abat, was opposed (or repugnant) : (a) the subj. is 
 unum, one (thing) ; (5) rebus is the dat. of indir. obj. 
 
 2. cognoverat: (a) for meaning, cf. LX IV. Vocal). ; (6) its subj. 
 is Csesar understood ; (c) an tec. and case of se in phrase in se? 
 (rf) note that the conj. is entirely omitted between the different obj. 
 of cognoverat ; cf. lingua, institutis, legibus IV. and Garumna, 
 Oceano, finibus X., but contrast Rauracis et Tulingis et Lato- 
 brigis XXVIII. 
 
LESSON LXV. 231 
 
 3. ne . . offenderet vergbatur, he feared that he would 
 offend: (a) ne, following- verebatur in thought, is translated that ;* 
 (b) the impf. subjv. offenderet refers to the fut. ; (c) the antec. of 
 ejus is Dumnorix. 
 
 4. quicquam, sometimes written quidquam, anything : (a) the 
 accus. sing. neut. of the indef. pron. quisquam, quaequam, quicquam 
 (quidquam) ; (b) cf. quemque, each one XXV ill. ; it is from' 
 quisque, quaeque, quidque ; note that both of these pron. have only 
 the first syllable declined and that this is the indef. quis, quae, quid ; 
 for which, see XXXIII. 
 
 5. cui . . . habebat, to whom he was having the highest con- 
 fidence of all things, more freely, in ivhom he had the highest confi- 
 dence respecting everything: (a) case and antec. of cui? (b) note 
 that the gen. rerum is not best translated by of, and cf. dictionis, 
 
 for pleading XXLV., trium mensium, sufficient for three months 
 XXVIII., incommodl, disaster (like accus.) XL VI., minus dubita- 
 tionis, less doubt XL IX. 
 
 6. colloquitur : (a) part of speech and const, of preceding Galliee ? 
 
 (b) familiarem is a noun ; cf. LXI. Vocab. ; (c) antec. of eo ? 
 
 7. quae . . . dicta sint : (a) ea the omitted antec. of quae is 
 the obj. of the preceding verb ; (b) the antec. of ipso is Divitiacus. 
 
 (c) Why is dicta sint subjv., and why in the pf. tense ? 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The translation of the gen., like that of all cases, depends upon 
 the context; thus, though most frequently translated by the Eng. 
 possessive, or obj. with of, it is sometimes translated byybr, by a nom. 
 or objective or by a phrase containing words for which there are no 
 exact equivalents in the Lat. 
 
 2. The neg. ne, introducing a clause which is the obj. of a verb 
 of fearing, is regularly translated by the affirmative that. This will 
 seem less strange if we observe that where ne is used the obj. is not 
 desired. 
 
 1 Note that, if verebatur is translated by the verb desire, ne becomes neg. in 
 sense, thus, he desired that he might not offend. We never fear that a thing will 
 happen without desiring the contrary. 
 
232 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Decl. of quisque and quisquam A. & G. 105, c, H. 190, 2, 1) 
 
 e. 2) and N. 1. 
 
 2. Use or omission of the conj. 
 
 in series of more than two 
 
 words A. & G. 208, b. H. 554, I. 6. 
 
 3. The const, with verbs of fear- 
 
 ing A. & G. 331, /. H. 498, III. 
 
 and N. 1, 
 foot-note 4. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. Caius, more correctly written 
 
 Gaius or Gajus, a Roman 
 first name, usually represent- 
 ed by C. 
 
 2. colloqui, -locutus, to confer, 
 
 converse. 
 
 3. commonefacere, -fecit, -fac- 
 
 tus, to put in mind, to remind 
 forcibly. 
 
 4. egregius (e and grex, -gis, a 
 
 herd}, out of the (common) herd, 
 hence, eminent, excellent. 
 
 5. interpres, -etis, an interpreter. 
 
 6. justitia (Justus, just), justice, 
 
 sense of justice, uprightness. 
 7 offenders, -fendit, fensus, to 
 
 hit against, stumble, blunder, 
 
 offend. 
 S. prius, adv. in comp., sooner ; 
 
 prius quam or priusquam, 
 
 conj , sooner than, before. 
 
 9. quisquam, qugequam, quid- 
 
 quam, any one, anything. 
 
 10. removere, -mSvit, -motus, 
 
 to move back, remove. 
 
 11. repugnare, to fujht back, to be 
 
 opposed. 
 
 12. simul, adv., at the same time, 
 
 at once. 
 
 13. studium, zeal, devotion, a pur- 
 
 suit. 
 
 14. supplicium (sub and plicare, 
 
 to fold, to bend, as the knees 
 in kneeling), a kneeling, sup- 
 p lie a tion, p un ish ment. 
 
 15. temperantia (temperare) mod- 
 
 eration. 
 
 16. vocare, to call, to summon. 
 
 17. verri, reg., to feel awe of, to 
 
 fear. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Principal parts of repugnare, habere, jubere, dicere. 
 
 (b) Decline fidem, justitiam, animum, sg, omnium, praesente, 
 
 (c) Compare summus. 
 
LESSON LXVI. 233 
 
 2. (d) After finding out all these things, Caesar called Divitiacus, 
 the brother of Dumnorix. (6) He was unwilling to wound the 
 feelings of Divitiacus, who had been a friend to him and to the 
 Eoman people for many years, (c) Though Dumnorix was reckless, 
 his brother was a man of eminent moderation, (d) After conversing 
 with all the rest, Caesar determined to inform Divitiacus of all that he 
 had learned. 
 
 3, () I fear that I shall forget many things, (b) Divitiacus sur- 
 passed all in good faith, in moderation, and in justice, (c) These 
 were men in whom Caesar had entire confidence respecting the most 
 important matters, (d) Caesar feared that there would not be grain 
 
 enough. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The derivation of voluntas, temperantia. 2. The abstract 
 noun from stem of prseseiis. 3. Lat. words related to studium, 
 princeps, familiaris. 4. Difference between concilium and con- 
 silium. 5. Translation and peculiarity in use of consuevit, cogno- 
 vit, odit, ccepit. 6. Three indef. pron. 7. How Idem resembles 
 two of them in dec!. 8. Why the Eomans used the neg. ne where 
 we use the affirmative that. 9. Difference between Lat. and Eng. re- 
 specting the use of the conj. in the enumeration of particulars. 
 10. Eng. words related to studium, voluntas, vocare, colloqui. 
 
 LESSON LXVI. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 19, et ostendit through se crgvisset ; in 20. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. ostendit : What two tenses are possible for this verb ? 
 
 2. dixerit : (a) How does the tense of this verb determine that 
 of ostendit ? (6) antec. of eo and se ? (c) apud se, near him, in 
 his presence. 
 
234 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. statuat : (a) mode and tense ? (b) for const., cf. XX. N. 5, 
 Gram. Less., and examples of the same const, in XXX., XXX1L, 
 XXXVII., XLVIlf. ; (e) ejus depends upon animl and refers to 
 Divitiacus ; (d) ipse refers to Caesar, eo to Dumnorix ; (e) const, 
 arid best translation of causa cognita? 
 
 4. statueret : (a) for const., cf. 3 ; (b) note the position of quid 
 with respect to ne, and cf. si quid LXI1. ; (c) gravius is here an 
 adj. ; gender and agreement ? it means too severe rather than more 
 severe; cf. the meaning of adv. cupidius L1V.; (d) in fiatrem, 
 against his brother. 
 
 5. capere : (a) why inf. ? (b) nom. and const, of quem-quam ? 
 (c) ex eo,from that fact, i. e. the behavior of Dumnorix ; (d} const, 
 and antec. of sS ? LVII1. N. 4, Gram. Less.; (e) for plus doloris, 
 cf. minus dubitationis XL IX. 
 
 6. doml; cf. LXI. N. 4. 
 
 7. posset : (a) Was this verb snbjv. in the dir. disc. ? XLIV. N. 5. ; 
 (b) modified by both plurimum and minimum; cf. XXII. N. 7 (c). 
 
 8. crevisset : (a) from crescere ; (b) steins crgsce-, crev-, 
 cret- ; (c) note that ere- is the basis of all three steins ; it is called 
 the verb stem ; (d) the pres. stern is formed from this verb stem by 
 adding -see ; cf. consclscere, verb stem consci-, pres. stem con- 
 scisce- ; consuescere, verb stem consue-, pres. stem consuesce- ; 
 (e) note that all the verb stems mentioned above end in a vowel, ns 
 also in the case of sci-, verb stem of scire ; the pf. stems are crev-, 
 consciv-, consuev-. sciv-, and the sup. stems cret-, conscit-, con- 
 suet-, scit- ; cf. ama-, amav-, amat-. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The b.isis of the three stems of a verb already learned the 
 pres., the pf., and the sup. is called the verb stern. This in the 
 1st and 4th conjng. is the same in form as the pres. stem. 
 
 2. Verbs of the 3d conjug. in -scere form the pres. stem by adding 
 -see to the verb stem. 
 
 3. Most verb stems ending in a vowel form the pf. stem by add- 
 ing -v, and the sup. by adding -t. 
 
 4. The indef. quis usually stands immediately after si, nisi, ne, or 
 num. 
 
LESSON LXVI. 235 
 
 4. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. complect!, -plexus, to em- 6. obsecrare (ob and sacrum, 
 
 brace. sacred) , to ask on religious 
 
 2. crescere, crevit, cretus, in- grounds, to beseech. 
 
 trans., to grow, increase ; cf. 1. petere, petivit, petitus, to 
 the trans, augere. aim at, to seek. 
 
 3. hortari, to urge. 8. scire, scivit, scitus, to know. 
 
 4. lacrima, a tear. 9. sSparatim, separately. 
 
 5. offensio (offendere), a strik- 
 
 ing against^ a stumbling, an 
 offence. 
 
 5. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Write in Eng. and then in Lat. the dir. disc, which is quoted in 
 this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) Divitiacus began to embrace Caesar and to beseech him 
 not to compel Dumnorix to pay the penalty of his crime, (b) The 
 greater his wrong-doing is, the greater sorrow I experience because of 
 it. (e) Dumnorix was increasing in power because of the aid which 
 Divitiacus was giving to him. (d) When Divitiacus had learned all 
 things which Caesar had found out, he feared that Caesar would kill 
 his brother. 
 
 3. (a) Caesar was accustomed to converse with the G-auls by means 
 of interpreters. (&) Each one says that no one is more unfriendly to 
 Caesar than Dumnorix (is), (c) If Caesar kills (shall kill) Dumnorix, 
 he will offend many among the Haedui, because Dumnorix is popular 
 at home. 
 
 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. The pres. ind., pres. subjv., and fut. ind., 3d sing, and plur. of 
 statuere. 2. The synopsis and inf. and partic. of crescere in act. 
 voice. 3. Synopsis of capere in pres. system. 4. Decl. of quisque, 
 plus. 5. Third plur. of ostendit in pres. ind. ; in pf. ind. 
 6. How to distinguish like forms of rel. and indef. pron. by the 
 position of the latter. 7. The four stems of the verb. 8. Two 
 meanings of the comp., of the sup. 9. Difference between in 
 
236 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 fratrem, in fratre, and apud fratrem. 10. Antec. of every pron. 
 in the lesson. 11. Verbs in text thus far which take an obj. clause 
 of purpose. 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 20, quibus opibus through sg averterentur. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. uteretur : (a) why subjv. ? (V) what case used with it ? 
 XXVIII. N. 2; (c) for translation and force of ad minuendam 
 gratiam, cf. XIX. N. 5, LXI. N. 1 (e) ; (d) ouam is for meam, my, 
 in the words of Divitiacus ; for form and use of meam, cf. suus, 
 tuus XLVII. N. 4. 
 
 2. amore ; the noin. sing, amor names the action of the verb 
 amare, to love ; cf. dolor LXVI., which names the action of dolere, 
 and LX. N. 5. 
 
 3. fraterno : (a) an adj., the noin. sing, of which, frater-nus, is 
 formed from frater by the addition of the ending -nus ; cf. the fol- 
 lowing adj. : Cassi-anus, repent-Inus, frument-arius, consanguin- 
 eus, egreg-ius, cupi-dus, faci-lis, immort-alis, incredi-bilis. Give 
 the meaning of each of these adj. and the word from which it is 
 formed. (b) Note that the adj. fraterno has here the same force as 
 the gen. vulgi, just beyond, and cf. LXIV. N. 4 (c), Gram. Less. 
 
 4. existimaturum : (a) supply esse. What inf. is then formed ? 
 (b) the preceding accidisset, after si, stands for a fut. pf. in the dir. 
 disc. ; cf. LIX. N. 2 ; the exact Eng. for the dir. form of the Lat. 
 would be "If any thing shall have happened, no one will think;" 
 the Lat, uses the fut. pf. in the si clause, but the simple fut. 
 in the conclusion, to indicate that something must happen before 
 there can be any thought about it ; contrast the vague use of the 
 pres. "happens" in the Eng. sentence, "If anything happens, no 
 
LESSON LXVIL 237 
 
 one will think," and XVI. N. 15, foot-note ; LX. Obs. 2, foot-note ; 
 (c) for quod, cf. L. N. 5 ; (d) for quid and el, cf. si quid accidat 
 Romania LX11. ; (e) for gravius, cf. LVf. N. 4 (c) ; (/) neminem 
 is an accus. sing, from nemo. 
 
 5. factum : (a) esse, understood, it was done ; what inf. ? cf. 
 existimaturum (esse) ; (b) voluntate is an abl. of manner ; cf. vo- 
 luntate XXX [I. N. 9 (e). 
 
 6. avertsrentur : (a) cf. f uturum ut . . . haberet XXXVIII. ; 
 (b) cf. averterant LVI., and note that the pres. stem averte- differs 
 from the pf. stem avert- only in the final -e of the pres. ; avert- is 
 both verb stem and pf. stem ; verbs like avertere in this respect have 
 the same form in the pres. and pf. ind. 3d sing. ; examples are minu- 
 it, ostendit, statuit, incendit, offendit, solvit ; cf. XXIV. N. 5, 
 Obs. 3, LXVI. N. 8, Obs. 1, 2, 3. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The following adj. endings meaning belonging to or pertaining 
 to have been used in the text : -nus, -anus, -Inus, -arms, -ius, 
 alls. 
 
 2. The Lat. use of tenses is more precise and definite than the 
 Eng. ; the pres. ind. is very rarely used for the fut. or flit, pf., or the 
 pres. partic. for the pf. partic., or the simple past tense of the ind. for 
 the impf. All of these inaccuracies are permitted by Eng. usage. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The possessive adj. pronouns . A. & G. 99, a, H. 185, 449. 
 
 197. 
 
 2. The name of an action in -io, 
 
 -tio, -tus, -or A. & G. 163, a, H. 326 arid 1, 
 
 b. 327 and 1. 
 
 3. Four classes of 3d conjng. 
 
 verbs, classified according to 
 the formation of the pf. 
 
 stern from the verb stem . A. & G. 124, a, H. 252 and 1, 
 
 b, d, e. 254, 255 
 
 and II. 
 
238 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. amor famare), love, desire. 1. ops, ability ; in plur., means, 
 
 2. existimatio (existimare), es- resources. 
 
 tint at ion, opinion. 8. pernicies, -ei (nex), destruc- 
 
 3. fraternus, of a brother, brother- tion. 
 
 1 >/, fraternal. 9. vulgus (of the 2d decl., neut. by 
 
 4. metis, my t mine. exception and, hence, having 
 
 5. mi mere, minuit, minutus nom. and accus. alike; want- 
 
 (minus), to lessen. ing in plur.), the public, the 
 
 6. nervus, a sinew, tendon, nerve ; crowd, the mob. 
 
 in plur., power, strength. 
 
 6 EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Write first the Eng. and then the Lat. of the dir. disc, 
 which is quoted in this lesson. 
 
 2. (a) Dumnorix used the resources which he received from his 
 brother to increase his own popularity, (b) Divitiacus showed that 
 Caesar would turn the affections of the public from him (i. e. Divitia- 
 cus) if he should decide upon any too severe (punishment) for his 
 brother. (c) It happened that the popularity of Divitiacus was 
 lessened, but the influence of Dumnorix was increased, (d) If any- 
 thing happens to my brother, his friends will blame me. 
 
 3. (a) Although Dumnorix had inflicted injuries upon his brother, 
 yet Divitiacus asked Caesar not to punish him too severely, (b) If 
 Caesar punishes Dumnorix, every one will say that Divitiacus, the 
 friend of Caesar, urged him to do it. (c) He lessened our popularity, 
 in order to obtain favor himself, (d) Embracing Caesarj he said that 
 he experienced more sorrow than any other man on account of his 
 brother's wrong-doing. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY, 
 
 1. Three possible translations for ostendit. 2. How to determine 
 the tense where the form is the same in pres. and pf. ind. 3. Verb stems 
 of ducere, agere, emere, facere, consuescere, defendere. nubere. 
 4. Formation of pf. stem and classification of each of the foregoing. 
 
LESSON LXV1II. 239 
 
 5. Difference in meaning or use between tuus and vester, noster and 
 vester, meus and noster, suus and ejus. 6. The names of actions 
 and the names of qualities in Chap. 19 and 20. 7. The difference in 
 form between fnt, act. and pf. pass. inf. 8. Mode and tense of acci- 
 dere, accideret, accidisse, accidisset. 9. Explanation of combina- 
 tions quod si and si quid. 10. Comparison of gravius as adj. and 
 as adv. 11. Declension of gravius as an adj. 12. A class of nouns 
 having a stem ending which is like that of nemo. 13. Use of tenses 
 in the Eng. sentences : " Seizing his hand, he thanked him," " If he 
 goes, he will come again," " While I mused, the fire burned." 
 
 LESSON LXYIII. 
 
 1. TEXT. 
 Caesar, B. G. I. 20, Heec cum to the end. 
 
 2. NOTES. 
 
 1. peteret : (a) the introductory cum is here best translated while, 
 as very often when used with the impf. subj. (b) Why does hsec pre- 
 cede cum ? (c) flgns, pres. partic. in form and use ; for meaning, cf. 
 LX. N. 12 (b}, Obs. 2 ; for pf. ind., cf. LXY1. N. 8 (e), Obs. 3. 
 
 2. prendit : (a) for verb stem and pf. stem, cf. LXVII. N. 6 (b) ; 
 (b) for decl. of dextram (sometimes written dexteram), cf. LX. 
 N. 1. (<?) What would mean his own right hand, her right hand? 
 
 3. f aciat : (a) for omission of ut before faciat, see Gram. Less.; 
 (b) for const, of clause, cf. statuat, LXVI. N. 3 (b) ; (c) meaning of 
 finem in plnr. ? (d) for orandi, cf. bellaiidi, XVI. N. 12. 
 
 4. ostendit : (a) antec. of preceding ejus and se? (1) taiiti, the 
 gen. sing, of tantus is a predicate after esse, lit., he shows that his 
 favor is of so much, freely, is of so much (account), is worth so 
 much ,' tanti is called a gen. of price, since it tells (in an indefinite 
 way) how much a thing is worth. 
 
240 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 5. reipublicae : (a) really two words, re's and publica, declined 
 together ; cf. jusjurandum and also res familiaris, novee res ; 
 (b) note the gen. ending' -I of the -e decl. 
 
 6. condonet : (a) What coujug., mode, and tense? (&) Explain 
 mode ; (c) antec. of ejus ; (d) the dat. in voluntati and precibus 
 may be best translated for the sake of or because of. 
 
 7. queratur : () mode and tense? why? (b) meaning? cf. 
 quaeratur ; (c) Might quae agree with civitas (cf. quae civitas 
 XXXVII.) so far as form is concerned ? How do you know that it 
 does not ? 
 
 8. ut . . . vitet: (ft) same const, after monet as in faciat, above; 
 (b) best Eng. translation for in reliquum tempus ? 
 
 9. praeterita: (a) in form a pf. pass, partic. plnr. nciit. from 
 praeterire, to go by: lit. the things which have been passed by, more 
 freely, brgoncs, the past ; (b) cf. the following forms of ire and its 
 compounds : exirent XIII., exeant, subeunda XXVII., exlre, tran- 
 situr XXIX., ire XXX., translbant, transierat XLIII., Ibunt (dir. 
 disc.), ituros XLVI., transient, and the derivatives iter, initium, 
 reditio. What is the verb stem of Ire ? Its pres. stem ? How is 
 this stem changed when it stands before a vowel? How is the sup. 
 stem formed ? What is true of its tense signs and pers. endings ? 
 
 10. dicit : (a) note the position of this word with reference to the 
 clause which follows it in thought, and contrast the position of verbs 
 of saying or thinking in LX., LXIII., LXVI. ; cf., however, position 
 of dicere LVL, arbitrabatur LXIV. ; (b) cf. also (as to the posi- 
 tion of the verb of urging) monet ut vitet, above, and hortatur ut 
 statuat, obsecrare lie statueret LXVI., rogat faciat, above ; note 
 also the position of result clauses in XXIX., LXVII. and in this 
 lesson ; (c) for repetition of pres. ind. in this lesson, cf. XXXI. N. 10. 
 
 11. possit : (a) used after ut ; why, then, subjv. ? (b) quae agat 
 is an indir. question ; quae being here an interrogative, not a rel. 
 pron. 
 
 3. OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The verb stem of Ire is i-, which is lengthened to I- to form 
 the pres. stem and adds -t to form the supine stem. Before a vowel 
 the pres. stem is changed to e, 
 
LESSON LXVIII. 241 
 
 2. Quoted clauses more frequently follow a verb of saying tliau 
 precede it, though short quoted clauses often precede. In like manner 
 the obj. clause of purpose and all result clauses usually follow the 
 principal verb on which they depend. 
 
 3. Cum vvitlrthe impf. subjv. is often best translated while. 
 
 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. The conjng. of Ire . . . . A. & G. 141. H. 295, 1, 3. 
 
 2. Ut omitted after a verb of 
 
 urging A. & G. 331, / H. 499, 2. 
 
 Bern. 
 
 3. The gen. of price A. & G. 214, c, H. 401, 404. 
 
 215, c. 
 
 5. VOCABULARY. 
 
 1. adhibere, reg., to hold to, to 9. orare, to entreat, to beg. 
 
 summon, to employ. 10. praeterire, -lit, -itus, to go by, 
 
 2. condonare, to give up, to par- to pass In/ ; praeterita, things 
 
 don. gone by, the past. 
 
 3. consolari to console, to comfort. 11. prendere (also written prehen- 
 
 4. custos, oclis, a guard. dere), prendit, prensus, to 
 
 5. dexter, -tera, -terum or more grasp. 
 
 frequently -tra, -trum, the 12. reprehendere, to hold back, to 
 
 right ; dextra (maims, fern., blame. 
 
 the hand, being understood), 13. respublica (also written as two 
 
 the right hand. words res publica, and al- 
 
 6. flere, flevit, fletus, to weep. ways decl. as two), the common- 
 
 7. loqui, locutus, to speak. weal* republic. 
 
 8. monere, reg., to remind, warn, 14. verbum, a word. 
 
 advise. 15. vitare, to shun. 
 
 6. EXERCISES. 
 
 1. (a) Decline flens, haec, ejus, dextram, flnem, reipublicee, 
 jusjiitandum, precibus, omnes, tempus. (&) Synopsis of peteret 
 in the pres. system and of prendit in the pf. system, (c) Principal 
 parts of condSnet, adhibet, intellegat, sclre, faciat. 
 
 IS 
 
242 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 2. (a) Your (sing.) favor is worth so much that I freely pardon 
 your brother hvorder to retain it. (b) Dunmorix, when called (having 
 been called), is reproved by Caesar because he has not shunned sus- 
 picion, (c) He asks what Caesar is complaining about, (d] He 
 asked Caesar to pardon his brother. 
 
 3. (a) I will forgive the past if you will, for the future, do what 
 ought to be done. (6) Caesar went into Gaul, to overcome the Hel- 
 vetii, who had gone out of their territory and were crossing the fields 
 of the Haedui. (c) Caesar told the ambassadors, who had asked 
 permission to cross the province, that, if they should try to cross by 
 force, he would prevent them. 
 
 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 
 
 1. Where the following forms are found : eunt, eo, eant, it, Iret, 
 itiirus. 2. The partic. of cSnsolari with the meaning of each. 
 
 3. Formation of pres. and fut. ind. and pres. subjv. in all conjug. 
 
 4. Meaning of tain, quam ; tantus, quantus ; is, qui ; ibi, ubi. 
 
 5. Of copia, copiee ; finis, fines ; castrum, castra. 6. Of res 
 publica, res familiaris, novae res. 7. Of est tanti. 8. Of quaerere, 
 queri. 9. Of praeterita, in reliquum tempus, in praesentia. 
 
 10. Usual position of the verb and all the exceptions thus far learned. 
 
 11. Ut clauses in this lesson. 12. All possible meanings of cum, 
 conj. 
 
LESSON LXIX. 243 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 REVIEW of LESSONS LIV. to LXVIII. inclusive. 
 
 1. TEXT. CAESAR, B. G. I., 15 TO 20 INCLUSIVE. 
 
 Follow implicitly the directions given in LIII. under " Text." 
 
 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
 
 1. Deel. of neuters in -al . . . A. & G. 5 ani- H. 63, ani- 
 
 mal, mal. 
 
 2. Decl. of nouns and adj. with 
 
 stems in -ro and -ero . . A. &G. 38,puer, H. 51, puer, 
 
 ager and N. ager and 2, 
 
 near bottom 1), 4), 5); 
 
 of p. 16; 82. 149, 150. 
 
 3. Decl. of the pres. act. partic. . A. & G. 85, b, H. 157, a- 
 
 iens. mans. 
 
 4. Decl. of adj. in -ns (other than 
 
 pres. partic.) A. & G. 85, a, H. 157, pru- 
 
 egens. dens N. 
 
 5. 3d dec!, adj. in -er . . . . A. & G. 84, acer. H. 153, acer. 
 
 6. Comparison of certain irreg. 
 
 adj A. & G. 90, 91 H. 163, 3 ; 
 
 and a. 165 and N. 
 1, 166. 
 
 7. Comparative meaning too 
 
 rather than more . . . . A. & G. 93, a. H. 444, 1. 
 
 8. Sup. of adj. in -er and of adv. 
 
 formed from them . . . . A. & G. 89, a ; H. 163, 1 ; 
 
 92, misere. 306 and 2. 
 
 9. The cardinals to mllle . . . A. & G. 94. H. 174. 
 
 10. The use of distributives . . . A. & G. 95 and H. 174, 2, 1). 
 
 a. 
 
244 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 11. The possessive adj. pronouns . A. & G. 99, a, H. 185, 449. 
 
 197. 
 
 12. Decl. of the interrogative adj. 
 
 qui A. & G. 104. H. 188, II. 
 
 and 1. 
 
 13. Decl. ofquisque and quisquam A. & G. 105, c, e. If. 190, 2, 1), 
 
 2) and N. 1. 
 
 14. Ipse meaning very . . . . A. & G. 1S5, /, H. 452, 2. 
 
 Rein. 
 
 15. The partic. of dep. verbs . .A. & G. 135 and H. 231, 1; 
 
 a. 232. 
 
 16. Four classes of 3d conjug. verbs A. & G. 124, a, H. 252 and 1, 
 
 I, d, e. 254, 255 
 
 and II. 
 
 17. Conjng. of capere . . . . A. & G. p. 83. H. 217, 218, 
 
 219. 
 
 18. Conjug. of ire A. & G. 141. H. 295, 1, 3. 
 
 19. Conjug. of ferre A. & G. 139. H. 292 and 1, 
 
 ]),2). 
 
 20. Conjug. of odisss . . . . A. & G. 143, b H. 297 and 2. 
 
 and c, x. 
 
 21. Conjng. of ccepisse . . . . A. & G. 143, a. H. 297. 
 
 22. The name of the action in -io, 
 
 -tio, -tus, -or A. &G. 163, a, 6. H. 326 and 1, 
 
 327 and 1. 
 
 23. The name of the quality in -ia, 
 
 -tia, -tas, -tudo . . . . A. & G. 163, e. H. 325 and 1. 
 
 24. The gen. of price A. & G. 214, c, H. 401, 404. 
 
 215, c. 
 
 25. The adj. with the force of a 
 
 gen A. & G. p. 146, H. 393 and 
 
 N., 190. foot-note 3; 
 
 395, N. 2. 
 
 26. T\vo dat, ; the obj. to which 
 
 and the end for which . . A. & G. 233. H.390 and I., 
 
 II. 
 
 27. The dat. with certain verbs of 
 
 taking away A. & G. 229. H. 386, 2; 
 
 385. IF. 2. 
 
LESSON LXTX. 245 
 
 28. Two accus. with verbs of asking 
 
 and teaching . . . . . A. & G. 239, c. H. 374. 
 
 29. The locative case A. & G. 31, /?,. H. 45, 2. 
 
 30. The abl. of price A. & G. 252. H. 422. 
 
 31. The abl. of place without a prep. A. & G. 258, /. H. 425, II. 1, 
 
 1) and 2. 
 
 32. Time before or after . . . . A. & G. 259, d. H. 430 and N. 
 
 1, 2), also 
 foot-note 3. 
 
 33. Difference in meaning of same 
 
 prep, when used with differ- 
 ent cases A. & G. 152 ; c. H. 435 and N. 
 
 1. 
 
 34. Comparatives with quaxn . . A. & G. 203, a; II. 417, 1, 
 
 247, a. 444, 2. 
 
 35. Comparatives without quam . A. &G.247anda. H. 417 and 1. 
 
 36. Collective nouns with the agree- 
 
 ment of plurals . . . . A. & G. 205, c. II. 461, 1. 
 
 37. Const, with verbs of fearing . A. & G. 331, /. H. 498, III. 
 
 and N. 1 , 
 foot-note 4. 
 
 38. The use of qum with the subjv. A. & G. 332, g, H. 501, II. 2 ; 
 
 Bern. 504. 
 
 39. The adv. use of the substantive 
 
 quod clause A. & G. 533, a. H. 516, II. 2, 
 
 N. 
 
 40. Mode and tense used after ubi A. & G. 324. H. 518 and 
 
 N. 1. 
 
 41. Ut omitted after a verb of urg- 
 
 ing , A. & G. 331, /, H. 499, 2. 
 
 Hem. 
 
 42. The historical inf. . . . .A. & G. 275 and H. 536, 1 and 
 
 Hern. N. 
 
 43. The time denoted by participles A. & G. 290. II. 550. 
 
 44. The pf. pass, partic. after habere A. & G. 292, c. H. 388, 1. N. 
 
 45. The use or omission of the conj. A. & G. 208, b. H. 554, I. 6. 
 
 46. The effect of separating words 
 
 naturally connected . . . A. & G. 344, H. 561, III. 
 
 and e. 
 
246 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 3. WORD REVIEW. 
 
 Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Csesar, B. G. I. 
 
 15-20. 
 
 1. VERBS. 
 1st Conjug. (-a verbs). 
 
 accusare consolaii desperare in stare repugnare 
 collocare convocare dubitare jactare sublevare 
 comportare creare flagitare obsecrare vltare 
 condonare deslgnare hortaii orare vocare 
 
 
 2d Conjug. 
 
 (-e verbs). 
 
 
 adliibere 
 
 deterrere 
 
 monere 
 
 retinere 
 
 audere 
 
 favere 
 
 movere 
 
 tacere 
 
 augere 
 coercere 
 
 Here 
 liceii 
 
 perterrere 
 rcmovere 
 
 valere 
 vereri 
 
 
 3d Conjug. 
 
 (-e verbs). 
 
 
 Give the principal parts of these verbs. 
 
 accedere 
 alere 
 animadvertere 
 avertere 
 cadere 
 
 complect! 
 crescere 
 cupere 
 deminiiere 
 destituere 
 
 loqul 
 minuere 
 utibere 
 odisse 
 offendere 
 
 propellere 
 proponere 
 quaerere 
 queil 
 redimere 
 
 ccepisse 
 c5gnoscere 
 colloqui 
 commonefacere 
 
 dimittere 
 em ere 
 insequl 
 lacessere 
 
 petere 
 ponere 
 praemittere 
 prendere 
 
 repreliendere 
 restituere 
 subsistere 
 subvehere 
 
 largiri 
 
 4:th Conjug. (-1 verbs). 
 metiri repeiire scire 
 
 sentire 
 
 Irregular verbs. 
 adesse conferre interesse nolle prseesse praeferre prajterire 
 
LESSON LXIX. 
 
 247 
 
 2. NOUNS HAVING -A STEMS. 
 
 audacia 
 
 lacrima 
 
 pra5sentia 
 
 temperantia 
 
 justitia 
 
 potentia 
 
 rapiria 
 
 vita 
 
 
 3. 
 
 -O STEMS. 
 
 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 
 Cains 
 
 pabulum 
 
 studium 
 
 vergobretus 
 
 concilium 
 
 portor,ium 
 
 supplicium 
 
 vulgus 
 
 nervus 
 
 pretium 
 
 verb u m 
 
 
 Adj. (having also stems in -a). 
 
 ad versus 
 
 egregius 
 
 panel 
 
 seditiosus 
 
 alien us 
 
 fraternus 
 
 posterns 
 
 sen! 
 
 ampins 
 
 improbus 
 
 propinquus 
 
 solus 
 
 animus 
 
 rnaturus 
 
 quantus 
 
 sumrnus 
 
 antiouus 
 
 meus 
 
 quingenti 
 
 tantus 
 
 dexter 
 
 parvus 
 
 qnini 
 
 verus 
 
 4. THIRD DECL. 
 
 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 
 
 Give the gen 
 
 . and gender of each. 
 
 
 adfinitas 
 
 frlgus 
 
 mater 
 
 populatio 
 
 aginen 
 
 honor 
 
 nemo 
 
 potestas 
 
 amor 
 
 liostis 
 
 nex 
 
 prex 
 
 custos 
 
 interpres 
 
 oifensio 
 
 soror 
 
 eques 
 
 liberalitas 
 
 ops 
 
 nxor 
 
 existimatio 
 
 libertas 
 
 pabulatio 
 
 vectlgal 
 
 equester familiaris insciens plus, neut. praesens 
 
 conventus 
 
 5. -U STEMS. 
 equitatus injussu 
 
 sumptus 
 
248 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 6. -E STEMS. 
 pern icies respublica 
 
 7. INDECL. NUMERAL ADJ. 
 quindecira 
 
 >. FKON. 
 
 quisqi 
 
 meus 
 
 
 
 9. PREP. 
 
 
 
 
 contra 
 
 
 
 
 10. ADV. 
 
 
 antea 
 celeriter 
 
 gravitcr 
 illic 
 
 necessario 
 praesertim 
 
 secreto 
 semper 
 
 circiter 
 cotidie 
 rupide 
 demum 
 
 interim 
 largiter 
 llbere 
 modo 
 
 prius 
 prlvatim 
 publice 
 quidera 
 
 separatim 
 sitnul 
 turn 
 
 
 
 11. CONJ. 
 
 
 
 
 quin 
 
 
LESSON LXX. 249 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 GRAMMATICAL REVIEW and INDEX of LESSONS I. to 
 
 LXVin. 
 
 In this Lesson the most important grammatical points discussed in the foregoing 
 Lessons are arranged in the usual order of the grammars. The Lesson may be 
 used both for systematic study and for reference. It has been thought best in 
 giving references to mention only the Notes and Observations ; the pupil should 
 remember, however, that the subject of reference is very often treated under the 
 Grammar Lesson and the Topics of Study in the Lesson referred to. 
 
 The grammatical principles referred to below are always discussed in immediate 
 connection with their application. It is therefore possible and very desirable, in the 
 systematic study of this Lesson, for the pupil to prepare classified sets of examples 
 taken from the text and illustrating the most important principles which he has 
 been studying. The teacher cannot too strongly urge upon his pupils the necessity 
 of associating every principle with a definite, concrete example of its use. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 Eoraan pronunciation, I. IV., au, ce, IX. Obs. 7 ; j, XX. N. 1, 
 Obs. 1 ; accent, I. ; consonant changes, IV. N. 8 (&) ; VII. N. 12 (a), 
 Obs. 4 ; X. Obs. 6 ; XXV. N. 2 ; vowel changes, XXII. N. 3, Obs. 2 ; 
 the mutes, XXV. ; quantity of contracts, XXV. N. 3. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Gender: I. N. 1 (d) Obs. 5, 9; II. N. 4 (e), Obs. 7. 
 
 Declension: there are different decl. II. Ob<*. 8; the stern, VI. N. 
 4, Obs. 8 ; the neut. ending -a, N. 7, Obs. 2 ; classification of nouns 
 by stem endings, XVII. N. 8, Obs. 1; nom. formed by adding -s, 
 XXV. N. 3 (&), Obs. 2. 
 
 -a decl.; -a, -am, -ee nom. plur. II. Obs. 5, 6, 7; -arum, -a, III. ; 
 -as, Is, ubl, V. ; -ae gen. VI. ; all forms, VIII. Obs. 10. 
 
250 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 -o decl. -I nora. plur., -orum, III. ; -is, abl. IV. N. 4, Obs. 3 ; -os, 
 V. ; -um (raasc.), and the iieut. endings, VIII.; XL Obs. 3; masc. 
 nouns declined, XIII. N. 2, Obs. 3, 4. 
 
 3d decl. ; the ending -es, I. N. 6, Obs. 6 ; -is, -ibus, IV.; -en, V. 
 N. 5, Obs. 6;-i-um, -e, VI.; dental stems complete, XIII. N. 11, 
 Obs. 5; -i stems, XIV. N. 1, Obs. 1; nouns in -ns, -rs, and -en, 
 XV. ; nouns in -or, XVI. N. 14, Obs. 8 ; stems in -c and -g, XVIII. 
 N. 2, Obs. 2 ; riom. in -os and -o, neuters with gen. in -uris and 
 -oris, -i stems, XXV. ; decl. of vis, XXX. ; iter, XXXI. N. 3, Obs. 
 2 ; gen. in -eris, XXXIV. N. 4 ; neuters in -al, LX. N. 10. 
 
 -u decl. XXV. N. 3, Obs. 1. 
 
 -g decl. LII, N. 11, Obs. 1. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 First and second decl. XIII. N. 2, Obs. 6; in -is, -e, XIV. N. 1, 
 Obs. 1 ; force of prefix per, XIV. N. 1, Obs. 4, XVIII. N. 3 (b) 
 altera and alia, XV. N. 7, Obs. 5; comp. XVI. N. 5 (c), Obs. 5, 
 XXIII. N. 6, Obs. 3 ; neut. of the comp. XXIX. N. 8; decl. of duo, 
 XXIX. N. 2; adj. with gen. in -lus, dat. in -I, XXXII. N. 7 (b) ; 
 comp. by adv. XXXVIII. N. 5 ; the first ten ordinals, XXXIX. N. 4 ; 
 the abl. ending -i, XL. N. 3, Obs. 1; decl. of vetus, XLVI. ; comp. 
 meaning too, LIV. N. 7 (a) ; the cardinals to mUle and use of dis- 
 tributives, LV. N. 10 (d), (e), Obs. 1; irreg. comp. LVIII. N. 4 (c) 
 decl. and comp. of adj. in -er, LX. N. 1, 3, Obs. 1 ; LXIII. N. 2 ; 
 adj. in -ns, LXIV. N. 5. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Decl. of is and quT, XXI. N. 2, 5, Obs. 1, 2 ; of ille and ipse, 
 XXII. N. 4; the indefinite quis, XXXIII. N. 9, Obs. 2; decl. of 
 idem, XLT. N. 1 ; decl. of hie, LII. N. 1 (b\ Obs. 2 ; decl. of ego 
 and vos, LII. N. 8 (c) ; the interrogntive adj. pron. qui, LIV. N. 
 6 (d) ; quisque and quisquam, LXV. N. 4 ; the possessive adj. 
 pron. LXVII. N. 1 (d). 
 
LESSON LXX. 251 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 In general: the pers. ending -t, I. N. 2 (b) ; -nt, II. N. 2 (c), 
 Obs. ; -ntur, III. N. 8, Obs. 5 ; the stem VI. N. 4, Obs. 8; pres. 
 ind. VII. N. 11, Obs. 3 ; all 3d pers. endings, X. N. 10 (c), Obs. 5 ; 
 ending of pres. inf. XIV. N. 8, Obs. 7; sign of the inipf. ind. and 
 subjv. XVI. N. 3 (b), Obs. 1; dep. verbs XVII. N. 5 (b), Obs. 4; 
 characteristics of the four conjug. XVIII. N. 11 ; Obs. 5, 6, 7, 8 ; the 
 gerundive, XIX. N. 5, Obs. 2 ; plpf. ind. act. and pass. XX. N. 3, 4, 
 Obs. 3 ; the supine stern, XXI. N. 3 (a) ; fut. act. and pf. pass, partic. 
 XXII. N. 5, Obs. 1 ; supine in -u, XXII. N. 1 ; the three stems, how 
 found, XXIV. N. 5, Obs. 1, 2; impers. verbs, XXIV. N. 3 ; plpf. 
 subjv. pass. XXXI. N. 2 ; the pf. ind. and pf. inf. pass. XXXIII. 
 N. 2 (a) ; sign of the pres. subjv. XXXVII. N. 4, Obs. 2 ; the sign of 
 the pf. subjv. act. XL. N. 7 (a), Obs. 3; pf. inf. act. XLIII. N. 5, 
 Obs. 1 ; the plpf. subjv. act., the stems of all conjug., the principal 
 parts, XLIV. ; tense signs of the fut. and fut. pf. ind.XLVI. N. 1 (c), 
 N. 3 '(?), N. 5 (d) ; tenses of the ind. and subjv. XL VI. Obs. 3; 
 summary of reg. verb forms, XLVIII. ; the pers. endings of the act. 
 L. ; pers. endings of the pass. LI. ; partic. of dep. verbs, time denoted 
 by pres. partic. and decl. of pres. partic. LX. ; the verb stem, LXVI. 
 N. 8, Obs. 1, 3. 
 
 First conjug. : pf. stem, XXVIII. N. 6, Obs. 2 ; loss of -v from 
 pf. stem, XXVIII. N. 6 (a). 
 
 Second conjug. : pf. stem, XX. N. 3 (a), Obs. 2 ; the supine stem, 
 XXXV. N. 3 (), Obs. 2. 
 
 Third conjug. : how to find stems, XXIV. N. 5, Obs. 3, 4 ; pres. 
 inf. pass. XXX 1. N. 11, Obs. 6 ; conjug. of capere, LIV. N. 6 (c), 
 Obs. 2 ; -see in 3d conjug. LXVI. N. 8, Obs. 2 ; verbs in which 
 the verb stem and pf. stem are alike, and four classes of 3d conjug. 
 verbs, LXVII. N. 6. 
 
 Irregular: formation and conjug. of posse, XXIII". \. 8; pf. of 
 compounds of Ire, XLTII. N. 7, Obs. 2; conjug. of esse, XLVI. ; 
 complete conjug. of velle, LI. N. 6 (c) ; of esse and posse, LIL; 
 of ccepit, LV.V. 6; of ferre, LVI. N. 7 ; of odit, LXII. N. 2 ; of 
 Ire, LVI 1 1. N. 9 (b), Obs. 1. 
 
252 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 PARTICLES (/. e. adv., conj., prep.). 
 
 The adv. ending e-, YL N. 11 (a), Obs. 2; sup. of the adv. Vf. 
 \. 11, Obs. 3 ; force of ob and con in composition, X. ; difference in 
 meaning of a or ab and ex, XV. N. 1, Obs. 1 ; comp. of adv. XV L N. 
 5, Obs. 5. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Formation of adv. in e- and -ter, LYIF. x. 10, Obs. 1. 
 The name of the quality in -ia, -tia, -tas, -tudo, LX. N. 8. 
 The endings of adj., and the name of the action, LXYLI. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Agreement: two sing. subj. with sing, verb, Y. N. 8 (b), Obs. 4; 
 appositive, Y. N. 5 (b) ; X. N. 9 (b), Obs. 1 ; pred. noun or adj. XX. 
 N. 4 (d). 
 
 Norn.: as subj. II. N. 2 (/), Obs. 3, 5. 
 
 Accus.: as Obj. II. N. 2 (/), 5 (c), Obs. 4, 6; with in and 
 inter, IY. N. 7, Obs. 1 ; extent of space, XVII. N. 7 (b), Obs. 7 ; 
 duration of time, XX. N. 3 (b} domum XXVII. N. 6 (b) ; two 
 accus. after compound verbs, XLIII. N. 5 (b) ; two accus. with verbs 
 of asking and teaching, LVI. N. 1 (b) ; substantive quod clause as 
 adv. accus. LIX. N. 6. 
 
 Gen. : in general, and also possessive and partitive, VI. ; words 
 used with partitive gen. XVII. N. 8 (b), Obs. 8; with potiri, XXIII. 
 N. 7 ; of quality, XXXIV. N. 2 (b) ; with special verbs, L. N. 6 (e) ; 
 the adj. with force of gen. LXIV. N. 4 (e) ; gen. not always translated 
 of, LXV. N. 5 (b}, Obs. 1 ; of price, LXVIII. N. 4 (b). 
 
 Dat.: indir. obj. VIII. N. 2, Obs. 1 ; with compounds, XIX. N. 
 12 (c), Obs. 3 ; with adj. XX [. N. 3 (b) ; with verbs of giving and 
 saying, XXII. N. 2 (b), Obs. 3; of possessor, XXXII. N. 4 (b) of 
 the agent, XLI. x. 7 (b) ; with certain verbs of taking away, LIX. N. 
 
LESSON LXX. 253 
 
 3 (e) ; the dat. where the accus. might be expected, LXII. N. 1, Obs. 
 1 ; two dat. LXIII. N. 7. 
 
 All. : in general and of respect, IV.; with a or ab, V. ; of separa- 
 tion, IX. N. 15, Obs. 2 ; with in, IX. N. 18, Obs. 3 ; of means, X. N. 
 11, Obs. 2 ; absolute, XIII. N. 5, Obs. 1 ; of cause, XVI. N. 2 (c), 
 Obs. 9 ; prep, with, XVII. N. 1, Obs. 5 ; of agent, XX. N. 4 (c) ; of 
 time, XXI. N. 2 ; translation of abl. absolute, XXIII. N. 5 ; abl. of 
 degree of difference, XXVII. N. 1 ; place from which, and domo, 
 XXVIIL N.I (b) abl. with special verbs, XXVIII. N. 2; prep, 
 omitted with loco and locis, XXIX. N. 9 ; abl. of quality, XXX. 
 N. 2, Obs. 1 ; of manner, XLIII. N. 1 ; of place without a prep. LV. 
 N. 4 ; after comp. without quam, LV. N. 10 (c) ; of price, LX. N. 
 11 (b) ; time before or after, LXIII. N. 3. 
 
 The locative case, LXI. N. 4. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Agreement, VI. N. 2, Obs. 7 ; used snbstantively, XXIX. N. 6 
 (b) ; with force of gen. IX. N. 5 (5), LXIV. N. 4 (c). 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Agreement, VII. N. 3, Obs. 6 ; rel. translated like demonstrative, 
 IX. N. 1 (d), Obs. 1 ; suus and e6rum IX. N. 19, Obs. 9 ; use of 
 demonstrative as pers. pron. XIA r . N. 9, 12, Obs. 8 ; use of reflexives, 
 XIX. N. 12 (d), Obs. 4 ; rel. agreeing with repeated antec. XXIX. 
 N. 3 (c) ; pers. pron. often omitted, XL. N. 4 (c) (d) ; change of pers. 
 pron. in indir. disc. XLVI. ; use of the rel. quod as an adv. acrus. 
 L. N. 5 ; meaning and use of hie, ille, is, ipse, LI I. N. 1 (a), LX. 
 N. 7. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Tenses, use of, LXVII. N. 4 (b), Obs. 2 ; agreement, VII. N. 6 (a) 
 omission of esse, XXIII. N. 3 (a), Obs. 1; substantive clauses, 
 XXIV. N. 3 (b). 
 
 Ind. : force of the pf. XIII. N. 3, Obs. 8 ; force of the impf. XVI. ; 
 pres. in narrative, XXXI. x. 10 ; used after ubi, LVII. N. 1 (a). 
 
254 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 Subjv.: of purpose, XVIIL N. 13 (d), Obs. 10; obj. clause of 
 purpose, XX. 'x. 5 ; neg. purpose, XXV. N. 1 ; translation of purpose 
 clause, XXVJII. N. 4, Obs. 4 ; subjv. of result, XXIX. N. 6 ; purpose 
 clauses introduced by a rd. XXX. N. 5 ; the subordinate clause 
 of iridir. disc. XXXII. N. 6 ; dum clauses of purpose, XXXIII. N. 
 7 ; subjv. of purpose after qu6, XXXIV. N. 5 (b) ; substantive clause 
 of result, XXXVIII. N. 6 ; cum causal, XL. N. 2 (b) ; indir. question, 
 XL1II. N. 2 (c) ; cum temporal in Caesar, XLIV. N. 5 ; fut. time in 
 the subjv. XLVI. ; tenses of the subordinate clauses in indir. disc. 
 XLVII. ; cum concessive, LII. N. 2, Obs. 3; subjv. with quin, LIX. 
 N. 3 (a) ; with verbs of fearing-, LXV. N. 3, Obs. 2 ; ut omitted after 
 a verb of urging, LXVIII. N. 3. 
 
 Inf. : after a verb of saying, XIV. N. 2, Obs. 9 ; the subj. of the 
 inf., XVII. N. 3, Obs. 6 ; complementary inf., XVIIL N. 8, Obs. 11 ; 
 inf. with jubere, XX VII I. x. 1 ; subj. of inf. in indir. disc, regularly 
 expressed, XL. N. 4 (d) ; translation of pres. inf. after past tense of 
 debere ; tense of inf. in indir. disc. XLIX. N. 5, 8, Obs. 2 ; the his- 
 torical inf. LVI. N. 1 (a). 
 
 Gerunds, Supines, and Partic. : force of the partic. XIII. N. 
 7, Obs. 7 ; of the gerund, XVI. N. 12, Obs. 6 ; best translation of 
 partic. XXVI II. N. 3, 7 ; gerundive meaning ought or must, XXXIII. 
 N. 3 (b) ; the supine in -um, XL. N. 2 (a) ; gerundive after curare, 
 XLV. N. 3 ; gerundive expressing purpose, LXI. N. 1 (e). 
 
 PARTICLES (i. e. adv., conj., and prep.). 
 
 Et, -que. atque, VII. N. 1, Obs. 1 ; ut introduces both ind. and 
 subjv. XXV. x. 6, Obs. 4 ; quam with the sup. XXXI. N. 5, Obs. 3 ; 
 meaning of ad with names of towns, XXXI. N. 6 ; force of num in 
 asking a question, L. N. 9 (b) ; the comp. of the adv. sometimes 
 means too, LIV. N. 7 (CL) ; difference in meaning of same prep, when 
 used with different cases, LVIT. N. 9 ; comparative with quam, LVIII. 
 N. 4 (a) ; use or omission of the conj. LXV. N. 2 (d ). 
 
 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 
 
 Position: of verb, VIT. x. 12 (c), Obs. 8; of monosyllabic prep. 
 XV. N. 7 (e), Obs. 6 ; of adj. XXIV. N. 1 (b), Obs. 6 ; grouping of 
 
LESSON LXX. 255 
 
 words, XXIV. N. 4, Obs. 4 ; effect of position at beginning of a sen- 
 tence, XXX. N. 1 ; effect of placing subj. at the end of a sentence, 
 XXXI. N. 9; change of order for emphasis, XXXII. N. 7 (a); the 
 unemphatic order, XXXIII. N. 3 (a) ; the order of the modifiers of 
 the verb, XXXIV. N. 3 (b) ; position of word closely connected with 
 the preceding or following clause, XXXVI. N. 2 (b) ; position of 
 eiiim, autem, quoque, LI. N. 4 (/) ; the rel. before the principal 
 clause, LI. N. 6 (6) : the effect of separating words naturally con- 
 nected, LX1II. N. 1 (a) ; position of the indefinite quis, LXVI. N. 4 
 (b), Obs. 4 ; position of obj. clauses of purpose, clauses of result, and 
 quoted clauses, LXVIII. N. 10, Obs. 2. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 Variation of meaning with context, XXX. N. 4, Obs. 2. 
 Koman way of reckoning time, XXX. N. 6, Obs. 2. 
 Four ways of expressing purpose, LX. N. 1, 6, Obs. 1. 
 
256 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 THE HELVETIAN WAR. 
 
 B. G. I. 1-29. 
 
 NOTE. The numbers within parentheses indicate the Lessons in which 
 the following text is treated. 
 
 The divisions of Gaul. 
 
 1. (1) Gulliu est omnis divisa in partes tres ; (2) qunrum imam 
 iucolunt Belgce, aliam Aquitani, (3) tertiam qui ipsorum lingua 
 Celtje, nostra Galli appellantur. (4) Hi omiies lingua, institutis, 
 legibus inter se differunt. (5) Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna 
 
 5 flumen, a Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit. (6) Horinn omnium 
 fortissimi sunt Belgae, proptcrea quod a cultu atque humanitate 
 provincial longissime absunt, (7) minimeque ad eos mercatores 
 saepe com meant, atque ea quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent 
 important ; (8) proximique sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum in- 
 
 10 colunt, quibuscum continenter bellum gernnt. (9) Qua de causa 
 Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere quo- 
 tidianis proeliis cum Germanis contendunt, cum aut suis finibus 
 eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. (10) Eorum 
 una pars, quam Gallos obtinere dictum est, initium capit a flumine 
 
 15 Rhodano ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; 
 attingit etiam ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum ; vergit ad 
 septentriones. (1-1) Belgne ab extremis Gallise finibus oriuntur, 
 pertinent ad inferiorem partem fluminis Rheni, spectant in septen- 
 trionem et orientem solem. Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad 
 
 20 Pyreuaeos montes et earn partem Oceani quae est ad Hispaniam 
 pertinet, spectat inter occasum sol is et septentriones. 
 
 Orgetorix, a Helvetian noble, forms a plot to seize the government in 
 Gaul. The warlike Helcetii prepare to leave their narrow boun- 
 daries in a body. 
 
 2. (13) Apud Helvetios longe uobilissimus fuit et ditissimus 
 Orgetorix. Is, M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, regni cupidi- 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 257 
 
 tate inductus, conjurationem nobilitatis fecit, et civitati persuasit ut 
 de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis exirent ; (14) perfacilc esse, 
 cum virtute omnibus prrestarent, totius Gallise imperio potiri. Id 
 hoc facilius eis persuasit, quod undique loci iiatura Hclvetii con- 
 tiuentur : (15) una ex parte fluraine llheno latissimo atque altis- 5 
 simo, qui agrum Helvetium a Gerrnanis dividit; altera ex parte 
 monte Jura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios ; tertia 
 lacu Lemaimo et flumine Bhodaiio, qui provinciam nostram ab Hel- 
 vetiis dividit. (16) His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarcntur, 
 et minus facile h'nitimis bellum inferre pqssent | qua ex parte 10 
 homines bellandi cupidi magno dolore adticiebantur. (17) Pro 
 multitudine autem hominum, et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, 
 angustos se fines habere arbitrabantnr, qui in longitudinem milia 
 passuum CCXL, in latitudinem CLXXX patebant. 
 
 3. (18) His rebus adducti, et auctoritatc Orgetorigis permoti, 15 
 constituerunt ea quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent comparare, 
 jumentorum et carrorum quam maximum numerum coemere, sc- 
 mentes quam mnximas faeere, ut in itinere copia frumenti suppe- 
 teret, (19) cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare. 
 Ad eas res conficiendas bienniuin sibi satis esse duxerunt, in 20 
 tertium annum prefectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res con- 
 ficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civitates sus- 
 cepit. (20) In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Catamantaloedis filio, 
 Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis inultos anr.os obtinuerat, 
 et a senatu populi Eomaiii amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in 25 
 civitate sua occuparet, quod pater ante habuerai ; (21) itemque 
 Dumnorigi Hseduo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tempore principatum in ,, 
 civitate obtjnebat ac maxime plebi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur / 
 persuadet, eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. (22) PerFacile 
 factu csse ill is probat conata perfieere, propterea quod ipse sure 30 
 civitatis imperium obtenturus esset : non esse dubium, quin totius 
 Gallise plurimum Helvetii possent ; (23) se suis copiis suoque 
 exercitu illis regna conciliaturum confirmat. Hac oratione adducti, 
 inter se fidem et jusjurandum dant, et, regno oeeupato, per tres po- 
 tentissimos ac firmissimos populos totius Gallise sese potiri posse 35 
 sperant. 
 
 17 
 
258 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 The plot of Orgetorix discovered ; his sudden death. 
 
 4. (24) Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Moribus 
 suis Orgetorigein ex vinclis causam dicere coegerunt. Damriatum 
 poenam sequi oportebat, ut igni cremaretur. Die constituta causse 
 dictiouis, Orgetorix ad judicium omnem suam familiam, ad kominum 
 
 5 milia decem, undique coegit, et omnes clientes obseratosque suos, 
 quorum magnum numerum habebat, eodem conduxit ; (25) per 
 eos, ne causam diceret, se eripuit. Cum civitasob earn reni incitata 
 armis jus suum exsequi conaretur, multitudinemque hominum ex 
 agris magistratus cogerent, Orgetorix mortuus est; neque abest 
 10 suspitio, ut Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse sibi mortem consciverit. 
 
 The Helvetii continue their preparations ; they gain allies. 
 
 5. (27) Post ejus mortem, uihilo minus Helvetii id quod con- 
 stituerant facere couantur, ut e finibus suis exeant. Ubi jam se ad 
 earn rein paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia uuinero ad 
 duodecim, vicos ad quadringentos, reliqua privata sedificiaincendunt ; 
 
 15 frumentuin omne, prseterquam quod serum portaturi erant, com- 
 burunt, ut domum reditionis spe sublata paratiores ad omnia 
 pericula subeunda essent ; (28) triura mensium molita cibaria sibi 
 quemque domo efferre jubent. Persuadent Kauracis et Tulingis et 
 Latobrigis finitimis, uti, eodem usi consilio, oppidis suis vicisque 
 
 20 exustis, una cum iis proficiscantur ; Boiosque, qui trans Ehenum 
 incoluerant, et in agrum Noricum transierant Noreiamque oppug- 
 narant, receptos ad se socios sibi adsciscunt. 
 
 The Helvetii plan to cross the Roman Province. Ctesar suddenly 
 appears and keeps them out. 
 
 6. (29) Erant omnino itinera duo, quibus itineribus domo exire 
 possent : unum per Sequanos, angustum et difficile, inter montein 
 
 25 Juram et flumen Rhodanum, vix qua singuli carri ducerentur; 
 mons autem altissimus iinpendebat, ut facile perpauci prohibere 
 possent : alterum per provinciam nostram, multo facilius atque ex- 
 peditius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allobrogum, qui 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 259 
 
 iiuper pacati erant, Ehodanus fluit, isque nonnullis locis vado tran- 
 situr. (30) Extremurn oppidura Allobrogum est, proximumque 
 Helvetiorum finibus, Genua. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios per- 
 tinet. Allobrogibus sese vel persuasuros (quod nondum bono 
 animo in populura Romanum viderentur) existimabant, vel vi co- 5 
 acturos, ut per suos fines eos ire paterentur. Omnibus rebus ad 
 profeetionem comparatis, diem dicunt, qua die ad ripam Rliodani 
 o nines conveniant. Is dies erat a. d. v. Kal. Apr., L. Pisorie A. 
 Gabinio consulibus. 
 
 7. (31) Caesari cum id nuntiatum esset, eos per provinciam 10 
 nostram iter facere conari, maturat ab uvbe proficisci, et quam maxi- 
 mis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem contendit, et ad Genuam 
 pervenit. Provincias toti quam maximum potest militum numerum 
 imperat erat omnino in Gallia nlteriore legio una ; pontem. qui 
 erat ad Genuam, jubet rescind!. (32) Ubi de ejus adventu Helvetii 15 
 certiores facti snnt, legatos ad eum inittunt, nobilissimos civitatis, 
 cujus legationis Nammeius et Verudoctius principem locum obtine- 
 bant, qui dicerent ' sibi esse in animo sine ullo maleficio iter per pro- 
 vinciam facere, propterea quod aliud iter haberent riullum : rogare, 
 ut ejus voluntate id sibi facere liceat.' (33) Caesar, quod memoria 20 
 tenebat L. Cassium consulem occisum, exercitumque ejus ab Hel- 
 vetiis pulsum et sub jugura missum, concedendum non putabat ; 
 neque homines inimico auimo, data facilitate per provinciam itineris 
 faciundi, temperaturos ab iujuria et maleficio existimabat. Tamen, 
 ut spatium intercedere posset, dum milites quos imperaverat con- 25 
 venirent, legatis respondit diem se ad deliberandum sumpturum ; si 
 quid vellent, ad Id. Apr. reverterentur. 
 
 8. (34) Interea ea legione, quam secum habebat, militibusque 
 qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacu Lemanno, qui in numen Eho- 
 danum influit, ad montem Jnram, qui fines Sequanorum ab Hel- 30 
 vetiis dividit, milia passuum decem novem, murum in altitudinem 
 pedum sedecim, fossamque perducit. Eo opere perfecto, praesidia 
 disponit, castella commmiit, quo facilius, si se invito transire cona- 
 rentur, prohibere possit. (35) Ubi ea dies quam constituerat cum 
 legatis venit, et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat se more et exemplo 35 
 populi Romani posse iter ulli per provinciam dare ; et, si vim facere 
 conentur, prohibiturum ostendit. Helvetii, ea spe dejecti, navibus 
 junetis ratibusque compluribus factis, alii vadis Ehodani, qua 
 
260 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 minima altitudo flumiuis erat, nonnunquam interdiu, saepius noctu, 
 si perrumpere possent conati, operis niunitione et militum concursu 
 et telis repulsi, hoc conatu destiterunt. 
 
 The Helvetii obtain, permission to go out by the only remaining way, 
 that through the country of the Sequani. 
 
 9, (36) Relinquebatur una per Sequanos via, qua, Sequanis iuvitis, 
 5 propter angustias ire non poterant. His cam sua sponte per- 
 
 suadere non possent, legates ad Dumnorigera Haeduum mittuut, ut 
 eo deprecatore a Sequanis iuipetrareut. Dumnorix gratia et largi- 
 tione apud Sequanos plurimuin poterat, et Helvetiis erat amicus, 
 quod ex ea civitate Orgetorigis filiam in inatrimouiuui duxerat; et 
 
 10 cupiditate regrii adductus novis rebus studebat, et qiiam plurimas 
 civitates suo beneficio habere obstrietas volebat. (37) Itaque rem 
 suscipit, et a Sequanis impetrat ut per tines suos Helvetios ire 
 patiantur, obsidesque uti inter sese dent perficit : Sequani, ne 
 itinere Helvetios prohibeant ; Helvetii, ut sine maleficio et injuria 
 
 15 trail scant. 
 
 Cccsar again objects, and quickly brings up his legions. 
 
 10. Oaesari renuntiatur Helvetiis esse in animo per agruni Se- 
 quunorum et Hieduorum iter in Santonum fines facere, qni non longe 
 a Tolosatium finibus absunt, quse civitas est in Provincia. (38) Id 
 si tieret, iutellegebat mag-no cum periculo provinciae futurum, ut 
 
 20 homines bellicosos, populi Romaui inimicos, locis patentibus maxi- 
 meque frumentariis finitimos haberet. Ob eas causas, ei munition! 
 quain fecerat T. Labienum legatum praefecit ; ipse in Italiam 
 magnis itineribus contend it, duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et tres, 
 quue circum Aquileiam liiemabant, ex hibernis educit, et, qua proxi- 
 
 25 mum iter in ulteriorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum his quinque 
 legionibus ire contendit. (39) Ibi Centrones et Graioceli et 
 Caturig-es, locis superioribus occupatis, iti-nere exercitum prohibere 
 conantur. Compluribus his pra^liis pulsis, ab Ocelo, quod est 
 citerioris provincise extremum, in fines Vocontiorum ulterioris 
 
 30 provincijfi die septimo pervenit ; inde in Allobrogura fines, ab 
 Allobrogibus in Segusiavos exercitum ducit. Hi sunt extra pro- 
 viuciam trans Rhodanum priini. 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 261 
 
 Ccesar aroused by the entreaties of Roman allies, whose fields are being 
 ravaged, at once attacks and defeats a fourth part of the llelcetii. 
 
 11. Helvetii jam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas copias 
 trail uxerant, et in Haeduoruni fines pervenerant, eorumque agros 
 populabantur. (40) Hawlui, cum se suaque ab iis defendere non 
 possent, legatos ad Caesarem inittuiit rogatum auxiliuin : ' Ita se 
 otimi teinpore de populo Romano meritos esse, ut pserie in conspectu 5 
 exercitus nostri agri vastari, liberi eorura in servitutem abduci, 
 oppida expugnari non debuerint.' (41) Eodem teinpore Hsedui 
 Awbarri, necessarii et consanguine! Hseduorum, Ca j sarem certiorem 
 faciunt, sese, depopulatis agris, non facile ab oppidis vim hostium 
 prohibere. Item Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanuin vicos possessio- 10 
 nesque habebant, fuga se ad Csesarem recipinnt, et demonstrant sibi 
 prseter agri sol tun nibil esse reliqui. Quibus rebus adductus, 
 Caesar non exspectandura sibi statuit, dum, omnibus fortunis 
 sociorum consurnptis, in Santonos Helvetii pervenirent. 
 
 12. (43) Flumen est Arar, quod per fines Hpeduorum et Scqua- 15 
 uorum in Ehodanum influit, incredibili lenitate, ita ut oculis, in 
 utram partem fluat, judicari non possit. Id Helvetii ratibns ac 
 lintribus junctis transibant. Ubi per exploratores Csesar certior 
 factus est, tres jam partes copiarum Helvetios id flumen traduxisse, 
 quartam fere partem citra fiumen Ararim reliquam esse ; de tertia 20 
 vigilia cum legionibus tribus e castris profectus, ad earn partem 
 pervenit, qu83 nondum flumen transierat. (44) Eos impeditos et 
 inopinantes adgressus, magnam partem eorum concidit : reliqui sese 
 fugse mandarunt, atque in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Is pagus 
 appellabatur Tigurinus : nam ornnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor 25 
 pagos divisa est. Hie pagus unus, cum domo exisset, patrum nos- 
 trorum mernoria L. Cassium consulem interfecerat, et ejus exercitum 
 sub jugum miserat. Ita sive casu, sive consilio cl eorura immortalinm, 
 quse pars civitatis Helvetia; insignem calamitatem populo Romano 
 intulerat, ea princeps pcenas persolvit. (45) Qua in re Cpesar non 30 
 solum pnblicas, sed etiam privatas injurias ultus est ; quod ejus 
 soceri L. Pisonis avurn, L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurini eodem prcelio 
 quo Cassium interfecerant. 
 
262 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 The Helvetii proudly ask for peace, but refuse to accept the, terms of Ccesar. 
 
 13. Hoc prcelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetiorurn ut consequi 
 posset, pontein in Arare faciendum curat, atque ita exercitum tradu- 
 cit. Helvetii, reperitino ejus adventu conmioti, cum id quod ipsi 
 diebus xx aegerrume confecerant, ut flumen transirent, ilium uno 
 
 5 die fecisse intellegerent, legatos ad cum mittunt ; cujus legationis 
 Divico princeps fuit, qui hello Cassiano dux Helvetiorum fuerat. 
 (46) Is ita cum Caesare egit : ' Si pacem populus Romanus cum 
 Helvetiis faceret, in earn partem ituros atque ibi futures Helvetios, 
 ubi eos Caesar constituisst't atque esse voluisset ; sin bello persequi 
 
 10 perseveraret, reminisceretur et veteris incomniodi populi Romani, et 
 pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. (47) Quod improvise) unuin pagum 
 adortus esset, cum ii, qui tinmen transissent, suis auxilium ferre 
 non possent, ne ob earn rein aut sure magnopere virtuti tribueret, 
 aut ipsos despiceret ; se ita a patribus inajoribnsque suis didicisse. 
 
 15 ut magis virtute qnam dolo contendcrent, aut insidiis niterentur, 
 (48) Quare ne committeret, ut is locus, ubi constitissent, ex calami- 
 tate populi Romani et iriternecione exercitus nomen caperet, aul 
 memoriam proderet.' 
 
 14. (49) His Caesar ita respondit : ' Eo sibi minus dubitationis 
 20 dari, quod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemorassent, memoria 
 
 teneret, atque eo gravius ferre, quo minus merito populi Roman? 
 accidissent : qui si alicnjus injurise sibi conscius fuisset, non fuisse 
 difficile cavere ; (50) sed eo deceptum, quod neque commissum a 
 se intellegeret quare timeret, neque sine causa timendum putaret, 
 
 25 Quod si veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet, uum etiam recentium 
 injuriarum, quod eo invito iter per provinciam per vim temptassent, 
 quod Haeduos, quod Ambarros, quod Allobrogas vexassent, me- 
 moriam deponere posse? (51) Quod sua victoria tarn insolenter 
 gloriarentur, quodque tarn diu se impune injurias tulisse admira- 
 
 30 rentur, eodem pertinere. Consuesse enim deos immortales, quo 
 gravius homines ex commutatione rerum doleant, qnos pro scelere 
 eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores interdum res et diuturniorem 
 impunitatem concedere. (52) Cum ea ita sint, tamen si obsides 
 ab iis sibi dentur, uti ea qune polliceantur facturos intellegat, et si 
 
 35 Haeduis de injuriis quas ipsis sociisque eorum intulerint. item si 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAK. 263 
 
 Allobrogibus satisfaciant, scse cum iis pacem esse facturum.' Divico 
 respondit : ' Ita Helvt'tios a majoribus suis institutes essc, uti ob- 
 sides accipere, 11011 dare consuerint ; ejus rei populum Romanum 
 esse testem.' Hoc response dato, discessit. 
 
 Caesar continues to pursue the Heloetii, who are elated by a successful 
 skirmish. 
 
 15. (54) Postero die castra ex eo loco raovent. Idem facit 5 
 Caesar, equitatumque omnein, ad numerum quattuor milium, quem 
 ex omni proviiicia et Haeduis atque eorum sociis coactutn habebat, 
 pneraittit, qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant. Qui, cupi- 
 dius iiovissiiiiuui agmen insecuti, alieno loco cum cquitatu Helve- 
 tioruin proalium committuiit ; et pauci de nostris cadunt. (55) Quo 10 
 proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingeiitis equitibus tantam multi- 
 tudiriem equitum propulerant, audacius subsistere nonnunquam, et 
 novissimo agmine proelio nostros lacessere coeperuut. Caesar suos 
 
 a proelio continebat, ac satis liabebat in prsesentia bostem rapinis, 
 pabulationibus, populationibusque prohibere. Ita dies circiter quin- 15 
 decim iter fecerunt, uti inter novissimum liostium agmen et nostrum 
 primurn non amplius quinis aut senis milibus passuum interesset. 
 
 The Hadui fail to furnish supplies ; Liscus tells why, 
 
 16. (56) Interim cotidie Caesar Hreduos frumentum, quod essent 
 publice polliciti. flagitare. Nam propter frigora, quod Gallia sub 
 septentrionibus (ut ante dictum est) posita est, non modo frumenta 20 
 in agris matura non erant, sed ne pabuli quidem satis magna copia 
 suppetebat : eo autem frumento, quod fhimine A rare navibus sub- 
 vexerat, propterea minus uti poterat, quod iter ab A rare Helvetii 
 averterant, a quibus discedere nolebat. Diem ex die ducere Hsedui : 
 conferri, comportari, adesse, dicere. (57) Ubi se diutius duci 25 
 intellexit, et diem instare, quo die frumentum militibus metiri 
 oporteret, convocatis eorum principibus, quorum magnam copiam 
 in castris habebat, in his Divitiaco et Lisco, qui summo magis- 
 tratui praeerat quem vergobretum appellant Haedui, qui creatur 
 annuus, et vitaa necisque in suos habet potestatem, graviter eos 30 
 accusat, quod, cum neque emi neque ex agris sumi posset, tarn 
 
264 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 necessario terapore, tarn propinquis hostibus, ab iis 11011 sublevetur ; 
 prsesertim cum inagua ex parte eorum precibus adductus bellum 
 susceperit, multo etiam gravius quod sit destitutus queritur. 
 
 17. (58) Turn demum Liscus, oratioue Csesaris adductus, quod 
 5 antea tacuerat proponit : ' Esse iioiuiullos, quorum auctoritas apud 
 
 plebem plurimum valeat, qui privatim plus possint quam ipsi 
 magistratus. Hos seditiosa atque improba oratioue iimltitudinem 
 deterrere, ne fruinentum couferaut, quod prsestare debeaiit : si jam 
 priucipatum Gulliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Rorna- 
 
 10 uorum imperia prneterre ; (59) ueque dubitare [debeant] quin, si Hel- 
 vetios superaveriut Romani, uua cum reliqua Gallia Hseduis liberta- 
 tem siiit erepturi. Ab eisdcin uostra consilia, quzeque in castris 
 gerantur, hostibus enuntiuri ; hos a se coerceri non posse. Quiu 
 etiam, quod necessario rein coactus Caesari euuntiarit, intellegere 
 
 15 sese quanto id cum periculo fecerit, ct ob earn causam, quam diu 
 potuerit, tacuisse.' 
 
 Dumnorix, the Hfsduan noble; his influence and his hate of the Romans. 
 
 18. (60) Caesar hac oratioue Lisci Pumnorigem, Pivitiaci fra- 
 trem, designari seutiubat ; sed, quod pluribus prsesentibus eas res 
 jactari nolebat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet. Quaerit 
 
 20 ex solo ea qure in conventu dixerat. Dicit liberius atque audacius. 
 Eadem secreto ab aliis quaerit ; reperit csse vera : ' Ipsum esse 
 Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magua apud plebem propter liberali- 
 tatem gratia, cupidum rerurn novarura. Complures annos portoria 
 reliquaque oinnia Haed uorum vectigalia parvo pretio redempta 
 
 25 habere, propterea quod illo licente contra liceri audeat nemo. 
 (61) His rebus et suam rein familiarcm auxisse, et facilitates ad 
 largiendum inagnas comparasse; magnum numerum equitatus suo 
 sumptu semper alere et circum se habere, ueqne sohmi dorai, sed 
 etiam apud finitimas civitates largiter posse ; atque hujus potentiae 
 
 30 causa matrem in Biturigibus hornini illic nobilissimoac potentissimo 
 collocasse, ipsum ex Helvetiis uxorem habere, sororem ex matre et 
 propinquas suas nuptum in alias civitates collocasse. (62) Favere 
 et cupere Helvetiis propter earn adfinitatem, odisse etiam suo nomine 
 Caesarem et Romanes, quod eorum adventu potentia eju^ deminuta, 
 
 35 et Divitiacus frater in antiquum locum gratiae atque honoris sit 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 266 
 
 restitutus. Si quid accidat Romania, suramam in spem per Helvetios 
 regni obtinendi venire ; iinperio populi Romani 11011 inodo de regno, 
 sed etiam de ea quaiu liabeat gratia, desperare.' (63) Reperiebat 
 etiam in quserendo Csesar, quod proeliuui equestre adversum paucis 
 ante diebus esset factum, initium ejus i'ugae factum a Dumnorige 5 
 atque ejus equitibus, nam equitatui, quern auxilio Csesari Haedui 
 miserant, Duinnorix prseerat : eorum fuga reliquum esse equitatum 
 perterritum. 
 
 Ccesar spares Dumnorix out of friendship for his brother Diviliacus, 
 Dumnorix is reprimanded and icatched. 
 
 19. (64) Quibus rebus cognitis, cum ad has suspitiones certis- 
 simse res accederent, quod per fines Sequanorum Helvetios tra- 10 
 duxisset, quod obsides inter eos dandos curasset, quod ea omriia non 
 inodo injussu suo et civitatis, sed etiam inscientibus ipsis fecisset, 
 quod a magistratu Hseduorum accusaretur, satis esse caus.e 
 arbitrabatur, quare in eum aut ipse animadvertcret, aut civitatem 
 animadvertere juberet. (65) His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, i, 
 quod Divitiaci fratris suinmum in populum Eomanum studium, 
 suinmam in se voluntatem, egregiara fidem, jnstitiain, temperaritiam 
 cognoverat : nam ne ejus supplicio Divitiaci animnm offenderet 
 verebatur. Itaque prius quam quicquam conaretnr, Divitiacum ad 
 se vocari jubet, et qnotidianis interpivtibus remotis, per C. Valerium 20 
 Procillum, principem Galli?e provincise, familiarem suum, cui sum- 
 mam omnium rerum fidem habebat, cum eo colloquitur; simul 
 commonefacit qu;c ipso prsesente in concilio Gallorum de Dum- 
 norige sint dicta; (66) et ostendit qure separatim quisque de eo 
 apud se dixerit ; petit atque hortatur, ut sine ejus oft'ensione animi 25 
 vel ipse de eo causa cognita statuat, vel civitatem statuere jubeat. 
 
 20. Divitiacus, multis cum lacrimis Csesarem complexus, ob- 
 secrare coepit, ne quid gravius in fratrem statueret : ' Scire se ilia 
 esse vera, nee quemquam ex oo plus quam se doloris capere, pro- 
 pterea quod, cum ipse gratia plurimurn domi atque in reliqua 30 
 Gallia, ille minimum propter adulescentiara posset, per se crevisset; 
 (67) quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, 
 sed pasne ad perniciem suam uteretur; sesetamen et amore fraterno 
 
 et existimatione vulgi commoveri. Quod si quid ei a Caesare 
 
266 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 gravius accidisset, cum ipse eum locum amicitise apud eum teneret, 
 neminem existimaturum non sua voluntate factuin ; qua ex re 
 futurum, uti totius Gallic animi a se averterentur.' (68) Haec cum 
 pluribus verbis flens a Caesare peteret, Caesar ejus dextram prendit; 
 5 consolatus rogat, finein orandi faciat ; tanti ejus apud se gratiam 
 esse ostendit, uti et reipublicae injuriam et suum dolorem ejus vol- 
 untati ac precibus condonet. Dumnorigem ad se vocat, fratrem 
 adhibet ; quae in eo repreheudat, ostendit, quae ipse intellegat, quae 
 civitas queratur, proponit ; nionet ut in reliquutn tempus omnes 
 10 suspitiones vitet ; praeterita se Divitiaco fratri condonare dicit. 
 DLiinuorigi custodes ponit, ut quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire 
 possit. 1 
 
 plans to attack the enemy in front and rear ; his plan ix defeated 
 by the mistake of Considius. 
 
 21. Eodem die ab exploratoribus certior faotus hostes sub monte 
 cousedisse milia passuum ab ipsius castris octo, qualis esset natura 
 
 15 montis et qualis in circuitu ascensus, qui cognoscerent inisit. 
 Renuntiatum est facileiu esse. De tertia vigilia T. Labiemun, 
 legatum pro praetore, eum duabus legionibus et iis ducibus qui iter 
 cognoverant, summum jnguin montis asceudere jubet ; quid sui 
 consilii sit ostendit. Ipse de quarta vigilia eodem itinere, quo 
 
 20 hostes ierant, ad eos couteudit, equitatumque omnem ante se mittit. 
 P. Considius, qui rei militaris peritissimus habebatur, et in exer- 
 citu L. Sullae et postea in M. Crassi fuerat, cum exploratoribus 
 prae mittit ur. 
 
 22. Prima luce, cum summus mons a Labieno teneretur, ipse ab 
 25 hostium castris non longius mille et quingentis passibus abesset, 
 
 neque, ut postea ex captivis comperit, aut ipsius adventus ant 
 Labieni cognitus esset, Considius equo admisso ad eum accurrit ; 
 dicit montem, quein a Labieno occupari voluerit, ab hostibus teneri ; 
 id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse. Caesar suas 
 30 copias in proximum collem subducit, aciem instruit. Labienus, ut 
 erat ei praeceptutn a Caesare, ne prcelium committeret, nisi ipsius 
 
 1 The Lessons cease at this point. Notes on the following Chapters will 
 be found in Appendix B, and all new words in the General Vocabulary. 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 267 
 
 copise prope liostium castra visre essent, ut undique uno tempore in 
 hostes impetus fieret, monte occupato nostros exspectabat, proe- 
 lioque abstinebat. Multo denique die per exploratores Caesar 
 cognovit et inontem a suis teneri, et Helvetios castra movisse, et 
 Considiura, timore perterritum, quod TIOII vidisset pro viso sibi 5 
 renuntiasse. Eo die, quo cousuerat intervallo, hostes sequitur, et 
 milia passuum tria ab eorum castris castra pouit. 
 
 The Romans, having turned aside to go to Bibracte, are followed by 
 the Heloetii. 
 
 23. Postridie ejus diei, quod omnino biduum supererat, rum 
 exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret, et quod a Bibracte, oppido 
 Hieduorum longe maximo et copiosissimo, non amplius milibus 10 
 passuum xvm aberat, rei fmmentefriae prospiciendum existimavit : 
 iter ab Helvetiis avertit, ac Bibracte ire coritendit. Ea res per 
 fugitivos L. Aeinilii, decurionis equitum Gallorum, hostibus nuntia- 
 tur. Helvetii, sen quod timore perterritos Romanos discedere a se 
 existirnarent, eo magis quod pridie, superioribus locis occupatis, 15 
 proelium non commisissent, sive eo quod re frumentaria intercludi 
 posse confiderent, commutato corisilio atque itinere converse, nos- 
 tros a novissimo agmine inscqui ac lacessere coeperurit. 
 
 A pitched battle is fought ; the Helnetii are utterly defeated after a 
 desperate struggle. 
 
 24. Postquam id animum advertit, copias suas Csesar in proxi- 
 mum collem subducit, equitatumque, qui sustineret liostium impetum, 20 
 misit. Ipse interim in colle medio triplicem aciem instruxit 
 legionum quattuor veteranarum [ita uti supra] ; sed in summo 
 jugo duas legiones, quas in Gallia citeriore proxime conscripserat 
 et omnia auxilia conlocari, ac totum montem hominibus compleri, 
 et interea sarcinas in unum locum conferri, et eum ab his qui in 25 
 superiore acie coustiterant muniri jussit. Helvetii cum omnibus 
 suis carris secuti, impedimenta in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsi 
 confertissima acie, rejecto nostro equitatu, phalange facta, sub 
 primam nostram aciem successerunt. 
 
268 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 25. Caesar primum suo, delude omnium ex conspectu remotis 
 equis, ut seqiuto omnium periculo spem fugae tolleret, cohortatus 
 suos proelium commisit. Milites e loco snperiore, pilis missis, 
 facile liostium phalangem perf'regerunt. Ea disjecta, gladiis de- 
 
 5 strictis in eos impetum t'ecerunt. Gallis magno ad pugnam erat 
 impedimento, quod pluribus eoruin scutis uuo ictu pilorum trans- 
 fixis et conligatis, cii;n ferrum s^ inttexisset, neque evellere neque 
 sinistra impedita sitis commode pugnare poterant, inulti ut, din 
 jactato biMchio, prdeoptarent scutum manu emittere, et nudo corpora 
 
 10 pugnare. Tandem vuln^ribus det'essi, et pedem referre et, quod 
 mons suberat circiter mille passuum, eo se recipere coeperunt. 
 Capto monte et succedentibus nostris, Boii et Tulingi, qui hominum 
 milibus circiter xv agmen hostium claudebant, et novissirnis prae- 
 sidio erant, ex itineiv nostros latere aperto adgressi circumvenire ; 
 
 15 et id conspicati Helvetii, qui in montem sese receperant, rursus 
 instare et prrelium redintegrare ccepmint. Romani conversa signa 
 bipartite intulerunt : prima et secunda acies, ut victis ac summotis 
 resisteret; tertia, ut venientes sustineret. 
 
 26. Ita ancipiti proelio din atque acriter pugnatum est. Diutius 
 20 cum sustinere nostrorum impetus non possent, alteri se, ut coepe- 
 
 rant, in montem receperunt, alteri ad impedimenta et carros suos se 
 contulenmt. Nam hoc toto proelio, cum ab hora septima ad ves- 
 perum pugnatum sit, aversum hostem videre nemo pouiit. Ad 
 multam noctein etiam ad impedimenta pugnatum est, propterea 
 
 25 quod pro vallo carros objecerant, et e loco superiore in nostros 
 venientes tela coniciebant, et no:inulli inter carros rotisi^ue mataras 
 ac tragulas subiciebint, nostrosque vulnerabant. Diu cum esset 
 pugnatum, impediments castriscpie nostri potiti sunt. Ibi Orge- 
 torigis filia atque umis e filiis captus est. Ex eo proelio circiter 
 
 30 hominum milia cxxx superfuerunt, eaqne tota nocte continenter 
 ierunt : nullam partem noctis itinere intermisso, in fines Lingonum 
 die quarto pervenerunt, cum et propter vulnera militum, et propter 
 sepulturam occisorum, nostri triduum morati eos sequi non potuis- 
 sent. Caasar ad Lingonas litteras nuntiosque misit, ne eos frumento 
 
 35 neve alia re juvarent : qui si juvissent, se eodem loco quo Hel- 
 vetios habiturum. Ipse, triduo intermisso, cum omnibus copiis 
 eos sequi coepit. 
 
THE HELVETIAN WAR. 269 
 
 The Heloetii surrender ; Gcesar sends them back home, to keep out the 
 Germans. 
 
 27. Helvetii, omnium rerum iuopia adducti, legatos de deditione 
 ad eum miserunt. Qui cum eum in itinere convenissent, seque ad 
 pedes projecissent, suppliciterque locuti flentes pacein petissent, 
 atque eos in eo loco, quo turn essent, suum adventum exspectare 
 jussisset, paruerunt. Eo postquam Caesar pervenit, obsides, anna, 5 
 servos, qui ad eos perfugissent, poposcit. Dum ea coiiquiruntur et 
 conferuntur, nocte intermissa, eirciter hominum milia vi ejus pagi 
 qui Verbigenus appellatur, sive tiinore perterriti, ne armis traditis 
 supplicio adh'cerentur, sive spe salutis inducti, quod in tanta inulti- 
 tudine dediticiorum suam fug-am aut occultari aut omnino ignorari 10 
 posse existimareut, priiua nocte e castris Helvetiorum egressi, ad 
 Rherium h'uesque Germanorum contenderunt. 
 
 28. Quod ubi Caesar resciit, quorum per fines ierant, his, uti 
 conquirerent et reducerent, si sibi purgati esse vellent, imperavit : 
 reductos in hostium nuinero liabuit ; reliquos omues, obsidibus, 15 
 armis, perfugis traditis, in deditioiiem accepit. Helvetios, Tulingos, 
 Latobrigos in fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti jussit ; et 
 quod, omnibus fructibus amissis, domi nihil erat quo famem tolera- 
 rent, Allobrogibus imperavit. ut iis fnunenti copiam facerent ; ipsos 
 oppida vicosque, quos inoenderant, restituere jussit. Id ea maxime 20 
 ratione fecit, quod no! nit eum locum, unde Helvetii discesserant, 
 vacare, ne propter bonitatem ngrorum Germani, qui trans Rbenum 
 incolunt, e suis finibus in Helvetiorum fines transirent, et finitimi 
 Galliae provincire Allobrogibusqne essent. Boios, potentibus Hse- 
 duis, quod egregia virtute erant cogriiti, ut in finibus suis collo- 25 
 carent, concessit ; quibus illi agros dederunt, quosqne postea in 
 parern juris libertatisque condicionem atque ipsi erant receperunt. 
 
 The numbers of the Helvetian host. 
 
 29. In castris Helvetiorum tabulae repertae sunt litteris Grascis 
 confectse et ad Csesarem relatRe, quibus in tabulis nominatim ratio 
 confecta erat, qui numerus domo exisset eorum qui arma ferre 30 
 possent, et item separatim pueri, seues mulieresque. Quarum 
 
270 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 omnium rerum summa erat capitum Helvetiorum milia CCLXIII, 
 Tulingorum milia xxxvr, Latobrigoruin xnu, Hauracorum xxni, 
 Boiorum xxxri; ex his qui anna ferre possent, ad milia xcn. 
 Summa omnium fuerunt ad milia CCCLXVIII. Eorum qui doinum 
 5 retlierunt, censu habito, ut Caesar imperaverat, repertus est numerus 
 milium c et x. 
 
WORD FOR WORD TRANSLATION OF B. G. I. 1-4 IN THE 
 ORDER OF THE ORIGINAL. 
 
 NOTE. The figures within parentheses indicate the Lessons of this book in 
 which the text, corresponding to this translation, is treated. 
 
 1. (1) Gaul is as-a-\vhole divided into parts three; (2) of-wliich 
 one inhabit the-Belgse, another the-Aquitarii, (3) the-third (part 
 those inhabit) who of-themselves in-the-language Kelts, in-ours Gauls, 
 are-called. (4) These all in-language, customs, laws, among them- 
 selves differ. (5) The Gauls from the Aquitani the Garumna river, 
 from the Belgse the Matrona and the Seine divide(s). (6) Of these 
 (of) all the bravest are the Belggp, on-account-of-this because from the 
 civilization and also the refinement of-the-province very far they- 
 are-distant, (7) least also to them merchants often go-to-and-fro, 
 and those (things) which to enervate minds tend (they) bring in ; 
 (8) nearest also they are to-the-Germans, who across the Rhine 
 dwell, with whom continually war they-wage. (9) Which from 
 cause the Helvetii also the-rest-of the Gauls in-valor surpass, because 
 almost (in) daily battles with the Germans they-contend, when either 
 from their-own boundaries them they-keep-away, or themselves in 
 their boundaries war wage. (10) Of-these one part, which the Gauls 
 to-hold it has been said, beginning takes from the river Rhone ; it-is- 
 bounded by-the-Garumna river, by-the-ocean, by-the-territory of-the- 
 Belgae ; it-reaches also on-the-side-of the Sequani and the Helvetii the 
 river Rhine; it-slopes toward the north. (11) The Belgse from the 
 remotest of-Gaul boundaries take-their-rise, they-extend to the lower 
 part of-the-river Rhine, they-look into the north and the rising sun. 
 Aquitania from the Garumna river to the Pyrenean mountains and 
 that part of-the-ocean which is near Spain extends, it-looks between 
 the setting of-the-stin and the north. 
 
 2. (13) Among the Helvetii by-far the highest-born was and the 
 richest Orgetorix. He, Marcus Messala and Marcus Piso (being) 
 
272 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 consuls, of the royal-power by a desire being-led, a conspiracy of the 
 nobility made, and upon-the-citizens prevailed that from territory their 
 with all forces tliey-might-go-out : (14) very-easy to be, since in 
 valor all they stood -before, of entire Gaul the supreme-power to ob- 
 tain. This on-this-account more easily to-thein he persuaded, because 
 on-all-sides of the place by the nature the Helvetii are-hem med-in : 
 (15) one on side by the river Rhine very-broad and very-deep, which 
 the country Helvetian from the Germans divides ; the second on side 
 by the mountain Jura very-high, which is between the Sequarii and 
 the Helvetii ; on the thirll (side) by the lake Geneva and by the river 
 Rhone, which province our from the Helvetii divides. (16) On 
 account of these things it-came-to-pass that both less widely they 
 wandered and less easily (upon their) neighbors war to bear-in they 
 were able ; which in respect men of warring fond with great grief 
 were-atfected. (17) In-proportion-to the-great-n umber moreover of 
 men, and in-proportion-to the glory of war and of bravery, narrow 
 themselves territory to have they thought, which in (into) length 
 thousands of paces two-hundred and forty, in (into) width a hundred 
 and eighty extended. 
 
 3. (18) By these things led, and by the advice of Orgetorix 
 deeply-moved, they determined t hose-things which to departure per- 
 tained to prepare, of beasts-of-burden and of carts as-much-as the 
 greatest number to buy-up, sowings as-much-as the greatest to make, in- 
 order-that on the journey plenty of grain might-be-on-hand, (19) with 
 the nearest states peace and friendship to establish. For these things 
 to be accomplished two-years for-them enough to be they thought, for 
 the third year the departure by law they fix. For these things to be 
 accomplished Orgetorix is chosen. This man (upon) himself an 
 embassy to the states took. (20) In this journey he persuades 
 Casticus, of Catamantaloedes son, a Sequanian, whose father the kingly- 
 power among the Sequani many years had-held, and by the senate of 
 the people Roman friend had been called, that the kingly-power in 
 state his he seize, which (his) father before had had; (21) and also 
 Dumnorix the Haeduan, brother of Divitiacus, who at that time the- 
 chief-place in the state was holding and especially to the common- 
 people acceptable was, that the same (thing) he try he persuades, and 
 to-him daughter his in (into) marriage he gives. (22) Very-easy to 
 do it is (to be) to-them he proves undertakings to accomplish, (on- 
 
WORD FOR WORD TRANSLATION. 273 
 
 account-of-this) because he-himself of his-own state the government 
 about-to-hold was : not it is (to be) doubtful that of the-vvhole-of 
 Gaul most the Helvetii could; (23) he-himself with his forces and 
 with his army for them the kingdoms about-to-win (is) he affirms. 
 By this argument influenced, among themselves a pledge and an oatli 
 they give, and, the kingly-power havirig-been-seized, through three 
 very-powerful and very-strong peoples of entire Gaul themselves 
 to-be-masters to be able they hope. 
 
 4. (24) This conspiracy (thing) is to-the-Helvetii through in- 
 formers (information) made-known. In-accordance-with-customs 
 their, Orgetorix out-of chains (his) cause to plead they compelled. 
 Condemned the punishment to follow it-was-fitting, (namely) that by 
 fire he be burned. On the day appointed of the cause for (of) the 
 pleading, Orgetorix to the trial all his retinue, about (to) of men 
 thousands ten, fro in-all-sides collected, and all clients and debtors his, 
 of whom a great number he had, to-the-same-place he brought- 
 together; (25) through these, so-that lie might not (his) cause plead, 
 himself he rescued (snatched away). When the state on-account-of 
 this act (thing) roused-up by arms right its to enforce was trying, and 
 a multitude of men out-of the fields the magistrates were collecting, 
 Orgetorix died ; and not absent-is suspicion, as the Helvetii think, 
 that he-hiinself to-himself death decreed. 
 
 FREE TRANSLATION OF B. G. I. 5-9. 
 
 5. (27) After his death the Helvetii, nevertheless, attempt to go 
 forth as they had determined to do. When at length they thought 
 they were ready for this expedition, they set fire to all their towns, 
 about twelve in number, to about four hundred villages and to the 
 remaining private buildings; they burned up all the corn except whalA 
 they were about to carry with them, that, by taking away the hope of 
 returning home, they might be more ready to encounter all perils ; 
 (28) they ordered every man to carry from home for himself meal 
 enough for three months. They persuade the Rauraci, the Tulingi, 
 and the Latobrigi, their neighbors, to adopt the same plan, burn up 
 all their towns and villages, and set out together with them; and the 
 Boii, who formerly lived across the Rhine arid had stormed Noreia 
 
 18 
 
274 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 after crossing into the Noric territory, were received and joined to 
 them. 
 
 6. (29) There were only two ways by which they could go out 
 from home : one through the country of the Sequani, narrow and diffi- 
 cult, between mount Jura and the river Rhone, where with difficulty 
 carts were drawn one by one ; moreover, a very high mountain was 
 overhanging, so that a very few could easily keep them out : the 
 second way through our province, much more easy and open because 
 between the territory of the Ilelvetii and the Allobroges, the latter of 
 whom had recently been subdued, the Rhone flows and this is crossed 
 in several places by a ford. (30) The last town of the Allobroges 
 and the nearest town to the territory of the Helvetii is Geneva. 
 Prom this town a bridge extends to the territory of the Helvetii. 
 They thought they would either persuade the Allobroges (because they 
 did not yet seem well-disposed toward the Roman people), or would 
 compel them by force to allow them to go through their territory. 
 When all things are prepared for departure, they appoint a day for 
 all to come together at the bank of the Rhone. This day was the 
 28th of March, in the consulship of Lucius Piso and Aulus Gabinms. 
 
 7. (31) When it was reported to Caesur that they were trying to 
 make their journey through our province, he hastened to set out from 
 the city, and by the longest possible marches hurried into farther Gtml 
 and arrived near Geneva. He levies upon the whole province as many 
 soldiers as he can there was, in all, one legion in farther Gaul and 
 orders the bridge which reached to Geneva to be cut down. (32) When 
 the Helvetii were informed of his arrival, they sent to him as am- 
 bassadors the highest born of the state. Of this embassy Nammeius 
 and Verudoctius held the highest place. They sent the ambassadors 
 to say that they intended to make their journey through the province, 
 because they had no other way, and to make it without any wrong- 
 doing ; they ask his permission to do this. (33) Cassar, because 
 he remembered that Lucius Cassius had been killed and his army 
 defeated and sent under the yoke by the Helvetii, thought he ought 
 not to grant this permission ; and he did not think that men of 
 hostile feelings, if the opportunity should he given them of making 
 the journey would refrain from harm and wrong-doing. Yet, in order 
 that time might intervene for the soldiers, whom he had ordered, to 
 
FREE TRANSLATION. 275 
 
 come together, he replied to the legates that he would take time to 
 think it over; they may return on the 13th of April if they want 
 anything. 
 
 8. (34) In the meantime with that legion which he had with him 
 and with the soldiers who had come together out of the province, he 
 built a wall sixteen feet high and dug a ditch for nineteen miles 
 from lake Geneva which flows into the river Rhone to mount Jura, 
 which divides the territory of the Sequani from that of the Helvetii. 
 After completing this work, he places garrisons here and there and 
 fortifies redoubts, so that he can more easily keep them out, if they 
 attempt to cross against his will. (35) When that day which he had 
 appointed with the legates has come, and the legates have returned 
 to him, he says he cannot, consistently with the custom and precedent 
 of the Roman people, grant to any one a way through the province; 
 and he declares that if they attempt to force their way lie Avill keep 
 them out. The Helvetii, disappointed in this hope, by joining boats 
 and rafts which they had made, or, in some cases, by the fords of the 
 Rhone where the depth of the river was least, tried, sometimes by day 
 more frequently by night, to see if they could breaj^fi rough ; but 
 when they were repelled by the fortified work^iHTa by the running 
 together of the soldiers, they desisted from this attempt. 
 
 9. (36) There was left the one way through the country of the 
 Sequani, where, if the Sequani were unwilling, they could not go on 
 account of the narrow pass. When they could not persuade these 
 through their own efforts, they sent ambassadors to Dumnorix, the 
 Haeduan, that by his mediation they might obtain their request from 
 the Sequani. Dumnorix was very influential among the Sequani 
 because of his kindness and liberality, and he was a friend to the 
 Helvetii because he had married the daughter of Orgetorix from that 
 state ; influenced by the desire for kingly power he favored revolution, 
 and also wished to have as many states as possible bound to him by 
 his favors. (37) Therefore he takes upon himself this commission, 
 and obtains his request from the Sequani, that they allow the Helvetii 
 to go through their territory : and he has them give hostages to each 
 other; the Sequani, that they will not keep the Helvetii from their 
 journey ; the Helvetii, that they will cross without wrong-doing and 
 harm. 
 
276 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 WORD FOR WORD TRANSLATION OF (LESAR, B. G. I. 13, 14. 
 
 13, This battle having- been made, the remaining forces of the 
 Helvetii in order that to follow up he might be able, a bridge on the 
 Arar to be made he cares for, and so (his) army he leads across. 
 The Helvetii, by sudden his arrival deeply moved, when that which 
 they themselves in twenty days with-the-greatest-difficulty had done, 
 (namely) that the river they crossed, that man in one day had done 
 they knew, legates to him they send ; of which embassy Divico chief 
 was, who in the war Cassian leader of the Helvetii had been. (46) This 
 man thus with Ciesar discussed : 
 
 direct form. 
 
 "If peace the people Roman with 
 the Helvetii will make, into that 
 part they will yo and there 
 will be the Helvetii, where 
 them you shall hace placed and 
 to bs shall have wished ; but if 
 in war to follow up you shall 
 continue, remember both 
 the former misfortune of the 
 people Roman and Ihe former 
 valor of the Helvetii. 
 
 (4-7) Because unexpectedly one can- 
 ton you ha } oe a '(lacked, when those, 
 who the river had crossed, to 
 their own aid to bear not they 
 were able, {do} not on account 
 of that act (thing) either (to) 
 your greatly valor ascribe (it), 
 or us despise ; we so from 
 fathers and ancestors our have 
 learned, that more by valor than 
 by craft we contend or by am- 
 buscades we strive. 
 
 (48) Wherefore (do} not allow, that 
 that place, where we shall have 
 taken our stand from the disaster 
 of the people Roman and the ex- 
 termination of the army a name 
 take, or the memorv hand down." 
 
 Quoted forrii. 
 
 ' If peace the people Roman with 
 the Helvetii would make, into that 
 part they would go and there 
 would be the Helvetii, where 
 them Ctfsar should place and 
 to be should wish ; but if 
 in war to follow up he should 
 continue, let him remember both 
 the former misfortune of the 
 people Roman and the former 
 valor of the Helvetii. 
 
 (47) Because unexpectedly one can- 
 ton he had attacked, when those, 
 who the river had crossed, to 
 their own aid to bear not they 
 were able, let him not on account 
 of that act (thing) either (to) 
 his own greatly valor ascribe (it), 
 or them despise; they so from 
 fathers and ancestors their had 
 learned, that more by valor than 
 by craft they contended or by am- 
 buscades they strove. 
 
 (48) Wherefore let him not allow, that 
 that place where they should 
 take their stand from the disaster 
 of the p'eople Roman and the ex- 
 termination of the army a name 
 take, or the memory hand down-' 
 
WORD FOR WORD TRANSLATION. 
 
 277 
 
 14. (49) To these Csesar thus replied : 
 
 "Oil this account to me less of 
 doubt is ginen, because those 
 things which you 
 
 have called to mind by 
 the memory I hold, and by this 
 the more heavily / bear (them) 
 by which the less because of the 
 desert of the people Roman they 
 happened-; who if of any 
 wrong to themselves conscious 
 had been, not it was difficult to 
 be on guard ; 
 
 (50) but by this thry were de- 
 ceived, because neither (a thing) 
 committed by themselves did 
 they know wherefore they should 
 fear, nor without a cause (it) to 
 be feared was did they think. 
 As to which if of the former 
 insult, to be unmindful lam will- 
 ing, also of recent wrongs, be- 
 cause / {being) unwilling a way 
 through the province through 
 force f yo# have attempted, because 
 the Hsedui, because the Ambarri, 
 because the Allobroges you have 
 annoyed, the memory to lay aside 
 am I able? 
 
 (51) Because in your victory so in- 
 solently you glory, and because 
 that so long you with impunity 
 injuries have carried you wonder, 
 to the same place tends. Are 
 wont for the gods immortal, that 
 by this more heavily the men 
 from the change of fortune 
 (things) may sorrow, whom on 
 account of crime their to punish 
 they wish, to these nrore prosper- 
 ous sometimes fortune (things) 
 and a longer impunity to grant. 
 
 ' On this account to him less of 
 doubt wux yicen, because those 
 things which the Helvetian am- 
 bassadors had called to mind by 
 the memory he held, and by this 
 the more heavily he bore (them) 
 by which the less^beeause of the 
 desert of the people RomanV/^y 
 had happened ; who if of any 
 wrong to themselves conscious 
 had been, not it was difficult to 
 be on guard ; 
 
 (50) but by this they had been de- 
 ceived, because neither (a thing) 
 committed by themselves did 
 they know wherefore they should 
 fear, nor without a cause (it) to 
 be feared was did they think. 
 As to which if of the former 
 insult to be unmindful he was will- 
 ing, also of recent wrongs, be- 
 cause he (being} unwilling a way 
 through the province through 
 force they had attempted, because 
 the Hsedui, because the Ambarri, 
 because the Allobroges they had 
 annoyed, the memory to lay aside 
 was he able ? 
 
 (51) Because in their victory so in- 
 solently they glory, and because 
 that so long they with impunity 
 injuries have carried they wonder, 
 to the same place tends. Are 
 wont for the gods immortal, that 
 by this more heavily the men 
 from the change of fortune 
 (things) may sorrow, whom on 
 account of crime their to punish 
 they wish, to these more prosper- 
 ous sometimes fortune (things) 
 and a longer impunity to grant. 
 
278 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 (52) Although these things are so, 
 yet if hostages by you to me 
 shall be given, in order that those 
 things which you, promise (you) 
 will do / may know, and it' to 
 the Hsedui for the wrongs which 
 upon them and allies their you 
 have inflicted, also if to th;- 
 Allobroges satisfaction you will 
 give (make), I with you, peace 
 will make." 
 
 (52) Although these things are so, 
 yet if hostages by them to him 
 should bey icen, in order that those 
 things which they promise (they) 
 will do he may know, and if to 
 the Haidui for the wrongs which 
 upon them and allies their they 
 have inflicted, also if to the 
 Allohroges satisfaction they would 
 gice (make), he with them peace 
 would make' 
 
 Divico replied : 
 
 So the Helcetii by ancestors their 
 haoe been taught, that hostages 
 to receive, not to give; they are 
 wont, of this thing the people 
 Roman are witnesses." 
 
 So the Heloetii by ancestors their 
 hace been taught, that hostages 
 to receive, not to give they are 
 wont, of this thing the people 
 Roman are witnesses.' 
 
 This reply having been given, he departed. 
 
APPENDIX A. 
 
 METHOD OF READING LATIN. 
 
 THE teaclier should see to it that the text is mastered in the order of the 
 original, and not by finding first predicate, then subject, etc. To accom- 
 plish this, the following method is recommended: 
 
 When Lesson XIX. is reached, and before the Text is studied at all, let all 
 the class close their books and give exclusive attention to the teacher. He 
 will write upon the board the first word of the Text, constituerunt, and a 
 colloquy something like what follows will ensue : " What do you know 
 about constituerunt?" Ans., "It is the pf. ind. act., 3d plur., and 
 means they arranged or have arranged, they determined or hace determined." 
 " What may we expect after it?" Ans., "A noun in the accus. case, or 
 an inf. as in the preceding lesson." 
 
 Now add the next word, and the Text will stand : 
 constituerunt cum . . . 
 
 " What may cum be ? " Ans., " Either a prep, or a conj." " If it is a 
 prep., what may we expect after it ? " Ans., " An abl. ; cf. cum omni- 
 bus copiis XIII." "If a conj , what?" Ans., "The ind. or snbj.; cf. 
 cum prohibent IX.. cum praestareiit XIV. 
 
 constituerunt cum proximis . . . 
 
 " What possibilities for proximis ? " Ans., " Dat. or abl. plur. ; prob- 
 ably an adj., but perhaps a noun ; cf. omnibus XIV., finitimis XVI. " 
 
 constituerunt cum proximis civitatibus . . . 
 
 " What possibilities for civitatibus?" Ans., "Dat. or abl. plur." 
 "What construction for proximis is probable?" Ans., "Adj. limiting 
 civitatibus." "If civitatibus is an abl., will it certainly show that 
 cum is a prep. ?* Ans., " No ; cf. cum virtute XIV., where cum is a 
 conj., and virtute an abl. of respect, which does not admit a prep." 
 
 1 In the first book of Cresar's Gallic War, the conj. cum is immediately followed, in the 
 order of the text, eight times by an abl. which might be an abl. governed by a prep. The 
 lesson of this fact for the beginner is : Be cautious, and wait for the Latin to develop its own 
 meaning. 
 
280 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 constituerunt cum proximis civitatibus pacem . . . 
 
 " What are the possibilities for pacem ? " Ans., " It is an accus. sing, 
 and may be the obj. of a verb, cf. numerum XV III. ; the subj. of an inf., 
 cf. Gallos X. ; the pred. of an inf., cf. perfacile XIV. ; or an apposi- 
 tive, cf. Rhenum X." " May it be the obj. of constituerunt ? " Ans., 
 " Yes." " Arc we sure that it is ! J " Ans., " No." 
 
 amicitiam, which follows, after et, lias the same possibilities as pacem. 
 
 constituerunt cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam 
 confirmare. 
 
 Here the sentence ends. " How may we now determine the force of 
 cum ? " Ans., " It must be a prep., as no ind. or subjv. one of which 
 modes is necessary after the conj. cum is now possible in this sentence. 5 ' 
 "May pacem et amicitiam be the obj. of constituerunt?" Ans., 
 " No, for that would complete the sentence without bringing in confir- 
 mare at all." "May pacem et amicitiam be the subj. of confir- 
 mare ? " Ans., " No, for the verb confirmare requires an obj., and the 
 use of these nouns as subj. would leave it without any." " What, then, 
 is the construction of confirmare?" Ans., "It is the complementary 
 inf. after constituerunt, with pacem et amicitiam as its objects." 
 
 This method should be continued through this Lesson and through every 
 Lesson for several weeks. It is slow at first, but will rapidly grow easier, 
 and will secure alertness of thought and a ready command of the language. 
 Occasionally written exercises should be substituted for the oral, to test 
 the progress of the class, and constant translation by hearing as well as 
 sight should be required. The Notes of these Lessons will be adapted to 
 this method. The writer is very greatly indebted 1o Professor W. G. Hale, 
 of Cornell University, who has explained the method very fully in a little 
 pamphlet called " The Art of Reading Latin," published by Ginn & Co., 
 Boston. Every Latin teacher should read it. 
 
APPENDIX B. 
 
 Notes on B. G. I. 21-29. 
 
 CHAPTER 21. 
 
 certior factus . . . consedisse ; cf. certior factus traduxisse 
 XLIII. milia ; XVII. N. 7 (ti) misit ; its obj. understood would be 
 some such word as milites ; this obj. is the antec. of qui, and qui cog- 
 nSscerent expresses purpose; the clauses quails esset natura and 
 qualis (esset) ascensus are indir. questions and the obj. of cognosce- 
 rent ; cf. XLIII. N. 2 (V) ; qualis is an interrogative adj., not an adv. 
 With what does it agree ? facilem ; limits ascensum understood. 
 de tertia vigilia; cf. XLIII. Vocab. ducibus ;*n apposition witli iis. 
 cognoverant; for form and meaning, cf. cognoscerent above, LXVI. 
 N. 8, Obs 2, and LXIV. Vocab. jugum -. strictly a yoke, but here a 
 {yoke-shaped) ridge ascendere ; cf. ascensus above, and LX. N. 5. 
 sit; the preceding quid is a substantive interrogative pron. ; cf. the 
 adj. pron. qui LIV. v. 6 (V) ; quid is declined like the indefinite quis ; 
 see A. & G. 104. II . 188, I. ; consilii is a predicate gen., what is of his 
 plan, what belonrjs to his plan, what his plan is ; cf. tanti LXVTII. and A. 
 & G. 214, c. H. 401; explain mode and tense of sit. ierant, for ive- 
 rant, from ire. habebatur; for meaning, cf. LV. N. 7 (ft) ; peritissi- 
 mus ; rei mllitaris depends upon it, very experienced of military science, 
 where we should say in Eng. very experienced in military science ; see A. & 
 G. 218, a. H. 399, I. 2. Sullae ; nom. Sulla, though a masculine 
 noun ; cf. III. N. 5. Crass! depends on exercitu, supplied from what 
 goes before ; see II. 398, 1 and N. 1. 
 
 CHAPTER 22. 
 
 luce ; for form of nom. cf. XVIII. N. 2, Obs. 2 ; for const, cf. XXI. N. 
 2. summus mons, the top of the mountain, not the highest mountain ; 
 cf. IX. N. 5 (/;) . passibus ; for const., cf. LV. N. 10 (c) ; limited by 
 preceding mille, which is here an indecl. adj. ; see A. & G. 94, e. H. 178. 
 
282 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 Labieni ; cf. CrassI, Chap. 21. What pron. is used in such cases in 
 Eng., to supply the place of the omitted noun? equo admisso, (his) 
 horse having been let go, with loose reins, at full speed ; the root meaning of 
 mittere is to let go ; distinguish equus from eques, equitatus, eques- 
 ter. voluerit; review the conjug. of this verb, A. & G. 138. H. 293; 
 explain mode and tense. cognovisse ; give the exact words which Con- 
 sidius addressed to Caesar ; insignibus, here from the noun insigne, a 
 distinguishing mark, decoration, uniform. praeceptum erat : for mode, 
 cf. XXV. N. 6, Obs. 4. ne . . . committeret, nisi . . . visae 
 essent. What were the exact words of Caesar to Labienus? XLVII. N. 
 6, XL VI. N. 3. fieret; voice? cf. fiebat XVI. Vocab.; why subjv. ? 
 
 abstinebat ; for const, of preceding prcelio, cf. IX. N. 15. multo 
 die, in the much day, late in the day ; why abl.? perterritum ; force of 
 per? XVIII. N. 3, (b). pro viso, in place of (a thine/) seen, as seen ; 
 viso, in form a partic., is liere a noun. quo consuerat intervallo 
 intervallo qu5 consuerat, at the interval at ichich he was accustomed; 
 cf. quae civitas est for ci vitas quse est XXXVII. ; for impf. force of 
 the plpf. consuerat, cf. LI. N. 4 (e). 
 
 9 
 
 CHAPTER 23. 
 
 diSi ; a gen. depending on postridie, which is an adv., but was origi- 
 nallv a noun, being contracted from postero dig, on the day after ; see A. 
 & G. 214, ff. H. 398, 5. cum . . . oporteret; cf. quo oporteret 
 LVII. N. 2. Bibracte ; nom. same as abl. ; see A. & G. 57, d. H. 63, 
 2. copiosissimo ; the nom. masc. of the positive copiosus is formed 
 from copia with the ending -6sus ; for force of this ending, cf. bellico- 
 sus XXXVIII., seditiosus LVILL, and A. & G. 164, k. H. 328. 
 aberat ; for preceding milibus, cf. passibus, Chap. 22 ; for passuum, 
 cf. XVII. N. 8. existimavit ; for preceding prospiciendum, cf. 
 XXXIII. N. 3 (/;) ; rei frumentariae, for the grain supply ; dat. with 
 prospiciendum (esse) ; cf. respublica, res familiaris, res militaris, 
 novee res. contendit ; like the preceding avertit hns the same form 
 in 3d sing. pres. ind. as in pf. ind. ; cf. LXVII. N. 6; here probably pf. 
 like preceding existimavit. seu for sive. eo magis quod ; magis 
 is used as tlie com p. of magnopere XLVII. : for whole expression, cf. 
 h5c facilius . . . quod XIV., eo . . . minus . . . quod XLIX. 
 sive; cf. preceding seu. re; const.? a novissimo agmine; for 
 use of same expression without a, cf. LV. ; for meaning of a, cf. X. N. 
 14. ccepgrunt ; for translation of preceding abl. absolutes, cf. XXVIII. 
 N. 7 (,). 
 
APPENDIX B. 283 
 
 CHAPTER 24. 
 
 id animum advertit ; the last two words are usually written as one ; 
 cf. LXIV. and note also the difference in Lat. between the expressions 
 meaning to notice and to punish ; for two accus. id and animum, cf. 
 XLIII. N. 5 (), Gram. Less. qui sustineret . . . misit ; cf. other 
 examples of the rel. clause of purpose in XXXII., LIV., and Chap. 21, 
 and note that in all these instances the antec. of the rel. is the obj. of the 
 verb on which the purpose clause depends. in medio colle ; in the 
 middle of the hill, i. e. half way up, not in the middle of the summit ; cf. 
 multo die, Chap. 22. What important difference between the way of 
 expressing the time in which and the place in which ? [ita utl supra] ; 
 in brackets because it is doubtful whether these words belong in the text; 
 omit in translation. compleri ; voice ? for parts, cf. flens LXVIII. 
 eum ; antec. ? impedimenta ; from impedire, means that which 
 hinders, (i. e. makes the march slow?) the baggage train, including the beasts 
 of burden, while sarcinas, above, refers to the personal baggage of each 
 soldier, something like the modern knapsacks, though not carried on the 
 back. confertissima acie, in a very crowded line of battle ; why abl. ? 
 difference in meaning between acies and agmen ? 
 
 CHAPTER 25. 
 
 equis : What does this word suggest as to the noun with which preced. 
 ing suo agrees, and what const, for this noun is suggested by remotis ? 
 aequato periculS, lit. the danger having been made equal, freely, by 
 making the danger equal; cf. spe sublata XXVII. perfregerunt ; 
 from perfringere. fecerunt : How does this verb show that the first 
 word in the sentence is not a nom. sing. ? What word shows that it is not 
 an accus. plur. ? Why may it not be a nom. plur. neut. 1 What, then, must 
 be its case, antec., and const.? Gallis . . . impediments ; for const. 
 cf. LXIII. N. 7. se inflexisset, had bent itself, had become bent ; note 
 that the shields of soldiers standing next to one another were overlapped in 
 forming the phalanx, and that these shields, which were carried on the left 
 arm, were pinned and held together by the Roman javelins ; for mode of in- 
 flexisset, cf. XL. N. 2 (/>). sinistra; cf. dextram LXVIII. emit- 
 tere ; for meaning, cf. admisso, Chap. 22 ; praeoptarent, preceding, is a 
 subjv. of result; manu ; fern, by exception ; why abl.? mille passu- 
 um ; mille is here a noun like milia, but cf. mille, Chap. 22. eo ; here 
 an adv. meaning to that place, thither, not the demonstrative pron. 
 
284 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 succedentibus ; on the use of this pres. partic., cf. LX. N. 12, Obs. 2. 
 novissimis praesidio ; cf. Gallis impediments, above ; novissimis 
 
 means to those at the rear, or simply to the rear ; the best Eng. for the 
 whole expression ! J latere aperto ; for omission of prep., cf. novis- 
 simo agmine LV. cceperunt; followed by circumvenire as well as 
 instare. conversa signa . . . intulerunt, they bore in the turned 
 about standards., (hey wheeled about and adcanced. Make a list of the mili- 
 tary names and expressions in this and the preceding Chap. resiste- 
 ret; used with the dat. ; victis, from vincere, means those conquered, the 
 conquered ; cf. novissimis, above. Of what is the preceding acies the 
 subj.? venientes; cf. succedentibus. Note the large number of 
 partic. in this Chap., and that in many cases the Eng. would have clauses 
 instead. Make these partic. a special study, noting the difference in 
 meaning between those of dep. verbs and the others, and the variety of 
 Eng. translation required in rendering them idiomatically. 
 
 CHAPTER 26. 
 
 pugnatum est ; used impersonally, lit. translated it teas fought, freely 
 there was fighting ; the preceding adv. may then be freely translated like an 
 adj. ; the preceding ancipiti prcelio is an abl. of manner ; ancipiti is from 
 nom. anceps. diutius is a comp. from diu. alter! . . . alteri, the 
 one party . . . the other ; cf. XV. N. 7, Gram. Less. ab hora septima ; 
 the day from sunrise to sunset, whatever its length, was divided into twelve 
 equal hours, which must, of course, have varied in length with the seasons ; 
 cf., for the night, XLIII., Vocab. pugnatum sit; for const., cf. LII. 
 N. 2, Obs. 3. ad multam noctem ; cf. multo die, Chap. 22. pro 
 vail 6 ; for, in place of, as, a rampart. objecerant ; for force of ob in 
 composition, cf. X. N. 4, Obs. 8. coniciebant for conjiciebant ; see 
 A. & G. 10, d. H. 36, 4, and foot-note 1, also XX. N. 1. potiti sunt ; 
 for case used with it, cf. XIV N. 7. unus e filiis, one out of the sons, 
 one of the son* ; see A. & G. 216, c. II. 397, 3, N. 3, and foot-note 1. 
 ierunt for iverunt pervenerunt ; partem (noctis) in this sentence 
 is the accus. of duration of time, and die the abl. of time at which ; with 
 these regular uses contrast nocte in the preceding clause and prcelio, near 
 the beginning of the Chap., both of which are exceptionally used in the abl. 
 to express duration of time ; see A. & G. 256, b. H. 379, 1. Lingonas ; 
 cf. L. N. 8 (<;). juvarent; for dir. form, cf. ne . . . tribueret 
 XLVIL qui . . . habiturum; cf. si ... accidisset . . . existima- 
 turum LXVII. ; force of the position of qui ? for omission of prep, with 
 loco, cf. XXIX. N. 9 ; Helvetios is the obj. of haberet, to be supplied ; 
 
APPENDIX B. 285 
 
 eos, referring to Lingonas, is the obj. of habiturum (esse); if the 
 Lingones harbored the enemies of the Romans, they would be regarded as 
 enemies by Caesar. 
 
 CHAPTER 27. 
 
 convenissent : here transitive ; for position and translation of its 
 subj., qui, ,/. IX. N. 1 (d), Obs. 1; XXXVI. N. 2 (b}, Gram. Less. 
 jussisset ; note the four subjv. after one conj., viz. cum; why subjv. ? 
 essent, preceding, is subjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. disc., jussis- 
 set being a verb of saying. eo . . . pervgnit; cf. eo, Chap. 25. 
 perfugissent ; for mode, cf. essent, above. ea conquiruntur ; ea, 
 referring to obsides, arma, servos, in preceding sentence, is neut. 
 because the hostages and slaves are here regarded as things rather than 
 men; cf. H. 439, 2, and N. hominum milia . . . pagi ; note the 
 possessive and partitive gen. depending on the same noun. Verbigeiius 
 appellatur; for case of Verbigenus, cf. XX. N. 4 (d). perterriti; 
 limits milia ; for gender, see A. & G. 187, d. H. 438, 6. aducerentur ; 
 for const., cf. LXV. N. 3, Obs. 2. quod . . . existimarent ; subjv. 
 in indir. disc. ; Caesar is here quoting two reports or perhaps two conjec- 
 tures of his own in regard to the departure of the Helvetii. prima 
 nocte ; in thejirst of the night., in the early part of the night. What other 
 adj. have been used, like prima, to designate a part of a thing, and in what 
 phrases ? 
 
 CHAPTER 28. 
 
 resciit for rescivit, from resciscere ; cf. LXVI. N. 8, Obs. 2 ; for 
 tense, cf. LVII. N. 1 (a}. imperavit ; takes what case? LXII. N. 1, 
 Obs. 1; for quorum, preceding its antec. his, cf. quae pars . . . ea 
 XLIV. ; dir. obj. of imperavit? XX. N. 5 (b} ; purgatl ; nom., agree- 
 ing with subj. of vellent ; see A. & G. 272, b. H. 536, 2, 1) ; sibi, to 
 him, in his sight; vellent; form in dir. disc.? in numero hostium, 
 lit. in, the number of enemies, freely as enemies ; cf. pro valid, Chap. 26. 
 unde, from which place, whence ; cf. ubi, ichere, ibi, there, e6, thither, 
 inde, thence. revert! ; What means they returned? cf. reverterentur 
 XXXIII., reverterunt XXXV. domi; cf. LXI. N. 4. tolerarent 
 is here a result clause ; the preceding quo = ut e5, and has nihil as 
 its antec., lit. there was nothing (of such a sorf) that they would by means 
 of it endure hunger. ipsos ; the antec. are Helvetios, Tulingos, Lato- 
 brlgos ne , . . translrent ; a subjv. after the idea of fearing sug- 
 
286 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 gested in noluit; cf. LXV. N. 3, Obs. 2. Gallise provinciae ; which 
 of these two words is a dat. ? concessit ; note the emphatic position 
 of Boios; it is the obj. of collocarent, of which the subj. is Haedui 
 understood ; Haeduls is the dat. of indir. obj. after concessit ; for col- 
 locarent, cf. conquirerent, above; for virtute, cf. XXX. N. 2; dede 
 runt, pf. of dare ; antec. of preceding quibus and ill! ! J for force of 
 atque, see A. & G. 156, a. H. 554 I. 2, N. ; translated lit. into an equal 
 condition and they themselves were, freely, into the same condition as 
 themselves. 
 
 CHAPTER 29. 
 
 Utterae ; this word in the plur. may mean either letters of the alphabet, 
 a letter (epistle), or literature ; it is here used in the first sense. quibus 
 in tabulls ; for repetition of antec., cf. quibus itineribus XXIX. 
 exisset ; for form, cf. XLIV. 5 ; it is the verb of an indir. question, the 
 preceding qul being an interrogative adj. ; cf. quas in partes LIV. ; for 
 domo cf. XX VII L. N. 1 (/;). qui . . . possent ; the clause describes 
 eorum like an adj., emphasizing a characteristic or condition rather than a 
 fact ; see A. & G. 320. II. 503, I. separatim ; for the adv. ending -tim, 
 cf. nominating privatim, preesertim. pueri ; stem and nom. ? how 
 different from stem and nom. of agri? seiies ; see A. & G. 61. H. 66. 
 summa, sum, here a noun; the preceding rgrurn may be translated 
 items. erat . . . CCLXIII ; capitum, souls, rather than heads ; a par- 
 titive gen. depending on mllia ; review in this connection the numerals, 
 A. & G. 94. H. 174. possent ; cf possent, above. ad mllia ; ad is 
 here an adv. meaning about ; note that fuerunt agrees with predicate 
 noun rather than subj. ; see A. & G. 204, b. H. 462 ; cf., however, summa 
 erat mllia, above. eorum qui , . . redierunt ; why ind. here, but 
 subjv. in eorum qui , . . possent, above? 
 
APPENDIX C. 
 
 WORD-LISTS. 
 
 Words occurring five or more times in the First Book of Csesar's " Gallic W 7 ar. 
 
 amicitia 
 
 Belgse 
 
 causa 
 
 -A NOUNS. 
 
 copia 
 
 fortuna 
 
 Gallia 
 
 gratia 
 injuria 
 memoria 
 
 provincia 
 summa 
 
 -O NOUNS. 
 
 ager 
 
 concilium 
 
 Labieuus 
 
 pi'celium 
 
 amicus 
 
 colloquium 
 
 legatus 
 
 regimm 
 
 animus 
 
 cousilium 
 
 Liscus 
 
 Rhcnus 
 
 annus 
 
 Divitiacus 
 
 locus 
 
 Rliodauus 
 
 Ariovistus 
 
 equus 
 
 Lucius 
 
 Komfmus 
 
 arma 
 
 frumentum 
 
 Marcus 
 
 Sequani 
 
 aux ilium 
 
 Gallus 
 
 numerus 
 
 socius 
 
 bellum 
 
 German! 
 
 oppidum 
 
 solum 
 
 beneficium 
 
 Hsedui 
 
 pagus 
 
 telura 
 
 carrus 
 
 Helvetii 
 
 periculura 
 
 Valerius 
 
 castra 
 
 imperium 
 
 populus 
 
 
 agmen 
 
 Allobroges 
 
 Caesar 
 
 ci vitas 
 
 consuetudo 
 
 consul 
 
 dicio 
 
 Durnuorix 
 
 eques 
 
 explorator 
 
 3d DECL. NOUNS. 
 
 finis 
 
 flumen 
 
 frater 
 
 homo 
 
 liostis 
 
 iter 
 
 jus 
 
 legio 
 
 miles 
 
 mllia 
 
 mons 
 
 multitude 
 
 nemo 
 
 nihil 
 
 nox 
 
 obses 
 
 oratio 
 
 Orgetorix 
 
 pars 
 
 pater 
 
 pax 
 pes 
 
 prince ps 
 ratio 
 salus 
 tern pus 
 timor 
 virtus 
 
 VIS 
 
 voluntas 
 
288 
 
 INDUCTIVE LATIN METHOD. 
 
 -U NOUNS. 
 
 adventus equitatus impetus passus 
 domus exercitus maims seuatus 
 
 
 
 -E NOUNS. 
 
 
 
 acies 
 
 dies 
 
 fides 
 
 res 
 
 spes 
 
 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 
 
 
 1st 
 
 Conjug. (-a verbs). 
 
 appellare 
 arbitrari 
 comparare 
 confirmare 
 
 dare 
 desperare 
 enuntiare 
 existimare 
 
 imperare 
 impetrare 
 ju die a re 
 mandare 
 
 nfmtiare 
 occupare 
 perturbare 
 postulare 
 
 pugnare 
 putare 
 rogare 
 superare 
 
 %d Conjug. (-e verbs). 
 
 commovere 
 continere 
 debere 
 
 liabere 
 jubere 
 licet 
 
 obtiuere 
 oportet 
 persuade re 
 
 perterrere 
 j)olliceri 
 prohibere 
 
 respondere 
 tenere 
 videre 
 
 3c? Conjug. (-e verbs). 
 
 accidere 
 accipere 
 adducere 
 agere 
 aiiimadvertere 
 capere 
 cogere 
 cognoscere 
 colloqui 
 
 committere 
 
 conficere 
 conjicere 
 considere 
 constituere 
 consuescere 
 contendere 
 deligere 
 dicere 
 
 discedere 
 dlvidere 
 ducere 
 face re 
 gerere 
 iucolere 
 Instruere 
 intellegere 
 intermittere 
 
 mittere 
 ostendere 
 patl 
 pellere 
 perficere 
 petere 
 proficisci 
 queerere 
 querl 
 
 recipere 
 reducere 
 reliuquere 
 revert! 
 sequi 
 statuere 
 traducere 
 uti 
 vincere 
 
 4M Conjug. (-1 verbs). 
 
 audlre 
 
 convenire 
 
 pervenlre 
 
 reperire 
 
 venire 
 
 
 
 Irreg. Verbs. 
 
 
 
 abesse 
 coepisse 
 conferre 
 
 esse 
 exlre 
 ferre 
 
 Inferre 
 Ire 
 posse 
 
 prseesse 
 refer re 
 tollere 
 
 tran sire 
 velle 
 
APPENDIX C. 
 
 289 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Positive degree. 
 
 alias 
 alter 
 
 multus reliquus 
 omnis Homauus 
 
 totus 
 ullus 
 
 barbarus 
 
 paucus taut us 
 
 unus 
 
 maguus 
 
 quartus tertius 
 
 uter 
 
 
 Comp. degree. 
 
 
 amplior 
 
 gravior major minor plus 
 
 supei 
 
 Stip. degree. 
 nobilissimus novissimus plurimus primus proximus summus 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Positive degree. 
 
 circiter ita 
 facile jam 
 ibi neque 
 
 non 
 propterea 
 quam 
 
 satis 
 tarn 
 tameu 
 
 turn 
 ubi 
 
 amplius 
 
 Comp. degree. 
 gravius 
 
 I 
 ininus 
 
 
 Sup. degree. 
 
 prim urn 
 
 19 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 A. $- G. 
 
 Allen and Greenough's 
 
 impers. . 
 
 . . impersonal 
 
 
 Latin Grammar 
 
 impf. . 
 
 . . imperfect 
 
 abl. . 
 
 . . ablative 
 
 indef. . 
 
 indefinite 
 
 accus. . 
 
 . . accusa*' 1 "; 
 
 ind. . 
 
 Indicative 
 
 act. . 
 
 . . active 
 
 indir. 
 
 . . indirect 
 
 adj. . 
 
 adjective 
 
 inf. . . 
 
 . . infinitive 
 
 ado. 
 
 . . adverb 
 
 Lat. . . 
 
 . . Latin 
 
 antec. . 
 
 antecedent 
 
 lit. . . 
 
 literal 
 
 Bk. . 
 
 . . Book 
 
 masc. 
 
 . . masculine 
 
 Chap. . 
 
 . . Chapter 
 
 N 
 
 Note 
 
 *f. . 
 
 . . CONFER, compare 
 
 ue ut. 
 
 . . neuter 
 
 com p. . 
 
 . . comparative 
 
 nom. 
 
 nominative 
 
 eonj. . 
 
 conjunction 
 
 obj. . 
 
 . . objective 
 
 coitjiig. 
 
 conjugation 
 
 Obs. . 
 
 . . Observation 
 
 const. , 
 
 . . construction 
 
 p. . . 
 
 . . page 
 
 dat. . 
 
 . . dative 
 
 partlc. . 
 
 o . part iciple 
 
 dec/. . 
 
 declension 
 
 pass. 
 
 . . passive 
 
 dep. 
 
 . . deponent 
 
 pers. 
 
 . . person 
 
 dtr. . 
 
 . . direct 
 
 Pf. 
 
 . . perfect 
 
 disc. 
 
 . . discourse 
 
 plur. 
 
 plural 
 
 e.g. . 
 
 . . EXEMPLI GRATIA, for 
 
 P/Pf. - 
 
 . . pluperfect 
 
 
 example 
 
 prep. . 
 
 . . preposition 
 
 Eng. 
 
 . . English 
 
 pres. 
 
 . . present 
 
 etc. . 
 
 . . ET CETERA, and so forth 
 
 pron. 
 
 pronoun 
 
 fern. . 
 
 feminine 
 
 ret. . . 
 
 . . relative 
 
 fat. . 
 
 . . future 
 
 sing. 
 
 . . singular 
 
 gen. 
 
 . . genitive 
 
 subj. 
 
 . . subject 
 
 Gram. . 
 
 Grammar 
 
 subjv. 
 
 subjunctive 
 
 ir. . . 
 
 Harkness's Latin 
 
 sup. . 
 
 superlative 
 
 
 Grammar 
 
 viz. . . 
 
 . . namely 
 
 i. e. 
 
 . . ID EST, that is 
 
 Vocab. . 
 
 . . Vocabulary 
 
 The same abbreviation has generally been used for the singular and the plural. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 NOTE. The following Vocabulary contains all the Latin words found in th 
 first twenty-nine Chapters of Cesar's Gallic War. 
 
 It has been considered not only unnecessary but hurtful to the student constantly 
 to repeat in the Vocabulary facts which he should already know, and facts which 
 are governed by those simple rules, a knowledge of which is essential to even an ele- 
 mentary use of the language. The repetition of such facts blinds -the pupil to the 
 existence of the rules which govern them, and destroys that self-reliance which is 
 necessary to success in sight reading. Accordingly, the pupil has not been told 
 with everv recurrence of a noun in -tas that its gen. is -tatis, or with every recur- 
 rence of a verb in -are that its pf. and partic. are in -avit and -atus. Exceptions 
 to regular rules are always given. If the gen. of a noun in -us is not given, it is to 
 be considered a masc. of the -o declension. 
 
 A slight divergence from the usual method of giving the parts of verbs has been 
 made. In the Text of Csesar, B. G. I. 1-29, neither the 1st sing, of the pres. ind. 
 nor that of the pf. ind. is found at all. It would, then, be a serious departure from 
 the inductive method to use these forms in giving the parts of every verb. Accord- 
 ingly, the pres. ind. (except that of verbs in -io of the 3d conjug.) has been omitted, 
 and the 3d sing, of the pf. has been used instead of the 1st sing. The pf. pass, or 
 fut. act. partic. has been used as one of the principal parts instead of the supine. 
 The objections to the use of the latter have been well stated by Mr. Tetlow in the 
 Preface to his Inductive Lessons in Latin. 
 
 In this connection it is not out of place to speak of the unfortunate convention bv 
 which the 1st sing, of the pres. ind. is used in naming verbs and in giving the prin- 
 cipal parts. It seems only reasonable that a principal part should be a common 
 form, and should show one of the stems of the verb. The 1st sing, of the pres. ind. 
 is almost unknown in the narrative authors usually read by beginners; and in the 
 1st and 3d conjug. it does not show the pres. stem, and, therefore, in naming verbs 
 the 1st and 3d conjug. are entirely undistinguished. 
 
 The words in parentheses are merely kindred with the leading word, and, in very 
 many cases, are not the words from which this is derived. In so elementary a book, 
 it has been thought unwise to discuss or use roots to any extent. 
 
 a, ab, prep, with &\A., from, by. 
 abdere, -didit, -ditus, to put away, 
 
 hide. 
 abdueere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 away. 
 
 abesse, -fuit, -fu.tu.rus, to be away or 
 
 distant. 
 abstinere, -tinuit, -tentus, trans. 
 
 and in trans., to keep from. 
 ac, another form for atque ; it is 
 
 used only before consonants, 
 accedere, -cessit, -cessus, to go to, 
 
accidere 
 
 292 
 
 animus 
 
 approach, be added ; accedit quod 
 
 or ut, it is added that, moreover. 
 accidere, -cidit (ad and cadere, to 
 fall), fall upon, fall out, happen ( used 
 
 generally of unfortunate occur- 
 rences, hence Eng. accident). 
 accipere (accipio), -cepit, -ceptus, 
 
 to take to one's self, receive, accept. 
 accurrere, -currit (or -cucurrit), to 
 
 run to, run up. 
 accusare (ad and causa), to call to 
 
 account, blame, accuse. 
 acies, -ei, a sharp edge, a sharp 
 
 glance, a battle line (presenting sharp 
 
 weapons), 
 acriter, sharply. 
 adducere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 to, draw to, induce. 
 adesse, -fuit, -futurus, to be near, be 
 
 present, assist. 
 adficere (adficio), -fecit, -fectus, to 
 
 do to (somebody), affect. 
 adfmitas (fines), nearness, relation- 
 ship In/ marriage. 
 adgredl ; see aggredi. 
 adhibere, to hold, summon, enip'oy. 
 admirari, to wonder at, admire. 
 admittere, -misit, -missus, to let go 
 
 to, send to, allow. 
 
 adoriri, -ortus, to rise against, attack. 
 adsciscere, -scivit, -scitus, to take to 
 
 one's self, unite. 
 
 adventus, -us, a coming to, approach. 
 adversus (in form the pf. partic. of 
 
 advertere), turned toward, in front 
 
 of, adverse, unfavorable. 
 advertere, -vertit, -versus, to turn 
 
 to or toward. 
 eedificium, a building, 
 segerrume or segerrime, adv. in sup., 
 
 with the greatest trouble. 
 sequare, to make equal. 
 
 ager, agri, field, territory. 
 
 agere, egit, actus, to set in motion, 
 drive, do, discuss. 
 
 aggredi (aggredior), -gressus (ad 
 and gradi), to go towards, to attack. 
 
 agmen ( agere j, that which is set in 
 motion, an army on the march, a line 
 (of inarch) ; novissimum agmen, 
 the newest or last line, the rear. 
 
 alere, aluit, altus, to nourish, sup- 
 port. 
 
 alienus, (alius), belonging to another^ 
 foreign, unfavorable. 
 
 aliqui, indef. adj., any. 
 
 alius, -a, -ud (gen.-ius, dat. -I), adj. 
 or pron., one of any number, another, 
 
 Alpes, the Al/>s. 
 
 alter, -era, -erum (gen. -lus, dat. -1), 
 adj. or pron., one of two, the other. 
 
 altitude, height, depth cf. altus. 
 
 altus, high or deep. 
 
 amicitia, friendship ; cf. aniicus, 
 fritnd, 
 
 amicus, friend. 
 
 amittere, -misit, -missus, to let (a 
 thing) go away, send away, lose. 
 
 amor (amare), love, desire. 
 
 amplus, ample, much, great, 
 
 anceps, -cipitis (ambo, both and 
 caput, a head), having a head on 
 both sides, double, doubtful. 
 
 angustiae, -arum (angustus), nar- 
 rowness, straits, a narrow pass. 
 
 angustus, narrow. 
 
 animadvertere (animum, ad, and 
 vertere), to turn the mind or atten- 
 tion to, notice (in this sense takes 
 simple ace us.) ; in hominem ani- 
 madvertere, to punish a man ; cf. 
 the Eng. expression to attend to, in 
 sense of to punish. 
 
 animus, soul, mind, feeling, courage- 
 
annus 
 
 293 
 
 castra 
 
 annus, a year. 
 
 annuus (annus), annual, for a year. 
 
 ante, adv. and prep , before. 
 
 antea, adv., before. 
 
 antiquus (ante), old, ancient, former. 
 
 aperire, -peruit, -pertus, to uncover, 
 open ; the partic. a^ertus is com- 
 monly used as a simple adj. mean- 
 ing uncovered, open. 
 
 appellare, to call (by name). 
 
 Aprilis, -is, masc. (probably from 
 aperire, too/ten), the month of April ; 
 also very frequently an adj. 
 
 apud, prep, with accus., among, near, 
 with. 
 
 Aqultani, the Aqultani. 
 
 Aqultania, Aqnitania. 
 
 Arar or Araris (Ararim accus., and 
 Ararl abl., are found), the name 
 of a Gallic river, the Saone. 
 
 arbitrarl, to judge, think. 
 
 arma, nom. plur. neut., armor, 
 arms. 
 
 ascendere or adscendere, -scendit, 
 -scensus (ad and scandere), to 
 climb up, ascend 
 
 ascensus or adscensus, -us, a climb- 
 ing up, ascent. 
 
 atque, and, and also. 
 
 attingere, -tigit, -tactus, to touch 
 upon, reach. 
 
 auctoritas, advice, authority, influence. 
 
 audacia (audax), boldness, audacity. 
 
 audacter, boldly. 
 
 audere, ausus est, to dare. 
 
 augere, auxit, auctus, trans., to in- 
 crease. 
 
 Aulus, a Roman first or individual 
 name ; generally represented in 
 Lat. authors by the initial A. 
 
 aut, or ; aut . , . aut, either ... or. 
 
 autem, but, moreover. 
 
 auxilium, help, aid ; in plur. auxiliary 
 
 troops. 
 avertere, -vertit, -versus, to turn 
 
 away. 
 avus, grandfather. 
 
 B. 
 
 bellare, to war, wage war. 
 bellicosus (bellum), warlike. 
 bellum, war. 
 beneficium (bene, well, and facere), 
 
 well-doing, a favor. 
 biduum, the space of two days, tivo 
 
 days. 
 biennium (bis and annus), the space 
 
 of two years. 
 bipartite, adv. (bis, twice, and pars), 
 
 in two parts. 
 bonitas, goodness. 
 bonus, good, goodly. 
 brachium, the fore-arm, the arm. 
 
 C. 
 
 cadere, cecidit, casurus, to fall. 
 Caesar, -is, full name Caius Julius 
 
 Caesar, a great Roman, writer, 
 
 general, statesman. 
 Caius, more correctly written Gaius 
 
 or Gajus, a Roman first name, 
 
 usually represented by C. 
 calamitas, disaster, calamity. 
 capere (capio), cepit, captus, to take. 
 captivus, a captive. 
 caput, -itis, a head. 
 carrus, a cart. 
 
 Cassianus, adj., pertaining to Cassius. 
 castellum, a small fort, a castle. 
 castra, -orum (the sing, castrum, a 
 
 fortress, is not found in Caesar), a 
 
 camp. 
 
casus 
 
 294 
 
 conari 
 
 casus, -us (cadere, to fall), a fulling, 
 accident, misfortune, chance. 
 
 Catamantalcedes, -is, a Gallic name. 
 
 causa, cause, reason. 
 
 cavere, cavit, cautus, to take care, 
 beware of. 
 
 celeriter.adv. (celerius, celerrime), 
 quickly. 
 
 Celtse, the Kelts. 
 
 census, -us (censere, to reckon), a 
 numbering or rating, a census. 
 
 centum, indeel., one hundred. 
 
 certus, sure, certain ; hominem cer- 
 tiorem facere, to inform a man. 
 
 cibarius, pertaining to food ; cibaria, 
 neut. plur. as noun, provisions. 
 
 circiter, adv., about. 
 
 circuitus, -us (circum and Ire), a go- 
 ing around, a circuit. 
 
 circum, prep, with accus., around, 
 about. 
 
 circumvenlre, -venit, -ventus, to 
 come around, surround, impose upon, 
 circumvent. 
 
 citerior, adj. in comp. (positive not 
 found), nearer, hither; citerior 
 Gallia, Gaul on this side the Alps, 
 i. e. on the TComan or eastern side ; 
 ulterior Gallia, Gaul beyond the 
 Alps. 
 
 citra, prep, with accus., on this side 
 
 of- 
 
 ci vitas, citizenship, a state, the body- 
 politic. 
 
 claudere, clausit, clausus, to close. 
 
 cliens, a client, dependent. 
 
 coemere (con and emere), -emit, 
 -emptus, to bin/ up. 
 
 ccepit, ccepisse (he, she, it) began. 
 
 coercere, to enclose on all sides, re- 
 strain, coerce. 
 
 cogere, coegit, coaetus (con, to- 
 
 gether, and agere, to drive, lead), to 
 drive together, colled, coin/>el. 
 
 cognoscere, cognovit, cognitus, to 
 learn thoroughly ; cognovit, he has 
 learned, he knows. 
 
 cohortari, to urge strongly, encourage. 
 
 collis, masc. by exception, a hill. 
 
 collocare, to place together, set tip, es* 
 tablish. 
 
 colloqul, -locutus, to confer, converse. 
 
 comburere, -bussit, -bustus, to burn 
 up, consume. 
 
 commeare, to go back and forth. 
 
 commemorare, to call to mind, to 
 mention. 
 
 committere, -misit, -missus, to cause 
 to go together, commit, cause; proa- 
 lium committere, to join battle. 
 
 commode, adv. (con and mcdus, 
 a measure in due measure), conven- 
 iently. 
 
 commonefacere (commonefacio), 
 -fecit, -factus, to put in mind, re- 
 mind forcibly. 
 
 commovere, -movit, -motus, to 
 move deeply. 
 
 communlre, to fortify strongly. 
 
 commutare, to change entirely. 
 
 commutatio (mutare, to change), a 
 changing, change. 
 
 comparare (con, intensive and pa- 
 rare), to prepare with zeal. 
 
 comperire, -perit, -pertus, to find 
 out certainly (by searching or in- 
 quiry). 
 
 complures, complura or compluria 
 neut., very many. 
 
 comportare, to bring together. 
 
 complectl, -plexus, to embrace. 
 
 complere, -plevit, -pletus, to fill out, 
 complete. 
 
 conari, to try. 
 
conatum 
 
 295 
 
 convemre 
 
 conatum, a thing attempted, an at- 
 tempt, undertaking. 
 
 c5natus, -us (conarl), an attempt. 
 
 concedere, -cessit, -cessus, to go 
 awai/, yield. 
 
 concidere, -cidit, -cisus (con, in- 
 tensive, anil caedere, to cut), to cut 
 to pieces, to kill. 
 
 conciliate, to bring together, win over. 
 
 concilium, an assembly, conned ; cf. 
 , consilium, a plan, counsel. 
 
 concursus, -us (con and currere, to 
 run), a running together. 
 
 condicio and, less correctly, conditio 
 (condlcere), an agreement, condi- 
 tion. 
 
 condonare, to give up, to pardon. 
 
 conducere, -duxit, -ductus, to bring 
 together, hire. 
 
 conferre, -tulit, collatus, to bring to- 
 gether, collect, compare ; where con 
 is intensive, to bring vigorously or 
 rapidly, se conferre, to betake one's 
 self. 
 
 confertus (confercire, to cram to- 
 gether), pressed together, crowded. 
 
 conficere, -fecit, -fectus (con and 
 facere), to accomplish, complete. 
 
 confidere, -fisus est (with act. mean- 
 ing), to trustfully, confide in. 
 
 confirmare, to strengthen, establish, 
 encourage, affirm. 
 
 conicere or conjicere (conicio), 
 -jecit, -jectus, to throw or put to- 
 gether, to conjecture, to hurl withforce. 
 
 conjuratio (con and jurare, to swear, 
 take oath], a swearing together, a 
 conspiracy. 
 
 conligare or colligare, to fasten to- 
 gether. 
 
 conquirere, -qulsivit, -qulsltus, 
 (con and quaerere) to search for. 
 
 consanguineus, adj. or noun (con 
 
 and sanguis, blood), akin by blood. 
 consciscere, -sclvit, -scltus, to 
 
 decree, determine. 
 conscius (con, with, and seire, to 
 
 know), knowing with one's self or 
 
 with others, conscious. 
 conscribere, -scrlpsit, -scriptus, to 
 
 write together, enroll. 
 cSnsequi, -secutus, to follow up, to 
 
 obtain. 
 considere, -sedit, -sessurus, to sit 
 
 down (used especially of a large 
 
 number), to hold a session, to en- 
 camp. 
 
 consilium, a plan. 
 
 consistere, -stitit, to take a stand,stop, 
 consolari, to console, to comfort. 
 conspectus, -us (conspicere, to see), 
 
 sight. 
 
 conspicari, to get sight of, to see. 
 constituere, -stituit, -stitutus, to 
 
 set together, arrange, determine. 
 consuescere, -suevit, -suetus, to 
 
 accustom one's self; in pf. to have 
 
 accustomed one's self, to be wont. 
 consul, consul, the title of the chief 
 
 executive officer at "Rome, 
 consumere, -sumpsit, -sumptus 
 
 (con, intensive, wholly, and su- 
 
 mere, to take), to consume, destroy. 
 contendere, -tendit, -tentus, to 
 
 strive, hasten. 
 continenter, continually. 
 continere, -tinuit, -tentus, to hold 
 
 together, bound. 
 contra, adv., and prep, with accus., 
 
 against. 
 
 contumelia, effrontery, insult. 
 convemre, -venit, -vent us, to come 
 
 together, to meet; convenit, it is 
 
 agreed, it is fitting. 
 
conventus 
 
 296 
 
 dens 
 
 conventus, -us, a coming together, a 
 meeting. 
 
 convertere, -vertit, -versus, to turn 
 or wheel about. 
 
 convocare, to call together, summon. 
 
 copia, plenty ; in plur. forces, troops. 
 
 copiSsus, well-supplied, copious. 
 
 cotldie or quotidie, daily. 
 
 creare, to make, to elect. 
 
 cremare, to burn. 
 
 crescere, crevit, cretus, intrans., to 
 grow, increase; cf. the trans, augere. 
 
 cultus, -us, culture, way of living, 
 civilization. 
 
 cum, prep, witli abl., with. 
 
 cum (quum), conj , when, since, al- 
 though. 
 
 cupere (cupio), cupivit or -lit, cu- 
 pltus, to long for, desire, be well- 
 disposed toward (in the last sense 
 it takes a dat). 
 
 cupide, eagerly. 
 
 cupiditas, desire, cupidity. 
 
 cupidus, desirous, fond. 
 
 curare, to take care. 
 
 custos, -odis, a guard. 
 
 D. 
 
 damnare, to condemn. 
 
 dare, dedit, datus, to give. 
 
 de, prep, with abl.,yrom, down from, 
 
 concerning, for. 
 debere, debuit, debitus (de and ha- 
 
 bere, to have or keep from some one], 
 
 to owe, to be bound ; debet, he ought. 
 deoem, indec., ten. 
 decipere (decipio), -cepit, -ceptus, 
 
 to catch away, entrap, deceive. 
 decurio (decem), the commander of 
 
 a company of ten cavalry, a decu- 
 
 dediticius, one who has surrendered, a 
 
 captive. 
 
 deditio (dedere, to give up), a sur- 
 render. 
 defendere, -fendit, -fensus, to ward 
 
 off, to defend. 
 defessus (partic. of defetisci, to 
 
 crack open), exhausted. 
 deicere or dejicere (deicio), -jecit, 
 
 -jectus, to cast down. 
 deinde (de and inde), from thence, 
 
 thereafter, next. 
 deliberate (from de and librare, to 
 
 weigh) to weigh well, ponder. 
 deligere, -legit, -lectus, to choose 
 
 from, select. 
 deminuere, -minuit, -minutus (de 
 
 and minus), to lessen. 
 demonstrate, to show. 
 demum, adv., at last. 
 denique, adv., at last, finally. 
 deponere, -posuit, -positus, to place 
 
 aside, lay aside. 
 depopulari, to lay waste. 
 deprecator (deprecari, to beg off, to 
 
 intercede) an intercessor, mediator. 
 deslgnare (signum, a mark), to mark 
 
 out, point out, describe. 
 desistere, -stitit, -stiturus, to stand 
 
 off, to desist. 
 
 desperare, to be hopeless, to despair. 
 despicere (despicio), -spexit, 
 
 -spectus, to look down upon, <o 
 
 despise. 
 destituere, -stituit, -sti tutus, to set 
 
 away from, to abandon. 
 destringere, -strinxit, -strictus, to 
 
 strip off; of a sword, to strip off the 
 
 scabbard, unsheathe, draw. 
 deterrere, to frighten away from, to 
 
 deter. 
 deus, a god. 
 
dexter 
 
 297 
 
 dexter, -tera, -terum, or more fre- 
 quently -tra, -trum, the right ; 
 
 dextra (manus, fern., the hand, 
 
 being understood), the right hand. 
 dicere, dixit, dictus, to say, tell. 
 dictio (dicere), a saying, pleading. 
 dies, -el, masc., sometimes fern., day, 
 
 time. 
 differre, distulit, dilatus, to bear 
 
 apart, differ. 
 difficilis, difficult. 
 dimittere, -misit, -missus, to send 
 
 apart, dismiss. 
 discedere, -cessit, -cessurus, to go 
 
 apart, depart. 
 discere, didicit, to learn. 
 disicere or disjicere (disicio), -je- 
 
 cit, -jectus, to cast apart. 
 disponere, -posuit, -positus, to place 
 
 apart, place here and there. 
 ditissimus, richest. 
 diu, adv., long (used of time, not 
 
 of space), 
 diuturnus, adj. (diu), long (of 
 
 time). 
 
 dividere, -visit, -visus, to divide. 
 dolere, doluit, to feel pain, to grieve 
 
 for. 
 
 dolor, pain, grief. 
 dolus, craft, deceit. 
 domus, us, fern, (lias some forms of 
 
 the -o decl.), a house, a home. 
 dubitare, to doubt, to hesitate. 
 dubitatio, doubt. 
 dubius, doubtful. 
 ducentl (duo and centum), two 
 
 hundred. 
 ducere, duxit, ductus, to lead, draw, 
 
 consider. 
 
 dum, conj., while, until. 
 Dumnorix, -igis, a man's name, 
 duo, duse, duo, irreg., two. 
 
 duodecim (duo and decem), in- 
 
 decl., twelve. 
 dux, -cis (ducere), a leader. 
 
 E. 
 
 educere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 out. 
 
 effeminare, to make effeminate, ener- 
 vate. 
 
 efferre, extulit, elatus, to bear out. 
 ego, / ; see mini, me, nos. 
 egredi (egredior), -gressus, to go 
 
 out. 
 egregius (e and grex, -gis, a herd), 
 
 out of the (common) herd, hence, 
 
 eminent, excellent. 
 emere, emit, emptus, to buy. 
 emittere, -misit, -missus, to let go 
 
 forth, to send oat. 
 enim, for; placed generally after the 
 
 first word of the clause, 
 enuntiare, to speak out or openly, make 
 
 known. 
 eo ; see ire. 
 
 eo, adv., to that place, thither. 
 eodem, adv., to the same place. 
 eques, equitis (equus, a horse), a 
 
 horseman, a knight. 
 equester, equestris, equestre, adj., 
 
 belonging to a horseman, cavalry. 
 equitatus, -us, a collection of horse- 
 men, cavalry. 
 equus (same root as ac-er, sharp), a 
 
 horse. 
 eripere (eripio), -ripuit, -reptus, 
 
 to snatch away. 
 
 esse (sum), fuit, futurus, to be. 
 et, and. 
 
 etiam, even, also. 
 
 evellere, -vellit, -vulsus, to tear out. 
 ex, prep, with abl., out of, from. 
 
exemplum 
 
 298 
 
 Geuava 
 
 exemplum, an example. 
 
 exercitus, -us, an exercised and dis- 
 ciplined body, an army. 
 
 exire, -lit, -itum, to go out. 
 
 exlstimare (ex and eestimare), to 
 estimate, think. 
 
 exlstimatio (exlstimare), estimation, 
 opinion. 
 
 .expedire, to set free from (some- 
 thing) ; the pf. pass, partic. is com- 
 monly used like an adj. in all 
 respects, and means unencumbered, 
 without bdf/f/ttf/e, open. 
 
 explSrator (explorare, to search out), 
 a spy, a scout. 
 
 expugnare (to fight successfully), to 
 take bi/ storm. 
 
 exspectare, to wait for, to expect. 
 
 extremus, outermost, extreme, the end 
 of; cf. reliquus, the rest of. 
 
 F. 
 
 facere (facio), fecit, factus, to make 
 
 or do. 
 
 facile, adv., easi/y. 
 facilis, easy, 
 facultas, opportunity. 
 fames, -is, hunger. 
 familia, a body of slaves, household, 
 
 retinue. 
 familiaris (familia), belonging to the 
 
 household, private, intimate ; as noun, 
 
 a friend. 
 favere, favit, fauturus, to favor; 
 
 takes dat. of person, 
 fere, adv., almost. 
 ferre, tulit, latus, irreg , to bear. 
 ferrum, iron. 
 fides, el, faith, a promise, a promise of 
 
 protection, protection. 
 fieri, factus, to be made, to be done, to 
 
 happen; used as pass, of simple 
 verb facere, but not when it is 
 compounded with a prep. 
 
 filia, daughter. 
 
 filius, son. 
 
 finis, masc. by exception, the end; in 
 plur. limits, confines, territory. 
 
 finitimus (fines, borders, boundaries], 
 bordering upon, neighboring; in plur. 
 masc. usually a noun meaning 
 neighbors. 
 
 firmus, firm, strong. 
 
 flagitare, to ask repeated! '// or earnestly. 
 
 flere, flevit, fletus, to weep. 
 
 nuere, fluxit, fluxus, loflow. 
 
 flumen, a river. 
 
 fortis, brave. 
 
 fortitude (fortis), bravery. 
 
 fortuna, fortune (either good or bad) ; 
 in plur. goods, possessions. 
 
 fossa, that which has been dug, a 
 ditch. 
 
 frater, -tris, brother. 
 
 fraternus, of a brother, brotherly, fra- 
 ternal. 
 
 frigus, -oris, cold, coldness. 
 
 fructus, -us (frui, to enjoy), enjoyment, 
 what one enjoys, fruit. 
 
 frumentarius (frumentum), belong- 
 ing to grain, fruitful. 
 
 frumentum, grain. 
 
 fuga, flight. 
 
 fugitivus, a runaway, deserter. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gallus, a Gaul. 
 Gallia, Gaul. 
 Gallicus, Gallic. 
 Garumna, the Garumna. 
 Genava or Genua, Geneva, a town 
 in Switzerland. 
 
gerere 
 
 299 
 
 incitare 
 
 gerere, gessit, gestus, to earn/ on, 
 wage. 
 
 Germanl, the Germans. 
 
 gladius, a sword. 
 
 gloria, a glory. 
 
 gloriari, to boast, glory. 
 
 Graecl, the Greeks. 
 
 Grsecus, adj., Greek. 
 
 gratia, favor either shown or re- 
 ceived, hence, either kindness or 
 popularity,. 
 
 graviter, heavily, severely ; graviter 
 ferre, to be annoyed at, be angry at. 
 
 H. 
 
 habere, to have, hold. 
 
 Haeduus, a Hceduan, one of the ffcedui. 
 
 Hellenes, the Hellenes. 
 
 Helvetia, the country of the Hel- 
 
 vetii, now Switzerland. 
 Helvetius, Helvetian, of the Helvetii. 
 Helvetil, the Helvetii. 
 hibernus (hiems, winter], belonging 
 
 to winter; hiberna, -orum (with 
 
 castra understood), winter quarters. 
 hie, hasc, hoc, this. 
 hiemare, to pass the winter, to winter. 
 Hispania, Spain. 
 homo, -inis, a human being, man. 
 honor, honor, office. 
 hora, an hour. 
 hortari, to urge. 
 hostis, a stranger, an enemy ; in plur. 
 
 f/t> j enemy. 
 humanitas, refinement. 
 
 ibi, there ; cf. ubi, where, ivhen. 
 ictus, -us, (icere, to strikf), a blow. 
 idem, eadem, idem, the same. 
 
 Idus, -uum, fern, by exception, the. 
 Ides, the 13th of the month, except 
 in March, May, July, and Oct., 
 when they came on the 15th. 
 
 ignorare (in neg. and root of (g)nos- 
 cere), not to know, to be ignorant. 
 
 ille, ilia, illud, that, used of what 
 is remote in contrast to what if 
 near. 
 
 illic (ille), in that place, there, yonder. 
 
 immortalis (in neg. and mors), un- 
 dying, immortal. 
 
 impedimentum, that which impedes, 
 a hindrance,' in plur. the heavy 
 baggage of an army (including the 
 beasts which drew it) ; cf. sar- 
 cinse. 
 
 impedire, -pedivit, -peditus (in, 
 against, and pes, foot], to impede, 
 to place at a disadvantage. 
 
 impendere, no pf. nor pf. partic., 
 intrans., to overhang. 
 
 imperare, to command; provincise 
 milites imperare, to give orders to 
 the province for soldiers. 
 
 imperium, supreme power. 
 
 impetrare, to obtain one's request. 
 
 impetus, -us (in prep, and petere), 
 an attack. 
 
 importare, they bring in, import. 
 
 improbus, above or below the proper 
 standard, base, excessive, wicked, 
 
 improviso, adv. (in neg., pro, before, 
 fore, visus, seen), unexpectedly. 
 
 impune, adv., without punishment, with 
 impunity. 
 
 impunitas, impunity, 
 
 in, prep., into, with accus. ; in, with 
 abi. 
 
 incendere, -cendit, -census, to set 
 fire to; cf. comburere. 
 
 incitare, to urge on, incite. 
 
incolere 
 
 300 
 
 ita 
 
 incolere, -coluit (in prep, and co- 
 lere, to cultivate), to inhabit. 
 
 incommodus, inconvenient ; as a noun 
 in the neut., an inconvenience, a mild 
 term for misfortune. 
 
 lucre dibilis, not to be believed, incred- 
 ible, remarkable. 
 
 inde, from that place, thence ; cf. ibi, 
 there. 
 
 indicium, information. 
 
 inducere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 into, induce. 
 
 inferior, /W r. 
 
 inferre, intulit, illatus, to bear into 
 or upon, to icage upon. 
 
 Snflectere, -fiexit, -flectus, to bend. 
 
 influere, -fluxit, -fluxurus, loflow, or 
 flow into. 
 
 inimicus (in neg and amlcus), un- 
 friendly. 
 
 initium, beginning. 
 
 injuria, injustice, wrong. 
 
 injussu, found only in abl., without 
 command. 
 
 inopia (in neg. and ops, help ; cf. 
 copia, from con and ops), want, 
 scarcity, helplessness. 
 
 inopmans, adj., unexpecting, una- 
 ware. 
 
 Insciens (in neg. and scire, to know), 
 simple adj., though pres. partic. in 
 form, not knowing, unaware. 
 
 Insequi, -secutus, to follow up. 
 
 Insidise, nom. plur. (in, in, and se- 
 dere, to sit), an ambush, treachery. 
 
 inslgnis (in, upon, and signum, a 
 mark), marked, remarkable ; insig- 
 ne, neut. as noun, a mark, badge 
 of office, uniform. 
 
 Insolenter (in neg and solere, to be 
 accustomed), strangely, insolently. 
 
 Instare, -stitit, -staturus, to stand 
 
 upon, to approach, to be near at 
 hand, to press upon. 
 
 instituere, -stituit, -stitutus, to ar- 
 range, construct, instruct. 
 
 institutum, custom, institution. 
 
 instruere, -struxit, -structus, to 
 build into, set in order, draw up. 
 
 intellegere or -ligere, -lexit, -lectus 
 (inter, between, and legere, to 
 choose), to understand, to know. 
 
 inter, prep, with accus., between, 
 among. 
 
 intercedere, -cessit, -cessurus, to go 
 between, to intfrrene. 
 
 intercludere, -clusit, -clusus (inter, 
 between and claudere, to shut), to 
 shut off, cut off'. 
 
 interdiu, adv., by day. 
 
 interdum, adv., sometimes. 
 
 interea, adv., meanwhile. 
 
 interesse, -fuit, -futurus, to be be- 
 tween or among, to take part in; 
 interest, it makes a difference, it 
 interests. 
 
 interficere (interficio), -fecit, -fec- 
 tus, to kill. 
 
 interim, meanwhile. 
 
 intermittere, -misit, -missus, to 
 cause to go between, leave off, in- 
 terrupt. 
 
 internecio, destruction, extermination. 
 
 interpres, -etis, an interpreter. 
 
 intervallum (inter, between, and 
 vallum, the breastwork of a camp), 
 a distance between, an interval. 
 
 invitus, unwilling. 
 
 ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive or em- 
 phatic pron., self. 
 
 ire (eo), ivit, itum, to go. 
 
 is, ea, id, dem. pron , this, that ; he, 
 she, it. 
 
 ita, adv., so. 
 
itaque 
 
 301 
 
 Httera 
 
 itaque, and so, therefore. 
 item, adv., likewise, also. 
 iter, itineris, neut., journey, route, 
 march. 
 
 J. 
 
 jactare, to throw about ; when used of 
 words, to discuss. 
 
 jam, adv., at tltis time (as contrasted 
 with the past or future), at last, 
 already. 
 
 jubere, jussit, jussus, to order. 
 
 judicare, to judge. 
 
 judicium, a judgment, a trial, a court 
 of justice. 
 
 jugum, that which joins, a yoke (con- 
 quered armies, in token of sub- 
 mission, were often compelled to 
 pass under a yoke consisting of a 
 spear set on two uprights, cf. Eng. 
 subjugate) a (ijoke- shaped) hill, a 
 ridge. 
 
 jumentum, a yoke or draught animal, 
 beast of burden. 
 
 jungere, junxit, junctus, to join. 
 
 Jura, a mountain chain extending 
 from the Rhone to the Rhine. 
 
 jus, juris, right, law, justice. 
 
 jusjurandum (really two words, jus 
 and jurandum, and declined as 
 two), an oath. 
 
 justitia (Justus, just), justice, sense of 
 justice, uprightness. 
 
 juvare, juvit, jutus, to help ; juvat, 
 impers., it pleases. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kalendse, -arum, the Calends, the first 
 day of a month. 
 
 L. 
 
 lacessere, lacesslvit or lacessiit, 
 lacessitus, to provoke, assail. 
 
 lacrima, a tear. 
 
 lacus, -us, a lake. 
 
 largiri, largitus, to give bountifully, 
 yive bribes. 
 
 largiter, largely, bountifully. 
 
 largitio, lavish giving, bribery, liber- 
 ality. 
 
 late, widely. 
 
 latus, wide, broad. 
 
 latitude, width. 
 
 latus, -eris, the side. 
 
 legatio, embassy ; cf. legatus, am- 
 bassador. 
 
 legatus, lieutenant, ambassador. 
 
 legio, a legion ; the Roman legion was 
 a body of soldiers, numbering in 
 the army of CaBsar about 3600 men. 
 
 Lemannus, the name of a lake, 
 Leman or Geneva. 
 
 lenitas (lenis, smooth), smoothness, 
 gentleness. 
 
 lex, -gis, la uo. 
 
 liberalitas ( liber, /ree), the quality of 
 a freeman, generosity. 
 
 libere (from adj. liber) , freely. 
 
 Ifberl (the sing., meaning child, not 
 found), children. 
 
 libertas, freedom, liberty. 
 
 liceri, to bid (at an auction). 
 
 licet, it is permitted; el licet, it is 
 permitted to him, he may. 
 
 Lingeries, the Line/ones. 
 
 lingua, the tongue, language. 
 
 linter, -tris, fern, by exception, a 
 boat. 
 
 littera or litera, a written sign, a 
 letter of the alphabet ; in plur. letters, 
 a letter (epistle), literature. 
 
locus 
 
 302 
 
 multitude 
 
 locus, a place ; loca, nom. plur. (as 
 if from nom. sing, locum). 
 
 longe, adv., far. 
 
 longitude, length. 
 
 loqul, locutus, to speak. 
 
 Lucius, a Roman first name, usually 
 represented by L. 
 
 lux, -cis, light. 
 
 M. 
 
 magis (comp. of magnopere), more. 
 
 magistratus, -us, a civil office, a civil 
 officer, magistrate. 
 
 magnopere, adv. (magno and 
 opere), with great toil, greatly; 
 magis, comp., more ; maxime, sup., 
 very f/reatly, most, especially. 
 
 magnus, great, large. 
 
 major (comp of magmis), greater; 
 majores natu or simply maj5res, 
 those greater by birth, ancestors, elders. 
 
 maleficium (male, adv., badly, and 
 facere), wrong-doing, an evil deed. 
 
 mandare (manus, the hand, and 
 dare) , to give into one's hand, commit. 
 
 manus, -us, fern, by exception, a 
 hand, an armed force (as the instru- 
 ment by which war is waged). 
 
 matara, a javelin used by the Gauls. 
 
 mater, -tris, mother. 
 
 matrimonium, marriage. 
 
 Matrona, the Matrona. 
 
 maturare, to hasten. 
 
 maturus, ripe, early. 
 
 maxime, very greatly, most, especially 
 
 maximus, irregular sup. of magnus, 
 greatest. 
 
 me, accus., me ; see ego. 
 
 medius, adj., the middle of; cf. the 
 meaning of summus and ex- 
 tremus. 
 
 memoria, memory. 
 
 mensis, -is, masc. by exception, a 
 
 month. 
 
 mercator, merchant. 
 mererl, meritus, to merit, deserve, 
 
 earn. 
 
 meritum (mererl), desert, merit. 
 metirl, mensus, to measure. 
 meus, mi/, mine. 
 mihi, dat, me ; see ego. 
 militaris (miles), belonging to a 
 
 soldier, m Hilary. 
 miles, -itis, soldier. 
 mllle (in sing, usually an inclecl. adj. ; 
 
 in plur. a noun decl. like mare), a 
 
 thousand. 
 minime, adv. in sup., least, by no 
 
 means ; cf. minus, 
 minimus (irreg. sup. of parvus), 
 
 least, very small. 
 
 minor (comp. of parvus), smaller, less. 
 minuere, minuit, minutus (minus), 
 
 to lessen. 
 minus, adv. in comp., less; minime, 
 
 sup , least. 
 mittere, mlsit, missus, to let go, 
 
 send. 
 
 modo, adv., only. 
 molere, moluit, molitus, to grind. 
 monere, to remind, warn, advise. 
 mons, masc. by exception, a moun- 
 tain. 
 morarl, trans, or intrans., to delay ; 
 
 distinguish mori, to die. 
 mori (rarely moriri), mortuus, to 
 
 die. 
 
 mors, death. 
 mos, moris, custom ; in plur. customs, 
 
 manners, character. 
 movere, movit, motus, to move. 
 mulier, -is, a woman. 
 multitudo, a great number, multitude. 
 
multus 
 
 303 
 
 oblivisci 
 
 multus, much ; plur. many ; plus, 
 
 comp. neut. ; plurimus, sup. 
 munlre (moenia, walls), to wall, to 
 
 fortify- 
 
 munitio, a fortifying, a fortification. 
 murus, a wall. 
 
 N. 
 
 nam, conj.,for. 
 
 natura, nature, disposition. 
 
 navis, a ship, a boat. 
 
 ne, conj., that . . . not, not to, lest; 
 
 after words of fearing, that. 
 nee ; see neque. 
 necessario, adv., necessarily, of 
 
 necessity. 
 necessarius, necessary ; as noun, a 
 
 dose friend or near relative. 
 negare, to say . . . not, to deny. 
 nemo, nemini dat. (ne and homo), 
 
 no man, no one ; the gen. and abl. 
 
 sing, of this word are supplied by 
 
 nullius and nullo. 
 neque or nee, adv. and conj., and 
 
 not ; neque . . . neque, neither 
 
 . . . nor. 
 nervus, a sinew, tendon, nerve ; in plur. 
 
 power, strength. 
 neve or neu (ne and ve, or), or 
 
 not. 
 nex, necis, death, especially a violent 
 
 death. 
 nihilum, nothing; nihil, the indecl. 
 
 form, is more common, 
 nisi, if not, unless. 
 nitl, nisus, or nixus, to rest upon, 
 
 rely upon, strive. 
 
 nobilis, well-krown, noble bi/ birth. 
 nobilitas, nobility; cf. nobilis, high- 
 born. 
 noctu, adv., by night. 
 
 nolle, noluit (ne and velle), to be 
 
 unwilling. 
 nomen, a name. 
 nominating adv., by name. 
 non, adv., not. 
 nonaginta, ninety. 
 nondum, not yet. 
 nonnullus, not none, some. 
 nonnunquam, not never, sometimes ; 
 
 cf. nonnullus. 
 
 Noricus, of the Nor id, Noric. 
 nos, noiu. or accus. plur., we or us. 
 noster, -tra, -trum, our. 
 novem, indecl., nine. 
 novus, new ; novae res, new things, 
 
 revolution. 
 nox, -ctis, night. 
 nubere, nupsit, nuptus, to veil one's 
 
 self, hence, to marry (said of the 
 
 woman) ; hominl nubere, to veil 
 
 one's self for a man, marry a man. 
 nudus, naked, unprotected. 
 nullus (gen.-Ius, dat. -i),adj.(ne,nof, 
 
 and ulluSj am/), not any, no, none. 
 num, interrogative particle ; in direct 
 
 questions expects a neg. answer, 
 numerus, a number. 
 nuntiare, to announce. 
 nuntius (perhaps akin to novus, 
 
 new], a bearer of news, messenger, 
 
 news. 
 nuper, recently. 
 
 O. 
 
 ob, prep, with accus., on account of; in 
 composition, in the way of, against. 
 
 obseratus, one bound to service for debt, 
 a debtor. 
 
 obicereor-jicere(obicio),-jecit,-jec- 
 tus, to throw in the ivay or against. 
 
 oblivisci, -Htus, to forget. 
 
obsecrare 
 
 304 
 
 perfringere 
 
 obsecrare (ob and sacrum, sacred), 
 
 to ask on religious grounds, io beseech. 
 obses, obsidis, a hostage ; hostages 
 
 were human beings given by on<; 
 
 person or nation to another, in 
 
 order to guarantee the fulfilment 
 
 of an agreement ; if the agreement 
 
 was broken, the hostages might be 
 
 killed, 
 obstringere, -,strinxit, -strictus, to 
 
 bind. 
 obtinere, -tinuit, -tentus, to hold, 
 
 possess, OCCUJH/. 
 
 occasus, -us, a falling, setting. 
 occldere, -cldit, -clsus (ob and 
 
 caedere, to cut), to cut down, kill. 
 occultare, to conceal. 
 occupare, to seize, take, possession of. 
 Oceanus, the ocean. 
 Ocelum, a town in Cisalpine Gaul, 
 octo, eight. 
 octodecim, eighteen. 
 octoginta, indecl. adj., eighty. 
 oculus, an eye. 
 odisse, odit, to hate ; found only in 
 
 the pf. system, and in the pf. is 
 
 pres. in sense, 
 offendere, -fendit, -fensus, to hit 
 
 against, stumble, blunder, ojfend. 
 offensio (ofiendere), a striking 
 
 against, a stumbling, offence. 
 omnino, adv., altogether, in all. 
 omnis, all, every. 
 oportet, impers. verb, it is necessary, 
 
 it behooves. 
 
 oppidum, a stronghold, a town, [siege. 
 oppugnare, to fight against, storm, be~ 
 ops, ability ; in plur. means, resources. 
 opus, -eris, a work, a piece of work. 
 orare, to entreat, bey. 
 oratio, a speech, oration. 
 Orgetorix, -igis, an Helvetian chief. 
 
 oriens, adj., rising. 
 
 oriri, ortus, to rise. 
 
 ostendere, ostendit, ostentus (oba 
 for ob, and tendere, to stretch), 
 to stretch in the way of, show. 
 
 P. 
 
 pabulatio (pabular!), a getting of 
 
 food, a foraging. 
 pabulum (pascere, to feed, pasture), 
 
 that which feeds, food, especially for 
 
 animals,/orfe/er. 
 pacare, to pacify, to subdue. 
 paene, almost. 
 pagus, canton, district. 
 par, paris, adj., equal. 
 parare, to make ready, prepare. 
 paratus (pf. pass, partic. of parare), 
 
 prepared, ready. 
 
 parere, to appear at call (as a serv- 
 ant), to obey ; takes dative, 
 pars, part, direction. 
 parvus, minor, minimus, little, small. 
 passus, -us, a pace ; the lloman mile 
 
 was a thousand paces, and the 
 
 Roman (double) pace was a little 
 
 less than five feet, 
 pater, -tris, father. 
 patere, patuit, to lie open, extend, 
 pati, passus, to endure, permit. 
 pauci (sing, very rare), /CM?. 
 pax, pacis, peace. 
 pellere, pepuli, pulsus, to drive. 
 per, prep, with accus., through. 
 perducere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 through. 
 perficere (perficio), -fecit, -fectus, 
 
 to accomplish, finish. 
 perfringere (per and frangere, to 
 
 break], -fregit, -fractus, to break 
 
 through . 
 
perfuga 
 
 305 
 
 praeficere 
 
 perfuga, masc. by meaning, a run- 
 away, deserter. 
 perfugere (perfugio), -fugit, to run 
 
 away, desert. 
 
 periculum, that which tests, a peril. 
 peritus (perlrl, to try), experienced, 
 
 skilled. 
 permovere, -movit, -motus, to move 
 
 thoroughly or deeply, to influence 
 
 strongly. 
 
 pernicies, -el (nex), destruction. 
 perpaucus, very little; in plur. very 
 
 fetv. 
 perrumpere, -rupit, -ruptus, to 
 
 break through. 
 
 persequi, -secutus, to follow up, pur- 
 sue. 
 
 perseverare, to continue, persist. 
 persolvere, -solvit, -solutus, to loose 
 
 thoroughly, to pay in full. 
 persuadere, persuasit, persuasum, 
 
 to persuade. 
 
 perterrere, to frighten thoroughly. 
 pertinere, -tinuit, stretch oat, tend, 
 
 pertain. 
 pervenlre, -venit, -ventum, to come 
 
 through, arrive. 
 pes, pedis, a foot of man or beast, 
 
 and also the measure of length, 
 petere, petivit, petitus, to aim at, 
 
 seek. 
 phalanx, -gis, a close battle array, a 
 
 phalanx. 
 
 pllum, a heavy javelin. 
 plebs, -bis, plebeians, common people. 
 plurimus, irreg. sup. of multus, very 
 
 much, most ; in plur., very many. 
 plus,pluris (neut.comp. of multus), 
 
 more. 
 
 poena, punishment, penalty. 
 polliceri, pollicitus, to promise. 
 ponere, posuit, positus, to place. 
 
 p5ns, masc. by exception, a bridge. 
 
 popular!, to lay waste. 
 
 populatio (popularl), a laying waste, 
 ravaging. 
 
 populus, people. 
 
 portare, to carry. 
 
 port5rium (portare), a tax, espe- 
 cially a tax paid on goods im- 
 ported. 
 
 poscere, poposcit, to* ask urgently, 
 demand. 
 
 posse, potuit (potis, able, and esse, 
 to be), to be able. 
 
 possessio, a possession. 
 
 post, prep, with accus., after, behind. 
 
 postea, adv., after that, ajlerwards. 
 
 posterus (post), coming after, Jollow- 
 ing. 
 
 postquam, conj., later than, after, as 
 soon as. 
 
 postrldie, adv. (posterus and dies ; 
 cf. pridie) , on the day after ; postrl- 
 die ejus diei, on the day after this 
 day, on the following day. 
 
 potens, being able, powei'ful. 
 
 potentia (potens), power. 
 
 potestas (posse), power, lawful au- 
 thority. 
 
 potirl, potitus, to obtain; takes abl. 
 
 praecedere, -cessit, -cessus, to pre- 
 cede, surpass. 
 
 praecipere (praecipio), -cepit, -cep- 
 tus, to take beforehand, to anticipate, 
 to give rules, instruct., direct. 
 
 prseesse, -fuit, to be over, to com' 
 mand; cf. praeficere, tn put in com- 
 mand. 
 
 praeferre, -tulit, -latus, to bear before, 
 prefer, choose. 
 
 prseflcere (praeficio), -fecit, -fectus, 
 to put before, set over, put in com' 
 mand. 
 
 20 
 
praemitteie 
 
 306 
 
 Fyrenseus 
 
 praemittere, -misit, -missus, to send 
 before. 
 
 praeoptare, to choose rather, prefer. 
 
 praesens (in form, a partic. from 
 prseesse), present, immediate. 
 
 praesentia (prae and esse), a being 
 present, presence ; in praesentia, at 
 present. 
 
 praesertim, especially. 
 
 praesidium, a sitting before, a guard. 
 
 praestare, -stitit, -status, to stand be- 
 fore, excel, furnish ; praestat, it is 
 better. 
 
 praeter, prep, with accus., along by, 
 beyond, except. 
 
 praeterire, -lit, -itus, to <jo by, pass 
 by; praeterita, things gone bij, the 
 past. 
 
 praeterquam, adv., further than, be- 
 yond, besides. 
 
 praetor (praB and ire), a leader, com- 
 mander, judge, governor. 
 
 preces, prayers. 
 
 prendere (also written prehendere), 
 prendit, prensus, to grasp. 
 
 pretium, a price. 
 
 pridie, adv. (primus and dies; cf. 
 postridie), on the day before ; pridie 
 ej as diei, on the day before this day, 
 on the preceding day. 
 
 primum, adv., in the first place, 
 first. 
 
 primus, first. 
 
 princeps, -cipis, adj. or noun, chief. 
 
 principatus, -us, leadership. 
 
 pristinus, former. 
 
 prius, adv. in comp., sooner; prius 
 quam or priusquam, conj., sooner 
 than, before. 
 
 privatim, privately, as private citizens. 
 
 prlvatus, belonging to an individual, 
 private. 
 
 pro, prep, with abl., in front of, in 
 behalf of , instead of , for, in propor- 
 tion to. 
 
 probare, to test, prove, approve. 
 
 prodere, -didit, -ditus, to put forth, 
 transmit, hand down. 
 
 proelium, battle. 
 
 profectio, a setting out, departure. 
 
 proficisci, -fectus (pro and facere, 
 to make forward, make headway), set 
 out, depart. 
 
 prohibere, to keep away, prevent. 
 
 proicere or -jicere (proicio), -jecit, 
 -jectus, to throw before or forth, fi 'ing 
 aicay. 
 
 prope, adv. and prep, with accus., 
 near; sup. proxime. 
 
 propellere, -pulit, -pulsus, to drive 
 before. 
 
 propinquus, near; as noun, a rela- 
 tive. 
 
 proponere, -posuit, -positus, to put 
 or set forth, dtclare. 
 
 propter, prep, with accus., on account 
 
 f- 
 
 propterea, adv., for this reason. 
 prospicere (prospicio), -spexit, 
 
 -spectus, to look forward, look out 
 
 for. 
 
 provincia, province. 
 proxime, adv., latest, last, next. 
 proximus, nearest. 
 publice, publicly, by public authority. 
 publicus, public. 
 Publius, a Roman first name, usually 
 
 represented by the initial P. 
 puer, -I, a child, boy. 
 pugna, a fight. 
 pugnare, to fight. 
 purgare, to make clear, clear. 
 putare, to think. 
 Pyrenaeus, Pyrenean,ofthe Pyrenees. 
 
qua 
 
 307 
 
 repellere 
 
 Q. 
 
 qua, where, 
 
 quadraginta, indecl. adj., forty. 
 
 quadringenti, adj., /our hundred; cf. 
 
 quadraginta, indecl., forty. 
 quserere, quaeslvit or -lit, quaesitus, 
 
 to seek ; cf. queri, to complain. 
 qualis, adj., of what sort. 
 quam, adv. and conj., how, as, than; 
 
 with sup. denotes the highest pos- 
 
 sible degree. 
 quantus, adj. (quam, how), how 
 
 great, as much as; after tantus 
 
 (.so great), quantus maybe trans- 
 
 lated as. 
 quare (qua and re), on account of 
 
 which thing, wherefore. 
 quartus, fourth. 
 quattuor, indecl., four. 
 -que, conj., and ; enclitic. 
 queri, questus, to complain. 
 qui, quae, quod, who, which, what; 
 
 also used as interrogative adj. 
 quidem, indeed ; in Cresar mostly in 
 
 the phrase ne . . . quidem, en- 
 
 closing the emphatic word, thus 
 
 ne Caesar quidem, not even C&sar. 
 quin, conj., when used with the ind., 
 
 but, nay more, in fact ; when used 
 
 with the su\)jv.,that, but that, that not. 
 quindecim"(quinque and decem), 
 
 fifteen. 
 
 quingenti, fice hundred. 
 quini, distributive, five to each, five 
 
 at a time. 
 
 qulntus, fifth. 
 
 quis, quae, quid, indefinite pron., 
 
 any one, anything. 
 quis, quae, quid, interrogative pron., 
 
 who ? which ? what ? 
 
 quisquam, quaequam, quidquam, 
 any one, anything; used in neg. 
 clauses. 
 
 quisque,quaeque,quidque or quod- 
 que, each one, every one. 
 
 quod, conj., because. 
 
 quoque, conj., also. 
 
 quotldianus, daily. 
 
 quotidie, adv., daily. 
 
 quum, conj ; see cum. 
 
 R. 
 
 rapina (rapere, to seize), plundering. 
 ratio, a reckoning, account, considera- 
 tion, plan, reason. 
 ratis, a raft, 
 recens, fresh, recent. 
 recipere (recipio), -cepit, -ceptus, 
 
 to take back, receive ; se recipere, 
 
 to betake oneself, to retreat. 
 redimere, -emit, -emptus, to buy 
 
 back, buy up. 
 redintegrare, to make whole again, 
 
 renew. 
 
 redire, -il, -itiirus, to go back. 
 reditio, a going back, return. 
 reducere, -duxit, -ductus, to lead 
 
 back, withdraw. 
 referre, -tulit, -latus, to bring back, 
 
 report. 
 
 regnum, royal poirer, kingdom. 
 reicere or rejicere (reicio), -jecit, 
 
 -jectus, to throw back. 
 relinquere, -liquit, -lictus, to leave. 
 reliquus, adj., the rest of, remaining. 
 reminisci, to remember. 
 removere, -movit, -motus, to move 
 
 back, remove. [ port. 
 
 renuntiare, to bring back word, re- 
 repellere, -pulit, -pulsus, to drive 
 
 back. 
 
 r T? 
 
repentmus 
 
 308 
 
 silva 
 
 repentmus, sudden. 
 
 reperire, repperit, repertus, to find 
 
 out. 
 reprehendere, -hendit, -hensus, to 
 
 hold back, blame. 
 
 repugnare, to fight back, be opposed. 
 res, rel, a thing (in the widest sense) ; 
 
 its translation will vary widely 
 
 with the context, 
 rescindere, -scidit, -scissus, to cut 
 
 away, break i/oicti. 
 resciscere, -scivit or -sciit, -scltus, 
 
 to find out. 
 resistere, -stitit, to stand back, stop, 
 
 resist. 
 respondere, -spondit, -sponsus, to 
 
 answer^ 
 
 responsum, the thing answered, a reply. 
 respublica (also written as two words, 
 
 res publica, and always decl. as 
 
 two), the commonweal, state, republic. 
 restituere, -stituit, -stitutus, to set 
 
 up again, restore. 
 
 retinere, -tinuit, -tentus, to holdback. 
 reverti, -versus, dep., to return ; in 
 
 the pf. tenses, the stem of act. 
 
 form revertit was used by Caesar. 
 Rhenus, the Rhine. 
 Rhodanus, the. Rhone. 
 ripa, the bank of a river. 
 rogare, to ask. 
 
 Roman!, Romanorum, the Romans. 
 Romanus, adj., Roman. 
 rota, a wheel. 
 rursus, adv. (for reversus, from re- 
 
 vertere), turned back, back, again. 
 
 S. 
 
 saepe, adv., often. 
 
 salus, -utis, a sound condition, health, 
 welfare, safety. 
 
 sarcinse, sacks, bundles, especially 
 soldiers' packs (carried by each 
 soldier) ; cf. impedimenta. 
 
 satis, adv. or adj., sufficiently, enough. 
 
 satisfacere (satisfacio), -iecit, -fac- 
 turus.to do enough, satisfy, apologize. 
 
 scelus, -eris, a crime. 
 
 scire, scivit, scitus, to know. 
 
 scutum, a shield, oblong, wooden and 
 covered with leather. 
 
 secrete, separately, in private. 
 
 secundus, following, second, favorable 
 (a wind following or right astern 
 would be a. favorable wind). 
 
 sed, conj , but. 
 
 sedecim (sex and decem), indecl. 
 numeral, six and ten, sixteen. 
 
 seditiosus, seditious. 
 
 sementis, a sowing, planting. 
 
 semper, always. 
 
 senatus, -us, a bodi/ of old men, a 
 senate. 
 
 senex, senis, an old man. 
 
 seni (sex), distributive, six to each, 
 six at a time. 
 
 sentlre, sensit, sensus, to feel, per- 
 ceive, think. 
 
 separatim, separately. 
 
 septentrio or septentriones, the 
 Great Bear, the north. 
 
 Septimus, seventh. 
 
 sepultura, a burying, burial. 
 
 Sequana, fern., the Seine. 
 
 Sequani, the Sequani. 
 
 sequi, secutus, to follow. 
 
 servitus, -utis (servus, a slave), 
 servitude. 
 
 seu ; see sive. 
 
 sex, six. 
 
 sexaginta, sixty. 
 
 si, conj., if. 
 
 silva, a forest. 
 
simul 
 
 309 
 
 suscipere 
 
 simul, adv , at the same time, at once. 
 sin (si and ne, not), but if. 
 sine, prep, with abl., without. 
 singuli, one to each, one at a time. 
 sinister, -tra, -trum, on the left side, 
 
 left; sinistra (manus), the left, 
 
 hand; cf. dextra. 
 sive, conj. (si and vel), or if; sive 
 
 . . . sive, whether . . . or, eithtr 
 
 . . . or. 
 
 socer, father-in-law. 
 socius, an ally. 
 
 sol, masc. by exception, the sun. 
 solum, adv., only; non solum, . . . 
 
 sed etiam, not only, . . . but also. 
 solum, the soil, the around. 
 solus (gen. -lus, dat. -I), adj., alone. 
 soror, sister. 
 spatium, extent, either of space or 
 
 time. 
 
 spectare, to look, face. 
 sperare, to hope, expect. 
 spes, -el, hope. 
 spontis gen., sponte abl., wanting 
 
 in other cases ; in abl., with sua, 
 
 it means of one's own accord, by 
 
 one's self. 
 statuere, statuit, statutus, to cause 
 
 to stand, establish, decide. 
 studere, studuit, to be eager for, 
 
 desire. 
 
 studium, zeal, devotion, a pursuit. 
 sub, prep, with accus. or abl.. under. 
 subducere, -duxit, -ductus, to draw 
 
 from below, draw up, withdraiv. 
 subesse, -fuit, -futurus, to be under, 
 
 be near. 
 subicere or subjicere (subicio), 
 
 -jecit, -jectus, to throw under, place 
 
 beneath. 
 subire, -lit, -itus, irreg., to go under 
 
 or near, to undergo. 
 
 sublevare, to lift up from beneath, 
 
 a id. 
 
 submovere ; see summovere. 
 subsistere, -stitit, to make a stand, 
 
 resist. 
 subvehere, -vexit, -vectus, to carry 
 
 from below, i. e. to carry up. 
 succedere, -cessit, -cessurus, to go 
 
 under, march up, take the place 
 
 of- 
 sui, gen. sing, or plur., of himself, 
 
 herself, itself, themselves. 
 sum ; see esse. 
 sumere, sumpsit, sumptus, to take 
 
 up, assume. 
 summa [the fem. of summus as a 
 
 noun, the highest (part), the top], the 
 
 sum. 
 summus (irreg. sup. of superus), 
 
 highest. 
 summovere or submovere, -movit, 
 
 -motus, to remove, dislodge. 
 sumptus, -us (sumere), expense. 
 superare, to overcome, surpass. 
 superesse, -fuit, -futurus, to be 
 
 over (i. e. left over), to survive; cf. 
 
 praeesse. 
 superus, superior, supremus or 
 
 summus, h igh, higher, highest; su- 
 perior, when used of time, means 
 
 former. 
 suppetere, -petivit, -petiturus (sub 
 
 and petere), to be on hand, be in 
 
 store. 
 suppliciter (supplex), suppliantly, as 
 
 a suppliant. 
 supplicium (sub and plicare, to fold, 
 
 bend, as the knees in kneeling), a 
 
 kneeling, supplication, punishment. 
 supra, adv., above, before. 
 suscipere (suscipio), -cepit, -ceptus 
 
 (subs for sub, from under, and 
 
suspitio 
 
 310 
 
 urbs 
 
 capere) to take from under, take up 
 
 or upon, undertake. 
 suspitio or suspicio, suspicion. 
 sustinere, -tinuit, -tentus (subs 
 
 for sub, from under, and tenere), 
 
 to hold up, hold out against, support, 
 
 sustain. 
 suus, possessive adj. pron., his, her, 
 
 its, their. 
 
 T. 
 
 tabula, a board; bence, from the 
 practice of using for records 
 boards covered with wax, a writing- 
 tablet, or the icriting on a tablet. 
 
 tacere, to be silent ; also sometimes 
 transitive, to be silent about, pass 
 over in silence. 
 
 tarn, adv., .so (used mostly before adv. 
 and adj.). 
 
 tamen, adv., yet, nevertheless. 
 
 tandem [tarn, .so, and termination 
 -dem (cf. idem), just so far, so long], 
 at last ; in a question, pray. 
 
 tantus, adj., so much, so great. 
 
 telum, a weapon used for fighting at 
 a distance, a missile. 
 
 temperantia (temperare), self-con- 
 trol, moderation. [ frain. 
 
 temperare, to govern one's self, re- 
 
 temptare or tentare ("tenere), to 
 handle, try. 
 
 tempus, -oris, time. 
 
 tenere, tenuit, tentus, to hold. 
 
 terra, the earth, a country. 
 
 tertius, third. 
 
 testis, masc. or fern., a witness. 
 
 timere, timuit, to fear. 
 
 timor (timere), year, alarm. 
 
 Titus, a Roman first name, usually 
 represented by initial T. 
 
 tolerare, to bear, endure, maintain. 
 tollere, sustulit, sublatus, irreg., to 
 
 lift tip, remove, destroy. 
 totus (gen. -lus, dat. -1), the who j e, the 
 
 whole of, entire. 
 tradere, -didit, -ditus, to hand over, 
 
 hand down, surrender. 
 traducere or transducere, -duxit, 
 
 -ductus, to lead across ; cf. transire. 
 tragula, a heavy, Gallic javelin. 
 trans, prep, with accus., across. 
 transfigere, -fixit, -fixus, to pierce 
 
 through, transfix. 
 transire, -iit, -itus, to go across. 
 trecenti, adj., three hundred. 
 tres, three. 
 tribuere, tribuit, tributus, to assign, 
 
 ascribe. 
 triduum, the space of three days ; cf, 
 
 biduum. 
 
 triginta, indecl. adj., thirty. 
 triplex, -icis (tres and plicare, to 
 
 fold), threefold, triple. 
 turn, adv. of time, then. 
 tuus, thy, thine, your ; cf. suus. 
 
 u. 
 
 ubi, when, where. 
 ulciscl, ultus, to avenge, punish. 
 ullus (gen. -lus, dat. -I), adj., any. 
 ulterior, adj. (positive wanting, 
 
 ultimus, sup.), farther. 
 una, adv., together, 
 unde,fro7n which place, ivhence. 
 undique, adv., from all sides, on all 
 
 sides. 
 
 unus (gen. -lus, dat. -I), adj., one. 
 urbs, a city ; to a Roman, often the 
 
 city of Rome, just as " the city " 
 
 means Boston to one living in the 
 
 suburbs of that city. 
 
lit 
 
 311 
 
 vulnus 
 
 ut or uti, conj., that, in order that, so 
 that ; if followed J>y the ind., as or 
 when. 
 
 uter, -tra, -trum (gen. -lus, dat. -1), 
 adj., which (of two) ? 
 
 uti, usus, to use ; takes abl. 
 
 uxor, wife. 
 
 V. 
 
 vacare, to be empty, vacant. 
 
 vadum, n ford, a shalloiv. 
 
 vagarl, to wander, 
 
 valere, valuit, valiturus, to be strong 
 
 or powerful, to avail. 
 vallum (vallus, a stake), a line of 
 
 stakes, a palisade, generally with 
 
 earth behind it, a wall of earth, a 
 
 rampart. 
 vastare (vastus, empty), to make 
 
 empty, to lay waste. 
 veetigal, tax, revenue. 
 vel, or ; vel . . . vel, either . . . or. 
 velle, voluit, irreg., to wish. 
 venire, venit, ventum, to come. 
 verbum, a word. 
 vereri, to feel awe of, fear. 
 vergere, to slope, verge, be situated. 
 vergobretus, the title of the chief 
 
 magistrate among the Haedui. 
 verus, true, right. 
 vesper, -I, the evening. 
 vester, -tra, -trum, your, plur. ; cf. 
 
 tuus, thy or your, sing, 
 veteranus, old, veteran ; as noun, a 
 
 tried soldier, a veteran. 
 vetus, -eris, old, former. 
 
 vexare, to annoy, vex. 
 
 via, ivay. 
 
 victoria, victory. 
 
 vicus (cf. -wich in Norwich), a group 
 of houses, a village, street. 
 
 videre, vldit, visus, to see ; in pass., 
 often, to seem. 
 
 vigilia, watchful ness, a watch of the 
 nig/it ; the Romans divided the 
 night from sunset to sunrise, what- 
 ever its length, into four equal 
 watches. 
 
 viginti, indecl., twenty. 
 
 vincere, vicit, victus, to conquer. 
 
 vinculum or vinclum, that which 
 binds, hence, a rope, chain, fetter. 
 
 virtus, -utis, virtue, valor. 
 
 vis, gen. vis, force, violence; in plur. 
 vires, strength. 
 
 vita, life. 
 
 vitare, to shun. 
 
 vix, adv., with effort, with difficultly, 
 scarcely. 
 
 vocare, to call, summon. 
 
 volebat; see velle. 
 
 voluntas (volent(i)-, stem of pres. 
 pnrtic. of velle, to wish, and -tas), 
 willingness, will, desire. 
 
 vos, nom. and accus. plur., you; cf. 
 poss. adj. vester. 
 
 vulgus or volgus (of the -o decl., 
 neut. by exception, and hence hav- 
 ing nom. and accus. alike ; wanting 
 in plur.), the public, the crowd, the 
 mob. 
 
 vulnerare or volnerare, to wound. 
 
 vulnus or volnus, a wound. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 
 
 NOTE. The following Vocabulary contains the most common meanings of the 
 Latin words used in the first twenty Chapters of Caesar's Gallic War. Where proper 
 names have the same form in English as in Latin, it has been thought unnecessary 
 to give them. 
 
 The Vocabulary is intended to be merely suggestive. Fuller particulars in 
 regard to all these words will be found in the Latin-English Vocabulary. The pupil 
 who thoroughly masters the words as they occur in the Lessons will need to con- 
 sult this Vocabulary very little. In all cases, before looking up a word the Latin for 
 which seems unfamiliar, stop and think where that word has occurred in the text. 
 Then look up the passage, and note the construction and any peculiarity in the use 
 of the word. Only thus can skill in Latin composition be gained. Study the text 
 and base your own Latin upon it. 
 
 If you fail to find the word you are looking for, turn to its simplest synonym. 
 The number of Latin words in common use is more limited than in English, and 
 many simple Latin words have a great variety of English meaning. The dash has 
 been used to avoid the repetition of an English word just used ; thus, not, non ; 
 and , neque. 
 
 able, to be , posse. 
 
 about, circiter. 
 
 accept, accipere. 
 
 accident, casus. 
 
 accomplish, perficere. 
 
 accord, of one's own , sua sponte. 
 
 account, on of, propter, ob. 
 
 accuse, accusare. 
 
 accustom one's self, consuescere. 
 
 across, trans. 
 
 add, to be added, accedere. 
 
 admire, admirarl. 
 
 adverse, adversus. 
 
 advice, auctoritas. 
 
 advise, monere. 
 
 ajfc.ct, afficere. 
 
 affirm, confirmare. 
 
 against, contra; in composition, ob. 
 
 agreed, it is , convenit. 
 
 aid, auxilium. 
 
 akin by blood, consanguineus. 
 
 all, omnis ; in , omnino. 
 
 ally, socius. 
 
 almost, fere. 
 
 alone, solus. 
 
 Alps, Alpes. 
 
 already, jam. 
 
 also, quoque, etiam, item. 
 
 altogether, omnino. 
 
 always, semper. 
 
 ambassador, legatus. 
 
 ambush, insidiae. 
 
among 
 
 313 
 
 brother 
 
 among, inter, apud. 
 
 ample, amplus. 
 
 and, et, -que, atque. 
 
 angry, to be at, graviter ferre. 
 
 animal, a yoke or draught , jumen- 
 
 tum. 
 
 announce, nuntiare. 
 annoy, vexare ; to be annoyed at, gravi- 
 ter ferre. 
 annual, annuus. 
 another, alius; belonging to , 
 
 alienus. 
 answer, responsum ; to , respon- 
 
 dere. 
 any, ullus, aliqui ; one, quisquam ; 
 
 if one, si quis. 
 approach, adventus ; to , Instare, 
 
 accedere. 
 April, Aprilis. 
 arms, arma. 
 army, exercitus ; on the march, 
 
 agmen; in line of battle, acies. 
 arrange, constituere, instituere. 
 arrive, pervemre. 
 as, ut or uti, quam, or appositive. 
 ask, rogare. 
 assign, tribuere. 
 assume, sumere. 
 at last, demum. 
 attack, aggredl, adoriri. 
 attempt, conatum, conatus. 
 audacity, audacia. 
 authority, auctoritas. 
 avenge, ulcisci. 
 
 B. 
 
 baggage, without , expedltus. 
 bank (of a river), rlpa. 
 battle, prcelium. 
 
 be, esse ; near, adesse ; distant, 
 abesse ; in command, praeesse ; 
 
 of interest, interesse ; unwill- 
 ing, nolle ; well-disposed, esse 
 bono animo, cupere ; annoyed 
 at, graviter ferre ; at hand, in- 
 stare ; on hand, suppetere. 
 
 bear, ferre ; into, Inferre ; out, 
 efferre. 
 
 because, quod. 
 
 before, ante, prep. ; antea, adv. ; 
 priusquam, conj. 
 
 bey, orare. 
 
 began, ccepit. 
 
 beginning, initium. 
 
 behind, post. 
 
 beseech, obsecrare. 
 
 besides, praeterquam. 
 
 betake one's self, se recipere, se con- 
 ferre. 
 
 bflu-een, inter. 
 
 beware of, cavere. 
 
 beyond, extra. 
 
 bid, licerl. 
 
 bind, obstringere. 
 
 blame, reprehendere. 
 
 boast, gloriarl. 
 
 boat, linter. 
 
 boldly, audacter. 
 
 boldness, audacia. 
 
 bordering upon, finitimus. 
 
 bound, continere. 
 
 bountifully, largiter. 
 
 brave, fortis. 
 
 bravery, fortitude. 
 
 break down, rescindere ; through, 
 perrumpere. 
 
 bribe, largiri. 
 
 bribery, largitio. 
 
 bridge, pons. 
 
 bring together, conducere, conferre ; 
 in, importare ; back word, 
 renuntiare. 
 
 brother, frater. 
 
brotherly 
 
 314 
 
 departure 
 
 brotherly, fraternus. 
 building, sedificium. 
 burn, cremare ; up, comburere, 
 
 exurere. 
 
 but, sed, autem ; if, sin. 
 but/, emere, coemere ; back, re- 
 
 dimere. 
 by, a or ab. 
 
 C. 
 
 Calends,. Kalendae. 
 
 call (summon) vocare ; (by name) 
 
 appellare ; together, convo- 
 
 care. 
 
 camp, castra. 
 canton, pagus. 
 
 care, to take , curare, cavere. 
 carry, portare ; together, compor- 
 
 tare ; up, subvehere ; on, 
 
 gerere. 
 
 Cassias, pertaining to , Cassianus. 
 cart, carrus. 
 cast down, dejicere. 
 castle, castellum. 
 cause, causa ; to , committere. 
 cavalry, equitatus ; adj. equester. 
 chain, vinculum or vinclum. 
 chance, casus. 
 change, commutatio. 
 character, mores. 
 chief, princeps. 
 children, llberi. 
 choose, deligere. 
 city, urbs. 
 civilization, cultus. 
 client, cliens. 
 cold, frlgus. 
 
 collect, cogere, conferre. 
 come, venire ; together, conve- 
 
 nire ; through, pervenire. 
 comfort, consolari. 
 
 command, imperare, jubere, prse- 
 
 esse ; without , injussu. 
 commit, committere, mandare. 
 compel, cogere. 
 complain, querl. 
 concerning, de. 
 condemn, damnare. 
 confer wi'h, colloqul. 
 conscious, conscius. 
 conspiracy, conjuratio. 
 consul, consul. 
 consume, consumere. 
 continue, perseverare. 
 continually, continenter. 
 converse with, colloqul. 
 council, concilium. 
 country, terra, fines. 
 courage, animus. 
 crime, scelus. 
 crowd, vulgus. 
 custom, Institutum, mos. 
 cut to pieces, concldere. 
 
 D. 
 
 daily, quotidianus, adj. ; quotidie, 
 
 adv. 
 
 danger, periculum, 
 dare, audere. 
 daughter, filia. 
 day, dies ; by , interdiu. 
 death, mors, nex. 
 debtor, obaeratus. 
 deceit, dolus. 
 deceive, deoipere. 
 decide, statuere. 
 declare, proponere. 
 decree, consclscere. 
 deep, altus. 
 defend, defendere. 
 depart, proficiscl, discedere. 
 departure, profectio. 
 
depth 
 
 315 
 
 feelingg 
 
 depth, altitude. 
 
 describe, designare. 
 
 desert, meritum. 
 
 deserve, mereri. 
 
 desire, voluntas, cupiditas; to , 
 
 studere, cupere. 
 desist, desistere. 
 despair, desperare. 
 despise, despicere. 
 destroy, toller e. 
 
 destruction, internecio, perniciis. 
 deter, deterrere. 
 determine, constituere. 
 devotion, studium. 
 die, mori. 
 differ, differre. 
 difficult, difficilis. 
 difficulty, with , vix. 
 disaster, calamitas. 
 discuss, agere, jactare. 
 dismiss, dimittere. 
 disposition, natura. 
 distant, to be , abesse. 
 district, pagus. 
 ditch, fossa. 
 divide, dividere. 
 do, agere, facere. 
 doubt, dubitatio ; to , dubitare. 
 doubtful, dubius. 
 draw, ducere ; up, instruere. 
 drive, pellere, agere ; back, re- 
 
 pellere ; before, propellere. 
 
 E. 
 
 eagerly, cupide. 
 
 early, maturus. 
 
 earth, terra. 
 
 easily, facile. 
 
 easy, facilis. 
 
 effeminate, to make , eflfe"minare. 
 
 eighty, octoginta. 
 
 either . . . or, aut . . . aut, vel . . . 
 
 veL 
 
 elect, creare. 
 elders, majores. 
 embassy, legatio. 
 embrace, complectl. 
 encourage, confirmare. 
 end, finis ; the of, extremus, adj. 
 enemy, hostis. 
 enervate, eflfeminare. 
 enforce, exsequi. 
 enough, satis. 
 enroll, conscribere. 
 especially, maxime, praesertim. 
 establish, confirmare, statuere. 
 even, etiam ; not , ne . . . quidem. 
 every, omnis ; one, quisque- 
 example, exemplum. 
 excel, prsestare. 
 excellent, egregius. 
 except, prseter. 
 expect, exspectare. 
 expense, sumptus. 
 extend, patere. 
 extent, spatium. 
 extreme, extremus. 
 eye, oculus. 
 
 F. 
 
 face, spectare. 
 
 faith, fides. 
 
 fall, cadere. 
 
 far, longe. 
 
 farther, ulterior, adj. 
 
 father, pater ; father-in-law, socer. 
 
 favor, beneficium, gratia ; to , 
 
 favere. 
 
 favorable, secundus. 
 fear, timere, vereri. 
 feel, sentire. 
 feelings, animus. 
 
few 
 
 316 
 
 hate 
 
 few, paucT ; a very , perpauci. 
 
 field, ager. 
 
 fifteen, quindecim. 
 
 fifth, quintus. 
 
 fight back, repugnare. 
 
 find out, reperlre. 
 
 finish, perficere. 
 
 fire, to set to, incendere. 
 
 firm, firmus. 
 
 first, primus. 
 
 five, quinque ; to each, quini ; 
 hundred, quingentl. 
 
 flow, fluere ; info, influere. 
 
 fi'tyht, fuga. 
 
 fodder, pabulum. 
 
 follow, sequi; up* exsequl, In- 
 sequi. 
 
 following, posterus. 
 
 fond, cupidus. 
 
 food, pabulum. 
 
 foot, pes. 
 
 for, pro, prep. ; nam, enim, con- 
 junctions. 
 
 foraging, pabulatio. 
 
 force, vis. 
 
 forces, copiae. 
 
 ford, vadum. 
 
 foreign, alienus. 
 
 forest, silva. 
 
 forget, oblivisci. 
 
 former, vetus, pristinus, superior. 
 
 fortification, munltio. 
 
 fortify strongly, communire. 
 
 fortune, fortuna. 
 
 forty, quadraginta. 
 
 four, quattuor ; hundred, qua- 
 dringenti. 
 
 fourth, quartus. 
 
 fraternal, fraternus. 
 
 freedom, llbertas. 
 
 freely, libere. 
 
 fresh, recens. 
 
 friend, amicus, familiaris, neces- 
 
 sarius. 
 
 friendship, amlcitia. 
 frighten thoroughly, perterrere. 
 from, a or ab, e or ex. 
 front, in , adversus, adj. 
 fruitful, frumentarius. 
 furnish, prsestare. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gaul, Gallia. 
 generosity, liberalitas. 
 Geneva, Lake t Lemannus. 
 gentleness, lenitas. 
 Germans, German!. 
 give, dare ; bountifully, largiri. 
 glory, gloria ; to , gloriari. 
 go, Ire ; out, exlre ; across, 
 
 translre ; to, accedere ; back 
 
 and forth, commeare. 
 god, deus. 
 good, bonus. 
 grain, frumentum. 
 grandfather, avus. 
 grasp, prendere or prehendere. 
 great ; magnus ; so , tantus. 
 greatly, magnopere. 
 Greeks, Graeei. 
 grief, dolor. 
 grieve for, dolere. 
 grind, molere. 
 grow, crescere. 
 guard, custos, praesidium. 
 
 H. 
 
 hand, right , dextra; to down, 
 
 prodere. 
 happen, accidere. 
 hasten, contendere, maturare. 
 hate, odisse. 
 
have 
 
 317 
 
 last 
 
 have, habere. 
 
 he, is. 
 
 heavily, graviter. 
 
 height, altitude. 
 
 help, auxilium. 
 
 Helvetian, Helvetius, adj. and noun. 
 
 her, suus, ejus. 
 
 hesitate, dubitare. 
 
 hide, abdere. 
 
 high, altus, superus ; high-born, no- 
 
 bilis. 
 
 himself, ipse. 
 hire, conducere. 
 his, suus, ejus. 
 hither, citerior, adj. 
 hold, tenere ; back, retinere. 
 home, domus. 
 honor, honor. 
 
 hope t spes ; to , sperare. 
 horseman, eques. 
 hostage, obses. 
 house, domus. 
 household, familia. 
 how, quam ; great, quantus. 
 hundred, centum ; four , qua- 
 
 dringenti ; Jive , qulngenti. 
 
 I. 
 
 /, ego. 
 
 Ides, Idus. 
 
 if, si ; but , sin. 
 
 immortal, tmmortalis. 
 
 impede, impedire. 
 
 import, importare. 
 
 impunity, impunitas ; with , im- 
 
 pune. 
 in, in. 
 
 inconvenient, incommodus. . 
 increase, augere, trans. ; creseere, 
 
 intrans. 
 incredible, incredibilis. 
 
 induce, inducere. 
 influence, auctoritas. 
 information, indicium. 
 inhabit, incolere. 
 injustice, injuria. 
 insolently, insolenter. 
 instruct, Instruere. 
 insult, contumelia 
 intercessor, deprecator. 
 Interest, to be of , interesse. 
 interpreter, interpres. 
 intervene, intercedere. 
 intimate, familiaris. 
 into, in. 
 it, is, ea, id. 
 its, suus, ejus. 
 
 J. 
 
 join, jungere ; battle, proelium 
 
 committere. 
 journey, iter. 
 judge, judicare. 
 justice, justitia. 
 
 K. 
 
 keep away, prohibere. 
 
 Kelts, Celtse. 
 
 kill, interficere, occidere, con- 
 
 ctdere. 
 
 kindness, gratia. 
 kingdom, regnum. 
 
 know, scire, intellegere, cognovisse. 
 knight, eques. 
 known, make , enuntiare. 
 
 lake, lacus. 
 language, lingua. 
 last, at , demum. 
 
law 
 
 318 
 
 nobility 
 
 law, lex. 
 
 Jay, icaste, vastare, popular!, 
 depopularl ; a la //ing waste, popu- 
 latio. 
 
 lead, ducere ; into, inducere ; 
 to, adducere ; through, per- 
 ducere ; out, educere ; across, 
 traducere ; away, abducere. 
 
 leader, dux, princeps. 
 
 leadership, principatus. 
 
 learn, discere, cognoscere. 
 
 least, minime. 
 
 leave, relinquere. 
 
 length, longitudo. 
 
 less, minus. 
 
 lessen, minuere, deminuere. 
 
 lest, ne. 
 
 liberty, libertas. 
 
 lieutenant, legatus. 
 
 life, vita. 
 
 lift up, sublevare, tollere. 
 
 line (of march), agmen. 
 
 little, parvus. 
 
 long (of time), diu, adv. ; diuturnus, 
 adj. 
 
 look, spectare. 
 
 hose thoroughly, persolvere. 
 
 love, amor. 
 
 lower, Inferior, adj. 
 
 M. 
 
 magistrate, magistratus. 
 
 make, facere ; known, enuntiare. 
 
 man, homo. 
 
 many, multus, in plur. ; very , 
 
 complures. 
 
 march, iter ; to , iter facere. 
 marriage, matrimonium. 
 marry, nubere. 
 may, licet. 
 means, opes. 
 
 meanwhile, interea, interim. 
 
 measure, metiri. 
 
 meet, convenire. 
 
 meeting, conventus. 
 
 memory, memoria. 
 
 mention, commemorare. 
 
 merchant, mercator. 
 
 merit, meritum ; to , mereri. 
 
 mind, animus. 
 
 mine, meus. 
 
 misfortune, incommodum. 
 
 moderation, temperantia. 
 
 month, mensis. 
 
 moreover, autem, accedit ut or quod. 
 
 mother, mater. 
 
 mountain, mons. 
 
 move, movere ; deeply, permovere, 
 
 commovere. 
 much, multus. 
 multitude, multitude. 
 
 N. 
 
 name, nomen. 
 
 narrow, angustus. 
 
 narrowness, angustise. 
 
 nature, natura. 
 
 nay more, quln. 
 
 near, propinquus. 
 
 nearest, proximus. 
 
 necessary, necessarius ; it is , opor- 
 
 tet. 
 
 necessarily, necessario. 
 neither . . . nor, neque . . . neque. 
 nevertheless, tamen. 
 new, novus. 
 next, proximus. 
 night, by , noctu. 
 nine, novem. 
 no man, no one, nemo. 
 noble (by birth), nobilis. 
 nobility, nobilitas. 
 
none 
 
 319 
 
 property 
 
 none, nullus. 
 
 Noric, Noricus. 
 
 north, septentrio. 
 
 not, non, ne; and , neque (nee) ; 
 yet, n5ndum; even, ne . . . 
 quidem. 
 
 nothing, nihil. 
 
 notice, animadvertere. 
 
 nourish, alere. 
 
 number, numerus ; a great , multi- 
 tude. 
 
 O. 
 
 oath, jusjurandum. 
 
 obtain, potirl, consequi ; one's re- 
 quest, impetrare. 
 
 ocean, Oceanus. 
 
 of, de. 
 
 offence, oflRmsio. 
 
 offend, offendere. 
 
 often, saepe. 
 
 old, antiquus, vetus. 
 
 one, unus ; hundred, centum ; no 
 ,jiemo ; at a time, singuli. 
 
 only, solum, modo. 
 
 opinion, existimatio. 
 
 opportunity, facultas. 
 
 oppose, to be opposed, repugnare. 
 
 or, aut, vel ; if, slve. 
 
 order, jubere. 
 
 other, alius, alter. 
 
 ought, debere. 
 
 our, noster. 
 
 out of, e or ex. 
 
 overcome, superare. 
 
 overhang, impendere. 
 
 owe, debere. 
 
 P. 
 
 pace, passus. 
 pardon, condonare. 
 
 part, pars. 
 
 pass by, prseterlre. 
 
 past, praeterita, plur. 
 
 pay in full, persolvere. 
 
 peace, pax. 
 
 people, populus; common , plebs, 
 
 vulgus. 
 
 peril, periculum. 
 permit, patl; it is permitted, licet. 
 persuade, persuadere. 
 pertain, pertinere. 
 place, locus ; to the same , eodem ; 
 
 to , ponere ; here and there, 
 
 disponere ; aside, deponere ; 
 at a disadvantage , impedlre. 
 plan, consilium. 
 planting, sementis. 
 pleading, dictio. 
 plenty, copia. 
 plunder, raplna. 
 point out, designare. 
 ponder, deliberare. 
 popularity, gratia. 
 possess, obtinere. 
 possession, possessio. 
 power, potestas, potentia, nervi ; 
 
 royal , regnum ; supreme , 
 
 imperium. 
 powerful, potens. 
 pray, orare. 
 prayers, preces. 
 prefer, prseferre. 
 prepare, comparare. 
 press upon, instare. 
 present, praesens ; at , in praesen- 
 
 tia; to be , adesse. 
 prevent, prohibere. 
 price, pretium. 
 private, privatus. 
 privately, privatim. 
 promise, fides ; to , polliceri. 
 property, res familiaris. 
 
proportion 
 
 320 
 
 proportion, in to, pro. 
 prove, probare. 
 province, provincia. 
 provisions, cibaria. 
 provoke, lacessere. 
 public, publicus. 
 puhlicly, publice. 
 
 punish, ulcisci, animadvertere in. 
 punishment, supplicium, pcena ; with- 
 out , impune. 
 pursue, persequi. 
 pursuit, studium. 
 put in command, prseficere. 
 Purenean, Pyrenaeus. 
 
 Q- 
 
 quickly, celeriter. 
 
 R. 
 
 raft, ratis. 
 
 ravaging, populatio. 
 
 reach, attingere. 
 
 ready, paratus. 
 
 rear, novissimum agmen. 
 
 reason, causa. 
 
 receive, recipere. 
 
 recent, recens. 
 
 recently, nuper. 
 
 reckless, improbus. 
 
 refinement, humanitas. 
 
 refrain, temperare. 
 
 relationship (by marriage), adfinitas. 
 
 relative, propinquus, necessarius, 
 
 nouns. 
 
 rely upon, niti. 
 remaining, reliquus. 
 remarkable, inslgnis, incredibilis. 
 remember, reminisci. 
 remind, monere ; forcibly, commo- 
 
 nefacere. 
 
 remove, removere. 
 
 reply, responsum ; to , respondere. 
 
 report, renuntiare. 
 
 republic, respublica. 
 
 resist, subsistere. 
 
 rest, the of, reliquus. 
 
 restore, restituere. 
 
 restrain, coercere. 
 
 retinue, familia. 
 
 retreat, se recipere. 
 
 return, reditio ; to , redlre, revert! 
 
 revolution, novae res. 
 
 Rhine, Hhenus. 
 
 Rhone, Rhodanus. 
 
 richest, ditissimus. 
 
 ridge, jugum. 
 
 right, jus. 
 
 ripe, maturus. 
 
 rise, orirl. 
 
 river, flumen. 
 
 route, iter. 
 
 royal power, regnum. 
 
 running together, concursus. 
 
 S. 
 
 same, idem ; to. the place, eodem. 
 
 satisfy, satisfacere. 
 
 say, dicere ; . . . not, negare. 
 
 scarcely, vix. 
 
 scout, explorator. 
 
 second, secundus. 
 
 seditious, seditiosus. 
 
 see, videre. 
 
 seek, peterej quaerere. 
 
 seem, videre, in pass. 
 
 Seine, Sequana. 
 
 seize, occupare. 
 
 self, ipse. 
 
 senate, senatus. 
 
 send, mittere ; before, praemittere. 
 
separately 
 
 321 
 
 through 
 
 separately, secreto, separatim. 
 
 servitude, servitus. 
 
 set out, proficisci ; up, collocare ; 
 
 forth, proponere ; Jire to t 
 
 incendere. 
 setting, occasus. 
 seventh, septimus. 
 severely, graviter. 
 ship, navis. 
 
 show, ostendere, demSnstrare. 
 shun, vitare. 
 side, on this of, citra ; from all sides, 
 
 on all sides, undique. 
 sight, conspectus. 
 silent, be , tacere. 
 since, cum. 
 sinew, nervus. 
 sister, soror. 
 situated, be , vergere. 
 six to each, seni. 
 sixteen, sedecim. 
 slope, vergere. 
 small, parvus. 
 smoothness, lenitas. 
 snatch away, eripere. 
 so, ita, tarn ; great, tantus. 
 soil, solum. 
 soldier, miles. 
 some, nonnullus. 
 
 sometimes, nonnunquam, interdum. 
 son, filius. 
 sooner, prius ; than, prius- 
 
 quam. 
 
 sowing, sementis. 
 Spain, Hispania. 
 speak, loqui. 
 speech, oratio. 
 spy, explorator. 
 stand, take a , consistere. 
 state, civitas. 
 storm, oppugnare. 
 strength, vires. 
 
 stretch out, pertinere. 
 strive, nitl, contendere. 
 strong, firmus ; be , valere. 
 subdue, pacare. 
 sudden, repentinus. 
 sufficiently, satis. 
 summon, convocare, adhibere. 
 sun, sol. 
 sure, certus. 
 surpass, praecedere. 
 suspicion, suspicio or suspitio. 
 Switzerland, Helvetia. 
 
 T. 
 
 take, capere ; upon, suscipere ; 
 
 back, recipere ; up, sumere ; 
 
 bif storm, expugnare ; care, 
 curare, cavere ; a stand, con- 
 sistere. 
 
 tar, vectigal, portorium. 
 
 ten, decem. 
 
 tend, pertinere. 
 
 territory, fines. 
 
 than, quam. 
 
 that, ille, is, pronouns ; or so , 
 
 ut, utl ; or but , quin ; , 
 
 jzof or lest, ne. 
 their, suus, eorum. 
 then, turn. 
 thence, inde. 
 there, ibi, illic. 
 therefore, itaque. 
 thing, res. 
 
 think, putare, existimare, arbitrari. 
 third, tertius. 
 this, hie, is. 
 thousand, mille. 
 three, tres. 
 through, per. 
 
throw 
 
 322 
 
 wish 
 
 throw, jacere ; to keep throwing, jac- 
 
 tare. 
 thy, tuus. 
 
 time, tempus ; at the same , simul. 
 together, una. 
 touch upon, attingere. 
 town, oppidum. 
 treachery, insidise. 
 trial, judicium. 
 troops, copiee. 
 
 trouble, with the greatest , segerrime. 
 true, verus. 
 try, conari. 
 turn away, avertere. 
 twelve, duodecim. 
 twenty, viginti 
 two, duo, hundred, ducentl. 
 
 U. 
 
 "unaware, insciens. 
 
 under, sub. 
 
 undergo, subire. 
 
 understand, intellegere. 
 
 undertake, suscipere, conari. 
 
 undertaking, conatum. 
 
 unexpectedly, improvlso. 
 
 unexpecting, inopinans. 
 
 unfavorable, adversus. 
 
 unfriendly, inimlcus. 
 
 unite., adsciscere. 
 
 until, dum. 
 
 unwilling, invitus ; fo be , nolle. 
 
 urge, hortarl, incitare. 
 
 use, utl. 
 
 V. 
 
 valor, virtus. 
 vex, vexare. 
 
 victory, victoria. 
 village, vicus. 
 virtue, virtus. 
 visit, commeare ad. 
 
 W. 
 
 wage, gerere ; upon, inferre ; 
 war, bellare. 
 
 wait for, exspectare. 
 
 wall, murus. 
 
 wander, vagarl. 
 
 war, bellum. 
 
 warlike, bellicosus. 
 
 warn, monere. 
 
 waste, lay , vastare, popular!. 
 
 watch (of the night), vigilia. 
 
 way, via, iter. 
 
 we, nos. 
 
 weapon, telum. 
 
 weep, flere. 
 
 well-disposed, to be , esse bond 
 animo, cupere. 
 
 well-known, nobilis. 
 
 when, ubi, cum, ut. 
 
 where, ubi, qua. 
 
 wherefore, quare. 
 
 whether ... or, sive . . . sive. 
 
 which, qui; (of two), uter. 
 
 while, dum. 
 
 who, qui. 
 
 whole, totus. 
 
 wicked, improbus. 
 
 wide, latus. 
 
 widely, late. 
 
 width, latitudo. 
 
 wife, uxor. 
 
 win over, conciliate. 
 
 winter quarters, hiberna ; to winter, 
 
 hiemare. 
 wish, voluntas ; to , velle. 
 
with 
 
 323 
 
 your 
 
 with, cum. 
 
 without, sine ; command, injiissu. 
 
 witness, testis. 
 
 wonder at, admirari. 
 
 wont, be , consuevisse. 
 
 word, verbum. 
 
 work, opus. 
 
 wrong, injuria. 
 
 wrong-doing, maleficium. 
 
 Y. 
 
 year, annus ; two years, biennium. 
 
 yearly, annuus. 
 
 yet, tamen ; not , nondum. 
 
 yield, concedere. 
 
 yoke, jugum. 
 
 yon, vos, tu. 
 
 your, vester, tuus. 
 
 N 
 
Language and Grammar. 
 
 Text-books representing the best established usage 
 and the most progressive thought and methods in lan- 
 guage instruction. 
 
 CLARK'S GRAMMARS. 
 
 By S. W. CLARK, A.M. 
 
 Clark's Easy Lessons in Language . . . 25 cents 
 Clark's Normal Grammar 70 cents 
 
 Clark's method of presenting the subject of grammar has been for 
 many years very popular and successful, and still retains a large 
 share of public favor. 
 
 CONKLIN'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND 
 
 COMPOSITION. .... . 65 cents 
 
 By B. Y. CONKLIN. 
 
 A complete graded course, compassing the entire range of the usual 
 two-book course. 
 
 HARVEY'S REVISED GRAMMARS. 
 
 Harvey's Revised Elementary Grammar . . 42 cents 
 Harvey's Revised Practical English Grammar 05 cents 
 Harvey's Revised Grammars include the most valuable features of the 
 "language lesson" system, while retaining all that is insepa- 
 rable from a thorough knowledge of technical grammar. 
 
 HOLBROOK'S NEW ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 By ALFRED HOLBROOK, President National Normal 
 
 University 65 cents 
 
 A complete course in grammar, based on the objective method of 
 teaching. 
 
 KERL'S GRAMMARS. 
 
 Kerl's Language Lessons 32 cents 
 
 KerTs Common-School Grammar . . . 72 cents 
 
 These two books form a practical course in English grammar. In 
 arrangement of subjects, clearness and brevity of definitions, 
 and system of analysis, Kerl's Grammars have few superiors. 
 
 LYTE'S GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. . 65 cents 
 
 By E. O. LYTE. 
 
 Designed for common-school grades or for pupils who have received 
 some elementary instruction in the use and form of language. 
 Prominence is given to composition and letter-writing. 
 
LANGUAGE AND GRAMMAR CONTINUED. 
 
 MAXWELL'S LANGUAGE SERIES. 
 
 Maxwell's Primary Lessons in Language 
 
 and Composition ...... 30 cents 
 
 Maxwell's Introductory Lessons in English 
 
 Grammar ....... 40 cents 
 
 Maxwell's Complete Grammar (in press). 
 
 Designed to train young children in the proper use of the words that 
 belong to a child's vocabulary, and to give them facility in the 
 use of such sentence forms as they can readily imitate and 
 employ. 
 
 QUACKENBOS'S LANGUAGE SERIES. 
 
 Quackenbos's Illustrated Lessons in our Lan- 
 guage 42 cents 
 
 Quackenbos's English Grammar . . .63 cents 
 These two books form a popular course in language. They are in- 
 tended to impart a practical knowledge of English grammar in 
 as easy and attractive a manner as possible. 
 
 SWINTON'S LANGUAGE SERIES. 
 
 Swinton's Language Primer . . . .28 cents 
 Swinton's Language Lessons . . . .38 cents 
 Swinton's New English Grammar ... 56 cents 
 
 Swinton's Language Series takes the pupil from the primary grades 
 through the advanced grades in high school-s, academies, etc. 
 In these books the inductive method is skillfully applied and 
 the correct use of language simply and practically developed. 
 
 WELLS'S SHORTER COURSE IN ENGLISH 
 
 GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION . . 36 cents 
 
 By W. H. WELLS, A.M. 
 
 This is a complete common-school course in language lessons, gram- 
 mar, composition and letter-writing. It is a book of progressive 
 exercises in speaking and writing English, accompanied by a 
 constant application of principles and rules. 
 
 Copies of the above books will be mailed to any address, postpaid, 
 on receipt of price. Full catalogue sent on application. Correspond- 
 ence in reference to the introduction of our books is cordially invited. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 NEW YORK .-. CINCINNATI .'. CHICAGO 
 
American History for Schools. 
 
 BARNES'S SERIES; 
 
 Barnes's Primary History of the United States. By T. F. DONNELLY. 
 
 For Intermediate Classes. Fully illustrated. A fitting introduction to 
 
 Barnes's Historical Series. 60 cents. 
 Barnes's Brief History of the United States. Revised to the present 
 
 Administration. The page has been enlarged and reset in larger and 
 
 clearer type, and the work is embellished with many new cuts and 
 
 maps. $1.00. 
 
 ECLECTIC SERIES: 
 
 Eclectic Primary History of the United States. By EDWARD S. ELLIS. 
 
 A book for younger classes, or those who have not the time to devote 
 
 to a more complete history. 50 cents. 
 New Eclectic History of the United States. T>y M. E. THALHEIMER. 
 
 A revised, enlarged, and improved edition of the " Eclectic History of 
 
 the United States." Fully illustrated with engravings, colored plates, 
 
 etc. fi.oo. 
 
 EGGLESTON'S SERIES: 
 
 Eggleston's First Book in American History. By EDWARD EGGLES- 
 TON. With Special Reference to the Lives and Deeds of Great 
 Americans. Beautifully illustrated. A history for beginners on a new 
 plan. 60 cents. 
 
 Eggleston's History of the United States and its People. By 
 EDWARD EGGLESTON. For the Use of Schools. Fully illustrated with 
 engravings, maps, and colored plates. $1.05. 
 
 NILES'S SCHOOL HISTORY; 
 
 Niles's School History of the United States. By SANFORD NILES. A 
 comprehensive book, attractively written and illustrated. Adapted 
 for use in Grammar Grades. 75 cents. 
 
 QUACKENBOS SERIES: 
 
 Quackenbos's Elementary History of the United States. Revised 
 and corrected by J. D. QUACKENBOS, A.M., M.D. Fully illustrated 
 with maps and engravings. 60 cents. 
 
 Quackenbos's School History of the United States. From the 
 Earliest Discoveries to the Present Time. Illustrated. $1.05. 
 
 SWINTON'S SERIES: 
 
 Swinton's First Lessons in Our Country's History. Admirably 
 adapted for use either as a text-book for beginners or as a supplemen- 
 tary reader. 48 cents. 
 
 Swinton's Condensed History of the United States. Revised edition. 
 Illustrated with colored maps, portraits, etc. 90 cents. 
 
 Any of the above books will be mailed, postpaid, on receipt of price. 
 Complete price-list sent on application. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, Publishers, 
 
 NEW YORK CINCINNATI .' CHICAGO 
 
 [*8] 
 
GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 STANDARD TWO-BOOK SERIES. 
 
 All of these geographies have been edited with great care to present the latest 
 information regarding the geography of the world and the results of the most 
 recent researches and discoveries. They also have special editions for some 
 or all of the States. 
 
 APPLETONS' STANDARD GEOGRAPHIES. 
 
 Appletons' Elementary Geography . . . -55 cents 
 
 Appletons' Higher Geography .... $1.25 
 
 The elementary book is objective in method. In the advanced, special promi- 
 nence is given to industrial, commercial, and practical features. 
 
 BARNES'S NEW GEOGRAPHIES. By JAMES MONTEITH. 
 
 Barnes's Elementary Geography . . . .55 cents 
 
 Barnes's Complete Geography .... $1.25 
 
 A special feature of these books is the plan of teaching by comparison, or 
 association of ideas. The advanced book includes Physical, Descrip- 
 tive, Commercial, and Industrial Geography. 
 
 CORNELL'S GEOGRAPHIES. Revised Series. 
 
 Cornell's Primary Geography (New Edition) . . 42 cents 
 
 Cornell's Intermediate Geography (New Edition) . 86 cents 
 
 These popular books have been entirely revised, yet the distinctive features 
 of the series remain unchanged. 
 
 ECLECTIC GEOGRAPHIES. New Two-Book Series. 
 
 Eclectic Elementary Geography . . . .55 cents 
 
 Eclectic Complete Geography .... $1.20 
 
 The text of the Eclectic Geographies is comprehensive and simply worded. 
 
 The maps show physical features of the earth's surface fully and 
 
 accurately. 
 
 HARPER'S GEOGRAPHIES. 
 
 Harper's Introductory Geography . . . .48 cents 
 
 Harper's School Geography ..... $1.08 
 
 The introductory book is written in pleasing narrative style. The advanced 
 book presents physical and political elements in proper order of se- 
 quence, showing relations of industries and wealth to physical charac- 
 teristics. 
 
 NILES'S GEOGRAPHIES. 
 
 Niles's Elementary Geography . . . .44 cents 
 
 Niles's Advanced Geography . , . . . $1.00 
 
 The elementary book consists of interesting reading lessons, cultivating ob- 
 servation and exciting the imagination. The advanced book includes 
 Mathematical, Physical, and Political Geography. 
 
 SWINTON'S GEOGRAPHIES. 
 
 Swinton's Introductory Geography . . . .55 cents 
 
 In Readings and Recitations. 
 Swinton's Grammar-School Geography . . . $1.25 
 
 Physical, Political, and Commercial. 
 
 The text of these books is carefully graded so that the Introductory connects 
 with the Grammar School without the need of any intermediate manual. 
 
 Any of the above books will be sent, postpaid, to any address on receipt of 
 price. Correspondence in reference to the introduction of these books is cord- 
 ially invited. Special allowances made when books are exchanged. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 NEW YORK .'. CINCINNATI .'. CHICAGO 
 
 [*i 4 ] 
 
Physical Geography. 
 
 In addition to the series of Political Geographies published by 
 the American Book Company, their list includes the following standard 
 and popular text-books on Physical Geography : 
 
 APPLETONS' PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Large 4to $1.60 
 
 Prepared by a corps of scientific experts with richly-illustrated engravings, 
 diagrams, and maps in color, and including a separate chapter on the 
 geological history and the physical features of the United States. 
 
 CORNELL'S PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Large 4to $1.12 
 
 Revised edition, with such alterations and additions as were found necessary 
 to bring the work in all respects up to date. 
 
 ECLECTIC PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 I2mo $1.00 
 
 By RUSSELL HINMAN. A new work in a new and convenient form. All 
 irrelevant matter is omitted and the pages devoted exclusively to 
 Physical Geography clearly treated in the light of recent investiga- 
 tions. The numerous charts, cuts, and diagrams are drawn with 
 accuracy, fully illustrating the text. 
 
 GUYOTS PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Large 4to $1.60 
 
 By ARNOLD GUYOT. Revised, with new plates and newly-engraved maps. A 
 standard work by one of the ablest of modern geographers. All parts 
 of the subject are presented in their true relations and in their proper 
 subordination. 
 
 MONTEITH'S NEW PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 4to ?i.oo 
 
 A new and comprehensive work, embracing the results of recent research in 
 this field, including Physiography, Hydrography, Meteorology, Ter- 
 restial Magnetism, and Vulcanology The topical arrangement of 
 subjects adapts the work for use in grammar grades as well as for high 
 and normal schools. 
 
 A ny of the above books will be mailed, postpaid, on receipt of price. Full 
 price-list of books on all subjects for all grades will be sent on application. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 NEW YORK .-. CINCINNATI .-. CHICAGO 
 
 [*i 5 ] 
 
Standard Two-Book Series in Arithmetic, 
 
 Popular Books, Freshly Written, Attractive, Carefully Graded. 
 
 APPLETONS' STANDARD ARITHMETICS. 
 
 Appletons' Numbers Illustrated .... 36 cents 
 Appletons' Numbers Applied 75 cents 
 
 These books embody many new and practical features. The primary 
 book is objective in method ; the advanced book inductive. 
 
 FICKLIN'S NEW ARITHMETICS. 
 
 Ficklin's Elementary Arithmetic .... 40 cents 
 Ficklin's National Arithmetic 70 cents 
 
 A complete arithmetical course, designed to teach arithmetic by the 
 smallest expenditure of time, labor and money. 
 
 FISH'S NEW ARITHMETICS. 
 
 Fish's Arithmetic, Number One .... 30 cents 
 Fish's Arithmetic, Number Two .... 60 cents 
 
 The latest and best result of Mr. Fish's life-long studies in this de- 
 partment of text-book authorship. The books are fresh and 
 bright in methods of treatment and present many novel features. 
 
 HARPER'S GRADED ARITHMETICS. 
 
 Harper's First Book in Arithmetic ... 30 cents 
 Harper's Second Book in Arithmetic ... 60 cents 
 
 A common-school series, complete in two books, combining oral and 
 written work. The minimum of theory and maximum of 
 practice. 
 
 MILNE'S ARITHMETICS. 
 
 Milne's First Lessons in Arithmetic ... 22 cents 
 Milne's Practical Arithmetic 50 cents 
 
 A complete course prepared on the inductive method, including oral 
 and written exercises. 
 
 WHITE'S NEW ARITHMETICS. 
 
 White's First Book of Arithmetic .... 30 cents 
 White's New Complete Arithmetic ... 65 cents 
 
 White's New Arithmetics constitute one of the strongest and most at- 
 tractive two-book series published. 
 
 Any of the above books ivill be sent, postpaid, to any address on 
 receipt of price. Our complete list embraces standard and popular 
 books for all grades. Correspondence is cordially invited. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 NEW YORK _V>*^ CINCINNATI .'. CHICAGO 
 
 [*4l 
 
OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 30w-6,'14 
 
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES